]> code.delx.au - gnu-emacs/blob - doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi
* doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi (Run a Program): Add some
[gnu-emacs] / doc / lispintro / emacs-lisp-intro.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
2 @comment %**start of header
3 @setfilename ../../info/eintr.info
4 @c setfilename emacs-lisp-intro.info
5 @c sethtmlfilename emacs-lisp-intro.html
6 @settitle Programming in Emacs Lisp
7 @include docstyle.texi
8 @syncodeindex vr cp
9 @syncodeindex fn cp
10 @finalout
11
12 @include emacsver.texi
13
14 @c ================ How to Print a Book in Various Sizes ================
15
16 @c This book can be printed in any of three different sizes.
17 @c Set the following @-commands appropriately.
18
19 @c 7 by 9.25 inches:
20 @c @smallbook
21 @c @clear largebook
22
23 @c 8.5 by 11 inches:
24 @c @c smallbook
25 @c @set largebook
26
27 @c European A4 size paper:
28 @c @c smallbook
29 @c @afourpaper
30 @c @set largebook
31
32 @c (Note: if you edit the book so as to change the length of the
33 @c table of contents, you may have to change the value of 'pageno' below.)
34
35 @c <<<< For hard copy printing, this file is now
36 @c set for smallbook, which works for all sizes
37 @c of paper, and with PostScript figures >>>>
38
39 @set smallbook
40 @ifset smallbook
41 @smallbook
42 @clear largebook
43 @end ifset
44
45 @c ================ Included Figures ================
46
47 @c If you clear this, the figures will be printed as ASCII diagrams
48 @c rather than PostScript/PDF.
49 @c (This is not relevant to Info, since Info only handles ASCII.)
50 @set print-postscript-figures
51 @c clear print-postscript-figures
52
53 @comment %**end of header
54
55 @c per rms and peterb, use 10pt fonts for the main text, mostly to
56 @c save on paper cost.
57 @c Do this inside @tex for now, so current makeinfo does not complain.
58 @tex
59 @ifset smallbook
60 @fonttextsize 10
61
62 @end ifset
63 \global\hbadness=6666 % don't worry about not-too-underfull boxes
64 @end tex
65
66 @c These refer to the printed book sold by the FSF.
67 @set edition-number 3.10
68 @set update-date 28 October 2009
69
70 @c For next or subsequent edition:
71 @c create function using with-output-to-temp-buffer
72 @c create a major mode, with keymaps
73 @c run an asynchronous process, like grep or diff
74
75 @c For 8.5 by 11 inch format: do not use such a small amount of
76 @c whitespace between paragraphs as smallbook format
77 @ifset largebook
78 @tex
79 \global\parskip 6pt plus 1pt
80 @end tex
81 @end ifset
82
83 @c For all sized formats: print within-book cross
84 @c reference with ``...'' rather than [...]
85
86 @c This works with the texinfo.tex file, version 2003-05-04.08,
87 @c in the Texinfo version 4.6 of the 2003 Jun 13 distribution.
88
89 @tex
90 \if \xrefprintnodename
91 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{\unskip, ``#1''}
92 \else
93 \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{ ``#1''}
94 \fi
95 % \global\def\xrefprintnodename#1{, ``#1''}
96 @end tex
97
98 @c ----------------------------------------------------
99
100 @dircategory Emacs lisp
101 @direntry
102 * Emacs Lisp Intro: (eintr). A simple introduction to Emacs Lisp programming.
103 @end direntry
104
105 @copying
106 This is an @cite{Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp}, for
107 people who are not programmers.
108 @sp 1
109 @iftex
110 Edition @value{edition-number}, @value{update-date}
111 @end iftex
112 @ifnottex
113 Distributed with Emacs version @value{EMACSVER}.
114 @end ifnottex
115 @sp 1
116 Copyright @copyright{} 1990--1995, 1997, 2001--2015 Free Software
117 Foundation, Inc.
118 @sp 1
119
120 @iftex
121 Published by the:@*
122
123 GNU Press, @hfill @uref{http://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/}@*
124 a division of the @hfill email: @email{sales@@fsf.org}@*
125 Free Software Foundation, Inc. @hfill Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942@*
126 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor @hfill Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652@*
127 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
128 @end iftex
129
130 @ifnottex
131 Printed copies available from @uref{http://shop.fsf.org/}. Published by:
132
133 @example
134 GNU Press, http://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/
135 a division of the email: sales@@fsf.org
136 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Tel: +1 (617) 542-5942
137 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor Fax: +1 (617) 542-2652
138 Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
139 @end example
140 @end ifnottex
141
142 @sp 1
143 ISBN 1-882114-43-4
144
145 @quotation
146 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
147 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
148 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; there
149 being no Invariant Section, with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU
150 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of
151 the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
152 Documentation License''.
153
154 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have the freedom to
155 copy and modify this GNU manual. Buying copies from the FSF
156 supports it in developing GNU and promoting software freedom.''
157 @end quotation
158 @end copying
159
160 @c half title; two lines here, so do not use 'shorttitlepage'
161 @tex
162 {\begingroup%
163 \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{An Introduction to}%
164 \endgroup}%
165 {\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 0.25in \chaprm%
166 \centerline{Programming in Emacs Lisp}%
167 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
168 @end tex
169
170 @titlepage
171 @sp 6
172 @center @titlefont{An Introduction to}
173 @sp 2
174 @center @titlefont{Programming in Emacs Lisp}
175 @sp 2
176 @center Revised Third Edition
177 @sp 4
178 @center by Robert J. Chassell
179
180 @page
181 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
182 @insertcopying
183 @end titlepage
184
185 @iftex
186 @headings off
187 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
188 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
189 @end iftex
190
191 @ifnothtml
192 @c Keep T.O.C. short by tightening up for largebook
193 @ifset largebook
194 @tex
195 \global\parskip 2pt plus 1pt
196 \global\advance\baselineskip by -1pt
197 @end tex
198 @end ifset
199 @end ifnothtml
200
201 @shortcontents
202 @contents
203
204 @ifnottex
205 @node Top
206 @top An Introduction to Programming in Emacs Lisp
207
208 @ifset WWW_GNU_ORG
209 @html
210 <p>The homepage for GNU Emacs is at
211 <a href="/software/emacs/">http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/</a>.<br>
212 To view this manual in other formats, click
213 <a href="/software/emacs/manual/eintr.html">here</a>.
214 @end html
215 @end ifset
216
217 @insertcopying
218
219 This master menu first lists each chapter and index; then it lists
220 every node in every chapter.
221 @end ifnottex
222
223 @c >>>> Set pageno appropriately <<<<
224
225 @c The first page of the Preface is a roman numeral; it is the first
226 @c right handed page after the Table of Contents; hence the following
227 @c setting must be for an odd negative number.
228
229 @c iftex
230 @c global@pageno = -11
231 @c end iftex
232
233 @set COUNT-WORDS count-words-example
234 @c Length of variable name chosen so that things still line up when expanded.
235
236 @menu
237 * Preface:: What to look for.
238 * List Processing:: What is Lisp?
239 * Practicing Evaluation:: Running several programs.
240 * Writing Defuns:: How to write function definitions.
241 * Buffer Walk Through:: Exploring a few buffer-related functions.
242 * More Complex:: A few, even more complex functions.
243 * Narrowing & Widening:: Restricting your and Emacs attention to
244 a region.
245 * car cdr & cons:: Fundamental functions in Lisp.
246 * Cutting & Storing Text:: Removing text and saving it.
247 * List Implementation:: How lists are implemented in the computer.
248 * Yanking:: Pasting stored text.
249 * Loops & Recursion:: How to repeat a process.
250 * Regexp Search:: Regular expression searches.
251 * Counting Words:: A review of repetition and regexps.
252 * Words in a defun:: Counting words in a @code{defun}.
253 * Readying a Graph:: A prototype graph printing function.
254 * Emacs Initialization:: How to write a @file{.emacs} file.
255 * Debugging:: How to run the Emacs Lisp debuggers.
256 * Conclusion:: Now you have the basics.
257 * the-the:: An appendix: how to find reduplicated words.
258 * Kill Ring:: An appendix: how the kill ring works.
259 * Full Graph:: How to create a graph with labeled axes.
260 * Free Software and Free Manuals::
261 * GNU Free Documentation License::
262 * Index::
263 * About the Author::
264
265 @detailmenu
266 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
267
268 Preface
269
270 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
271 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
272 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
273 * Lisp History::
274 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
275 * Thank You::
276
277 List Processing
278
279 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
280 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
281 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
282 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
283 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
284 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
285 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
286 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
287 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
288 * Summary:: The major points.
289 * Error Message Exercises::
290
291 Lisp Lists
292
293 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
294 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
295 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
296 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
297
298 The Lisp Interpreter
299
300 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
301 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
302
303 Evaluation
304
305 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
306 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
307
308 Variables
309
310 * fill-column Example::
311 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
312 without a function.
313 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
314
315 Arguments
316
317 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
318 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
319 of a variable or list.
320 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
321 variable number of arguments.
322 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
323 to a function.
324 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
325
326 Setting the Value of a Variable
327
328 * Using set:: Setting values.
329 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
330 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
331
332 Practicing Evaluation
333
334 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
335 causes evaluation.
336 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
337 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
338 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
339 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
340 the buffer.
341 * Evaluation Exercise::
342
343 How To Write Function Definitions
344
345 * Primitive Functions::
346 * defun:: The @code{defun} macro.
347 * Install:: Install a function definition.
348 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
349 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
350 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
351 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
352 * if:: What if?
353 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
354 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
355 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point and buffer.
356 * Review::
357 * defun Exercises::
358
359 Install a Function Definition
360
361 * Effect of installation::
362 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
363
364 Make a Function Interactive
365
366 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
367 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
368
369 @code{let}
370
371 * Prevent confusion::
372 * Parts of let Expression::
373 * Sample let Expression::
374 * Uninitialized let Variables::
375
376 The @code{if} Special Form
377
378 * if in more detail::
379 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
380
381 Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
382
383 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
384
385 @code{save-excursion}
386
387 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
388 * Template for save-excursion::
389
390 A Few Buffer-Related Functions
391
392 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
393 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
394 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
395 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
396 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
397 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
398 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
399 * Buffer Exercises::
400
401 The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
402
403 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
404 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
405
406 The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
407
408 * append-to-buffer overview::
409 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
410 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
411 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
412
413 A Few More Complex Functions
414
415 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
416 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
417 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
418 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
419 * Second Buffer Related Review::
420 * optional Exercise::
421
422 The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
423
424 * insert-buffer code::
425 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
426 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
427 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
428 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
429 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
430 * New insert-buffer::
431
432 The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
433
434 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
435 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
436
437 Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
438
439 * Optional Arguments::
440 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
441 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
442
443 @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
444
445 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
446 * Large buffer case::
447 * Small buffer case::
448
449 Narrowing and Widening
450
451 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
452 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
453 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
454 * narrow Exercise::
455
456 @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
457
458 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
459 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
460 * cons:: Constructing a list.
461 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
462 * nth::
463 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
464 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
465 * cons Exercise::
466
467 @code{cons}
468
469 * Build a list::
470 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
471
472 Cutting and Storing Text
473
474 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
475 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
476 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
477 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
478 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
479 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
480 * cons & search-fwd Review::
481 * search Exercises::
482
483 @code{zap-to-char}
484
485 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
486 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
487 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
488 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
489 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
490 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
491
492 @code{kill-region}
493
494 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
495 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
496 * Lisp macro::
497
498 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
499
500 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
501 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
502
503 The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
504
505 * last-command & this-command::
506 * kill-append function::
507 * kill-new function::
508
509 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
510
511 * See variable current value::
512 * defvar and asterisk::
513
514 How Lists are Implemented
515
516 * Lists diagrammed::
517 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
518 * List Exercise::
519
520 Yanking Text Back
521
522 * Kill Ring Overview::
523 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
524 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
525
526 Loops and Recursion
527
528 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
529 * dolist dotimes::
530 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
531 * Looping exercise::
532
533 @code{while}
534
535 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
536 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
537 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
538 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
539 * Incrementing Loop Details::
540 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
541
542 Details of an Incrementing Loop
543
544 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
545 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
546 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
547
548 Loop with a Decrementing Counter
549
550 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
551 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
552 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
553
554 Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
555
556 * dolist::
557 * dotimes::
558
559 Recursion
560
561 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
562 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
563 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
564 * Recursive triangle function::
565 * Recursion with cond::
566 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
567 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
568 * No deferment solution::
569
570 Recursion in Place of a Counter
571
572 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
573 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
574
575 Recursive Patterns
576
577 * Every::
578 * Accumulate::
579 * Keep::
580
581 Regular Expression Searches
582
583 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
584 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
585 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
586 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
587 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
588 * Regexp Review::
589 * re-search Exercises::
590
591 @code{forward-sentence}
592
593 * Complete forward-sentence::
594 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
595 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
596
597 @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
598
599 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
600 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
601 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
602
603 Counting: Repetition and Regexps
604
605 * Why Count Words::
606 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
607 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
608 * Counting Exercise::
609
610 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
611
612 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
613 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
614
615 Counting Words in a @code{defun}
616
617 * Divide and Conquer::
618 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
619 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
620 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
621 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
622 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
623 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
624 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
625 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
626 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
627
628 Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
629
630 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
631 * append:: Attach one list to another.
632
633 Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
634
635 * Data for Display in Detail::
636 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
637 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
638 * Counting function definitions::
639
640 Readying a Graph
641
642 * Columns of a graph::
643 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
644 * recursive-graph-body-print::
645 * Printed Axes::
646 * Line Graph Exercise::
647
648 Your @file{.emacs} File
649
650 * Default Configuration::
651 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
652 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
653 * Beginning init File:: How to write a @file{.emacs} init file.
654 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
655 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
656 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
657 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
658 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
659 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
660 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
661 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
662 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
663 * Miscellaneous::
664 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
665
666 Debugging
667
668 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
669 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
670 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
671 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
672 * Debugging Exercises::
673
674 Handling the Kill Ring
675
676 * What the Kill Ring Does::
677 * current-kill::
678 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
679 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
680 * ring file::
681
682 The @code{current-kill} Function
683
684 * Code for current-kill::
685 * Understanding current-kill::
686
687 @code{current-kill} in Outline
688
689 * Body of current-kill::
690 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
691 * Determining the Element::
692
693 A Graph with Labeled Axes
694
695 * Labeled Example::
696 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
697 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
698 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
699 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
700
701 The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
702
703 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
704 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
705 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
706 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
707 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
708 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
709
710 The @code{print-X-axis} Function
711
712 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
713 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
714
715 Printing the Whole Graph
716
717 * The final version:: A few changes.
718 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
719 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
720 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
721 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
722 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
723 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
724
725 @end detailmenu
726 @end menu
727
728 @node Preface
729 @unnumbered Preface
730
731 Most of the GNU Emacs integrated environment is written in the programming
732 language called Emacs Lisp. The code written in this programming
733 language is the software---the sets of instructions---that tell the
734 computer what to do when you give it commands. Emacs is designed so
735 that you can write new code in Emacs Lisp and easily install it as an
736 extension to the editor.
737
738 (GNU Emacs is sometimes called an ``extensible editor'', but it does
739 much more than provide editing capabilities. It is better to refer to
740 Emacs as an ``extensible computing environment''. However, that
741 phrase is quite a mouthful. It is easier to refer to Emacs simply as
742 an editor. Moreover, everything you do in Emacs---find the Mayan date
743 and phases of the moon, simplify polynomials, debug code, manage
744 files, read letters, write books---all these activities are kinds of
745 editing in the most general sense of the word.)
746
747 @menu
748 * Why:: Why learn Emacs Lisp?
749 * On Reading this Text:: Read, gain familiarity, pick up habits....
750 * Who You Are:: For whom this is written.
751 * Lisp History::
752 * Note for Novices:: You can read this as a novice.
753 * Thank You::
754 @end menu
755
756 @ifnottex
757 @node Why
758 @unnumberedsec Why Study Emacs Lisp?
759 @end ifnottex
760
761 Although Emacs Lisp is usually thought of in association only with Emacs,
762 it is a full computer programming language. You can use Emacs Lisp as
763 you would any other programming language.
764
765 Perhaps you want to understand programming; perhaps you want to extend
766 Emacs; or perhaps you want to become a programmer. This introduction to
767 Emacs Lisp is designed to get you started: to guide you in learning the
768 fundamentals of programming, and more importantly, to show you how you
769 can teach yourself to go further.
770
771 @node On Reading this Text
772 @unnumberedsec On Reading this Text
773
774 All through this document, you will see little sample programs you can
775 run inside of Emacs. If you read this document in Info inside of GNU
776 Emacs, you can run the programs as they appear. (This is easy to do and
777 is explained when the examples are presented.) Alternatively, you can
778 read this introduction as a printed book while sitting beside a computer
779 running Emacs. (This is what I like to do; I like printed books.) If
780 you don't have a running Emacs beside you, you can still read this book,
781 but in this case, it is best to treat it as a novel or as a travel guide
782 to a country not yet visited: interesting, but not the same as being
783 there.
784
785 Much of this introduction is dedicated to walkthroughs or guided tours
786 of code used in GNU Emacs. These tours are designed for two purposes:
787 first, to give you familiarity with real, working code (code you use
788 every day); and, second, to give you familiarity with the way Emacs
789 works. It is interesting to see how a working environment is
790 implemented.
791 Also, I
792 hope that you will pick up the habit of browsing through source code.
793 You can learn from it and mine it for ideas. Having GNU Emacs is like
794 having a dragon's cave of treasures.
795
796 In addition to learning about Emacs as an editor and Emacs Lisp as a
797 programming language, the examples and guided tours will give you an
798 opportunity to get acquainted with Emacs as a Lisp programming
799 environment. GNU Emacs supports programming and provides tools that
800 you will want to become comfortable using, such as @kbd{M-.} (the key
801 which invokes the @code{find-tag} command). You will also learn about
802 buffers and other objects that are part of the environment.
803 Learning about these features of Emacs is like learning new routes
804 around your home town.
805
806 @ignore
807 In addition, I have written several programs as extended examples.
808 Although these are examples, the programs are real. I use them.
809 Other people use them. You may use them. Beyond the fragments of
810 programs used for illustrations, there is very little in here that is
811 ``just for teaching purposes''; what you see is used. This is a great
812 advantage of Emacs Lisp: it is easy to learn to use it for work.
813 @end ignore
814
815 Finally, I hope to convey some of the skills for using Emacs to
816 learn aspects of programming that you don't know. You can often use
817 Emacs to help you understand what puzzles you or to find out how to do
818 something new. This self-reliance is not only a pleasure, but an
819 advantage.
820
821 @node Who You Are
822 @unnumberedsec For Whom This is Written
823
824 This text is written as an elementary introduction for people who are
825 not programmers. If you are a programmer, you may not be satisfied with
826 this primer. The reason is that you may have become expert at reading
827 reference manuals and be put off by the way this text is organized.
828
829 An expert programmer who reviewed this text said to me:
830
831 @quotation
832 @i{I prefer to learn from reference manuals. I ``dive into'' each
833 paragraph, and ``come up for air'' between paragraphs.}
834
835 @i{When I get to the end of a paragraph, I assume that that subject is
836 done, finished, that I know everything I need (with the
837 possible exception of the case when the next paragraph starts talking
838 about it in more detail). I expect that a well written reference manual
839 will not have a lot of redundancy, and that it will have excellent
840 pointers to the (one) place where the information I want is.}
841 @end quotation
842
843 This introduction is not written for this person!
844
845 Firstly, I try to say everything at least three times: first, to
846 introduce it; second, to show it in context; and third, to show it in a
847 different context, or to review it.
848
849 Secondly, I hardly ever put all the information about a subject in one
850 place, much less in one paragraph. To my way of thinking, that imposes
851 too heavy a burden on the reader. Instead I try to explain only what
852 you need to know at the time. (Sometimes I include a little extra
853 information so you won't be surprised later when the additional
854 information is formally introduced.)
855
856 When you read this text, you are not expected to learn everything the
857 first time. Frequently, you need only make, as it were, a ``nodding
858 acquaintance'' with some of the items mentioned. My hope is that I have
859 structured the text and given you enough hints that you will be alert to
860 what is important, and concentrate on it.
861
862 You will need to ``dive into'' some paragraphs; there is no other way
863 to read them. But I have tried to keep down the number of such
864 paragraphs. This book is intended as an approachable hill, rather than
865 as a daunting mountain.
866
867 This introduction to @cite{Programming in Emacs Lisp} has a companion
868 document,
869 @iftex
870 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
871 @end iftex
872 @ifnottex
873 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
874 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
875 @end ifnottex
876 The reference manual has more detail than this introduction. In the
877 reference manual, all the information about one topic is concentrated
878 in one place. You should turn to it if you are like the programmer
879 quoted above. And, of course, after you have read this
880 @cite{Introduction}, you will find the @cite{Reference Manual} useful
881 when you are writing your own programs.
882
883 @node Lisp History
884 @unnumberedsec Lisp History
885 @cindex Lisp history
886
887 Lisp was first developed in the late 1950s at the Massachusetts
888 Institute of Technology for research in artificial intelligence. The
889 great power of the Lisp language makes it superior for other purposes as
890 well, such as writing editor commands and integrated environments.
891
892 @cindex Maclisp
893 @cindex Common Lisp
894 GNU Emacs Lisp is largely inspired by Maclisp, which was written at MIT
895 in the 1960s. It is somewhat inspired by Common Lisp, which became a
896 standard in the 1980s. However, Emacs Lisp is much simpler than Common
897 Lisp. (The standard Emacs distribution contains an optional extensions
898 file, @file{cl.el}, that adds many Common Lisp features to Emacs Lisp.)
899
900 @node Note for Novices
901 @unnumberedsec A Note for Novices
902
903 If you don't know GNU Emacs, you can still read this document
904 profitably. However, I recommend you learn Emacs, if only to learn to
905 move around your computer screen. You can teach yourself how to use
906 Emacs with the built-in tutorial. To use it, type @kbd{C-h t}. (This
907 means you press and release the @key{CTRL} key and the @kbd{h} at the
908 same time, and then press and release @kbd{t}.)
909
910 Also, I often refer to one of Emacs's standard commands by listing the
911 keys which you press to invoke the command and then giving the name of
912 the command in parentheses, like this: @kbd{M-C-\}
913 (@code{indent-region}). What this means is that the
914 @code{indent-region} command is customarily invoked by typing
915 @kbd{M-C-\}. (You can, if you wish, change the keys that are typed to
916 invoke the command; this is called @dfn{rebinding}. @xref{Keymaps, ,
917 Keymaps}.) The abbreviation @kbd{M-C-\} means that you type your
918 @key{META} key, @key{CTRL} key and @key{\} key all at the same time.
919 (On many modern keyboards the @key{META} key is labeled
920 @key{ALT}.)
921 Sometimes a combination like this is called a keychord, since it is
922 similar to the way you play a chord on a piano. If your keyboard does
923 not have a @key{META} key, the @key{ESC} key prefix is used in place
924 of it. In this case, @kbd{M-C-\} means that you press and release your
925 @key{ESC} key and then type the @key{CTRL} key and the @key{\} key at
926 the same time. But usually @kbd{M-C-\} means press the @key{CTRL} key
927 along with the key that is labeled @key{ALT} and, at the same time,
928 press the @key{\} key.
929
930 In addition to typing a lone keychord, you can prefix what you type
931 with @kbd{C-u}, which is called the ``universal argument''. The
932 @kbd{C-u} keychord passes an argument to the subsequent command.
933 Thus, to indent a region of plain text by 6 spaces, mark the region,
934 and then type @w{@kbd{C-u 6 M-C-\}}. (If you do not specify a number,
935 Emacs either passes the number 4 to the command or otherwise runs the
936 command differently than it would otherwise.) @xref{Arguments, ,
937 Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
938
939 If you are reading this in Info using GNU Emacs, you can read through
940 this whole document just by pressing the space bar, @key{SPC}.
941 (To learn about Info, type @kbd{C-h i} and then select Info.)
942
943 A note on terminology: when I use the word Lisp alone, I often am
944 referring to the various dialects of Lisp in general, but when I speak
945 of Emacs Lisp, I am referring to GNU Emacs Lisp in particular.
946
947 @node Thank You
948 @unnumberedsec Thank You
949
950 My thanks to all who helped me with this book. My especial thanks to
951 @r{Jim Blandy}, @r{Noah Friedman}, @w{Jim Kingdon}, @r{Roland
952 McGrath}, @w{Frank Ritter}, @w{Randy Smith}, @w{Richard M.
953 Stallman}, and @w{Melissa Weisshaus}. My thanks also go to both
954 @w{Philip Johnson} and @w{David Stampe} for their patient
955 encouragement. My mistakes are my own.
956
957 @flushright
958 Robert J. Chassell
959 @ifnothtml
960 @email{bob@@gnu.org}
961 @end ifnothtml
962 @ifhtml
963 bob@@gnu.org
964 @end ifhtml
965 @end flushright
966
967 @c ================ Beginning of main text ================
968
969 @c Start main text on right-hand (verso) page
970
971 @tex
972 \par\vfill\supereject
973 \headings off
974 \ifodd\pageno
975 \par\vfill\supereject
976 \else
977 \par\vfill\supereject
978 \page\hbox{}\page
979 \par\vfill\supereject
980 \fi
981 @end tex
982
983 @c Note: this resetting of the page number back to 1 causes TeX to gripe
984 @c about already having seen page numbers 1-4 before (in the preface):
985 @c pdfTeX warning (ext4): destination with the same identifier (name{1})
986 @c has been already used, duplicate ignored
987 @c I guess that is harmless (what happens if a later part of the text
988 @c makes a link to something in the first 4 pages though?).
989 @c E.g., note that the Emacs manual has a preface, but does not bother
990 @c resetting the page numbers back to 1 after that.
991 @iftex
992 @headings off
993 @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thischapter
994 @oddheading @thissection @| @| @thispage
995 @global@pageno = 1
996 @end iftex
997
998 @node List Processing
999 @chapter List Processing
1000
1001 To the untutored eye, Lisp is a strange programming language. In Lisp
1002 code there are parentheses everywhere. Some people even claim that
1003 the name stands for ``Lots of Isolated Silly Parentheses''. But the
1004 claim is unwarranted. Lisp stands for LISt Processing, and the
1005 programming language handles @emph{lists} (and lists of lists) by
1006 putting them between parentheses. The parentheses mark the boundaries
1007 of the list. Sometimes a list is preceded by a single apostrophe or
1008 quotation mark, @samp{'}@footnote{The single apostrophe or quotation
1009 mark is an abbreviation for the function @code{quote}; you need not
1010 think about functions now; functions are defined in @ref{Making
1011 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}.} Lists are the basis of Lisp.
1012
1013 @menu
1014 * Lisp Lists:: What are lists?
1015 * Run a Program:: Any list in Lisp is a program ready to run.
1016 * Making Errors:: Generating an error message.
1017 * Names & Definitions:: Names of symbols and function definitions.
1018 * Lisp Interpreter:: What the Lisp interpreter does.
1019 * Evaluation:: Running a program.
1020 * Variables:: Returning a value from a variable.
1021 * Arguments:: Passing information to a function.
1022 * set & setq:: Setting the value of a variable.
1023 * Summary:: The major points.
1024 * Error Message Exercises::
1025 @end menu
1026
1027 @node Lisp Lists
1028 @section Lisp Lists
1029 @cindex Lisp Lists
1030
1031 In Lisp, a list looks like this: @code{'(rose violet daisy buttercup)}.
1032 This list is preceded by a single apostrophe. It could just as well be
1033 written as follows, which looks more like the kind of list you are likely
1034 to be familiar with:
1035
1036 @smallexample
1037 @group
1038 '(rose
1039 violet
1040 daisy
1041 buttercup)
1042 @end group
1043 @end smallexample
1044
1045 @noindent
1046 The elements of this list are the names of the four different flowers,
1047 separated from each other by whitespace and surrounded by parentheses,
1048 like flowers in a field with a stone wall around them.
1049 @cindex Flowers in a field
1050
1051 @menu
1052 * Numbers Lists:: List have numbers, other lists, in them.
1053 * Lisp Atoms:: Elemental entities.
1054 * Whitespace in Lists:: Formatting lists to be readable.
1055 * Typing Lists:: How GNU Emacs helps you type lists.
1056 @end menu
1057
1058 @ifnottex
1059 @node Numbers Lists
1060 @unnumberedsubsec Numbers, Lists inside of Lists
1061 @end ifnottex
1062
1063 Lists can also have numbers in them, as in this list: @code{(+ 2 2)}.
1064 This list has a plus-sign, @samp{+}, followed by two @samp{2}s, each
1065 separated by whitespace.
1066
1067 In Lisp, both data and programs are represented the same way; that is,
1068 they are both lists of words, numbers, or other lists, separated by
1069 whitespace and surrounded by parentheses. (Since a program looks like
1070 data, one program may easily serve as data for another; this is a very
1071 powerful feature of Lisp.) (Incidentally, these two parenthetical
1072 remarks are @emph{not} Lisp lists, because they contain @samp{;} and
1073 @samp{.} as punctuation marks.)
1074
1075 @need 1200
1076 Here is another list, this time with a list inside of it:
1077
1078 @smallexample
1079 '(this list has (a list inside of it))
1080 @end smallexample
1081
1082 The components of this list are the words @samp{this}, @samp{list},
1083 @samp{has}, and the list @samp{(a list inside of it)}. The interior
1084 list is made up of the words @samp{a}, @samp{list}, @samp{inside},
1085 @samp{of}, @samp{it}.
1086
1087 @node Lisp Atoms
1088 @subsection Lisp Atoms
1089 @cindex Lisp Atoms
1090
1091 In Lisp, what we have been calling words are called @dfn{atoms}. This
1092 term comes from the historical meaning of the word atom, which means
1093 ``indivisible''. As far as Lisp is concerned, the words we have been
1094 using in the lists cannot be divided into any smaller parts and still
1095 mean the same thing as part of a program; likewise with numbers and
1096 single character symbols like @samp{+}. On the other hand, unlike an
1097 ancient atom, a list can be split into parts. (@xref{car cdr & cons,
1098 , @code{car} @code{cdr} & @code{cons} Fundamental Functions}.)
1099
1100 In a list, atoms are separated from each other by whitespace. They can be
1101 right next to a parenthesis.
1102
1103 @cindex @samp{empty list} defined
1104 Technically speaking, a list in Lisp consists of parentheses surrounding
1105 atoms separated by whitespace or surrounding other lists or surrounding
1106 both atoms and other lists. A list can have just one atom in it or
1107 have nothing in it at all. A list with nothing in it looks like this:
1108 @code{()}, and is called the @dfn{empty list}. Unlike anything else, an
1109 empty list is considered both an atom and a list at the same time.
1110
1111 @cindex Symbolic expressions, introduced
1112 @cindex @samp{expression} defined
1113 @cindex @samp{form} defined
1114 The printed representation of both atoms and lists are called
1115 @dfn{symbolic expressions} or, more concisely, @dfn{s-expressions}.
1116 The word @dfn{expression} by itself can refer to either the printed
1117 representation, or to the atom or list as it is held internally in the
1118 computer. Often, people use the term @dfn{expression}
1119 indiscriminately. (Also, in many texts, the word @dfn{form} is used
1120 as a synonym for expression.)
1121
1122 Incidentally, the atoms that make up our universe were named such when
1123 they were thought to be indivisible; but it has been found that physical
1124 atoms are not indivisible. Parts can split off an atom or it can
1125 fission into two parts of roughly equal size. Physical atoms were named
1126 prematurely, before their truer nature was found. In Lisp, certain
1127 kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated into parts; but the
1128 mechanism for doing this is different from the mechanism for splitting a
1129 list. As far as list operations are concerned, the atoms of a list are
1130 unsplittable.
1131
1132 As in English, the meanings of the component letters of a Lisp atom
1133 are different from the meaning the letters make as a word. For
1134 example, the word for the South American sloth, the @samp{ai}, is
1135 completely different from the two words, @samp{a}, and @samp{i}.
1136
1137 There are many kinds of atom in nature but only a few in Lisp: for
1138 example, @dfn{numbers}, such as 37, 511, or 1729, and @dfn{symbols}, such
1139 as @samp{+}, @samp{foo}, or @samp{forward-line}. The words we have
1140 listed in the examples above are all symbols. In everyday Lisp
1141 conversation, the word ``atom'' is not often used, because programmers
1142 usually try to be more specific about what kind of atom they are dealing
1143 with. Lisp programming is mostly about symbols (and sometimes numbers)
1144 within lists. (Incidentally, the preceding three word parenthetical
1145 remark is a proper list in Lisp, since it consists of atoms, which in
1146 this case are symbols, separated by whitespace and enclosed by
1147 parentheses, without any non-Lisp punctuation.)
1148
1149 @need 1250
1150 Text between double quotation marks---even sentences or
1151 paragraphs---is also an atom. Here is an example:
1152 @cindex Text between double quotation marks
1153
1154 @smallexample
1155 '(this list includes "text between quotation marks.")
1156 @end smallexample
1157
1158 @cindex @samp{string} defined
1159 @noindent
1160 In Lisp, all of the quoted text including the punctuation mark and the
1161 blank spaces is a single atom. This kind of atom is called a
1162 @dfn{string} (for ``string of characters'') and is the sort of thing that
1163 is used for messages that a computer can print for a human to read.
1164 Strings are a different kind of atom than numbers or symbols and are
1165 used differently.
1166
1167 @node Whitespace in Lists
1168 @subsection Whitespace in Lists
1169 @cindex Whitespace in lists
1170
1171 @need 1200
1172 The amount of whitespace in a list does not matter. From the point of view
1173 of the Lisp language,
1174
1175 @smallexample
1176 @group
1177 '(this list
1178 looks like this)
1179 @end group
1180 @end smallexample
1181
1182 @need 800
1183 @noindent
1184 is exactly the same as this:
1185
1186 @smallexample
1187 '(this list looks like this)
1188 @end smallexample
1189
1190 Both examples show what to Lisp is the same list, the list made up of
1191 the symbols @samp{this}, @samp{list}, @samp{looks}, @samp{like}, and
1192 @samp{this} in that order.
1193
1194 Extra whitespace and newlines are designed to make a list more readable
1195 by humans. When Lisp reads the expression, it gets rid of all the extra
1196 whitespace (but it needs to have at least one space between atoms in
1197 order to tell them apart.)
1198
1199 Odd as it seems, the examples we have seen cover almost all of what Lisp
1200 lists look like! Every other list in Lisp looks more or less like one
1201 of these examples, except that the list may be longer and more complex.
1202 In brief, a list is between parentheses, a string is between quotation
1203 marks, a symbol looks like a word, and a number looks like a number.
1204 (For certain situations, square brackets, dots and a few other special
1205 characters may be used; however, we will go quite far without them.)
1206
1207 @node Typing Lists
1208 @subsection GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists
1209 @cindex Help typing lists
1210 @cindex Formatting help
1211
1212 When you type a Lisp expression in GNU Emacs using either Lisp
1213 Interaction mode or Emacs Lisp mode, you have available to you several
1214 commands to format the Lisp expression so it is easy to read. For
1215 example, pressing the @key{TAB} key automatically indents the line the
1216 cursor is on by the right amount. A command to properly indent the
1217 code in a region is customarily bound to @kbd{M-C-\}. Indentation is
1218 designed so that you can see which elements of a list belong to which
1219 list---elements of a sub-list are indented more than the elements of
1220 the enclosing list.
1221
1222 In addition, when you type a closing parenthesis, Emacs momentarily
1223 jumps the cursor back to the matching opening parenthesis, so you can
1224 see which one it is. This is very useful, since every list you type
1225 in Lisp must have its closing parenthesis match its opening
1226 parenthesis. (@xref{Major Modes, , Major Modes, emacs, The GNU Emacs
1227 Manual}, for more information about Emacs's modes.)
1228
1229 @node Run a Program
1230 @section Run a Program
1231 @cindex Run a program
1232 @cindex Program, running one
1233
1234 @cindex @samp{evaluate} defined
1235 A list in Lisp---any list---is a program ready to run. If you run it
1236 (for which the Lisp jargon is @dfn{evaluate}), the computer will do one
1237 of three things: do nothing except return to you the list itself; send
1238 you an error message; or, treat the first symbol in the list as a
1239 command to do something. (Usually, of course, it is the last of these
1240 three things that you really want!)
1241
1242 @c use code for the single apostrophe, not samp.
1243 @findex quote
1244 @cindex @code{'} for quoting
1245 @cindex quoting using apostrophe
1246 @cindex apostrophe for quoting
1247 The single apostrophe, @code{'}, that I put in front of some of the
1248 example lists in preceding sections is called a @dfn{quote}; when it
1249 precedes a list, it tells Lisp to do nothing with the list, other than
1250 take it as it is written. But if there is no quote preceding a list,
1251 the first item of the list is special: it is a command for the computer
1252 to obey. (In Lisp, these commands are called @emph{functions}.) The list
1253 @code{(+ 2 2)} shown above did not have a quote in front of it, so Lisp
1254 understands that the @code{+} is an instruction to do something with the
1255 rest of the list: add the numbers that follow.
1256
1257 @need 1250
1258 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs in Info, here is how you can
1259 evaluate such a list: place your cursor immediately after the right
1260 hand parenthesis of the following list and then type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1261
1262 @smallexample
1263 (+ 2 2)
1264 @end smallexample
1265
1266 @c use code for the number four, not samp.
1267 @noindent
1268 You will see the number @code{4} appear in the echo area. (In the
1269 jargon, what you have just done is ``evaluate the list.'' The echo area
1270 is the line at the bottom of the screen that displays or ``echoes''
1271 text.) Now try the same thing with a quoted list: place the cursor
1272 right after the following list and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1273
1274 @smallexample
1275 '(this is a quoted list)
1276 @end smallexample
1277
1278 @noindent
1279 You will see @code{(this is a quoted list)} appear in the echo area.
1280
1281 @cindex Lisp interpreter, explained
1282 @cindex Interpreter, Lisp, explained
1283 In both cases, what you are doing is giving a command to the program
1284 inside of GNU Emacs called the @dfn{Lisp interpreter}---giving the
1285 interpreter a command to evaluate the expression. The name of the Lisp
1286 interpreter comes from the word for the task done by a human who comes
1287 up with the meaning of an expression---who ``interprets'' it.
1288
1289 You can also evaluate an atom that is not part of a list---one that is
1290 not surrounded by parentheses; again, the Lisp interpreter translates
1291 from the humanly readable expression to the language of the computer.
1292 But before discussing this (@pxref{Variables}), we will discuss what the
1293 Lisp interpreter does when you make an error.
1294
1295 @node Making Errors
1296 @section Generate an Error Message
1297 @cindex Generate an error message
1298 @cindex Error message generation
1299
1300 Partly so you won't worry if you do it accidentally, we will now give
1301 a command to the Lisp interpreter that generates an error message.
1302 This is a harmless activity; and indeed, we will often try to generate
1303 error messages intentionally. Once you understand the jargon, error
1304 messages can be informative. Instead of being called ``error''
1305 messages, they should be called ``help'' messages. They are like
1306 signposts to a traveler in a strange country; deciphering them can be
1307 hard, but once understood, they can point the way.
1308
1309 The error message is generated by a built-in GNU Emacs debugger. We
1310 will ``enter the debugger''. You get out of the debugger by typing @code{q}.
1311
1312 What we will do is evaluate a list that is not quoted and does not
1313 have a meaningful command as its first element. Here is a list almost
1314 exactly the same as the one we just used, but without the single-quote
1315 in front of it. Position the cursor right after it and type @kbd{C-x
1316 C-e}:
1317
1318 @smallexample
1319 (this is an unquoted list)
1320 @end smallexample
1321
1322 @ignore
1323 @noindent
1324 What you see depends on which version of Emacs you are running. GNU
1325 Emacs version 22 provides more information than version 20 and before.
1326 First, the more recent result of generating an error; then the
1327 earlier, version 20 result.
1328
1329 @need 1250
1330 @noindent
1331 In GNU Emacs version 22, a @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and
1332 you will see the following in it:
1333 @end ignore
1334
1335 A @file{*Backtrace*} window will open up and you should see the
1336 following in it:
1337
1338 @smallexample
1339 @group
1340 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1341 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1342 (this is an unquoted list)
1343 eval((this is an unquoted list))
1344 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1345 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1346 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1347 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1348 @end group
1349 @end smallexample
1350
1351 @need 1200
1352 @noindent
1353 Your cursor will be in this window (you may have to wait a few seconds
1354 before it becomes visible). To quit the debugger and make the
1355 debugger window go away, type:
1356
1357 @smallexample
1358 q
1359 @end smallexample
1360
1361 @noindent
1362 Please type @kbd{q} right now, so you become confident that you can
1363 get out of the debugger. Then, type @kbd{C-x C-e} again to re-enter
1364 it.
1365
1366 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1367 Based on what we already know, we can almost read this error message.
1368
1369 You read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells
1370 you what Emacs did. When you typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, you made an
1371 interactive call to the command @code{eval-last-sexp}. @code{eval} is
1372 an abbreviation for ``evaluate'' and @code{sexp} is an abbreviation for
1373 ``symbolic expression''. The command means ``evaluate last symbolic
1374 expression'', which is the expression just before your cursor.
1375
1376 Each line above tells you what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
1377 The most recent action is at the top. The buffer is called the
1378 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer because it enables you to track Emacs
1379 backwards.
1380
1381 @need 800
1382 At the top of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, you see the line:
1383
1384 @smallexample
1385 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)
1386 @end smallexample
1387
1388 @noindent
1389 The Lisp interpreter tried to evaluate the first atom of the list, the
1390 word @samp{this}. It is this action that generated the error message
1391 @samp{void-function this}.
1392
1393 The message contains the words @samp{void-function} and @samp{this}.
1394
1395 @cindex @samp{function} defined
1396 The word @samp{function} was mentioned once before. It is a very
1397 important word. For our purposes, we can define it by saying that a
1398 @dfn{function} is a set of instructions to the computer that tell the
1399 computer to do something.
1400
1401 Now we can begin to understand the error message: @samp{void-function
1402 this}. The function (that is, the word @samp{this}) does not have a
1403 definition of any set of instructions for the computer to carry out.
1404
1405 The slightly odd word, @samp{void-function}, is designed to cover the
1406 way Emacs Lisp is implemented, which is that when a symbol does not
1407 have a function definition attached to it, the place that should
1408 contain the instructions is ``void''.
1409
1410 On the other hand, since we were able to add 2 plus 2 successfully, by
1411 evaluating @code{(+ 2 2)}, we can infer that the symbol @code{+} must
1412 have a set of instructions for the computer to obey and those
1413 instructions must be to add the numbers that follow the @code{+}.
1414
1415 It is possible to prevent Emacs entering the debugger in cases like
1416 this. We do not explain how to do that here, but we will mention what
1417 the result looks like, because you may encounter a similar situation
1418 if there is a bug in some Emacs code that you are using. In such
1419 cases, you will see only one line of error message; it will appear in
1420 the echo area and look like this:
1421
1422 @smallexample
1423 Symbol's function definition is void:@: this
1424 @end smallexample
1425
1426 @noindent
1427 @ignore
1428 (Also, your terminal may beep at you---some do, some don't; and others
1429 blink. This is just a device to get your attention.)
1430 @end ignore
1431 The message goes away as soon as you type a key, even just to
1432 move the cursor.
1433
1434 We know the meaning of the word @samp{Symbol}. It refers to the first
1435 atom of the list, the word @samp{this}. The word @samp{function}
1436 refers to the instructions that tell the computer what to do.
1437 (Technically, the symbol tells the computer where to find the
1438 instructions, but this is a complication we can ignore for the
1439 moment.)
1440
1441 The error message can be understood: @samp{Symbol's function
1442 definition is void:@: this}. The symbol (that is, the word
1443 @samp{this}) lacks instructions for the computer to carry out.
1444
1445 @node Names & Definitions
1446 @section Symbol Names and Function Definitions
1447 @cindex Symbol names
1448
1449 We can articulate another characteristic of Lisp based on what we have
1450 discussed so far---an important characteristic: a symbol, like
1451 @code{+}, is not itself the set of instructions for the computer to
1452 carry out. Instead, the symbol is used, perhaps temporarily, as a way
1453 of locating the definition or set of instructions. What we see is the
1454 name through which the instructions can be found. Names of people
1455 work the same way. I can be referred to as @samp{Bob}; however, I am
1456 not the letters @samp{B}, @samp{o}, @samp{b} but am, or was, the
1457 consciousness consistently associated with a particular life-form.
1458 The name is not me, but it can be used to refer to me.
1459
1460 In Lisp, one set of instructions can be attached to several names.
1461 For example, the computer instructions for adding numbers can be
1462 linked to the symbol @code{plus} as well as to the symbol @code{+}
1463 (and are in some dialects of Lisp). Among humans, I can be referred
1464 to as @samp{Robert} as well as @samp{Bob} and by other words as well.
1465
1466 On the other hand, a symbol can have only one function definition
1467 attached to it at a time. Otherwise, the computer would be confused as
1468 to which definition to use. If this were the case among people, only
1469 one person in the world could be named @samp{Bob}. However, the function
1470 definition to which the name refers can be changed readily.
1471 (@xref{Install, , Install a Function Definition}.)
1472
1473 Since Emacs Lisp is large, it is customary to name symbols in a way
1474 that identifies the part of Emacs to which the function belongs.
1475 Thus, all the names for functions that deal with Texinfo start with
1476 @samp{texinfo-} and those for functions that deal with reading mail
1477 start with @samp{rmail-}.
1478
1479 @node Lisp Interpreter
1480 @section The Lisp Interpreter
1481 @cindex Lisp interpreter, what it does
1482 @cindex Interpreter, what it does
1483
1484 Based on what we have seen, we can now start to figure out what the
1485 Lisp interpreter does when we command it to evaluate a list.
1486 First, it looks to see whether there is a quote before the list; if
1487 there is, the interpreter just gives us the list. On the other
1488 hand, if there is no quote, the interpreter looks at the first element
1489 in the list and sees whether it has a function definition. If it does,
1490 the interpreter carries out the instructions in the function definition.
1491 Otherwise, the interpreter prints an error message.
1492
1493 This is how Lisp works. Simple. There are added complications which we
1494 will get to in a minute, but these are the fundamentals. Of course, to
1495 write Lisp programs, you need to know how to write function definitions
1496 and attach them to names, and how to do this without confusing either
1497 yourself or the computer.
1498
1499 @menu
1500 * Complications:: Variables, Special forms, Lists within.
1501 * Byte Compiling:: Specially processing code for speed.
1502 @end menu
1503
1504 @ifnottex
1505 @node Complications
1506 @unnumberedsubsec Complications
1507 @end ifnottex
1508
1509 Now, for the first complication. In addition to lists, the Lisp
1510 interpreter can evaluate a symbol that is not quoted and does not have
1511 parentheses around it. The Lisp interpreter will attempt to determine
1512 the symbol's value as a @dfn{variable}. This situation is described
1513 in the section on variables. (@xref{Variables}.)
1514
1515 @cindex Special form
1516 The second complication occurs because some functions are unusual and
1517 do not work in the usual manner. Those that don't are called
1518 @dfn{special forms}. They are used for special jobs, like defining a
1519 function, and there are not many of them. In the next few chapters,
1520 you will be introduced to several of the more important special forms.
1521
1522 As well as special forms, there are also @dfn{macros}. A macro
1523 is a construct defined in Lisp, which differs from a function in that it
1524 translates a Lisp expression into another expression that is to be
1525 evaluated in place of the original expression. (@xref{Lisp macro}.)
1526
1527 For the purposes of this introduction, you do not need to worry too much
1528 about whether something is a special form, macro, or ordinary function.
1529 For example, @code{if} is a special form (@pxref{if}), but @code{when}
1530 is a macro (@pxref{Lisp macro}). In earlier versions of Emacs,
1531 @code{defun} was a special form, but now it is a macro (@pxref{defun}).
1532 It still behaves in the same way.
1533
1534 The final complication is this: if the function that the
1535 Lisp interpreter is looking at is not a special form, and if it is part
1536 of a list, the Lisp interpreter looks to see whether the list has a list
1537 inside of it. If there is an inner list, the Lisp interpreter first
1538 figures out what it should do with the inside list, and then it works on
1539 the outside list. If there is yet another list embedded inside the
1540 inner list, it works on that one first, and so on. It always works on
1541 the innermost list first. The interpreter works on the innermost list
1542 first, to evaluate the result of that list. The result may be
1543 used by the enclosing expression.
1544
1545 Otherwise, the interpreter works left to right, from one expression to
1546 the next.
1547
1548 @node Byte Compiling
1549 @subsection Byte Compiling
1550 @cindex Byte compiling
1551
1552 One other aspect of interpreting: the Lisp interpreter is able to
1553 interpret two kinds of entity: humanly readable code, on which we will
1554 focus exclusively, and specially processed code, called @dfn{byte
1555 compiled} code, which is not humanly readable. Byte compiled code
1556 runs faster than humanly readable code.
1557
1558 You can transform humanly readable code into byte compiled code by
1559 running one of the compile commands such as @code{byte-compile-file}.
1560 Byte compiled code is usually stored in a file that ends with a
1561 @file{.elc} extension rather than a @file{.el} extension. You will
1562 see both kinds of file in the @file{emacs/lisp} directory; the files
1563 to read are those with @file{.el} extensions.
1564
1565 As a practical matter, for most things you might do to customize or
1566 extend Emacs, you do not need to byte compile; and I will not discuss
1567 the topic here. @xref{Byte Compilation, , Byte Compilation, elisp,
1568 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a full description of byte
1569 compilation.
1570
1571 @node Evaluation
1572 @section Evaluation
1573 @cindex Evaluation
1574
1575 When the Lisp interpreter works on an expression, the term for the
1576 activity is called @dfn{evaluation}. We say that the interpreter
1577 ``evaluates the expression''. I've used this term several times before.
1578 The word comes from its use in everyday language, ``to ascertain the
1579 value or amount of; to appraise'', according to @cite{Webster's New
1580 Collegiate Dictionary}.
1581
1582 @menu
1583 * How the Interpreter Acts:: Returns and Side Effects...
1584 * Evaluating Inner Lists:: Lists within lists...
1585 @end menu
1586
1587 @ifnottex
1588 @node How the Interpreter Acts
1589 @unnumberedsubsec How the Lisp Interpreter Acts
1590 @end ifnottex
1591
1592 @cindex @samp{returned value} explained
1593 After evaluating an expression, the Lisp interpreter will most likely
1594 @dfn{return} the value that the computer produces by carrying out the
1595 instructions it found in the function definition, or perhaps it will
1596 give up on that function and produce an error message. (The interpreter
1597 may also find itself tossed, so to speak, to a different function or it
1598 may attempt to repeat continually what it is doing for ever and ever in
1599 what is called an ``infinite loop''. These actions are less common; and
1600 we can ignore them.) Most frequently, the interpreter returns a value.
1601
1602 @cindex @samp{side effect} defined
1603 At the same time the interpreter returns a value, it may do something
1604 else as well, such as move a cursor or copy a file; this other kind of
1605 action is called a @dfn{side effect}. Actions that we humans think are
1606 important, such as printing results, are often ``side effects'' to the
1607 Lisp interpreter. The jargon can sound peculiar, but it turns out that
1608 it is fairly easy to learn to use side effects.
1609
1610 In summary, evaluating a symbolic expression most commonly causes the
1611 Lisp interpreter to return a value and perhaps carry out a side effect;
1612 or else produce an error.
1613
1614 @node Evaluating Inner Lists
1615 @subsection Evaluating Inner Lists
1616 @cindex Inner list evaluation
1617 @cindex Evaluating inner lists
1618
1619 If evaluation applies to a list that is inside another list, the outer
1620 list may use the value returned by the first evaluation as information
1621 when the outer list is evaluated. This explains why inner expressions
1622 are evaluated first: the values they return are used by the outer
1623 expressions.
1624
1625 @need 1250
1626 We can investigate this process by evaluating another addition example.
1627 Place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1628
1629 @smallexample
1630 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1631 @end smallexample
1632
1633 @noindent
1634 The number 8 will appear in the echo area.
1635
1636 What happens is that the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the inner
1637 expression, @code{(+ 3 3)}, for which the value 6 is returned; then it
1638 evaluates the outer expression as if it were written @code{(+ 2 6)}, which
1639 returns the value 8. Since there are no more enclosing expressions to
1640 evaluate, the interpreter prints that value in the echo area.
1641
1642 Now it is easy to understand the name of the command invoked by the
1643 keystrokes @kbd{C-x C-e}: the name is @code{eval-last-sexp}. The
1644 letters @code{sexp} are an abbreviation for ``symbolic expression'', and
1645 @code{eval} is an abbreviation for ``evaluate''. The command means
1646 ``evaluate last symbolic expression''.
1647
1648 As an experiment, you can try evaluating the expression by putting the
1649 cursor at the beginning of the next line immediately following the
1650 expression, or inside the expression.
1651
1652 @need 800
1653 Here is another copy of the expression:
1654
1655 @smallexample
1656 (+ 2 (+ 3 3))
1657 @end smallexample
1658
1659 @noindent
1660 If you place the cursor at the beginning of the blank line that
1661 immediately follows the expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}, you will
1662 still get the value 8 printed in the echo area. Now try putting the
1663 cursor inside the expression. If you put it right after the next to
1664 last parenthesis (so it appears to sit on top of the last parenthesis),
1665 you will get a 6 printed in the echo area! This is because the command
1666 evaluates the expression @code{(+ 3 3)}.
1667
1668 Now put the cursor immediately after a number. Type @kbd{C-x C-e} and
1669 you will get the number itself. In Lisp, if you evaluate a number, you
1670 get the number itself---this is how numbers differ from symbols. If you
1671 evaluate a list starting with a symbol like @code{+}, you will get a
1672 value returned that is the result of the computer carrying out the
1673 instructions in the function definition attached to that name. If a
1674 symbol by itself is evaluated, something different happens, as we will
1675 see in the next section.
1676
1677 @node Variables
1678 @section Variables
1679 @cindex Variables
1680
1681 In Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have a value attached to it just as it can
1682 have a function definition attached to it. The two are different.
1683 The function definition is a set of instructions that a computer will
1684 obey. A value, on the other hand, is something, such as number or a
1685 name, that can vary (which is why such a symbol is called a variable).
1686 The value of a symbol can be any expression in Lisp, such as a symbol,
1687 number, list, or string. A symbol that has a value is often called a
1688 @dfn{variable}.
1689
1690 A symbol can have both a function definition and a value attached to
1691 it at the same time. Or it can have just one or the other.
1692 The two are separate. This is somewhat similar
1693 to the way the name Cambridge can refer to the city in Massachusetts
1694 and have some information attached to the name as well, such as
1695 ``great programming center''.
1696
1697 @ignore
1698 (Incidentally, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol can have two
1699 other things attached to it, too: a property list and a documentation
1700 string; these are discussed later.)
1701 @end ignore
1702
1703 Another way to think about this is to imagine a symbol as being a chest
1704 of drawers. The function definition is put in one drawer, the value in
1705 another, and so on. What is put in the drawer holding the value can be
1706 changed without affecting the contents of the drawer holding the
1707 function definition, and vice versa.
1708
1709 @menu
1710 * fill-column Example::
1711 * Void Function:: The error message for a symbol
1712 without a function.
1713 * Void Variable:: The error message for a symbol without a value.
1714 @end menu
1715
1716 @ifnottex
1717 @node fill-column Example
1718 @unnumberedsubsec @code{fill-column}, an Example Variable
1719 @end ifnottex
1720
1721 @findex fill-column, @r{an example variable}
1722 @cindex Example variable, @code{fill-column}
1723 @cindex Variable, example of, @code{fill-column}
1724 The variable @code{fill-column} illustrates a symbol with a value
1725 attached to it: in every GNU Emacs buffer, this symbol is set to some
1726 value, usually 72 or 70, but sometimes to some other value. To find the
1727 value of this symbol, evaluate it by itself. If you are reading this in
1728 Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can do this by putting the cursor after
1729 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1730
1731 @smallexample
1732 fill-column
1733 @end smallexample
1734
1735 @noindent
1736 After I typed @kbd{C-x C-e}, Emacs printed the number 72 in my echo
1737 area. This is the value for which @code{fill-column} is set for me as I
1738 write this. It may be different for you in your Info buffer. Notice
1739 that the value returned as a variable is printed in exactly the same way
1740 as the value returned by a function carrying out its instructions. From
1741 the point of view of the Lisp interpreter, a value returned is a value
1742 returned. What kind of expression it came from ceases to matter once
1743 the value is known.
1744
1745 A symbol can have any value attached to it or, to use the jargon, we can
1746 @dfn{bind} the variable to a value: to a number, such as 72; to a
1747 string, @code{"such as this"}; to a list, such as @code{(spruce pine
1748 oak)}; we can even bind a variable to a function definition.
1749
1750 A symbol can be bound to a value in several ways. @xref{set & setq, ,
1751 Setting the Value of a Variable}, for information about one way to do
1752 this.
1753
1754 @node Void Function
1755 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Function
1756 @cindex Symbol without function error
1757 @cindex Error for symbol without function
1758
1759 When we evaluated @code{fill-column} to find its value as a variable,
1760 we did not place parentheses around the word. This is because we did
1761 not intend to use it as a function name.
1762
1763 If @code{fill-column} were the first or only element of a list, the
1764 Lisp interpreter would attempt to find the function definition
1765 attached to it. But @code{fill-column} has no function definition.
1766 Try evaluating this:
1767
1768 @smallexample
1769 (fill-column)
1770 @end smallexample
1771
1772 @need 1250
1773 @noindent
1774 You will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
1775
1776 @smallexample
1777 @group
1778 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1779 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function fill-column)
1780 (fill-column)
1781 eval((fill-column))
1782 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1783 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1784 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1785 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1786 @end group
1787 @end smallexample
1788
1789 @noindent
1790 (Remember, to quit the debugger and make the debugger window go away,
1791 type @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1792
1793 @ignore
1794 @need 800
1795 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will produce an error message that says:
1796
1797 @smallexample
1798 Symbol's function definition is void:@: fill-column
1799 @end smallexample
1800
1801 @noindent
1802 (The message will go away as soon as you move the cursor or type
1803 another key.)
1804 @end ignore
1805
1806 @node Void Variable
1807 @subsection Error Message for a Symbol Without a Value
1808 @cindex Symbol without value error
1809 @cindex Error for symbol without value
1810
1811 If you attempt to evaluate a symbol that does not have a value bound to
1812 it, you will receive an error message. You can see this by
1813 experimenting with our 2 plus 2 addition. In the following expression,
1814 put your cursor right after the @code{+}, before the first number 2,
1815 type @kbd{C-x C-e}:
1816
1817 @smallexample
1818 (+ 2 2)
1819 @end smallexample
1820
1821 @need 1500
1822 @noindent
1823 In GNU Emacs 22, you will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that
1824 says:
1825
1826 @smallexample
1827 @group
1828 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1829 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-variable +)
1830 eval(+)
1831 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
1832 eval-last-sexp(nil)
1833 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
1834 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
1835 @end group
1836 @end smallexample
1837
1838 @noindent
1839 (Again, you can quit the debugger by
1840 typing @kbd{q} in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
1841
1842 This backtrace is different from the very first error message we saw,
1843 which said, @samp{Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function this)}.
1844 In this case, the function does not have a value as a variable; while
1845 in the other error message, the function (the word @samp{this}) did not
1846 have a definition.
1847
1848 In this experiment with the @code{+}, what we did was cause the Lisp
1849 interpreter to evaluate the @code{+} and look for the value of the
1850 variable instead of the function definition. We did this by placing the
1851 cursor right after the symbol rather than after the parenthesis of the
1852 enclosing list as we did before. As a consequence, the Lisp interpreter
1853 evaluated the preceding s-expression, which in this case was
1854 @code{+} by itself.
1855
1856 Since @code{+} does not have a value bound to it, just the function
1857 definition, the error message reported that the symbol's value as a
1858 variable was void.
1859
1860 @ignore
1861 @need 800
1862 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, your error message will say:
1863
1864 @example
1865 Symbol's value as variable is void:@: +
1866 @end example
1867
1868 @noindent
1869 The meaning is the same as in GNU Emacs 22.
1870 @end ignore
1871
1872 @node Arguments
1873 @section Arguments
1874 @cindex Arguments
1875 @cindex Passing information to functions
1876
1877 To see how information is passed to functions, let's look again at
1878 our old standby, the addition of two plus two. In Lisp, this is written
1879 as follows:
1880
1881 @smallexample
1882 (+ 2 2)
1883 @end smallexample
1884
1885 If you evaluate this expression, the number 4 will appear in your echo
1886 area. What the Lisp interpreter does is add the numbers that follow
1887 the @code{+}.
1888
1889 @cindex @samp{argument} defined
1890 The numbers added by @code{+} are called the @dfn{arguments} of the
1891 function @code{+}. These numbers are the information that is given to
1892 or @dfn{passed} to the function.
1893
1894 The word ``argument'' comes from the way it is used in mathematics and
1895 does not refer to a disputation between two people; instead it refers to
1896 the information presented to the function, in this case, to the
1897 @code{+}. In Lisp, the arguments to a function are the atoms or lists
1898 that follow the function. The values returned by the evaluation of
1899 these atoms or lists are passed to the function. Different functions
1900 require different numbers of arguments; some functions require none at
1901 all.@footnote{It is curious to track the path by which the word ``argument''
1902 came to have two different meanings, one in mathematics and the other in
1903 everyday English. According to the @cite{Oxford English Dictionary},
1904 the word derives from the Latin for @samp{to make clear, prove}; thus it
1905 came to mean, by one thread of derivation, ``the evidence offered as
1906 proof'', which is to say, ``the information offered'', which led to its
1907 meaning in Lisp. But in the other thread of derivation, it came to mean
1908 ``to assert in a manner against which others may make counter
1909 assertions'', which led to the meaning of the word as a disputation.
1910 (Note here that the English word has two different definitions attached
1911 to it at the same time. By contrast, in Emacs Lisp, a symbol cannot
1912 have two different function definitions at the same time.)}
1913
1914 @menu
1915 * Data types:: Types of data passed to a function.
1916 * Args as Variable or List:: An argument can be the value
1917 of a variable or list.
1918 * Variable Number of Arguments:: Some functions may take a
1919 variable number of arguments.
1920 * Wrong Type of Argument:: Passing an argument of the wrong type
1921 to a function.
1922 * message:: A useful function for sending messages.
1923 @end menu
1924
1925 @node Data types
1926 @subsection Arguments' Data Types
1927 @cindex Data types
1928 @cindex Types of data
1929 @cindex Arguments' data types
1930
1931 The type of data that should be passed to a function depends on what
1932 kind of information it uses. The arguments to a function such as
1933 @code{+} must have values that are numbers, since @code{+} adds numbers.
1934 Other functions use different kinds of data for their arguments.
1935
1936 @need 1250
1937 @findex concat
1938 For example, the @code{concat} function links together or unites two or
1939 more strings of text to produce a string. The arguments are strings.
1940 Concatenating the two character strings @code{abc}, @code{def} produces
1941 the single string @code{abcdef}. This can be seen by evaluating the
1942 following:
1943
1944 @smallexample
1945 (concat "abc" "def")
1946 @end smallexample
1947
1948 @noindent
1949 The value produced by evaluating this expression is @code{"abcdef"}.
1950
1951 A function such as @code{substring} uses both a string and numbers as
1952 arguments. The function returns a part of the string, a substring of
1953 the first argument. This function takes three arguments. Its first
1954 argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments
1955 are numbers that indicate the beginning (inclusive) and end
1956 (exclusive) of the substring. The numbers are a count of the number
1957 of characters (including spaces and punctuation) from the beginning of
1958 the string. Note that the characters in a string are numbered from
1959 zero, not one.
1960
1961 @need 800
1962 For example, if you evaluate the following:
1963
1964 @smallexample
1965 (substring "The quick brown fox jumped." 16 19)
1966 @end smallexample
1967
1968 @noindent
1969 you will see @code{"fox"} appear in the echo area. The arguments are the
1970 string and the two numbers.
1971
1972 Note that the string passed to @code{substring} is a single atom even
1973 though it is made up of several words separated by spaces. Lisp counts
1974 everything between the two quotation marks as part of the string,
1975 including the spaces. You can think of the @code{substring} function as
1976 a kind of ``atom smasher'' since it takes an otherwise indivisible atom
1977 and extracts a part. However, @code{substring} is only able to extract
1978 a substring from an argument that is a string, not from another type of
1979 atom such as a number or symbol.
1980
1981 @node Args as Variable or List
1982 @subsection An Argument as the Value of a Variable or List
1983
1984 An argument can be a symbol that returns a value when it is evaluated.
1985 For example, when the symbol @code{fill-column} by itself is evaluated,
1986 it returns a number. This number can be used in an addition.
1987
1988 @need 1250
1989 Position the cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
1990 C-e}:
1991
1992 @smallexample
1993 (+ 2 fill-column)
1994 @end smallexample
1995
1996 @noindent
1997 The value will be a number two more than what you get by evaluating
1998 @code{fill-column} alone. For me, this is 74, because my value of
1999 @code{fill-column} is 72.
2000
2001 As we have just seen, an argument can be a symbol that returns a value
2002 when evaluated. In addition, an argument can be a list that returns a
2003 value when it is evaluated. For example, in the following expression,
2004 the arguments to the function @code{concat} are the strings
2005 @w{@code{"The "}} and @w{@code{" red foxes."}} and the list
2006 @code{(number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column))}.
2007
2008 @c For GNU Emacs 22, need number-to-string
2009 @smallexample
2010 (concat "The " (number-to-string (+ 2 fill-column)) " red foxes.")
2011 @end smallexample
2012
2013 @noindent
2014 If you evaluate this expression---and if, as with my Emacs,
2015 @code{fill-column} evaluates to 72---@code{"The 74 red foxes."} will
2016 appear in the echo area. (Note that you must put spaces after the
2017 word @samp{The} and before the word @samp{red} so they will appear in
2018 the final string. The function @code{number-to-string} converts the
2019 integer that the addition function returns to a string.
2020 @code{number-to-string} is also known as @code{int-to-string}.)
2021
2022 @node Variable Number of Arguments
2023 @subsection Variable Number of Arguments
2024 @cindex Variable number of arguments
2025 @cindex Arguments, variable number of
2026
2027 Some functions, such as @code{concat}, @code{+} or @code{*}, take any
2028 number of arguments. (The @code{*} is the symbol for multiplication.)
2029 This can be seen by evaluating each of the following expressions in
2030 the usual way. What you will see in the echo area is printed in this
2031 text after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as ``evaluates to''.
2032
2033 @need 1250
2034 In the first set, the functions have no arguments:
2035
2036 @smallexample
2037 @group
2038 (+) @result{} 0
2039
2040 (*) @result{} 1
2041 @end group
2042 @end smallexample
2043
2044 @need 1250
2045 In this set, the functions have one argument each:
2046
2047 @smallexample
2048 @group
2049 (+ 3) @result{} 3
2050
2051 (* 3) @result{} 3
2052 @end group
2053 @end smallexample
2054
2055 @need 1250
2056 In this set, the functions have three arguments each:
2057
2058 @smallexample
2059 @group
2060 (+ 3 4 5) @result{} 12
2061
2062 (* 3 4 5) @result{} 60
2063 @end group
2064 @end smallexample
2065
2066 @node Wrong Type of Argument
2067 @subsection Using the Wrong Type Object as an Argument
2068 @cindex Wrong type of argument
2069 @cindex Argument, wrong type of
2070
2071 When a function is passed an argument of the wrong type, the Lisp
2072 interpreter produces an error message. For example, the @code{+}
2073 function expects the values of its arguments to be numbers. As an
2074 experiment we can pass it the quoted symbol @code{hello} instead of a
2075 number. Position the cursor after the following expression and type
2076 @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2077
2078 @smallexample
2079 (+ 2 'hello)
2080 @end smallexample
2081
2082 @noindent
2083 When you do this you will generate an error message. What has happened
2084 is that @code{+} has tried to add the 2 to the value returned by
2085 @code{'hello}, but the value returned by @code{'hello} is the symbol
2086 @code{hello}, not a number. Only numbers can be added. So @code{+}
2087 could not carry out its addition.
2088
2089 @need 1250
2090 You will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer that says:
2091
2092 @noindent
2093 @smallexample
2094 @group
2095 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2096 Debugger entered--Lisp error:
2097 (wrong-type-argument number-or-marker-p hello)
2098 +(2 hello)
2099 eval((+ 2 (quote hello)))
2100 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
2101 eval-last-sexp(nil)
2102 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
2103 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
2104 @end group
2105 @end smallexample
2106
2107 @need 1250
2108 As usual, the error message tries to be helpful and makes sense after you
2109 learn how to read it.@footnote{@code{(quote hello)} is an expansion of
2110 the abbreviation @code{'hello}.}
2111
2112 The first part of the error message is straightforward; it says
2113 @samp{wrong type argument}. Next comes the mysterious jargon word
2114 @w{@samp{number-or-marker-p}}. This word is trying to tell you what
2115 kind of argument the @code{+} expected.
2116
2117 The symbol @code{number-or-marker-p} says that the Lisp interpreter is
2118 trying to determine whether the information presented it (the value of
2119 the argument) is a number or a marker (a special object representing a
2120 buffer position). What it does is test to see whether the @code{+} is
2121 being given numbers to add. It also tests to see whether the
2122 argument is something called a marker, which is a specific feature of
2123 Emacs Lisp. (In Emacs, locations in a buffer are recorded as markers.
2124 When the mark is set with the @kbd{C-@@} or @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} command,
2125 its position is kept as a marker. The mark can be considered a
2126 number---the number of characters the location is from the beginning
2127 of the buffer.) In Emacs Lisp, @code{+} can be used to add the
2128 numeric value of marker positions as numbers.
2129
2130 The @samp{p} of @code{number-or-marker-p} is the embodiment of a
2131 practice started in the early days of Lisp programming. The @samp{p}
2132 stands for ``predicate''. In the jargon used by the early Lisp
2133 researchers, a predicate refers to a function to determine whether some
2134 property is true or false. So the @samp{p} tells us that
2135 @code{number-or-marker-p} is the name of a function that determines
2136 whether it is true or false that the argument supplied is a number or
2137 a marker. Other Lisp symbols that end in @samp{p} include @code{zerop},
2138 a function that tests whether its argument has the value of zero, and
2139 @code{listp}, a function that tests whether its argument is a list.
2140
2141 Finally, the last part of the error message is the symbol @code{hello}.
2142 This is the value of the argument that was passed to @code{+}. If the
2143 addition had been passed the correct type of object, the value passed
2144 would have been a number, such as 37, rather than a symbol like
2145 @code{hello}. But then you would not have got the error message.
2146
2147 @ignore
2148 @need 1250
2149 In GNU Emacs version 20 and before, the echo area displays an error
2150 message that says:
2151
2152 @smallexample
2153 Wrong type argument:@: number-or-marker-p, hello
2154 @end smallexample
2155
2156 This says, in different words, the same as the top line of the
2157 @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.
2158 @end ignore
2159
2160 @node message
2161 @subsection The @code{message} Function
2162 @findex message
2163
2164 Like @code{+}, the @code{message} function takes a variable number of
2165 arguments. It is used to send messages to the user and is so useful
2166 that we will describe it here.
2167
2168 @need 1250
2169 A message is printed in the echo area. For example, you can print a
2170 message in your echo area by evaluating the following list:
2171
2172 @smallexample
2173 (message "This message appears in the echo area!")
2174 @end smallexample
2175
2176 The whole string between double quotation marks is a single argument
2177 and is printed @i{in toto}. (Note that in this example, the message
2178 itself will appear in the echo area within double quotes; that is
2179 because you see the value returned by the @code{message} function. In
2180 most uses of @code{message} in programs that you write, the text will
2181 be printed in the echo area as a side-effect, without the quotes.
2182 @xref{multiply-by-seven in detail, , @code{multiply-by-seven} in
2183 detail}, for an example of this.)
2184
2185 However, if there is a @samp{%s} in the quoted string of characters, the
2186 @code{message} function does not print the @samp{%s} as such, but looks
2187 to the argument that follows the string. It evaluates the second
2188 argument and prints the value at the location in the string where the
2189 @samp{%s} is.
2190
2191 @need 1250
2192 You can see this by positioning the cursor after the following
2193 expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}:
2194
2195 @smallexample
2196 (message "The name of this buffer is: %s." (buffer-name))
2197 @end smallexample
2198
2199 @noindent
2200 In Info, @code{"The name of this buffer is: *info*."} will appear in the
2201 echo area. The function @code{buffer-name} returns the name of the
2202 buffer as a string, which the @code{message} function inserts in place
2203 of @code{%s}.
2204
2205 To print a value as an integer, use @samp{%d} in the same way as
2206 @samp{%s}. For example, to print a message in the echo area that
2207 states the value of the @code{fill-column}, evaluate the following:
2208
2209 @smallexample
2210 (message "The value of fill-column is %d." fill-column)
2211 @end smallexample
2212
2213 @noindent
2214 On my system, when I evaluate this list, @code{"The value of
2215 fill-column is 72."} appears in my echo area@footnote{Actually, you
2216 can use @code{%s} to print a number. It is non-specific. @code{%d}
2217 prints only the part of a number left of a decimal point, and not
2218 anything that is not a number.}.
2219
2220 If there is more than one @samp{%s} in the quoted string, the value of
2221 the first argument following the quoted string is printed at the
2222 location of the first @samp{%s} and the value of the second argument is
2223 printed at the location of the second @samp{%s}, and so on.
2224
2225 @need 1250
2226 For example, if you evaluate the following,
2227
2228 @smallexample
2229 @group
2230 (message "There are %d %s in the office!"
2231 (- fill-column 14) "pink elephants")
2232 @end group
2233 @end smallexample
2234
2235 @noindent
2236 a rather whimsical message will appear in your echo area. On my system
2237 it says, @code{"There are 58 pink elephants in the office!"}.
2238
2239 The expression @code{(- fill-column 14)} is evaluated and the resulting
2240 number is inserted in place of the @samp{%d}; and the string in double
2241 quotes, @code{"pink elephants"}, is treated as a single argument and
2242 inserted in place of the @samp{%s}. (That is to say, a string between
2243 double quotes evaluates to itself, like a number.)
2244
2245 Finally, here is a somewhat complex example that not only illustrates
2246 the computation of a number, but also shows how you can use an
2247 expression within an expression to generate the text that is substituted
2248 for @samp{%s}:
2249
2250 @smallexample
2251 @group
2252 (message "He saw %d %s"
2253 (- fill-column 32)
2254 (concat "red "
2255 (substring
2256 "The quick brown foxes jumped." 16 21)
2257 " leaping."))
2258 @end group
2259 @end smallexample
2260
2261 In this example, @code{message} has three arguments: the string,
2262 @code{"He saw %d %s"}, the expression, @code{(- fill-column 32)}, and
2263 the expression beginning with the function @code{concat}. The value
2264 resulting from the evaluation of @code{(- fill-column 32)} is inserted
2265 in place of the @samp{%d}; and the value returned by the expression
2266 beginning with @code{concat} is inserted in place of the @samp{%s}.
2267
2268 When your fill column is 70 and you evaluate the expression, the
2269 message @code{"He saw 38 red foxes leaping."} appears in your echo
2270 area.
2271
2272 @node set & setq
2273 @section Setting the Value of a Variable
2274 @cindex Variable, setting value
2275 @cindex Setting value of variable
2276
2277 @cindex @samp{bind} defined
2278 There are several ways by which a variable can be given a value. One of
2279 the ways is to use either the function @code{set} or the function
2280 @code{setq}. Another way is to use @code{let} (@pxref{let}). (The
2281 jargon for this process is to @dfn{bind} a variable to a value.)
2282
2283 The following sections not only describe how @code{set} and @code{setq}
2284 work but also illustrate how arguments are passed.
2285
2286 @menu
2287 * Using set:: Setting values.
2288 * Using setq:: Setting a quoted value.
2289 * Counting:: Using @code{setq} to count.
2290 @end menu
2291
2292 @node Using set
2293 @subsection Using @code{set}
2294 @findex set
2295
2296 To set the value of the symbol @code{flowers} to the list @code{'(rose
2297 violet daisy buttercup)}, evaluate the following expression by
2298 positioning the cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2299
2300 @smallexample
2301 (set 'flowers '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
2302 @end smallexample
2303
2304 @noindent
2305 The list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in the echo
2306 area. This is what is @emph{returned} by the @code{set} function. As a
2307 side effect, the symbol @code{flowers} is bound to the list; that is,
2308 the symbol @code{flowers}, which can be viewed as a variable, is given
2309 the list as its value. (This process, by the way, illustrates how a
2310 side effect to the Lisp interpreter, setting the value, can be the
2311 primary effect that we humans are interested in. This is because every
2312 Lisp function must return a value if it does not get an error, but it
2313 will only have a side effect if it is designed to have one.)
2314
2315 After evaluating the @code{set} expression, you can evaluate the symbol
2316 @code{flowers} and it will return the value you just set. Here is the
2317 symbol. Place your cursor after it and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2318
2319 @smallexample
2320 flowers
2321 @end smallexample
2322
2323 @noindent
2324 When you evaluate @code{flowers}, the list
2325 @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} appears in the echo area.
2326
2327 Incidentally, if you evaluate @code{'flowers}, the variable with a quote
2328 in front of it, what you will see in the echo area is the symbol itself,
2329 @code{flowers}. Here is the quoted symbol, so you can try this:
2330
2331 @smallexample
2332 'flowers
2333 @end smallexample
2334
2335 Note also, that when you use @code{set}, you need to quote both
2336 arguments to @code{set}, unless you want them evaluated. Since we do
2337 not want either argument evaluated, neither the variable
2338 @code{flowers} nor the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)}, both
2339 are quoted. (When you use @code{set} without quoting its first
2340 argument, the first argument is evaluated before anything else is
2341 done. If you did this and @code{flowers} did not have a value
2342 already, you would get an error message that the @samp{Symbol's value
2343 as variable is void}; on the other hand, if @code{flowers} did return
2344 a value after it was evaluated, the @code{set} would attempt to set
2345 the value that was returned. There are situations where this is the
2346 right thing for the function to do; but such situations are rare.)
2347
2348 @node Using setq
2349 @subsection Using @code{setq}
2350 @findex setq
2351
2352 As a practical matter, you almost always quote the first argument to
2353 @code{set}. The combination of @code{set} and a quoted first argument
2354 is so common that it has its own name: the special form @code{setq}.
2355 This special form is just like @code{set} except that the first argument
2356 is quoted automatically, so you don't need to type the quote mark
2357 yourself. Also, as an added convenience, @code{setq} permits you to set
2358 several different variables to different values, all in one expression.
2359
2360 To set the value of the variable @code{carnivores} to the list
2361 @code{'(lion tiger leopard)} using @code{setq}, the following expression
2362 is used:
2363
2364 @smallexample
2365 (setq carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2366 @end smallexample
2367
2368 @noindent
2369 This is exactly the same as using @code{set} except the first argument
2370 is automatically quoted by @code{setq}. (The @samp{q} in @code{setq}
2371 means @code{quote}.)
2372
2373 @need 1250
2374 With @code{set}, the expression would look like this:
2375
2376 @smallexample
2377 (set 'carnivores '(lion tiger leopard))
2378 @end smallexample
2379
2380 Also, @code{setq} can be used to assign different values to
2381 different variables. The first argument is bound to the value
2382 of the second argument, the third argument is bound to the value of the
2383 fourth argument, and so on. For example, you could use the following to
2384 assign a list of trees to the symbol @code{trees} and a list of herbivores
2385 to the symbol @code{herbivores}:
2386
2387 @smallexample
2388 @group
2389 (setq trees '(pine fir oak maple)
2390 herbivores '(gazelle antelope zebra))
2391 @end group
2392 @end smallexample
2393
2394 @noindent
2395 (The expression could just as well have been on one line, but it might
2396 not have fit on a page; and humans find it easier to read nicely
2397 formatted lists.)
2398
2399 Although I have been using the term ``assign'', there is another way of
2400 thinking about the workings of @code{set} and @code{setq}; and that is to
2401 say that @code{set} and @code{setq} make the symbol @emph{point} to the
2402 list. This latter way of thinking is very common and in forthcoming
2403 chapters we shall come upon at least one symbol that has ``pointer'' as
2404 part of its name. The name is chosen because the symbol has a value,
2405 specifically a list, attached to it; or, expressed another way,
2406 the symbol is set to ``point'' to the list.
2407
2408 @node Counting
2409 @subsection Counting
2410 @cindex Counting
2411
2412 Here is an example that shows how to use @code{setq} in a counter. You
2413 might use this to count how many times a part of your program repeats
2414 itself. First set a variable to zero; then add one to the number each
2415 time the program repeats itself. To do this, you need a variable that
2416 serves as a counter, and two expressions: an initial @code{setq}
2417 expression that sets the counter variable to zero; and a second
2418 @code{setq} expression that increments the counter each time it is
2419 evaluated.
2420
2421 @smallexample
2422 @group
2423 (setq counter 0) ; @r{Let's call this the initializer.}
2424
2425 (setq counter (+ counter 1)) ; @r{This is the incrementer.}
2426
2427 counter ; @r{This is the counter.}
2428 @end group
2429 @end smallexample
2430
2431 @noindent
2432 (The text following the @samp{;} are comments. @xref{Change a
2433 defun, , Change a Function Definition}.)
2434
2435 If you evaluate the first of these expressions, the initializer,
2436 @code{(setq counter 0)}, and then evaluate the third expression,
2437 @code{counter}, the number @code{0} will appear in the echo area. If
2438 you then evaluate the second expression, the incrementer, @code{(setq
2439 counter (+ counter 1))}, the counter will get the value 1. So if you
2440 again evaluate @code{counter}, the number @code{1} will appear in the
2441 echo area. Each time you evaluate the second expression, the value of
2442 the counter will be incremented.
2443
2444 When you evaluate the incrementer, @code{(setq counter (+ counter 1))},
2445 the Lisp interpreter first evaluates the innermost list; this is the
2446 addition. In order to evaluate this list, it must evaluate the variable
2447 @code{counter} and the number @code{1}. When it evaluates the variable
2448 @code{counter}, it receives its current value. It passes this value and
2449 the number @code{1} to the @code{+} which adds them together. The sum
2450 is then returned as the value of the inner list and passed to the
2451 @code{setq} which sets the variable @code{counter} to this new value.
2452 Thus, the value of the variable, @code{counter}, is changed.
2453
2454 @node Summary
2455 @section Summary
2456
2457 Learning Lisp is like climbing a hill in which the first part is the
2458 steepest. You have now climbed the most difficult part; what remains
2459 becomes easier as you progress onwards.
2460
2461 @need 1000
2462 In summary,
2463
2464 @itemize @bullet
2465
2466 @item
2467 Lisp programs are made up of expressions, which are lists or single atoms.
2468
2469 @item
2470 Lists are made up of zero or more atoms or inner lists, separated by whitespace and
2471 surrounded by parentheses. A list can be empty.
2472
2473 @item
2474 Atoms are multi-character symbols, like @code{forward-paragraph}, single
2475 character symbols like @code{+}, strings of characters between double
2476 quotation marks, or numbers.
2477
2478 @item
2479 A number evaluates to itself.
2480
2481 @item
2482 A string between double quotes also evaluates to itself.
2483
2484 @item
2485 When you evaluate a symbol by itself, its value is returned.
2486
2487 @item
2488 When you evaluate a list, the Lisp interpreter looks at the first symbol
2489 in the list and then at the function definition bound to that symbol.
2490 Then the instructions in the function definition are carried out.
2491
2492 @item
2493 A single quotation mark,
2494 @ifinfo
2495 '
2496 @end ifinfo
2497 @ifnotinfo
2498 @code{'}
2499 @end ifnotinfo
2500 , tells the Lisp interpreter that it should
2501 return the following expression as written, and not evaluate it as it
2502 would if the quote were not there.
2503
2504 @item
2505 Arguments are the information passed to a function. The arguments to a
2506 function are computed by evaluating the rest of the elements of the list
2507 of which the function is the first element.
2508
2509 @item
2510 A function always returns a value when it is evaluated (unless it gets
2511 an error); in addition, it may also carry out some action called a
2512 ``side effect''. In many cases, a function's primary purpose is to
2513 create a side effect.
2514 @end itemize
2515
2516 @node Error Message Exercises
2517 @section Exercises
2518
2519 A few simple exercises:
2520
2521 @itemize @bullet
2522 @item
2523 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2524 not within parentheses.
2525
2526 @item
2527 Generate an error message by evaluating an appropriate symbol that is
2528 between parentheses.
2529
2530 @item
2531 Create a counter that increments by two rather than one.
2532
2533 @item
2534 Write an expression that prints a message in the echo area when
2535 evaluated.
2536 @end itemize
2537
2538 @node Practicing Evaluation
2539 @chapter Practicing Evaluation
2540 @cindex Practicing evaluation
2541 @cindex Evaluation practice
2542
2543 Before learning how to write a function definition in Emacs Lisp, it is
2544 useful to spend a little time evaluating various expressions that have
2545 already been written. These expressions will be lists with the
2546 functions as their first (and often only) element. Since some of the
2547 functions associated with buffers are both simple and interesting, we
2548 will start with those. In this section, we will evaluate a few of
2549 these. In another section, we will study the code of several other
2550 buffer-related functions, to see how they were written.
2551
2552 @menu
2553 * How to Evaluate:: Typing editing commands or @kbd{C-x C-e}
2554 causes evaluation.
2555 * Buffer Names:: Buffers and files are different.
2556 * Getting Buffers:: Getting a buffer itself, not merely its name.
2557 * Switching Buffers:: How to change to another buffer.
2558 * Buffer Size & Locations:: Where point is located and the size of
2559 the buffer.
2560 * Evaluation Exercise::
2561 @end menu
2562
2563 @ifnottex
2564 @node How to Evaluate
2565 @unnumberedsec How to Evaluate
2566 @end ifnottex
2567
2568 @i{Whenever you give an editing command} to Emacs Lisp, such as the
2569 command to move the cursor or to scroll the screen, @i{you are evaluating
2570 an expression,} the first element of which is a function. @i{This is
2571 how Emacs works.}
2572
2573 @cindex @samp{interactive function} defined
2574 @cindex @samp{command} defined
2575 When you type keys, you cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate an
2576 expression and that is how you get your results. Even typing plain text
2577 involves evaluating an Emacs Lisp function, in this case, one that uses
2578 @code{self-insert-command}, which simply inserts the character you
2579 typed. The functions you evaluate by typing keystrokes are called
2580 @dfn{interactive} functions, or @dfn{commands}; how you make a function
2581 interactive will be illustrated in the chapter on how to write function
2582 definitions. @xref{Interactive, , Making a Function Interactive}.
2583
2584 In addition to typing keyboard commands, we have seen a second way to
2585 evaluate an expression: by positioning the cursor after a list and
2586 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. This is what we will do in the rest of this
2587 section. There are other ways to evaluate an expression as well; these
2588 will be described as we come to them.
2589
2590 Besides being used for practicing evaluation, the functions shown in the
2591 next few sections are important in their own right. A study of these
2592 functions makes clear the distinction between buffers and files, how to
2593 switch to a buffer, and how to determine a location within it.
2594
2595 @node Buffer Names
2596 @section Buffer Names
2597 @findex buffer-name
2598 @findex buffer-file-name
2599
2600 The two functions, @code{buffer-name} and @code{buffer-file-name}, show
2601 the difference between a file and a buffer. When you evaluate the
2602 following expression, @code{(buffer-name)}, the name of the buffer
2603 appears in the echo area. When you evaluate @code{(buffer-file-name)},
2604 the name of the file to which the buffer refers appears in the echo
2605 area. Usually, the name returned by @code{(buffer-name)} is the same as
2606 the name of the file to which it refers, and the name returned by
2607 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is the full path-name of the file.
2608
2609 A file and a buffer are two different entities. A file is information
2610 recorded permanently in the computer (unless you delete it). A buffer,
2611 on the other hand, is information inside of Emacs that will vanish at
2612 the end of the editing session (or when you kill the buffer). Usually,
2613 a buffer contains information that you have copied from a file; we say
2614 the buffer is @dfn{visiting} that file. This copy is what you work on
2615 and modify. Changes to the buffer do not change the file, until you
2616 save the buffer. When you save the buffer, the buffer is copied to the file
2617 and is thus saved permanently.
2618
2619 @need 1250
2620 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
2621 each of the following expressions by positioning the cursor after it and
2622 typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2623
2624 @example
2625 @group
2626 (buffer-name)
2627
2628 (buffer-file-name)
2629 @end group
2630 @end example
2631
2632 @noindent
2633 When I do this in Info, the value returned by evaluating
2634 @code{(buffer-name)} is @file{"*info*"}, and the value returned by
2635 evaluating @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}.
2636
2637 On the other hand, while I am writing this document, the value
2638 returned by evaluating @code{(buffer-name)} is
2639 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}, and the value returned by evaluating
2640 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is
2641 @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2642
2643 @cindex @code{nil}, history of word
2644 The former is the name of the buffer and the latter is the name of the
2645 file. In Info, the buffer name is @file{"*info*"}. Info does not
2646 point to any file, so the result of evaluating
2647 @code{(buffer-file-name)} is @file{nil}. The symbol @code{nil} is
2648 from the Latin word for ``nothing''; in this case, it means that the
2649 buffer is not associated with any file. (In Lisp, @code{nil} is also
2650 used to mean ``false'' and is a synonym for the empty list, @code{()}.)
2651
2652 When I am writing, the name of my buffer is
2653 @file{"introduction.texinfo"}. The name of the file to which it
2654 points is @file{"/gnu/work/intro/introduction.texinfo"}.
2655
2656 (In the expressions, the parentheses tell the Lisp interpreter to
2657 treat @w{@code{buffer-name}} and @w{@code{buffer-file-name}} as
2658 functions; without the parentheses, the interpreter would attempt to
2659 evaluate the symbols as variables. @xref{Variables}.)
2660
2661 In spite of the distinction between files and buffers, you will often
2662 find that people refer to a file when they mean a buffer and vice versa.
2663 Indeed, most people say, ``I am editing a file,'' rather than saying,
2664 ``I am editing a buffer which I will soon save to a file.'' It is
2665 almost always clear from context what people mean. When dealing with
2666 computer programs, however, it is important to keep the distinction in mind,
2667 since the computer is not as smart as a person.
2668
2669 @cindex Buffer, history of word
2670 The word ``buffer'', by the way, comes from the meaning of the word as a
2671 cushion that deadens the force of a collision. In early computers, a
2672 buffer cushioned the interaction between files and the computer's
2673 central processing unit. The drums or tapes that held a file and the
2674 central processing unit were pieces of equipment that were very
2675 different from each other, working at their own speeds, in spurts. The
2676 buffer made it possible for them to work together effectively.
2677 Eventually, the buffer grew from being an intermediary, a temporary
2678 holding place, to being the place where work is done. This
2679 transformation is rather like that of a small seaport that grew into a
2680 great city: once it was merely the place where cargo was warehoused
2681 temporarily before being loaded onto ships; then it became a business
2682 and cultural center in its own right.
2683
2684 Not all buffers are associated with files. For example, a
2685 @file{*scratch*} buffer does not visit any file. Similarly, a
2686 @file{*Help*} buffer is not associated with any file.
2687
2688 In the old days, when you lacked a @file{~/.emacs} file and started an
2689 Emacs session by typing the command @code{emacs} alone, without naming
2690 any files, Emacs started with the @file{*scratch*} buffer visible.
2691 Nowadays, you will see a splash screen. You can follow one of the
2692 commands suggested on the splash screen, visit a file, or press the
2693 spacebar to reach the @file{*scratch*} buffer.
2694
2695 If you switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer, type
2696 @code{(buffer-name)}, position the cursor after it, and then type
2697 @kbd{C-x C-e} to evaluate the expression. The name @code{"*scratch*"}
2698 will be returned and will appear in the echo area. @code{"*scratch*"}
2699 is the name of the buffer. When you type @code{(buffer-file-name)} in
2700 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate that, @code{nil} will appear
2701 in the echo area, just as it does when you evaluate
2702 @code{(buffer-file-name)} in Info.
2703
2704 Incidentally, if you are in the @file{*scratch*} buffer and want the
2705 value returned by an expression to appear in the @file{*scratch*}
2706 buffer itself rather than in the echo area, type @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
2707 instead of @kbd{C-x C-e}. This causes the value returned to appear
2708 after the expression. The buffer will look like this:
2709
2710 @smallexample
2711 (buffer-name)"*scratch*"
2712 @end smallexample
2713
2714 @noindent
2715 You cannot do this in Info since Info is read-only and it will not allow
2716 you to change the contents of the buffer. But you can do this in any
2717 buffer you can edit; and when you write code or documentation (such as
2718 this book), this feature is very useful.
2719
2720 @node Getting Buffers
2721 @section Getting Buffers
2722 @findex current-buffer
2723 @findex other-buffer
2724 @cindex Getting a buffer
2725
2726 The @code{buffer-name} function returns the @emph{name} of the buffer;
2727 to get the buffer @emph{itself}, a different function is needed: the
2728 @code{current-buffer} function. If you use this function in code, what
2729 you get is the buffer itself.
2730
2731 A name and the object or entity to which the name refers are different
2732 from each other. You are not your name. You are a person to whom
2733 others refer by name. If you ask to speak to George and someone hands you
2734 a card with the letters @samp{G}, @samp{e}, @samp{o}, @samp{r},
2735 @samp{g}, and @samp{e} written on it, you might be amused, but you would
2736 not be satisfied. You do not want to speak to the name, but to the
2737 person to whom the name refers. A buffer is similar: the name of the
2738 scratch buffer is @file{*scratch*}, but the name is not the buffer. To
2739 get a buffer itself, you need to use a function such as
2740 @code{current-buffer}.
2741
2742 However, there is a slight complication: if you evaluate
2743 @code{current-buffer} in an expression on its own, as we will do here,
2744 what you see is a printed representation of the name of the buffer
2745 without the contents of the buffer. Emacs works this way for two
2746 reasons: the buffer may be thousands of lines long---too long to be
2747 conveniently displayed; and, another buffer may have the same contents
2748 but a different name, and it is important to distinguish between them.
2749
2750 @need 800
2751 Here is an expression containing the function:
2752
2753 @smallexample
2754 (current-buffer)
2755 @end smallexample
2756
2757 @noindent
2758 If you evaluate this expression in Info in Emacs in the usual way,
2759 @file{#<buffer *info*>} will appear in the echo area. The special
2760 format indicates that the buffer itself is being returned, rather than
2761 just its name.
2762
2763 Incidentally, while you can type a number or symbol into a program, you
2764 cannot do that with the printed representation of a buffer: the only way
2765 to get a buffer itself is with a function such as @code{current-buffer}.
2766
2767 A related function is @code{other-buffer}. This returns the most
2768 recently selected buffer other than the one you are in currently, not
2769 a printed representation of its name. If you have recently switched
2770 back and forth from the @file{*scratch*} buffer, @code{other-buffer}
2771 will return that buffer.
2772
2773 @need 800
2774 You can see this by evaluating the expression:
2775
2776 @smallexample
2777 (other-buffer)
2778 @end smallexample
2779
2780 @noindent
2781 You should see @file{#<buffer *scratch*>} appear in the echo area, or
2782 the name of whatever other buffer you switched back from most
2783 recently@footnote{Actually, by default, if the buffer from which you
2784 just switched is visible to you in another window, @code{other-buffer}
2785 will choose the most recent buffer that you cannot see; this is a
2786 subtlety that I often forget.}.
2787
2788 @node Switching Buffers
2789 @section Switching Buffers
2790 @findex switch-to-buffer
2791 @findex set-buffer
2792 @cindex Switching to a buffer
2793
2794 The @code{other-buffer} function actually provides a buffer when it is
2795 used as an argument to a function that requires one. We can see this
2796 by using @code{other-buffer} and @code{switch-to-buffer} to switch to a
2797 different buffer.
2798
2799 But first, a brief introduction to the @code{switch-to-buffer}
2800 function. When you switched back and forth from Info to the
2801 @file{*scratch*} buffer to evaluate @code{(buffer-name)}, you most
2802 likely typed @kbd{C-x b} and then typed @file{*scratch*}@footnote{Or
2803 rather, to save typing, you probably only typed @kbd{RET} if the
2804 default buffer was @file{*scratch*}, or if it was different, then you
2805 typed just part of the name, such as @code{*sc}, pressed your
2806 @kbd{TAB} key to cause it to expand to the full name, and then typed
2807 @kbd{RET}.} when prompted in the minibuffer for the name of
2808 the buffer to which you wanted to switch. The keystrokes, @kbd{C-x
2809 b}, cause the Lisp interpreter to evaluate the interactive function
2810 @code{switch-to-buffer}. As we said before, this is how Emacs works:
2811 different keystrokes call or run different functions. For example,
2812 @kbd{C-f} calls @code{forward-char}, @kbd{M-e} calls
2813 @code{forward-sentence}, and so on.
2814
2815 By writing @code{switch-to-buffer} in an expression, and giving it a
2816 buffer to switch to, we can switch buffers just the way @kbd{C-x b}
2817 does:
2818
2819 @smallexample
2820 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer))
2821 @end smallexample
2822
2823 @noindent
2824 The symbol @code{switch-to-buffer} is the first element of the list,
2825 so the Lisp interpreter will treat it as a function and carry out the
2826 instructions that are attached to it. But before doing that, the
2827 interpreter will note that @code{other-buffer} is inside parentheses
2828 and work on that symbol first. @code{other-buffer} is the first (and
2829 in this case, the only) element of this list, so the Lisp interpreter
2830 calls or runs the function. It returns another buffer. Next, the
2831 interpreter runs @code{switch-to-buffer}, passing to it, as an
2832 argument, the other buffer, which is what Emacs will switch to. If
2833 you are reading this in Info, try this now. Evaluate the expression.
2834 (To get back, type @kbd{C-x b @key{RET}}.)@footnote{Remember, this
2835 expression will move you to your most recent other buffer that you
2836 cannot see. If you really want to go to your most recently selected
2837 buffer, even if you can still see it, you need to evaluate the
2838 following more complex expression:
2839
2840 @smallexample
2841 (switch-to-buffer (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
2842 @end smallexample
2843
2844 @c noindent
2845 In this case, the first argument to @code{other-buffer} tells it which
2846 buffer to skip---the current one---and the second argument tells
2847 @code{other-buffer} it is OK to switch to a visible buffer. In
2848 regular use, @code{switch-to-buffer} takes you to a buffer not visible
2849 in windows since you would most likely use @kbd{C-x o}
2850 (@code{other-window}) to go to another visible buffer.}
2851
2852 In the programming examples in later sections of this document, you will
2853 see the function @code{set-buffer} more often than
2854 @code{switch-to-buffer}. This is because of a difference between
2855 computer programs and humans: humans have eyes and expect to see the
2856 buffer on which they are working on their computer terminals. This is
2857 so obvious, it almost goes without saying. However, programs do not
2858 have eyes. When a computer program works on a buffer, that buffer does
2859 not need to be visible on the screen.
2860
2861 @code{switch-to-buffer} is designed for humans and does two different
2862 things: it switches the buffer to which Emacs's attention is directed; and
2863 it switches the buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer.
2864 @code{set-buffer}, on the other hand, does only one thing: it switches
2865 the attention of the computer program to a different buffer. The buffer
2866 on the screen remains unchanged (of course, normally nothing happens
2867 there until the command finishes running).
2868
2869 @cindex @samp{call} defined
2870 Also, we have just introduced another jargon term, the word @dfn{call}.
2871 When you evaluate a list in which the first symbol is a function, you
2872 are calling that function. The use of the term comes from the notion of
2873 the function as an entity that can do something for you if you ``call''
2874 it---just as a plumber is an entity who can fix a leak if you call him
2875 or her.
2876
2877 @node Buffer Size & Locations
2878 @section Buffer Size and the Location of Point
2879 @cindex Size of buffer
2880 @cindex Buffer size
2881 @cindex Point location
2882 @cindex Location of point
2883
2884 Finally, let's look at several rather simple functions,
2885 @code{buffer-size}, @code{point}, @code{point-min}, and
2886 @code{point-max}. These give information about the size of a buffer and
2887 the location of point within it.
2888
2889 The function @code{buffer-size} tells you the size of the current
2890 buffer; that is, the function returns a count of the number of
2891 characters in the buffer.
2892
2893 @smallexample
2894 (buffer-size)
2895 @end smallexample
2896
2897 @noindent
2898 You can evaluate this in the usual way, by positioning the
2899 cursor after the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}.
2900
2901 @cindex @samp{point} defined
2902 In Emacs, the current position of the cursor is called @dfn{point}.
2903 The expression @code{(point)} returns a number that tells you where the
2904 cursor is located as a count of the number of characters from the
2905 beginning of the buffer up to point.
2906
2907 @need 1250
2908 You can see the character count for point in this buffer by evaluating
2909 the following expression in the usual way:
2910
2911 @smallexample
2912 (point)
2913 @end smallexample
2914
2915 @noindent
2916 As I write this, the value of point is 65724. The @code{point}
2917 function is frequently used in some of the examples later in this
2918 book.
2919
2920 @need 1250
2921 The value of point depends, of course, on its location within the
2922 buffer. If you evaluate point in this spot, the number will be larger:
2923
2924 @smallexample
2925 (point)
2926 @end smallexample
2927
2928 @noindent
2929 For me, the value of point in this location is 66043, which means that
2930 there are 319 characters (including spaces) between the two
2931 expressions. (Doubtless, you will see different numbers, since I will
2932 have edited this since I first evaluated point.)
2933
2934 @cindex @samp{narrowing} defined
2935 The function @code{point-min} is somewhat similar to @code{point}, but
2936 it returns the value of the minimum permissible value of point in the
2937 current buffer. This is the number 1 unless @dfn{narrowing} is in
2938 effect. (Narrowing is a mechanism whereby you can restrict yourself,
2939 or a program, to operations on just a part of a buffer.
2940 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}.) Likewise, the
2941 function @code{point-max} returns the value of the maximum permissible
2942 value of point in the current buffer.
2943
2944 @node Evaluation Exercise
2945 @section Exercise
2946
2947 Find a file with which you are working and move towards its middle.
2948 Find its buffer name, file name, length, and your position in the file.
2949
2950 @node Writing Defuns
2951 @chapter How To Write Function Definitions
2952 @cindex Definition writing
2953 @cindex Function definition writing
2954 @cindex Writing a function definition
2955
2956 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates a list, it looks to see whether the
2957 first symbol on the list has a function definition attached to it; or,
2958 put another way, whether the symbol points to a function definition. If
2959 it does, the computer carries out the instructions in the definition. A
2960 symbol that has a function definition is called, simply, a function
2961 (although, properly speaking, the definition is the function and the
2962 symbol refers to it.)
2963
2964 @menu
2965 * Primitive Functions::
2966 * defun:: The @code{defun} macro.
2967 * Install:: Install a function definition.
2968 * Interactive:: Making a function interactive.
2969 * Interactive Options:: Different options for @code{interactive}.
2970 * Permanent Installation:: Installing code permanently.
2971 * let:: Creating and initializing local variables.
2972 * if:: What if?
2973 * else:: If--then--else expressions.
2974 * Truth & Falsehood:: What Lisp considers false and true.
2975 * save-excursion:: Keeping track of point and buffer.
2976 * Review::
2977 * defun Exercises::
2978 @end menu
2979
2980 @ifnottex
2981 @node Primitive Functions
2982 @unnumberedsec An Aside about Primitive Functions
2983 @end ifnottex
2984 @cindex Primitive functions
2985 @cindex Functions, primitive
2986
2987 @cindex C language primitives
2988 @cindex Primitives written in C
2989 All functions are defined in terms of other functions, except for a few
2990 @dfn{primitive} functions that are written in the C programming
2991 language. When you write functions' definitions, you will write them in
2992 Emacs Lisp and use other functions as your building blocks. Some of the
2993 functions you will use will themselves be written in Emacs Lisp (perhaps
2994 by you) and some will be primitives written in C@. The primitive
2995 functions are used exactly like those written in Emacs Lisp and behave
2996 like them. They are written in C so we can easily run GNU Emacs on any
2997 computer that has sufficient power and can run C.
2998
2999 Let me re-emphasize this: when you write code in Emacs Lisp, you do not
3000 distinguish between the use of functions written in C and the use of
3001 functions written in Emacs Lisp. The difference is irrelevant. I
3002 mention the distinction only because it is interesting to know. Indeed,
3003 unless you investigate, you won't know whether an already-written
3004 function is written in Emacs Lisp or C.
3005
3006 @node defun
3007 @section The @code{defun} Macro
3008 @findex defun
3009
3010 @cindex @samp{function definition} defined
3011 In Lisp, a symbol such as @code{mark-whole-buffer} has code attached to
3012 it that tells the computer what to do when the function is called.
3013 This code is called the @dfn{function definition} and is created by
3014 evaluating a Lisp expression that starts with the symbol @code{defun}
3015 (which is an abbreviation for @emph{define function}).
3016
3017 In subsequent sections, we will look at function definitions from the
3018 Emacs source code, such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}. In this section,
3019 we will describe a simple function definition so you can see how it
3020 looks. This function definition uses arithmetic because it makes for a
3021 simple example. Some people dislike examples using arithmetic; however,
3022 if you are such a person, do not despair. Hardly any of the code we
3023 will study in the remainder of this introduction involves arithmetic or
3024 mathematics. The examples mostly involve text in one way or another.
3025
3026 A function definition has up to five parts following the word
3027 @code{defun}:
3028
3029 @enumerate
3030 @item
3031 The name of the symbol to which the function definition should be
3032 attached.
3033
3034 @item
3035 A list of the arguments that will be passed to the function. If no
3036 arguments will be passed to the function, this is an empty list,
3037 @code{()}.
3038
3039 @item
3040 Documentation describing the function. (Technically optional, but
3041 strongly recommended.)
3042
3043 @item
3044 Optionally, an expression to make the function interactive so you can
3045 use it by typing @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by
3046 typing an appropriate key or keychord.
3047
3048 @cindex @samp{body} defined
3049 @item
3050 The code that instructs the computer what to do: the @dfn{body} of the
3051 function definition.
3052 @end enumerate
3053
3054 It is helpful to think of the five parts of a function definition as
3055 being organized in a template, with slots for each part:
3056
3057 @smallexample
3058 @group
3059 (defun @var{function-name} (@var{arguments}@dots{})
3060 "@var{optional-documentation}@dots{}"
3061 (interactive @var{argument-passing-info}) ; @r{optional}
3062 @var{body}@dots{})
3063 @end group
3064 @end smallexample
3065
3066 As an example, here is the code for a function that multiplies its
3067 argument by 7. (This example is not interactive. @xref{Interactive,
3068 , Making a Function Interactive}, for that information.)
3069
3070 @smallexample
3071 @group
3072 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3073 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3074 (* 7 number))
3075 @end group
3076 @end smallexample
3077
3078 This definition begins with a parenthesis and the symbol @code{defun},
3079 followed by the name of the function.
3080
3081 @cindex @samp{argument list} defined
3082 The name of the function is followed by a list that contains the
3083 arguments that will be passed to the function. This list is called
3084 the @dfn{argument list}. In this example, the list has only one
3085 element, the symbol, @code{number}. When the function is used, the
3086 symbol will be bound to the value that is used as the argument to the
3087 function.
3088
3089 Instead of choosing the word @code{number} for the name of the argument,
3090 I could have picked any other name. For example, I could have chosen
3091 the word @code{multiplicand}. I picked the word ``number'' because it
3092 tells what kind of value is intended for this slot; but I could just as
3093 well have chosen the word ``multiplicand'' to indicate the role that the
3094 value placed in this slot will play in the workings of the function. I
3095 could have called it @code{foogle}, but that would have been a bad
3096 choice because it would not tell humans what it means. The choice of
3097 name is up to the programmer and should be chosen to make the meaning of
3098 the function clear.
3099
3100 Indeed, you can choose any name you wish for a symbol in an argument
3101 list, even the name of a symbol used in some other function: the name
3102 you use in an argument list is private to that particular definition.
3103 In that definition, the name refers to a different entity than any use
3104 of the same name outside the function definition. Suppose you have a
3105 nick-name ``Shorty'' in your family; when your family members refer to
3106 ``Shorty'', they mean you. But outside your family, in a movie, for
3107 example, the name ``Shorty'' refers to someone else. Because a name in an
3108 argument list is private to the function definition, you can change the
3109 value of such a symbol inside the body of a function without changing
3110 its value outside the function. The effect is similar to that produced
3111 by a @code{let} expression. (@xref{let, , @code{let}}.)
3112
3113 @ignore
3114 Note also that we discuss the word ``number'' in two different ways: as a
3115 symbol that appears in the code, and as the name of something that will
3116 be replaced by a something else during the evaluation of the function.
3117 In the first case, @code{number} is a symbol, not a number; it happens
3118 that within the function, it is a variable who value is the number in
3119 question, but our primary interest in it is as a symbol. On the other
3120 hand, when we are talking about the function, our interest is that we
3121 will substitute a number for the word @var{number}. To keep this
3122 distinction clear, we use different typography for the two
3123 circumstances. When we talk about this function, or about how it works,
3124 we refer to this number by writing @var{number}. In the function
3125 itself, we refer to it by writing @code{number}.
3126 @end ignore
3127
3128 The argument list is followed by the documentation string that
3129 describes the function. This is what you see when you type
3130 @w{@kbd{C-h f}} and the name of a function. Incidentally, when you
3131 write a documentation string like this, you should make the first line
3132 a complete sentence since some commands, such as @code{apropos}, print
3133 only the first line of a multi-line documentation string. Also, you
3134 should not indent the second line of a documentation string, if you
3135 have one, because that looks odd when you use @kbd{C-h f}
3136 (@code{describe-function}). The documentation string is optional, but
3137 it is so useful, it should be included in almost every function you
3138 write.
3139
3140 @findex * @r{(multiplication)}
3141 The third line of the example consists of the body of the function
3142 definition. (Most functions' definitions, of course, are longer than
3143 this.) In this function, the body is the list, @code{(* 7 number)}, which
3144 says to multiply the value of @var{number} by 7. (In Emacs Lisp,
3145 @code{*} is the function for multiplication, just as @code{+} is the
3146 function for addition.)
3147
3148 When you use the @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the argument
3149 @code{number} evaluates to the actual number you want used. Here is an
3150 example that shows how @code{multiply-by-seven} is used; but don't try
3151 to evaluate this yet!
3152
3153 @smallexample
3154 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3155 @end smallexample
3156
3157 @noindent
3158 The symbol @code{number}, specified in the function definition in the
3159 next section, is given or ``bound to'' the value 3 in the actual use of
3160 the function. Note that although @code{number} was inside parentheses
3161 in the function definition, the argument passed to the
3162 @code{multiply-by-seven} function is not in parentheses. The
3163 parentheses are written in the function definition so the computer can
3164 figure out where the argument list ends and the rest of the function
3165 definition begins.
3166
3167 If you evaluate this example, you are likely to get an error message.
3168 (Go ahead, try it!) This is because we have written the function
3169 definition, but not yet told the computer about the definition---we have
3170 not yet installed (or ``loaded'') the function definition in Emacs.
3171 Installing a function is the process that tells the Lisp interpreter the
3172 definition of the function. Installation is described in the next
3173 section.
3174
3175 @node Install
3176 @section Install a Function Definition
3177 @cindex Install a Function Definition
3178 @cindex Definition installation
3179 @cindex Function definition installation
3180
3181 If you are reading this inside of Info in Emacs, you can try out the
3182 @code{multiply-by-seven} function by first evaluating the function
3183 definition and then evaluating @code{(multiply-by-seven 3)}. A copy of
3184 the function definition follows. Place the cursor after the last
3185 parenthesis of the function definition and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you
3186 do this, @code{multiply-by-seven} will appear in the echo area. (What
3187 this means is that when a function definition is evaluated, the value it
3188 returns is the name of the defined function.) At the same time, this
3189 action installs the function definition.
3190
3191 @smallexample
3192 @group
3193 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
3194 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3195 (* 7 number))
3196 @end group
3197 @end smallexample
3198
3199 @noindent
3200 By evaluating this @code{defun}, you have just installed
3201 @code{multiply-by-seven} in Emacs. The function is now just as much a
3202 part of Emacs as @code{forward-word} or any other editing function you
3203 use. (@code{multiply-by-seven} will stay installed until you quit
3204 Emacs. To reload code automatically whenever you start Emacs, see
3205 @ref{Permanent Installation, , Installing Code Permanently}.)
3206
3207 @menu
3208 * Effect of installation::
3209 * Change a defun:: How to change a function definition.
3210 @end menu
3211
3212 @ifnottex
3213 @node Effect of installation
3214 @unnumberedsubsec The effect of installation
3215 @end ifnottex
3216
3217 You can see the effect of installing @code{multiply-by-seven} by
3218 evaluating the following sample. Place the cursor after the following
3219 expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}. The number 21 will appear in the
3220 echo area.
3221
3222 @smallexample
3223 (multiply-by-seven 3)
3224 @end smallexample
3225
3226 If you wish, you can read the documentation for the function by typing
3227 @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and then the name of the
3228 function, @code{multiply-by-seven}. When you do this, a
3229 @file{*Help*} window will appear on your screen that says:
3230
3231 @smallexample
3232 @group
3233 multiply-by-seven is a Lisp function.
3234
3235 (multiply-by-seven NUMBER)
3236
3237 Multiply NUMBER by seven.
3238 @end group
3239 @end smallexample
3240
3241 @noindent
3242 (To return to a single window on your screen, type @kbd{C-x 1}.)
3243
3244 @node Change a defun
3245 @subsection Change a Function Definition
3246 @cindex Changing a function definition
3247 @cindex Function definition, how to change
3248 @cindex Definition, how to change
3249
3250 If you want to change the code in @code{multiply-by-seven}, just rewrite
3251 it. To install the new version in place of the old one, evaluate the
3252 function definition again. This is how you modify code in Emacs. It is
3253 very simple.
3254
3255 As an example, you can change the @code{multiply-by-seven} function to
3256 add the number to itself seven times instead of multiplying the number
3257 by seven. It produces the same answer, but by a different path. At
3258 the same time, we will add a comment to the code; a comment is text
3259 that the Lisp interpreter ignores, but that a human reader may find
3260 useful or enlightening. The comment is that this is the ``second
3261 version''.
3262
3263 @smallexample
3264 @group
3265 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Second version.}
3266 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3267 (+ number number number number number number number))
3268 @end group
3269 @end smallexample
3270
3271 @cindex Comments in Lisp code
3272 The comment follows a semicolon, @samp{;}. In Lisp, everything on a
3273 line that follows a semicolon is a comment. The end of the line is the
3274 end of the comment. To stretch a comment over two or more lines, begin
3275 each line with a semicolon.
3276
3277 @xref{Beginning init File, , Beginning a @file{.emacs}
3278 File}, and @ref{Comments, , Comments, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
3279 Reference Manual}, for more about comments.
3280
3281 You can install this version of the @code{multiply-by-seven} function by
3282 evaluating it in the same way you evaluated the first function: place
3283 the cursor after the last parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
3284
3285 In summary, this is how you write code in Emacs Lisp: you write a
3286 function; install it; test it; and then make fixes or enhancements and
3287 install it again.
3288
3289 @node Interactive
3290 @section Make a Function Interactive
3291 @cindex Interactive functions
3292 @findex interactive
3293
3294 You make a function interactive by placing a list that begins with
3295 the special form @code{interactive} immediately after the
3296 documentation. A user can invoke an interactive function by typing
3297 @kbd{M-x} and then the name of the function; or by typing the keys to
3298 which it is bound, for example, by typing @kbd{C-n} for
3299 @code{next-line} or @kbd{C-x h} for @code{mark-whole-buffer}.
3300
3301 Interestingly, when you call an interactive function interactively,
3302 the value returned is not automatically displayed in the echo area.
3303 This is because you often call an interactive function for its side
3304 effects, such as moving forward by a word or line, and not for the
3305 value returned. If the returned value were displayed in the echo area
3306 each time you typed a key, it would be very distracting.
3307
3308 @menu
3309 * Interactive multiply-by-seven:: An overview.
3310 * multiply-by-seven in detail:: The interactive version.
3311 @end menu
3312
3313 @ifnottex
3314 @node Interactive multiply-by-seven
3315 @unnumberedsubsec An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}, An Overview
3316 @end ifnottex
3317
3318 Both the use of the special form @code{interactive} and one way to
3319 display a value in the echo area can be illustrated by creating an
3320 interactive version of @code{multiply-by-seven}.
3321
3322 @need 1250
3323 Here is the code:
3324
3325 @smallexample
3326 @group
3327 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3328 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3329 (interactive "p")
3330 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3331 @end group
3332 @end smallexample
3333
3334 @noindent
3335 You can install this code by placing your cursor after it and typing
3336 @kbd{C-x C-e}. The name of the function will appear in your echo area.
3337 Then, you can use this code by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number and then
3338 typing @kbd{M-x multiply-by-seven} and pressing @key{RET}. The phrase
3339 @samp{The result is @dots{}} followed by the product will appear in the
3340 echo area.
3341
3342 Speaking more generally, you invoke a function like this in either of two
3343 ways:
3344
3345 @enumerate
3346 @item
3347 By typing a prefix argument that contains the number to be passed, and
3348 then typing @kbd{M-x} and the name of the function, as with
3349 @kbd{C-u 3 M-x forward-sentence}; or,
3350
3351 @item
3352 By typing whatever key or keychord the function is bound to, as with
3353 @kbd{C-u 3 M-e}.
3354 @end enumerate
3355
3356 @noindent
3357 Both the examples just mentioned work identically to move point forward
3358 three sentences. (Since @code{multiply-by-seven} is not bound to a key,
3359 it could not be used as an example of key binding.)
3360
3361 (@xref{Keybindings, , Some Keybindings}, to learn how to bind a command
3362 to a key.)
3363
3364 A prefix argument is passed to an interactive function by typing the
3365 @key{META} key followed by a number, for example, @kbd{M-3 M-e}, or by
3366 typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number, for example, @kbd{C-u 3 M-e} (if you
3367 type @kbd{C-u} without a number, it defaults to 4).
3368
3369 @node multiply-by-seven in detail
3370 @subsection An Interactive @code{multiply-by-seven}
3371
3372 Let's look at the use of the special form @code{interactive} and then at
3373 the function @code{message} in the interactive version of
3374 @code{multiply-by-seven}. You will recall that the function definition
3375 looks like this:
3376
3377 @smallexample
3378 @group
3379 (defun multiply-by-seven (number) ; @r{Interactive version.}
3380 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
3381 (interactive "p")
3382 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number)))
3383 @end group
3384 @end smallexample
3385
3386 In this function, the expression, @code{(interactive "p")}, is a list of
3387 two elements. The @code{"p"} tells Emacs to pass the prefix argument to
3388 the function and use its value for the argument of the function.
3389
3390 @need 1000
3391 The argument will be a number. This means that the symbol
3392 @code{number} will be bound to a number in the line:
3393
3394 @smallexample
3395 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 number))
3396 @end smallexample
3397
3398 @need 1250
3399 @noindent
3400 For example, if your prefix argument is 5, the Lisp interpreter will
3401 evaluate the line as if it were:
3402
3403 @smallexample
3404 (message "The result is %d" (* 7 5))
3405 @end smallexample
3406
3407 @noindent
3408 (If you are reading this in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate this expression
3409 yourself.) First, the interpreter will evaluate the inner list, which
3410 is @code{(* 7 5)}. This returns a value of 35. Next, it
3411 will evaluate the outer list, passing the values of the second and
3412 subsequent elements of the list to the function @code{message}.
3413
3414 As we have seen, @code{message} is an Emacs Lisp function especially
3415 designed for sending a one line message to a user. (@xref{message, ,
3416 The @code{message} function}.) In summary, the @code{message}
3417 function prints its first argument in the echo area as is, except for
3418 occurrences of @samp{%d} or @samp{%s} (and various other %-sequences
3419 which we have not mentioned). When it sees a control sequence, the
3420 function looks to the second or subsequent arguments and prints the
3421 value of the argument in the location in the string where the control
3422 sequence is located.
3423
3424 In the interactive @code{multiply-by-seven} function, the control string
3425 is @samp{%d}, which requires a number, and the value returned by
3426 evaluating @code{(* 7 5)} is the number 35. Consequently, the number 35
3427 is printed in place of the @samp{%d} and the message is @samp{The result
3428 is 35}.
3429
3430 (Note that when you call the function @code{multiply-by-seven}, the
3431 message is printed without quotes, but when you call @code{message}, the
3432 text is printed in double quotes. This is because the value returned by
3433 @code{message} is what appears in the echo area when you evaluate an
3434 expression whose first element is @code{message}; but when embedded in a
3435 function, @code{message} prints the text as a side effect without
3436 quotes.)
3437
3438 @node Interactive Options
3439 @section Different Options for @code{interactive}
3440 @cindex Options for @code{interactive}
3441 @cindex Interactive options
3442
3443 In the example, @code{multiply-by-seven} used @code{"p"} as the
3444 argument to @code{interactive}. This argument told Emacs to interpret
3445 your typing either @kbd{C-u} followed by a number or @key{META}
3446 followed by a number as a command to pass that number to the function
3447 as its argument. Emacs has more than twenty characters predefined for
3448 use with @code{interactive}. In almost every case, one of these
3449 options will enable you to pass the right information interactively to
3450 a function. (@xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for
3451 @code{interactive}, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
3452
3453 @need 1250
3454 Consider the function @code{zap-to-char}. Its interactive expression
3455 is
3456
3457 @smallexample
3458 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3459 @end smallexample
3460
3461 The first part of the argument to @code{interactive} is @samp{p}, with
3462 which you are already familiar. This argument tells Emacs to
3463 interpret a ``prefix'', as a number to be passed to the function. You
3464 can specify a prefix either by typing @kbd{C-u} followed by a number
3465 or by typing @key{META} followed by a number. The prefix is the
3466 number of specified characters. Thus, if your prefix is three and the
3467 specified character is @samp{x}, then you will delete all the text up
3468 to and including the third next @samp{x}. If you do not set a prefix,
3469 then you delete all the text up to and including the specified
3470 character, but no more.
3471
3472 The @samp{c} tells the function the name of the character to which to delete.
3473
3474 More formally, a function with two or more arguments can have
3475 information passed to each argument by adding parts to the string that
3476 follows @code{interactive}. When you do this, the information is
3477 passed to each argument in the same order it is specified in the
3478 @code{interactive} list. In the string, each part is separated from
3479 the next part by a @samp{\n}, which is a newline. For example, you
3480 can follow @samp{p} with a @samp{\n} and an @samp{cZap to char:@: }.
3481 This causes Emacs to pass the value of the prefix argument (if there
3482 is one) and the character.
3483
3484 In this case, the function definition looks like the following, where
3485 @code{arg} and @code{char} are the symbols to which @code{interactive}
3486 binds the prefix argument and the specified character:
3487
3488 @smallexample
3489 @group
3490 (defun @var{name-of-function} (arg char)
3491 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3492 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
3493 @var{body-of-function}@dots{})
3494 @end group
3495 @end smallexample
3496
3497 @noindent
3498 (The space after the colon in the prompt makes it look better when you
3499 are prompted. @xref{copy-to-buffer, , The Definition of
3500 @code{copy-to-buffer}}, for an example.)
3501
3502 When a function does not take arguments, @code{interactive} does not
3503 require any. Such a function contains the simple expression
3504 @code{(interactive)}. The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is like
3505 this.
3506
3507 Alternatively, if the special letter-codes are not right for your
3508 application, you can pass your own arguments to @code{interactive} as
3509 a list.
3510
3511 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}},
3512 for an example. @xref{Using Interactive, , Using @code{Interactive},
3513 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a more complete
3514 explanation about this technique.
3515
3516 @node Permanent Installation
3517 @section Install Code Permanently
3518 @cindex Install code permanently
3519 @cindex Permanent code installation
3520 @cindex Code installation
3521
3522 When you install a function definition by evaluating it, it will stay
3523 installed until you quit Emacs. The next time you start a new session
3524 of Emacs, the function will not be installed unless you evaluate the
3525 function definition again.
3526
3527 At some point, you may want to have code installed automatically
3528 whenever you start a new session of Emacs. There are several ways of
3529 doing this:
3530
3531 @itemize @bullet
3532 @item
3533 If you have code that is just for yourself, you can put the code for the
3534 function definition in your @file{.emacs} initialization file. When you
3535 start Emacs, your @file{.emacs} file is automatically evaluated and all
3536 the function definitions within it are installed.
3537 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
3538
3539 @item
3540 Alternatively, you can put the function definitions that you want
3541 installed in one or more files of their own and use the @code{load}
3542 function to cause Emacs to evaluate and thereby install each of the
3543 functions in the files.
3544 @xref{Loading Files, , Loading Files}.
3545
3546 @item
3547 Thirdly, if you have code that your whole site will use, it is usual
3548 to put it in a file called @file{site-init.el} that is loaded when
3549 Emacs is built. This makes the code available to everyone who uses
3550 your machine. (See the @file{INSTALL} file that is part of the Emacs
3551 distribution.)
3552 @end itemize
3553
3554 Finally, if you have code that everyone who uses Emacs may want, you
3555 can post it on a computer network or send a copy to the Free Software
3556 Foundation. (When you do this, please license the code and its
3557 documentation under a license that permits other people to run, copy,
3558 study, modify, and redistribute the code and which protects you from
3559 having your work taken from you.) If you send a copy of your code to
3560 the Free Software Foundation, and properly protect yourself and
3561 others, it may be included in the next release of Emacs. In large
3562 part, this is how Emacs has grown over the past years, by donations.
3563
3564 @node let
3565 @section @code{let}
3566 @findex let
3567
3568 The @code{let} expression is a special form in Lisp that you will need
3569 to use in most function definitions.
3570
3571 @code{let} is used to attach or bind a symbol to a value in such a way
3572 that the Lisp interpreter will not confuse the variable with a
3573 variable of the same name that is not part of the function.
3574
3575 To understand why the @code{let} special form is necessary, consider
3576 the situation in which you own a home that you generally refer to as
3577 ``the house'', as in the sentence, ``The house needs painting.'' If you
3578 are visiting a friend and your host refers to ``the house'', he is
3579 likely to be referring to @emph{his} house, not yours, that is, to a
3580 different house.
3581
3582 If your friend is referring to his house and you think he is referring
3583 to your house, you may be in for some confusion. The same thing could
3584 happen in Lisp if a variable that is used inside of one function has
3585 the same name as a variable that is used inside of another function,
3586 and the two are not intended to refer to the same value. The
3587 @code{let} special form prevents this kind of confusion.
3588
3589 @menu
3590 * Prevent confusion::
3591 * Parts of let Expression::
3592 * Sample let Expression::
3593 * Uninitialized let Variables::
3594 @end menu
3595
3596 @ifnottex
3597 @node Prevent confusion
3598 @unnumberedsubsec @code{let} Prevents Confusion
3599 @end ifnottex
3600
3601 @cindex @samp{local variable} defined
3602 @cindex @samp{variable, local}, defined
3603 The @code{let} special form prevents confusion. @code{let} creates a
3604 name for a @dfn{local variable} that overshadows any use of the same
3605 name outside the @code{let} expression. This is like understanding
3606 that whenever your host refers to ``the house'', he means his house, not
3607 yours. (Symbols used in argument lists work the same way.
3608 @xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
3609
3610 Local variables created by a @code{let} expression retain their value
3611 @emph{only} within the @code{let} expression itself (and within
3612 expressions called within the @code{let} expression); the local
3613 variables have no effect outside the @code{let} expression.
3614
3615 Another way to think about @code{let} is that it is like a @code{setq}
3616 that is temporary and local. The values set by @code{let} are
3617 automatically undone when the @code{let} is finished. The setting
3618 only affects expressions that are inside the bounds of the @code{let}
3619 expression. In computer science jargon, we would say ``the binding of
3620 a symbol is visible only in functions called in the @code{let} form;
3621 in Emacs Lisp, scoping is dynamic, not lexical.''
3622
3623 @code{let} can create more than one variable at once. Also,
3624 @code{let} gives each variable it creates an initial value, either a
3625 value specified by you, or @code{nil}. (In the jargon, this is called
3626 ``binding the variable to the value''.) After @code{let} has created
3627 and bound the variables, it executes the code in the body of the
3628 @code{let}, and returns the value of the last expression in the body,
3629 as the value of the whole @code{let} expression. (``Execute'' is a jargon
3630 term that means to evaluate a list; it comes from the use of the word
3631 meaning ``to give practical effect to'' (@cite{Oxford English
3632 Dictionary}). Since you evaluate an expression to perform an action,
3633 ``execute'' has evolved as a synonym to ``evaluate''.)
3634
3635 @node Parts of let Expression
3636 @subsection The Parts of a @code{let} Expression
3637 @cindex @code{let} expression, parts of
3638 @cindex Parts of @code{let} expression
3639
3640 @cindex @samp{varlist} defined
3641 A @code{let} expression is a list of three parts. The first part is
3642 the symbol @code{let}. The second part is a list, called a
3643 @dfn{varlist}, each element of which is either a symbol by itself or a
3644 two-element list, the first element of which is a symbol. The third
3645 part of the @code{let} expression is the body of the @code{let}. The
3646 body usually consists of one or more lists.
3647
3648 @need 800
3649 A template for a @code{let} expression looks like this:
3650
3651 @smallexample
3652 (let @var{varlist} @var{body}@dots{})
3653 @end smallexample
3654
3655 @noindent
3656 The symbols in the varlist are the variables that are given initial
3657 values by the @code{let} special form. Symbols by themselves are given
3658 the initial value of @code{nil}; and each symbol that is the first
3659 element of a two-element list is bound to the value that is returned
3660 when the Lisp interpreter evaluates the second element.
3661
3662 Thus, a varlist might look like this: @code{(thread (needles 3))}. In
3663 this case, in a @code{let} expression, Emacs binds the symbol
3664 @code{thread} to an initial value of @code{nil}, and binds the symbol
3665 @code{needles} to an initial value of 3.
3666
3667 When you write a @code{let} expression, what you do is put the
3668 appropriate expressions in the slots of the @code{let} expression
3669 template.
3670
3671 If the varlist is composed of two-element lists, as is often the case,
3672 the template for the @code{let} expression looks like this:
3673
3674 @smallexample
3675 @group
3676 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value})
3677 (@var{variable} @var{value})
3678 @dots{})
3679 @var{body}@dots{})
3680 @end group
3681 @end smallexample
3682
3683 @node Sample let Expression
3684 @subsection Sample @code{let} Expression
3685 @cindex Sample @code{let} expression
3686 @cindex @code{let} expression sample
3687
3688 The following expression creates and gives initial values
3689 to the two variables @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. The body of the
3690 @code{let} expression is a list which calls the @code{message} function.
3691
3692 @smallexample
3693 @group
3694 (let ((zebra 'stripes)
3695 (tiger 'fierce))
3696 (message "One kind of animal has %s and another is %s."
3697 zebra tiger))
3698 @end group
3699 @end smallexample
3700
3701 Here, the varlist is @code{((zebra 'stripes) (tiger 'fierce))}.
3702
3703 The two variables are @code{zebra} and @code{tiger}. Each variable is
3704 the first element of a two-element list and each value is the second
3705 element of its two-element list. In the varlist, Emacs binds the
3706 variable @code{zebra} to the value @code{stripes}@footnote{According
3707 to Jared Diamond in @cite{Guns, Germs, and Steel}, ``@dots{} zebras
3708 become impossibly dangerous as they grow older'' but the claim here is
3709 that they do not become fierce like a tiger. (1997, W. W. Norton and
3710 Co., ISBN 0-393-03894-2, page 171)}, and binds the
3711 variable @code{tiger} to the value @code{fierce}. In this example,
3712 both values are symbols preceded by a quote. The values could just as
3713 well have been another list or a string. The body of the @code{let}
3714 follows after the list holding the variables. In this example, the
3715 body is a list that uses the @code{message} function to print a string
3716 in the echo area.
3717
3718 @need 1500
3719 You may evaluate the example in the usual fashion, by placing the
3720 cursor after the last parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. When you do
3721 this, the following will appear in the echo area:
3722
3723 @smallexample
3724 "One kind of animal has stripes and another is fierce."
3725 @end smallexample
3726
3727 As we have seen before, the @code{message} function prints its first
3728 argument, except for @samp{%s}. In this example, the value of the variable
3729 @code{zebra} is printed at the location of the first @samp{%s} and the
3730 value of the variable @code{tiger} is printed at the location of the
3731 second @samp{%s}.
3732
3733 @node Uninitialized let Variables
3734 @subsection Uninitialized Variables in a @code{let} Statement
3735 @cindex Uninitialized @code{let} variables
3736 @cindex @code{let} variables uninitialized
3737
3738 If you do not bind the variables in a @code{let} statement to specific
3739 initial values, they will automatically be bound to an initial value of
3740 @code{nil}, as in the following expression:
3741
3742 @smallexample
3743 @group
3744 (let ((birch 3)
3745 pine
3746 fir
3747 (oak 'some))
3748 (message
3749 "Here are %d variables with %s, %s, and %s value."
3750 birch pine fir oak))
3751 @end group
3752 @end smallexample
3753
3754 @noindent
3755 Here, the varlist is @code{((birch 3) pine fir (oak 'some))}.
3756
3757 @need 1250
3758 If you evaluate this expression in the usual way, the following will
3759 appear in your echo area:
3760
3761 @smallexample
3762 "Here are 3 variables with nil, nil, and some value."
3763 @end smallexample
3764
3765 @noindent
3766 In this example, Emacs binds the symbol @code{birch} to the number 3,
3767 binds the symbols @code{pine} and @code{fir} to @code{nil}, and binds
3768 the symbol @code{oak} to the value @code{some}.
3769
3770 Note that in the first part of the @code{let}, the variables @code{pine}
3771 and @code{fir} stand alone as atoms that are not surrounded by
3772 parentheses; this is because they are being bound to @code{nil}, the
3773 empty list. But @code{oak} is bound to @code{some} and so is a part of
3774 the list @code{(oak 'some)}. Similarly, @code{birch} is bound to the
3775 number 3 and so is in a list with that number. (Since a number
3776 evaluates to itself, the number does not need to be quoted. Also, the
3777 number is printed in the message using a @samp{%d} rather than a
3778 @samp{%s}.) The four variables as a group are put into a list to
3779 delimit them from the body of the @code{let}.
3780
3781 @node if
3782 @section The @code{if} Special Form
3783 @findex if
3784 @cindex Conditional with @code{if}
3785
3786 A third special form, in addition to @code{defun} and @code{let}, is the
3787 conditional @code{if}. This form is used to instruct the computer to
3788 make decisions. You can write function definitions without using
3789 @code{if}, but it is used often enough, and is important enough, to be
3790 included here. It is used, for example, in the code for the
3791 function @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
3792
3793 The basic idea behind an @code{if}, is that ``@emph{if} a test is true,
3794 @emph{then} an expression is evaluated.'' If the test is not true, the
3795 expression is not evaluated. For example, you might make a decision
3796 such as, ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to the beach!''
3797
3798 @menu
3799 * if in more detail::
3800 * type-of-animal in detail:: An example of an @code{if} expression.
3801 @end menu
3802
3803 @ifnottex
3804 @node if in more detail
3805 @unnumberedsubsec @code{if} in more detail
3806 @end ifnottex
3807
3808 @cindex @samp{if-part} defined
3809 @cindex @samp{then-part} defined
3810 An @code{if} expression written in Lisp does not use the word ``then'';
3811 the test and the action are the second and third elements of the list
3812 whose first element is @code{if}. Nonetheless, the test part of an
3813 @code{if} expression is often called the @dfn{if-part} and the second
3814 argument is often called the @dfn{then-part}.
3815
3816 Also, when an @code{if} expression is written, the true-or-false-test
3817 is usually written on the same line as the symbol @code{if}, but the
3818 action to carry out if the test is true, the ``then-part'', is written
3819 on the second and subsequent lines. This makes the @code{if}
3820 expression easier to read.
3821
3822 @smallexample
3823 @group
3824 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3825 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-test-is-true})
3826 @end group
3827 @end smallexample
3828
3829 @noindent
3830 The true-or-false-test will be an expression that
3831 is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter.
3832
3833 Here is an example that you can evaluate in the usual manner. The test
3834 is whether the number 5 is greater than the number 4. Since it is, the
3835 message @samp{5 is greater than 4!} will be printed.
3836
3837 @smallexample
3838 @group
3839 (if (> 5 4) ; @r{if-part}
3840 (message "5 is greater than 4!")) ; @r{then-part}
3841 @end group
3842 @end smallexample
3843
3844 @noindent
3845 (The function @code{>} tests whether its first argument is greater than
3846 its second argument and returns true if it is.)
3847 @findex > (greater than)
3848
3849 Of course, in actual use, the test in an @code{if} expression will not
3850 be fixed for all time as it is by the expression @code{(> 5 4)}.
3851 Instead, at least one of the variables used in the test will be bound to
3852 a value that is not known ahead of time. (If the value were known ahead
3853 of time, we would not need to run the test!)
3854
3855 For example, the value may be bound to an argument of a function
3856 definition. In the following function definition, the character of the
3857 animal is a value that is passed to the function. If the value bound to
3858 @code{characteristic} is @code{fierce}, then the message, @samp{It's a
3859 tiger!} will be printed; otherwise, @code{nil} will be returned.
3860
3861 @smallexample
3862 @group
3863 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3864 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3865 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3866 then warn of a tiger."
3867 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3868 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3869 @end group
3870 @end smallexample
3871
3872 @need 1500
3873 @noindent
3874 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate the
3875 function definition in the usual way to install it in Emacs, and then you
3876 can evaluate the following two expressions to see the results:
3877
3878 @smallexample
3879 @group
3880 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
3881
3882 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
3883
3884 @end group
3885 @end smallexample
3886
3887 @c Following sentences rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
3888 @noindent
3889 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
3890 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; and
3891 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)} you will see @code{nil}
3892 printed in the echo area.
3893
3894 @node type-of-animal in detail
3895 @subsection The @code{type-of-animal} Function in Detail
3896
3897 Let's look at the @code{type-of-animal} function in detail.
3898
3899 The function definition for @code{type-of-animal} was written by filling
3900 the slots of two templates, one for a function definition as a whole, and
3901 a second for an @code{if} expression.
3902
3903 @need 1250
3904 The template for every function that is not interactive is:
3905
3906 @smallexample
3907 @group
3908 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
3909 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
3910 @var{body}@dots{})
3911 @end group
3912 @end smallexample
3913
3914 @need 800
3915 The parts of the function that match this template look like this:
3916
3917 @smallexample
3918 @group
3919 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic)
3920 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
3921 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
3922 then warn of a tiger."
3923 @var{body: the} @code{if} @var{expression})
3924 @end group
3925 @end smallexample
3926
3927 The name of function is @code{type-of-animal}; it is passed the value
3928 of one argument. The argument list is followed by a multi-line
3929 documentation string. The documentation string is included in the
3930 example because it is a good habit to write documentation string for
3931 every function definition. The body of the function definition
3932 consists of the @code{if} expression.
3933
3934 @need 800
3935 The template for an @code{if} expression looks like this:
3936
3937 @smallexample
3938 @group
3939 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
3940 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true})
3941 @end group
3942 @end smallexample
3943
3944 @need 1250
3945 In the @code{type-of-animal} function, the code for the @code{if}
3946 looks like this:
3947
3948 @smallexample
3949 @group
3950 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3951 (message "It's a tiger!")))
3952 @end group
3953 @end smallexample
3954
3955 @need 800
3956 Here, the true-or-false-test is the expression:
3957
3958 @smallexample
3959 (equal characteristic 'fierce)
3960 @end smallexample
3961
3962 @noindent
3963 In Lisp, @code{equal} is a function that determines whether its first
3964 argument is equal to its second argument. The second argument is the
3965 quoted symbol @code{'fierce} and the first argument is the value of the
3966 symbol @code{characteristic}---in other words, the argument passed to
3967 this function.
3968
3969 In the first exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the argument
3970 @code{fierce} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. Since @code{fierce}
3971 is equal to @code{fierce}, the expression, @code{(equal characteristic
3972 'fierce)}, returns a value of true. When this happens, the @code{if}
3973 evaluates the second argument or then-part of the @code{if}:
3974 @code{(message "It's tiger!")}.
3975
3976 On the other hand, in the second exercise of @code{type-of-animal}, the
3977 argument @code{zebra} is passed to @code{type-of-animal}. @code{zebra}
3978 is not equal to @code{fierce}, so the then-part is not evaluated and
3979 @code{nil} is returned by the @code{if} expression.
3980
3981 @node else
3982 @section If--then--else Expressions
3983 @cindex Else
3984
3985 An @code{if} expression may have an optional third argument, called
3986 the @dfn{else-part}, for the case when the true-or-false-test returns
3987 false. When this happens, the second argument or then-part of the
3988 overall @code{if} expression is @emph{not} evaluated, but the third or
3989 else-part @emph{is} evaluated. You might think of this as the cloudy
3990 day alternative for the decision ``if it is warm and sunny, then go to
3991 the beach, else read a book!''.
3992
3993 The word ``else'' is not written in the Lisp code; the else-part of an
3994 @code{if} expression comes after the then-part. In the written Lisp, the
3995 else-part is usually written to start on a line of its own and is
3996 indented less than the then-part:
3997
3998 @smallexample
3999 @group
4000 (if @var{true-or-false-test}
4001 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-true}
4002 @var{action-to-carry-out-if-the-test-returns-false})
4003 @end group
4004 @end smallexample
4005
4006 For example, the following @code{if} expression prints the message @samp{4
4007 is not greater than 5!} when you evaluate it in the usual way:
4008
4009 @smallexample
4010 @group
4011 (if (> 4 5) ; @r{if-part}
4012 (message "4 falsely greater than 5!") ; @r{then-part}
4013 (message "4 is not greater than 5!")) ; @r{else-part}
4014 @end group
4015 @end smallexample
4016
4017 @noindent
4018 Note that the different levels of indentation make it easy to
4019 distinguish the then-part from the else-part. (GNU Emacs has several
4020 commands that automatically indent @code{if} expressions correctly.
4021 @xref{Typing Lists, , GNU Emacs Helps You Type Lists}.)
4022
4023 We can extend the @code{type-of-animal} function to include an
4024 else-part by simply incorporating an additional part to the @code{if}
4025 expression.
4026
4027 @need 1500
4028 You can see the consequences of doing this if you evaluate the following
4029 version of the @code{type-of-animal} function definition to install it
4030 and then evaluate the two subsequent expressions to pass different
4031 arguments to the function.
4032
4033 @smallexample
4034 @group
4035 (defun type-of-animal (characteristic) ; @r{Second version.}
4036 "Print message in echo area depending on CHARACTERISTIC.
4037 If the CHARACTERISTIC is the symbol `fierce',
4038 then warn of a tiger;
4039 else say it's not fierce."
4040 (if (equal characteristic 'fierce)
4041 (message "It's a tiger!")
4042 (message "It's not fierce!")))
4043 @end group
4044 @end smallexample
4045 @sp 1
4046
4047 @smallexample
4048 @group
4049 (type-of-animal 'fierce)
4050
4051 (type-of-animal 'zebra)
4052
4053 @end group
4054 @end smallexample
4055
4056 @c Following sentence rewritten to prevent overfull hbox.
4057 @noindent
4058 When you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'fierce)}, you will see the
4059 following message printed in the echo area: @code{"It's a tiger!"}; but
4060 when you evaluate @code{(type-of-animal 'zebra)}, you will see
4061 @code{"It's not fierce!"}.
4062
4063 (Of course, if the @var{characteristic} were @code{ferocious}, the
4064 message @code{"It's not fierce!"} would be printed; and it would be
4065 misleading! When you write code, you need to take into account the
4066 possibility that some such argument will be tested by the @code{if}
4067 and write your program accordingly.)
4068
4069 @node Truth & Falsehood
4070 @section Truth and Falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4071 @cindex Truth and falsehood in Emacs Lisp
4072 @cindex Falsehood and truth in Emacs Lisp
4073 @findex nil
4074
4075 There is an important aspect to the truth test in an @code{if}
4076 expression. So far, we have spoken of ``true'' and ``false'' as values of
4077 predicates as if they were new kinds of Emacs Lisp objects. In fact,
4078 ``false'' is just our old friend @code{nil}. Anything else---anything
4079 at all---is ``true''.
4080
4081 The expression that tests for truth is interpreted as @dfn{true}
4082 if the result of evaluating it is a value that is not @code{nil}. In
4083 other words, the result of the test is considered true if the value
4084 returned is a number such as 47, a string such as @code{"hello"}, or a
4085 symbol (other than @code{nil}) such as @code{flowers}, or a list (so
4086 long as it is not empty), or even a buffer!
4087
4088 @menu
4089 * nil explained:: @code{nil} has two meanings.
4090 @end menu
4091
4092 @ifnottex
4093 @node nil explained
4094 @unnumberedsubsec An explanation of @code{nil}
4095 @end ifnottex
4096
4097 Before illustrating a test for truth, we need an explanation of @code{nil}.
4098
4099 In Emacs Lisp, the symbol @code{nil} has two meanings. First, it means the
4100 empty list. Second, it means false and is the value returned when a
4101 true-or-false-test tests false. @code{nil} can be written as an empty
4102 list, @code{()}, or as @code{nil}. As far as the Lisp interpreter is
4103 concerned, @code{()} and @code{nil} are the same. Humans, however, tend
4104 to use @code{nil} for false and @code{()} for the empty list.
4105
4106 In Emacs Lisp, any value that is not @code{nil}---is not the empty
4107 list---is considered true. This means that if an evaluation returns
4108 something that is not an empty list, an @code{if} expression will test
4109 true. For example, if a number is put in the slot for the test, it
4110 will be evaluated and will return itself, since that is what numbers
4111 do when evaluated. In this conditional, the @code{if} expression will
4112 test true. The expression tests false only when @code{nil}, an empty
4113 list, is returned by evaluating the expression.
4114
4115 You can see this by evaluating the two expressions in the following examples.
4116
4117 In the first example, the number 4 is evaluated as the test in the
4118 @code{if} expression and returns itself; consequently, the then-part
4119 of the expression is evaluated and returned: @samp{true} appears in
4120 the echo area. In the second example, the @code{nil} indicates false;
4121 consequently, the else-part of the expression is evaluated and
4122 returned: @samp{false} appears in the echo area.
4123
4124 @smallexample
4125 @group
4126 (if 4
4127 'true
4128 'false)
4129 @end group
4130
4131 @group
4132 (if nil
4133 'true
4134 'false)
4135 @end group
4136 @end smallexample
4137
4138 @need 1250
4139 Incidentally, if some other useful value is not available for a test that
4140 returns true, then the Lisp interpreter will return the symbol @code{t}
4141 for true. For example, the expression @code{(> 5 4)} returns @code{t}
4142 when evaluated, as you can see by evaluating it in the usual way:
4143
4144 @smallexample
4145 (> 5 4)
4146 @end smallexample
4147
4148 @need 1250
4149 @noindent
4150 On the other hand, this function returns @code{nil} if the test is false.
4151
4152 @smallexample
4153 (> 4 5)
4154 @end smallexample
4155
4156 @node save-excursion
4157 @section @code{save-excursion}
4158 @findex save-excursion
4159 @cindex Region, what it is
4160 @cindex Preserving point and buffer
4161 @cindex Point and buffer preservation
4162 @findex point
4163 @findex mark
4164
4165 The @code{save-excursion} function is the third and final special form
4166 that we will discuss in this chapter.
4167
4168 In Emacs Lisp programs used for editing, the @code{save-excursion}
4169 function is very common. It saves the location of point,
4170 executes the body of the function, and then restores point to
4171 its previous position if its location was changed. Its primary
4172 purpose is to keep the user from being surprised and disturbed by
4173 unexpected movement of point.
4174
4175 @menu
4176 * Point and mark:: A review of various locations.
4177 * Template for save-excursion::
4178 @end menu
4179
4180 @ifnottex
4181 @node Point and mark
4182 @unnumberedsubsec Point and Mark
4183 @end ifnottex
4184
4185 Before discussing @code{save-excursion}, however, it may be useful
4186 first to review what point and mark are in GNU Emacs. @dfn{Point} is
4187 the current location of the cursor. Wherever the cursor
4188 is, that is point. More precisely, on terminals where the cursor
4189 appears to be on top of a character, point is immediately before the
4190 character. In Emacs Lisp, point is an integer. The first character in
4191 a buffer is number one, the second is number two, and so on. The
4192 function @code{point} returns the current position of the cursor as a
4193 number. Each buffer has its own value for point.
4194
4195 The @dfn{mark} is another position in the buffer; its value can be set
4196 with a command such as @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}). If
4197 a mark has been set, you can use the command @kbd{C-x C-x}
4198 (@code{exchange-point-and-mark}) to cause the cursor to jump to the mark
4199 and set the mark to be the previous position of point. In addition, if
4200 you set another mark, the position of the previous mark is saved in the
4201 mark ring. Many mark positions can be saved this way. You can jump the
4202 cursor to a saved mark by typing @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}} one or more
4203 times.
4204
4205 The part of the buffer between point and mark is called @dfn{the
4206 region}. Numerous commands work on the region, including
4207 @code{center-region}, @code{count-lines-region}, @code{kill-region}, and
4208 @code{print-region}.
4209
4210 The @code{save-excursion} special form saves the location of point and
4211 restores this position after the code within the body of the
4212 special form is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter. Thus, if point were
4213 in the beginning of a piece of text and some code moved point to the end
4214 of the buffer, the @code{save-excursion} would put point back to where
4215 it was before, after the expressions in the body of the function were
4216 evaluated.
4217
4218 In Emacs, a function frequently moves point as part of its internal
4219 workings even though a user would not expect this. For example,
4220 @code{count-lines-region} moves point. To prevent the user from being
4221 bothered by jumps that are both unexpected and (from the user's point of
4222 view) unnecessary, @code{save-excursion} is often used to keep point in
4223 the location expected by the user. The use of
4224 @code{save-excursion} is good housekeeping.
4225
4226 To make sure the house stays clean, @code{save-excursion} restores the
4227 value of point even if something goes wrong in the code inside
4228 of it (or, to be more precise and to use the proper jargon, ``in case of
4229 abnormal exit''). This feature is very helpful.
4230
4231 In addition to recording the value of point,
4232 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the current buffer, and restores
4233 it, too. This means you can write code that will change the buffer and
4234 have @code{save-excursion} switch you back to the original buffer.
4235 This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in @code{append-to-buffer}.
4236 (@xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
4237
4238 @node Template for save-excursion
4239 @subsection Template for a @code{save-excursion} Expression
4240
4241 @need 800
4242 The template for code using @code{save-excursion} is simple:
4243
4244 @smallexample
4245 @group
4246 (save-excursion
4247 @var{body}@dots{})
4248 @end group
4249 @end smallexample
4250
4251 @noindent
4252 The body of the function is one or more expressions that will be
4253 evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter. If there is more than
4254 one expression in the body, the value of the last one will be returned
4255 as the value of the @code{save-excursion} function. The other
4256 expressions in the body are evaluated only for their side effects; and
4257 @code{save-excursion} itself is used only for its side effect (which
4258 is restoring the position of point).
4259
4260 @need 1250
4261 In more detail, the template for a @code{save-excursion} expression
4262 looks like this:
4263
4264 @smallexample
4265 @group
4266 (save-excursion
4267 @var{first-expression-in-body}
4268 @var{second-expression-in-body}
4269 @var{third-expression-in-body}
4270 @dots{}
4271 @var{last-expression-in-body})
4272 @end group
4273 @end smallexample
4274
4275 @noindent
4276 An expression, of course, may be a symbol on its own or a list.
4277
4278 In Emacs Lisp code, a @code{save-excursion} expression often occurs
4279 within the body of a @code{let} expression. It looks like this:
4280
4281 @smallexample
4282 @group
4283 (let @var{varlist}
4284 (save-excursion
4285 @var{body}@dots{}))
4286 @end group
4287 @end smallexample
4288
4289 @node Review
4290 @section Review
4291
4292 In the last few chapters we have introduced a macro and a fair number
4293 of functions and special forms. Here they are described in brief,
4294 along with a few similar functions that have not been mentioned yet.
4295
4296 @table @code
4297 @item eval-last-sexp
4298 Evaluate the last symbolic expression before the current location of
4299 point. The value is printed in the echo area unless the function is
4300 invoked with an argument; in that case, the output is printed in the
4301 current buffer. This command is normally bound to @kbd{C-x C-e}.
4302
4303 @item defun
4304 Define function. This macro has up to five parts: the name, a
4305 template for the arguments that will be passed to the function,
4306 documentation, an optional interactive declaration, and the body of
4307 the definition.
4308
4309 @need 1250
4310 For example, in an early version of Emacs, the function definition was
4311 as follows. (It is slightly more complex now that it seeks the first
4312 non-whitespace character rather than the first visible character.)
4313
4314 @smallexample
4315 @group
4316 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4317 "Move point to first visible character on line."
4318 (interactive)
4319 (beginning-of-line 1)
4320 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4321 @end group
4322 @end smallexample
4323
4324 @ignore
4325 In GNU Emacs 22,
4326
4327 (defun backward-to-indentation (&optional arg)
4328 "Move backward ARG lines and position at first nonblank character."
4329 (interactive "p")
4330 (forward-line (- (or arg 1)))
4331 (skip-chars-forward " \t"))
4332
4333 (defun back-to-indentation ()
4334 "Move point to the first non-whitespace character on this line."
4335 (interactive)
4336 (beginning-of-line 1)
4337 (skip-syntax-forward " " (line-end-position))
4338 ;; Move back over chars that have whitespace syntax but have the p flag.
4339 (backward-prefix-chars))
4340 @end ignore
4341
4342 @item interactive
4343 Declare to the interpreter that the function can be used
4344 interactively. This special form may be followed by a string with one
4345 or more parts that pass the information to the arguments of the
4346 function, in sequence. These parts may also tell the interpreter to
4347 prompt for information. Parts of the string are separated by
4348 newlines, @samp{\n}.
4349
4350 @need 1000
4351 Common code characters are:
4352
4353 @table @code
4354 @item b
4355 The name of an existing buffer.
4356
4357 @item f
4358 The name of an existing file.
4359
4360 @item p
4361 The numeric prefix argument. (Note that this @code{p} is lower case.)
4362
4363 @item r
4364 Point and the mark, as two numeric arguments, smallest first. This
4365 is the only code letter that specifies two successive arguments
4366 rather than one.
4367 @end table
4368
4369 @xref{Interactive Codes, , Code Characters for @samp{interactive},
4370 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a complete list of
4371 code characters.
4372
4373 @item let
4374 Declare that a list of variables is for use within the body of the
4375 @code{let} and give them an initial value, either @code{nil} or a
4376 specified value; then evaluate the rest of the expressions in the body
4377 of the @code{let} and return the value of the last one. Inside the
4378 body of the @code{let}, the Lisp interpreter does not see the values of
4379 the variables of the same names that are bound outside of the
4380 @code{let}.
4381
4382 @need 1250
4383 For example,
4384
4385 @smallexample
4386 @group
4387 (let ((foo (buffer-name))
4388 (bar (buffer-size)))
4389 (message
4390 "This buffer is %s and has %d characters."
4391 foo bar))
4392 @end group
4393 @end smallexample
4394
4395 @item save-excursion
4396 Record the values of point and the current buffer before
4397 evaluating the body of this special form. Restore the value of point and
4398 buffer afterward.
4399
4400 @need 1250
4401 For example,
4402
4403 @smallexample
4404 @group
4405 (message "We are %d characters into this buffer."
4406 (- (point)
4407 (save-excursion
4408 (goto-char (point-min)) (point))))
4409 @end group
4410 @end smallexample
4411
4412 @item if
4413 Evaluate the first argument to the function; if it is true, evaluate
4414 the second argument; else evaluate the third argument, if there is one.
4415
4416 The @code{if} special form is called a @dfn{conditional}. There are
4417 other conditionals in Emacs Lisp, but @code{if} is perhaps the most
4418 commonly used.
4419
4420 @need 1250
4421 For example,
4422
4423 @smallexample
4424 @group
4425 (if (= 22 emacs-major-version)
4426 (message "This is version 22 Emacs")
4427 (message "This is not version 22 Emacs"))
4428 @end group
4429 @end smallexample
4430
4431 @need 1250
4432 @item <
4433 @itemx >
4434 @itemx <=
4435 @itemx >=
4436 The @code{<} function tests whether its first argument is smaller than
4437 its second argument. A corresponding function, @code{>}, tests whether
4438 the first argument is greater than the second. Likewise, @code{<=}
4439 tests whether the first argument is less than or equal to the second and
4440 @code{>=} tests whether the first argument is greater than or equal to
4441 the second. In all cases, both arguments must be numbers or markers
4442 (markers indicate positions in buffers).
4443
4444 @need 800
4445 @item =
4446 The @code{=} function tests whether two arguments, both numbers or
4447 markers, are equal.
4448
4449 @need 1250
4450 @item equal
4451 @itemx eq
4452 Test whether two objects are the same. @code{equal} uses one meaning
4453 of the word ``same'' and @code{eq} uses another: @code{equal} returns
4454 true if the two objects have a similar structure and contents, such as
4455 two copies of the same book. On the other hand, @code{eq}, returns
4456 true if both arguments are actually the same object.
4457 @findex equal
4458 @findex eq
4459
4460 @need 1250
4461 @item string<
4462 @itemx string-lessp
4463 @itemx string=
4464 @itemx string-equal
4465 The @code{string-lessp} function tests whether its first argument is
4466 smaller than the second argument. A shorter, alternative name for the
4467 same function (a @code{defalias}) is @code{string<}.
4468
4469 The arguments to @code{string-lessp} must be strings or symbols; the
4470 ordering is lexicographic, so case is significant. The print names of
4471 symbols are used instead of the symbols themselves.
4472
4473 @cindex @samp{empty string} defined
4474 An empty string, @samp{""}, a string with no characters in it, is
4475 smaller than any string of characters.
4476
4477 @code{string-equal} provides the corresponding test for equality. Its
4478 shorter, alternative name is @code{string=}. There are no string test
4479 functions that correspond to @var{>}, @code{>=}, or @code{<=}.
4480
4481 @item message
4482 Print a message in the echo area. The first argument is a string that
4483 can contain @samp{%s}, @samp{%d}, or @samp{%c} to print the value of
4484 arguments that follow the string. The argument used by @samp{%s} must
4485 be a string or a symbol; the argument used by @samp{%d} must be a
4486 number. The argument used by @samp{%c} must be an @sc{ascii} code
4487 number; it will be printed as the character with that @sc{ascii} code.
4488 (Various other %-sequences have not been mentioned.)
4489
4490 @item setq
4491 @itemx set
4492 The @code{setq} function sets the value of its first argument to the
4493 value of the second argument. The first argument is automatically
4494 quoted by @code{setq}. It does the same for succeeding pairs of
4495 arguments. Another function, @code{set}, takes only two arguments and
4496 evaluates both of them before setting the value returned by its first
4497 argument to the value returned by its second argument.
4498
4499 @item buffer-name
4500 Without an argument, return the name of the buffer, as a string.
4501
4502 @item buffer-file-name
4503 Without an argument, return the name of the file the buffer is
4504 visiting.
4505
4506 @item current-buffer
4507 Return the buffer in which Emacs is active; it may not be
4508 the buffer that is visible on the screen.
4509
4510 @item other-buffer
4511 Return the most recently selected buffer (other than the buffer passed
4512 to @code{other-buffer} as an argument and other than the current
4513 buffer).
4514
4515 @item switch-to-buffer
4516 Select a buffer for Emacs to be active in and display it in the current
4517 window so users can look at it. Usually bound to @kbd{C-x b}.
4518
4519 @item set-buffer
4520 Switch Emacs's attention to a buffer on which programs will run. Don't
4521 alter what the window is showing.
4522
4523 @item buffer-size
4524 Return the number of characters in the current buffer.
4525
4526 @item point
4527 Return the value of the current position of the cursor, as an
4528 integer counting the number of characters from the beginning of the
4529 buffer.
4530
4531 @item point-min
4532 Return the minimum permissible value of point in
4533 the current buffer. This is 1, unless narrowing is in effect.
4534
4535 @item point-max
4536 Return the value of the maximum permissible value of point in the
4537 current buffer. This is the end of the buffer, unless narrowing is in
4538 effect.
4539 @end table
4540
4541 @need 1500
4542 @node defun Exercises
4543 @section Exercises
4544
4545 @itemize @bullet
4546 @item
4547 Write a non-interactive function that doubles the value of its
4548 argument, a number. Make that function interactive.
4549
4550 @item
4551 Write a function that tests whether the current value of
4552 @code{fill-column} is greater than the argument passed to the function,
4553 and if so, prints an appropriate message.
4554 @end itemize
4555
4556 @node Buffer Walk Through
4557 @chapter A Few Buffer-Related Functions
4558
4559 In this chapter we study in detail several of the functions used in GNU
4560 Emacs. This is called a ``walk-through''. These functions are used as
4561 examples of Lisp code, but are not imaginary examples; with the
4562 exception of the first, simplified function definition, these functions
4563 show the actual code used in GNU Emacs. You can learn a great deal from
4564 these definitions. The functions described here are all related to
4565 buffers. Later, we will study other functions.
4566
4567 @menu
4568 * Finding More:: How to find more information.
4569 * simplified-beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
4570 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
4571 * mark-whole-buffer:: Almost the same as @code{beginning-of-buffer}.
4572 * append-to-buffer:: Uses @code{save-excursion} and
4573 @code{insert-buffer-substring}.
4574 * Buffer Related Review:: Review.
4575 * Buffer Exercises::
4576 @end menu
4577
4578 @node Finding More
4579 @section Finding More Information
4580
4581 @findex describe-function, @r{introduced}
4582 @cindex Find function documentation
4583 In this walk-through, I will describe each new function as we come to
4584 it, sometimes in detail and sometimes briefly. If you are interested,
4585 you can get the full documentation of any Emacs Lisp function at any
4586 time by typing @kbd{C-h f} and then the name of the function (and then
4587 @key{RET}). Similarly, you can get the full documentation for a
4588 variable by typing @kbd{C-h v} and then the name of the variable (and
4589 then @key{RET}).
4590
4591 @cindex Find source of function
4592 @c In version 22, tells location both of C and of Emacs Lisp
4593 Also, @code{describe-function} will tell you the location of the
4594 function definition.
4595
4596 Put point into the name of the file that contains the function and
4597 press the @key{RET} key. In this case, @key{RET} means
4598 @code{push-button} rather than ``return'' or ``enter''. Emacs will take
4599 you directly to the function definition.
4600
4601 @ignore
4602 Not In version 22
4603
4604 If you move point over the file name and press
4605 the @key{RET} key, which in this case means @code{help-follow} rather
4606 than ``return'' or ``enter'', Emacs will take you directly to the function
4607 definition.
4608 @end ignore
4609
4610 More generally, if you want to see a function in its original source
4611 file, you can use the @code{find-tag} function to jump to it.
4612 @code{find-tag} works with a wide variety of languages, not just
4613 Lisp, and C, and it works with non-programming text as well. For
4614 example, @code{find-tag} will jump to the various nodes in the
4615 Texinfo source file of this document.
4616 The @code{find-tag} function depends on ``tags tables'' that record
4617 the locations of the functions, variables, and other items to which
4618 @code{find-tag} jumps.
4619
4620 To use the @code{find-tag} command, type @kbd{M-.} (i.e., press the
4621 period key while holding down the @key{META} key, or else type the
4622 @key{ESC} key and then type the period key), and then, at the prompt,
4623 type in the name of the function whose source code you want to see,
4624 such as @code{mark-whole-buffer}, and then type @key{RET}. Emacs will
4625 switch buffers and display the source code for the function on your
4626 screen. To switch back to your current buffer, type @kbd{C-x b
4627 @key{RET}}. (On some keyboards, the @key{META} key is labeled
4628 @key{ALT}.)
4629
4630 @c !!! 22.1.1 tags table location in this paragraph
4631 @cindex TAGS table, specifying
4632 @findex find-tag
4633 Depending on how the initial default values of your copy of Emacs are
4634 set, you may also need to specify the location of your ``tags table'',
4635 which is a file called @file{TAGS}. For example, if you are
4636 interested in Emacs sources, the tags table you will most likely want,
4637 if it has already been created for you, will be in a subdirectory of
4638 the @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/} directory; thus you would use the
4639 @code{M-x visit-tags-table} command and specify a pathname such as
4640 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/TAGS}. If the tags table
4641 has not already been created, you will have to create it yourself. It
4642 will be in a file such as @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}.
4643
4644 @need 1250
4645 To create a @file{TAGS} file in a specific directory, switch to that
4646 directory in Emacs using @kbd{M-x cd} command, or list the directory
4647 with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the compile command, with
4648 @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute:
4649
4650 @smallexample
4651 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
4652 @end smallexample
4653
4654 For more information, see @ref{etags, , Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File}.
4655
4656 After you become more familiar with Emacs Lisp, you will find that you will
4657 frequently use @code{find-tag} to navigate your way around source code;
4658 and you will create your own @file{TAGS} tables.
4659
4660 @cindex Library, as term for ``file''
4661 Incidentally, the files that contain Lisp code are conventionally
4662 called @dfn{libraries}. The metaphor is derived from that of a
4663 specialized library, such as a law library or an engineering library,
4664 rather than a general library. Each library, or file, contains
4665 functions that relate to a particular topic or activity, such as
4666 @file{abbrev.el} for handling abbreviations and other typing
4667 shortcuts, and @file{help.el} for help. (Sometimes several
4668 libraries provide code for a single activity, as the various
4669 @file{rmail@dots{}} files provide code for reading electronic mail.)
4670 In @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}, you will see sentences such as ``The
4671 @kbd{C-h p} command lets you search the standard Emacs Lisp libraries
4672 by topic keywords.''
4673
4674 @node simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4675 @section A Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition
4676 @findex simplified-beginning-of-buffer
4677
4678 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} command is a good function to start with
4679 since you are likely to be familiar with it and it is easy to
4680 understand. Used as an interactive command, @code{beginning-of-buffer}
4681 moves the cursor to the beginning of the buffer, leaving the mark at the
4682 previous position. It is generally bound to @kbd{M-<}.
4683
4684 In this section, we will discuss a shortened version of the function
4685 that shows how it is most frequently used. This shortened function
4686 works as written, but it does not contain the code for a complex option.
4687 In another section, we will describe the entire function.
4688 (@xref{beginning-of-buffer, , Complete Definition of
4689 @code{beginning-of-buffer}}.)
4690
4691 Before looking at the code, let's consider what the function
4692 definition has to contain: it must include an expression that makes
4693 the function interactive so it can be called by typing @kbd{M-x
4694 beginning-of-buffer} or by typing a keychord such as @kbd{M-<}; it
4695 must include code to leave a mark at the original position in the
4696 buffer; and it must include code to move the cursor to the beginning
4697 of the buffer.
4698
4699 @need 1250
4700 Here is the complete text of the shortened version of the function:
4701
4702 @smallexample
4703 @group
4704 (defun simplified-beginning-of-buffer ()
4705 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
4706 leave mark at previous position."
4707 (interactive)
4708 (push-mark)
4709 (goto-char (point-min)))
4710 @end group
4711 @end smallexample
4712
4713 Like all function definitions, this definition has five parts following
4714 the macro @code{defun}:
4715
4716 @enumerate
4717 @item
4718 The name: in this example, @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}.
4719
4720 @item
4721 A list of the arguments: in this example, an empty list, @code{()},
4722
4723 @item
4724 The documentation string.
4725
4726 @item
4727 The interactive expression.
4728
4729 @item
4730 The body.
4731 @end enumerate
4732
4733 @noindent
4734 In this function definition, the argument list is empty; this means that
4735 this function does not require any arguments. (When we look at the
4736 definition for the complete function, we will see that it may be passed
4737 an optional argument.)
4738
4739 The interactive expression tells Emacs that the function is intended to
4740 be used interactively. In this example, @code{interactive} does not have
4741 an argument because @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} does not
4742 require one.
4743
4744 @need 800
4745 The body of the function consists of the two lines:
4746
4747 @smallexample
4748 @group
4749 (push-mark)
4750 (goto-char (point-min))
4751 @end group
4752 @end smallexample
4753
4754 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark)}. When
4755 this expression is evaluated by the Lisp interpreter, it sets a mark at
4756 the current position of the cursor, wherever that may be. The position
4757 of this mark is saved in the mark ring.
4758
4759 The next line is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}. This expression
4760 jumps the cursor to the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the
4761 beginning of the buffer (or to the beginning of the accessible portion
4762 of the buffer if it is narrowed. @xref{Narrowing & Widening, ,
4763 Narrowing and Widening}.)
4764
4765 The @code{push-mark} command sets a mark at the place where the cursor
4766 was located before it was moved to the beginning of the buffer by the
4767 @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression. Consequently, you can, if
4768 you wish, go back to where you were originally by typing @kbd{C-x C-x}.
4769
4770 That is all there is to the function definition!
4771
4772 @findex describe-function
4773 When you are reading code such as this and come upon an unfamiliar
4774 function, such as @code{goto-char}, you can find out what it does by
4775 using the @code{describe-function} command. To use this command, type
4776 @kbd{C-h f} and then type in the name of the function and press
4777 @key{RET}. The @code{describe-function} command will print the
4778 function's documentation string in a @file{*Help*} window. For
4779 example, the documentation for @code{goto-char} is:
4780
4781 @smallexample
4782 @group
4783 Set point to POSITION, a number or marker.
4784 Beginning of buffer is position (point-min), end is (point-max).
4785 @end group
4786 @end smallexample
4787
4788 @noindent
4789 The function's one argument is the desired position.
4790
4791 @noindent
4792 (The prompt for @code{describe-function} will offer you the symbol
4793 under or preceding the cursor, so you can save typing by positioning
4794 the cursor right over or after the function and then typing @kbd{C-h f
4795 @key{RET}}.)
4796
4797 The @code{end-of-buffer} function definition is written in the same way as
4798 the @code{beginning-of-buffer} definition except that the body of the
4799 function contains the expression @code{(goto-char (point-max))} in place
4800 of @code{(goto-char (point-min))}.
4801
4802 @node mark-whole-buffer
4803 @section The Definition of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4804 @findex mark-whole-buffer
4805
4806 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is no harder to understand than the
4807 @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function. In this case, however,
4808 we will look at the complete function, not a shortened version.
4809
4810 The @code{mark-whole-buffer} function is not as commonly used as the
4811 @code{beginning-of-buffer} function, but is useful nonetheless: it
4812 marks a whole buffer as a region by putting point at the beginning and
4813 a mark at the end of the buffer. It is generally bound to @kbd{C-x
4814 h}.
4815
4816 @menu
4817 * mark-whole-buffer overview::
4818 * Body of mark-whole-buffer:: Only three lines of code.
4819 @end menu
4820
4821 @ifnottex
4822 @node mark-whole-buffer overview
4823 @unnumberedsubsec An overview of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4824 @end ifnottex
4825
4826 @need 1250
4827 In GNU Emacs 22, the code for the complete function looks like this:
4828
4829 @smallexample
4830 @group
4831 (defun mark-whole-buffer ()
4832 "Put point at beginning and mark at end of buffer.
4833 You probably should not use this function in Lisp programs;
4834 it is usually a mistake for a Lisp function to use any subroutine
4835 that uses or sets the mark."
4836 (interactive)
4837 (push-mark (point))
4838 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4839 (goto-char (point-min)))
4840 @end group
4841 @end smallexample
4842
4843 @need 1250
4844 Like all other functions, the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function fits
4845 into the template for a function definition. The template looks like
4846 this:
4847
4848 @smallexample
4849 @group
4850 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
4851 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
4852 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
4853 @var{body}@dots{})
4854 @end group
4855 @end smallexample
4856
4857 Here is how the function works: the name of the function is
4858 @code{mark-whole-buffer}; it is followed by an empty argument list,
4859 @samp{()}, which means that the function does not require arguments.
4860 The documentation comes next.
4861
4862 The next line is an @code{(interactive)} expression that tells Emacs
4863 that the function will be used interactively. These details are similar
4864 to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function described in the
4865 previous section.
4866
4867 @need 1250
4868 @node Body of mark-whole-buffer
4869 @subsection Body of @code{mark-whole-buffer}
4870
4871 The body of the @code{mark-whole-buffer} function consists of three
4872 lines of code:
4873
4874 @c GNU Emacs 22
4875 @smallexample
4876 @group
4877 (push-mark (point))
4878 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4879 (goto-char (point-min))
4880 @end group
4881 @end smallexample
4882
4883 The first of these lines is the expression, @code{(push-mark (point))}.
4884
4885 This line does exactly the same job as the first line of the body of
4886 the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer} function, which is written
4887 @code{(push-mark)}. In both cases, the Lisp interpreter sets a mark
4888 at the current position of the cursor.
4889
4890 I don't know why the expression in @code{mark-whole-buffer} is written
4891 @code{(push-mark (point))} and the expression in
4892 @code{beginning-of-buffer} is written @code{(push-mark)}. Perhaps
4893 whoever wrote the code did not know that the arguments for
4894 @code{push-mark} are optional and that if @code{push-mark} is not
4895 passed an argument, the function automatically sets mark at the
4896 location of point by default. Or perhaps the expression was written
4897 so as to parallel the structure of the next line. In any case, the
4898 line causes Emacs to determine the position of point and set a mark
4899 there.
4900
4901 In earlier versions of GNU Emacs, the next line of
4902 @code{mark-whole-buffer} was @code{(push-mark (point-max))}. This
4903 expression sets a mark at the point in the buffer that has the highest
4904 number. This will be the end of the buffer (or, if the buffer is
4905 narrowed, the end of the accessible portion of the buffer.
4906 @xref{Narrowing & Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more about
4907 narrowing.) After this mark has been set, the previous mark, the one
4908 set at point, is no longer set, but Emacs remembers its position, just
4909 as all other recent marks are always remembered. This means that you
4910 can, if you wish, go back to that position by typing @kbd{C-u
4911 C-@key{SPC}} twice.
4912
4913 @need 1250
4914 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{(point-max)} is slightly more complicated.
4915 The line reads
4916
4917 @smallexample
4918 (push-mark (point-max) nil t)
4919 @end smallexample
4920
4921 @noindent
4922 The expression works nearly the same as before. It sets a mark at the
4923 highest numbered place in the buffer that it can. However, in this
4924 version, @code{push-mark} has two additional arguments. The second
4925 argument to @code{push-mark} is @code{nil}. This tells the function
4926 it @emph{should} display a message that says ``Mark set'' when it pushes
4927 the mark. The third argument is @code{t}. This tells
4928 @code{push-mark} to activate the mark when Transient Mark mode is
4929 turned on. Transient Mark mode highlights the currently active
4930 region. It is often turned off.
4931
4932 Finally, the last line of the function is @code{(goto-char
4933 (point-min)))}. This is written exactly the same way as it is written
4934 in @code{beginning-of-buffer}. The expression moves the cursor to
4935 the minimum point in the buffer, that is, to the beginning of the buffer
4936 (or to the beginning of the accessible portion of the buffer). As a
4937 result of this, point is placed at the beginning of the buffer and mark
4938 is set at the end of the buffer. The whole buffer is, therefore, the
4939 region.
4940
4941 @node append-to-buffer
4942 @section The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}
4943 @findex append-to-buffer
4944
4945 The @code{append-to-buffer} command is more complex than the
4946 @code{mark-whole-buffer} command. What it does is copy the region
4947 (that is, the part of the buffer between point and mark) from the
4948 current buffer to a specified buffer.
4949
4950 @menu
4951 * append-to-buffer overview::
4952 * append interactive:: A two part interactive expression.
4953 * append-to-buffer body:: Incorporates a @code{let} expression.
4954 * append save-excursion:: How the @code{save-excursion} works.
4955 @end menu
4956
4957 @ifnottex
4958 @node append-to-buffer overview
4959 @unnumberedsubsec An Overview of @code{append-to-buffer}
4960 @end ifnottex
4961
4962 @findex insert-buffer-substring
4963 The @code{append-to-buffer} command uses the
4964 @code{insert-buffer-substring} function to copy the region.
4965 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is described by its name: it takes a
4966 string of characters from part of a buffer, a ``substring'', and
4967 inserts them into another buffer.
4968
4969 Most of @code{append-to-buffer} is
4970 concerned with setting up the conditions for
4971 @code{insert-buffer-substring} to work: the code must specify both the
4972 buffer to which the text will go, the window it comes from and goes
4973 to, and the region that will be copied.
4974
4975 @need 1250
4976 Here is the complete text of the function:
4977
4978 @smallexample
4979 @group
4980 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
4981 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
4982 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
4983 @end group
4984
4985 @group
4986 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
4987 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
4988 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
4989 (interactive
4990 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer
4991 (current-buffer) t))
4992 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
4993 @end group
4994 @group
4995 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
4996 (save-excursion
4997 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
4998 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
4999 point)
5000 (set-buffer append-to)
5001 (setq point (point))
5002 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5003 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5004 (dolist (window windows)
5005 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5006 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5007 @end group
5008 @end smallexample
5009
5010 The function can be understood by looking at it as a series of
5011 filled-in templates.
5012
5013 The outermost template is for the function definition. In this
5014 function, it looks like this (with several slots filled in):
5015
5016 @smallexample
5017 @group
5018 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5019 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5020 (interactive @dots{})
5021 @var{body}@dots{})
5022 @end group
5023 @end smallexample
5024
5025 The first line of the function includes its name and three arguments.
5026 The arguments are the @code{buffer} to which the text will be copied, and
5027 the @code{start} and @code{end} of the region in the current buffer that
5028 will be copied.
5029
5030 The next part of the function is the documentation, which is clear and
5031 complete. As is conventional, the three arguments are written in
5032 upper case so you will notice them easily. Even better, they are
5033 described in the same order as in the argument list.
5034
5035 Note that the documentation distinguishes between a buffer and its
5036 name. (The function can handle either.)
5037
5038 @node append interactive
5039 @subsection The @code{append-to-buffer} Interactive Expression
5040
5041 Since the @code{append-to-buffer} function will be used interactively,
5042 the function must have an @code{interactive} expression. (For a
5043 review of @code{interactive}, see @ref{Interactive, , Making a
5044 Function Interactive}.) The expression reads as follows:
5045
5046 @smallexample
5047 @group
5048 (interactive
5049 (list (read-buffer
5050 "Append to buffer: "
5051 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5052 (region-beginning)
5053 (region-end)))
5054 @end group
5055 @end smallexample
5056
5057 @noindent
5058 This expression is not one with letters standing for parts, as
5059 described earlier. Instead, it starts a list with these parts:
5060
5061 The first part of the list is an expression to read the name of a
5062 buffer and return it as a string. That is @code{read-buffer}. The
5063 function requires a prompt as its first argument, @samp{"Append to
5064 buffer: "}. Its second argument tells the command what value to
5065 provide if you don't specify anything.
5066
5067 In this case that second argument is an expression containing the
5068 function @code{other-buffer}, an exception, and a @samp{t}, standing
5069 for true.
5070
5071 The first argument to @code{other-buffer}, the exception, is yet
5072 another function, @code{current-buffer}. That is not going to be
5073 returned. The second argument is the symbol for true, @code{t}. that
5074 tells @code{other-buffer} that it may show visible buffers (except in
5075 this case, it will not show the current buffer, which makes sense).
5076
5077 @need 1250
5078 The expression looks like this:
5079
5080 @smallexample
5081 (other-buffer (current-buffer) t)
5082 @end smallexample
5083
5084 The second and third arguments to the @code{list} expression are
5085 @code{(region-beginning)} and @code{(region-end)}. These two
5086 functions specify the beginning and end of the text to be appended.
5087
5088 @need 1250
5089 Originally, the command used the letters @samp{B} and @samp{r}.
5090 The whole @code{interactive} expression looked like this:
5091
5092 @smallexample
5093 (interactive "BAppend to buffer:@: \nr")
5094 @end smallexample
5095
5096 @noindent
5097 But when that was done, the default value of the buffer switched to
5098 was invisible. That was not wanted.
5099
5100 (The prompt was separated from the second argument with a newline,
5101 @samp{\n}. It was followed by an @samp{r} that told Emacs to bind the
5102 two arguments that follow the symbol @code{buffer} in the function's
5103 argument list (that is, @code{start} and @code{end}) to the values of
5104 point and mark. That argument worked fine.)
5105
5106 @node append-to-buffer body
5107 @subsection The Body of @code{append-to-buffer}
5108
5109 @ignore
5110 in GNU Emacs 22 in /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
5111
5112 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5113 "Append to specified buffer the text of the region.
5114 It is inserted into that buffer before its point.
5115
5116 When calling from a program, give three arguments:
5117 BUFFER (or buffer name), START and END.
5118 START and END specify the portion of the current buffer to be copied."
5119 (interactive
5120 (list (read-buffer "Append to buffer: " (other-buffer (current-buffer) t))
5121 (region-beginning) (region-end)))
5122 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5123 (save-excursion
5124 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5125 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5126 point)
5127 (set-buffer append-to)
5128 (setq point (point))
5129 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5130 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5131 (dolist (window windows)
5132 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5133 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5134 @end ignore
5135
5136 The body of the @code{append-to-buffer} function begins with @code{let}.
5137
5138 As we have seen before (@pxref{let, , @code{let}}), the purpose of a
5139 @code{let} expression is to create and give initial values to one or
5140 more variables that will only be used within the body of the
5141 @code{let}. This means that such a variable will not be confused with
5142 any variable of the same name outside the @code{let} expression.
5143
5144 We can see how the @code{let} expression fits into the function as a
5145 whole by showing a template for @code{append-to-buffer} with the
5146 @code{let} expression in outline:
5147
5148 @smallexample
5149 @group
5150 (defun append-to-buffer (buffer start end)
5151 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5152 (interactive @dots{})
5153 (let ((@var{variable} @var{value}))
5154 @var{body}@dots{})
5155 @end group
5156 @end smallexample
5157
5158 The @code{let} expression has three elements:
5159
5160 @enumerate
5161 @item
5162 The symbol @code{let};
5163
5164 @item
5165 A varlist containing, in this case, a single two-element list,
5166 @code{(@var{variable} @var{value})};
5167
5168 @item
5169 The body of the @code{let} expression.
5170 @end enumerate
5171
5172 @need 800
5173 In the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the varlist looks like this:
5174
5175 @smallexample
5176 (oldbuf (current-buffer))
5177 @end smallexample
5178
5179 @noindent
5180 In this part of the @code{let} expression, the one variable,
5181 @code{oldbuf}, is bound to the value returned by the
5182 @code{(current-buffer)} expression. The variable, @code{oldbuf}, is
5183 used to keep track of the buffer in which you are working and from
5184 which you will copy.
5185
5186 The element or elements of a varlist are surrounded by a set of
5187 parentheses so the Lisp interpreter can distinguish the varlist from
5188 the body of the @code{let}. As a consequence, the two-element list
5189 within the varlist is surrounded by a circumscribing set of parentheses.
5190 The line looks like this:
5191
5192 @smallexample
5193 @group
5194 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5195 @dots{} )
5196 @end group
5197 @end smallexample
5198
5199 @noindent
5200 The two parentheses before @code{oldbuf} might surprise you if you did
5201 not realize that the first parenthesis before @code{oldbuf} marks the
5202 boundary of the varlist and the second parenthesis marks the beginning
5203 of the two-element list, @code{(oldbuf (current-buffer))}.
5204
5205 @node append save-excursion
5206 @subsection @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}
5207
5208 The body of the @code{let} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}
5209 consists of a @code{save-excursion} expression.
5210
5211 The @code{save-excursion} function saves the location of point, and restores it
5212 to that position after the expressions in the
5213 body of the @code{save-excursion} complete execution. In addition,
5214 @code{save-excursion} keeps track of the original buffer, and
5215 restores it. This is how @code{save-excursion} is used in
5216 @code{append-to-buffer}.
5217
5218 @need 1500
5219 @cindex Indentation for formatting
5220 @cindex Formatting convention
5221 Incidentally, it is worth noting here that a Lisp function is normally
5222 formatted so that everything that is enclosed in a multi-line spread is
5223 indented more to the right than the first symbol. In this function
5224 definition, the @code{let} is indented more than the @code{defun}, and
5225 the @code{save-excursion} is indented more than the @code{let}, like
5226 this:
5227
5228 @smallexample
5229 @group
5230 (defun @dots{}
5231 @dots{}
5232 @dots{}
5233 (let@dots{}
5234 (save-excursion
5235 @dots{}
5236 @end group
5237 @end smallexample
5238
5239 @need 1500
5240 @noindent
5241 This formatting convention makes it easy to see that the lines in
5242 the body of the @code{save-excursion} are enclosed by the parentheses
5243 associated with @code{save-excursion}, just as the
5244 @code{save-excursion} itself is enclosed by the parentheses associated
5245 with the @code{let}:
5246
5247 @smallexample
5248 @group
5249 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5250 (save-excursion
5251 @dots{}
5252 (set-buffer @dots{})
5253 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5254 @dots{}))
5255 @end group
5256 @end smallexample
5257
5258 @need 1200
5259 The use of the @code{save-excursion} function can be viewed as a process
5260 of filling in the slots of a template:
5261
5262 @smallexample
5263 @group
5264 (save-excursion
5265 @var{first-expression-in-body}
5266 @var{second-expression-in-body}
5267 @dots{}
5268 @var{last-expression-in-body})
5269 @end group
5270 @end smallexample
5271
5272 @need 1200
5273 @noindent
5274 In this function, the body of the @code{save-excursion} contains only
5275 one expression, the @code{let*} expression. You know about a
5276 @code{let} function. The @code{let*} function is different. It has a
5277 @samp{*} in its name. It enables Emacs to set each variable in its
5278 varlist in sequence, one after another.
5279
5280 Its critical feature is that variables later in the varlist can make
5281 use of the values to which Emacs set variables earlier in the varlist.
5282 @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}.
5283
5284 We will skip functions like @code{let*} and focus on two: the
5285 @code{set-buffer} function and the @code{insert-buffer-substring}
5286 function.
5287
5288 @need 1250
5289 In the old days, the @code{set-buffer} expression was simply
5290
5291 @smallexample
5292 (set-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer))
5293 @end smallexample
5294
5295 @need 1250
5296 @noindent
5297 but now it is
5298
5299 @smallexample
5300 (set-buffer append-to)
5301 @end smallexample
5302
5303 @noindent
5304 @code{append-to} is bound to @code{(get-buffer-create buffer)} earlier
5305 on in the @code{let*} expression. That extra binding would not be
5306 necessary except for that @code{append-to} is used later in the
5307 varlist as an argument to @code{get-buffer-window-list}.
5308
5309 @ignore
5310 in GNU Emacs 22
5311
5312 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5313 (save-excursion
5314 (let* ((append-to (get-buffer-create buffer))
5315 (windows (get-buffer-window-list append-to t t))
5316 point)
5317 (set-buffer append-to)
5318 (setq point (point))
5319 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5320 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5321 (dolist (window windows)
5322 (when (= (window-point window) point)
5323 (set-window-point window (point))))))))
5324 @end ignore
5325
5326 The @code{append-to-buffer} function definition inserts text from the
5327 buffer in which you are currently to a named buffer. It happens that
5328 @code{insert-buffer-substring} copies text from another buffer to the
5329 current buffer, just the reverse---that is why the
5330 @code{append-to-buffer} definition starts out with a @code{let} that
5331 binds the local symbol @code{oldbuf} to the value returned by
5332 @code{current-buffer}.
5333
5334 @need 1250
5335 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression looks like this:
5336
5337 @smallexample
5338 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)
5339 @end smallexample
5340
5341 @noindent
5342 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies a string
5343 @emph{from} the buffer specified as its first argument and inserts the
5344 string into the present buffer. In this case, the argument to
5345 @code{insert-buffer-substring} is the value of the variable created
5346 and bound by the @code{let}, namely the value of @code{oldbuf}, which
5347 was the current buffer when you gave the @code{append-to-buffer}
5348 command.
5349
5350 After @code{insert-buffer-substring} has done its work,
5351 @code{save-excursion} will restore the action to the original buffer
5352 and @code{append-to-buffer} will have done its job.
5353
5354 @need 800
5355 Written in skeletal form, the workings of the body look like this:
5356
5357 @smallexample
5358 @group
5359 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5360 (save-excursion ; @r{Keep track of buffer.}
5361 @var{change-buffer}
5362 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})
5363
5364 @var{change-back-to-original-buffer-when-finished}
5365 @var{let-the-local-meaning-of-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-disappear-when-finished}
5366 @end group
5367 @end smallexample
5368
5369 In summary, @code{append-to-buffer} works as follows: it saves the
5370 value of the current buffer in the variable called @code{oldbuf}. It
5371 gets the new buffer (creating one if need be) and switches Emacs's
5372 attention to it. Using the value of @code{oldbuf}, it inserts the
5373 region of text from the old buffer into the new buffer; and then using
5374 @code{save-excursion}, it brings you back to your original buffer.
5375
5376 In looking at @code{append-to-buffer}, you have explored a fairly
5377 complex function. It shows how to use @code{let} and
5378 @code{save-excursion}, and how to change to and come back from another
5379 buffer. Many function definitions use @code{let},
5380 @code{save-excursion}, and @code{set-buffer} this way.
5381
5382 @node Buffer Related Review
5383 @section Review
5384
5385 Here is a brief summary of the various functions discussed in this chapter.
5386
5387 @table @code
5388 @item describe-function
5389 @itemx describe-variable
5390 Print the documentation for a function or variable.
5391 Conventionally bound to @kbd{C-h f} and @kbd{C-h v}.
5392
5393 @item find-tag
5394 Find the file containing the source for a function or variable and
5395 switch buffers to it, positioning point at the beginning of the item.
5396 Conventionally bound to @kbd{M-.} (that's a period following the
5397 @key{META} key).
5398
5399 @item save-excursion
5400 Save the location of point and restore its value after the
5401 arguments to @code{save-excursion} have been evaluated. Also, remember
5402 the current buffer and return to it.
5403
5404 @item push-mark
5405 Set mark at a location and record the value of the previous mark on the
5406 mark ring. The mark is a location in the buffer that will keep its
5407 relative position even if text is added to or removed from the buffer.
5408
5409 @item goto-char
5410 Set point to the location specified by the value of the argument, which
5411 can be a number, a marker, or an expression that returns the number of
5412 a position, such as @code{(point-min)}.
5413
5414 @item insert-buffer-substring
5415 Copy a region of text from a buffer that is passed to the function as
5416 an argument and insert the region into the current buffer.
5417
5418 @item mark-whole-buffer
5419 Mark the whole buffer as a region. Normally bound to @kbd{C-x h}.
5420
5421 @item set-buffer
5422 Switch the attention of Emacs to another buffer, but do not change the
5423 window being displayed. Used when the program rather than a human is
5424 to work on a different buffer.
5425
5426 @item get-buffer-create
5427 @itemx get-buffer
5428 Find a named buffer or create one if a buffer of that name does not
5429 exist. The @code{get-buffer} function returns @code{nil} if the named
5430 buffer does not exist.
5431 @end table
5432
5433 @need 1500
5434 @node Buffer Exercises
5435 @section Exercises
5436
5437 @itemize @bullet
5438 @item
5439 Write your own @code{simplified-end-of-buffer} function definition;
5440 then test it to see whether it works.
5441
5442 @item
5443 Use @code{if} and @code{get-buffer} to write a function that prints a
5444 message telling you whether a buffer exists.
5445
5446 @item
5447 Using @code{find-tag}, find the source for the @code{copy-to-buffer}
5448 function.
5449 @end itemize
5450
5451 @node More Complex
5452 @chapter A Few More Complex Functions
5453
5454 In this chapter, we build on what we have learned in previous chapters
5455 by looking at more complex functions. The @code{copy-to-buffer}
5456 function illustrates use of two @code{save-excursion} expressions in
5457 one definition, while the @code{insert-buffer} function illustrates
5458 use of an asterisk in an @code{interactive} expression, use of
5459 @code{or}, and the important distinction between a name and the object
5460 to which the name refers.
5461
5462 @menu
5463 * copy-to-buffer:: With @code{set-buffer}, @code{get-buffer-create}.
5464 * insert-buffer:: Read-only, and with @code{or}.
5465 * beginning-of-buffer:: Shows @code{goto-char},
5466 @code{point-min}, and @code{push-mark}.
5467 * Second Buffer Related Review::
5468 * optional Exercise::
5469 @end menu
5470
5471 @node copy-to-buffer
5472 @section The Definition of @code{copy-to-buffer}
5473 @findex copy-to-buffer
5474
5475 After understanding how @code{append-to-buffer} works, it is easy to
5476 understand @code{copy-to-buffer}. This function copies text into a
5477 buffer, but instead of adding to the second buffer, it replaces all the
5478 previous text in the second buffer.
5479
5480 @need 800
5481 The body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this,
5482
5483 @smallexample
5484 @group
5485 @dots{}
5486 (interactive "BCopy to buffer: \nr")
5487 (let ((oldbuf (current-buffer)))
5488 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer)
5489 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
5490 (erase-buffer)
5491 (save-excursion
5492 (insert-buffer-substring oldbuf start end)))))
5493 @end group
5494 @end smallexample
5495
5496 The @code{copy-to-buffer} function has a simpler @code{interactive}
5497 expression than @code{append-to-buffer}.
5498
5499 @need 800
5500 The definition then says
5501
5502 @smallexample
5503 (with-current-buffer (get-buffer-create buffer) @dots{}
5504 @end smallexample
5505
5506 First, look at the earliest inner expression; that is evaluated first.
5507 That expression starts with @code{get-buffer-create buffer}. The
5508 function tells the computer to use the buffer with the name specified
5509 as the one to which you are copying, or if such a buffer does not
5510 exist, to create it. Then, the @code{with-current-buffer} function
5511 evaluates its body with that buffer temporarily current.
5512
5513 (This demonstrates another way to shift the computer's attention but
5514 not the user's. The @code{append-to-buffer} function showed how to do
5515 the same with @code{save-excursion} and @code{set-buffer}.
5516 @code{with-current-buffer} is a newer, and arguably easier,
5517 mechanism.)
5518
5519 The @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} function sends you an error
5520 message saying the buffer is read-only if you cannot modify it.
5521
5522 The next line has the @code{erase-buffer} function as its sole
5523 contents. That function erases the buffer.
5524
5525 Finally, the last two lines contain the @code{save-excursion}
5526 expression with @code{insert-buffer-substring} as its body.
5527 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} expression copies the text from
5528 the buffer you are in (and you have not seen the computer shift its
5529 attention, so you don't know that that buffer is now called
5530 @code{oldbuf}).
5531
5532 Incidentally, this is what is meant by ``replacement''. To replace text,
5533 Emacs erases the previous text and then inserts new text.
5534
5535 @need 1250
5536 In outline, the body of @code{copy-to-buffer} looks like this:
5537
5538 @smallexample
5539 @group
5540 (let (@var{bind-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-to-value-of-}@code{current-buffer})
5541 (@var{with-the-buffer-you-are-copying-to}
5542 (@var{but-do-not-erase-or-copy-to-a-read-only-buffer})
5543 (erase-buffer)
5544 (save-excursion
5545 @var{insert-substring-from-}@code{oldbuf}@var{-into-buffer})))
5546 @end group
5547 @end smallexample
5548
5549 @node insert-buffer
5550 @section The Definition of @code{insert-buffer}
5551 @findex insert-buffer
5552
5553 @code{insert-buffer} is yet another buffer-related function. This
5554 command copies another buffer @emph{into} the current buffer. It is the
5555 reverse of @code{append-to-buffer} or @code{copy-to-buffer}, since they
5556 copy a region of text @emph{from} the current buffer to another buffer.
5557
5558 Here is a discussion based on the original code. The code was
5559 simplified in 2003 and is harder to understand.
5560
5561 (@xref{New insert-buffer, , New Body for @code{insert-buffer}}, to see
5562 a discussion of the new body.)
5563
5564 In addition, this code illustrates the use of @code{interactive} with a
5565 buffer that might be @dfn{read-only} and the important distinction
5566 between the name of an object and the object actually referred to.
5567
5568 @menu
5569 * insert-buffer code::
5570 * insert-buffer interactive:: When you can read, but not write.
5571 * insert-buffer body:: The body has an @code{or} and a @code{let}.
5572 * if & or:: Using an @code{if} instead of an @code{or}.
5573 * Insert or:: How the @code{or} expression works.
5574 * Insert let:: Two @code{save-excursion} expressions.
5575 * New insert-buffer::
5576 @end menu
5577
5578 @ifnottex
5579 @node insert-buffer code
5580 @unnumberedsubsec The Code for @code{insert-buffer}
5581 @end ifnottex
5582
5583 @need 800
5584 Here is the earlier code:
5585
5586 @smallexample
5587 @group
5588 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5589 "Insert after point the contents of BUFFER.
5590 Puts mark after the inserted text.
5591 BUFFER may be a buffer or a buffer name."
5592 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5593 @end group
5594 @group
5595 (or (bufferp buffer)
5596 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5597 (let (start end newmark)
5598 (save-excursion
5599 (save-excursion
5600 (set-buffer buffer)
5601 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5602 @end group
5603 @group
5604 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5605 (setq newmark (point)))
5606 (push-mark newmark)))
5607 @end group
5608 @end smallexample
5609
5610 @need 1200
5611 As with other function definitions, you can use a template to see an
5612 outline of the function:
5613
5614 @smallexample
5615 @group
5616 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5617 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5618 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5619 @var{body}@dots{})
5620 @end group
5621 @end smallexample
5622
5623 @node insert-buffer interactive
5624 @subsection The Interactive Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5625 @findex interactive, @r{example use of}
5626
5627 In @code{insert-buffer}, the argument to the @code{interactive}
5628 declaration has two parts, an asterisk, @samp{*}, and @samp{bInsert
5629 buffer:@: }.
5630
5631 @menu
5632 * Read-only buffer:: When a buffer cannot be modified.
5633 * b for interactive:: An existing buffer or else its name.
5634 @end menu
5635
5636 @node Read-only buffer
5637 @unnumberedsubsubsec A Read-only Buffer
5638 @cindex Read-only buffer
5639 @cindex Asterisk for read-only buffer
5640 @findex * @r{for read-only buffer}
5641
5642 The asterisk is for the situation when the current buffer is a
5643 read-only buffer---a buffer that cannot be modified. If
5644 @code{insert-buffer} is called when the current buffer is read-only, a
5645 message to this effect is printed in the echo area and the terminal
5646 may beep or blink at you; you will not be permitted to insert anything
5647 into current buffer. The asterisk does not need to be followed by a
5648 newline to separate it from the next argument.
5649
5650 @node b for interactive
5651 @unnumberedsubsubsec @samp{b} in an Interactive Expression
5652
5653 The next argument in the interactive expression starts with a lower
5654 case @samp{b}. (This is different from the code for
5655 @code{append-to-buffer}, which uses an upper-case @samp{B}.
5656 @xref{append-to-buffer, , The Definition of @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
5657 The lower-case @samp{b} tells the Lisp interpreter that the argument
5658 for @code{insert-buffer} should be an existing buffer or else its
5659 name. (The upper-case @samp{B} option provides for the possibility
5660 that the buffer does not exist.) Emacs will prompt you for the name
5661 of the buffer, offering you a default buffer, with name completion
5662 enabled. If the buffer does not exist, you receive a message that
5663 says ``No match''; your terminal may beep at you as well.
5664
5665 The new and simplified code generates a list for @code{interactive}.
5666 It uses the @code{barf-if-buffer-read-only} and @code{read-buffer}
5667 functions with which we are already familiar and the @code{progn}
5668 special form with which we are not. (It will be described later.)
5669
5670 @node insert-buffer body
5671 @subsection The Body of the @code{insert-buffer} Function
5672
5673 The body of the @code{insert-buffer} function has two major parts: an
5674 @code{or} expression and a @code{let} expression. The purpose of the
5675 @code{or} expression is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is
5676 bound to a buffer and not just the name of a buffer. The body of the
5677 @code{let} expression contains the code which copies the other buffer
5678 into the current buffer.
5679
5680 @need 1250
5681 In outline, the two expressions fit into the @code{insert-buffer}
5682 function like this:
5683
5684 @smallexample
5685 @group
5686 (defun insert-buffer (buffer)
5687 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
5688 (interactive "*bInsert buffer:@: ")
5689 (or @dots{}
5690 @dots{}
5691 @end group
5692 @group
5693 (let (@var{varlist})
5694 @var{body-of-}@code{let}@dots{} )
5695 @end group
5696 @end smallexample
5697
5698 To understand how the @code{or} expression ensures that the argument
5699 @code{buffer} is bound to a buffer and not to the name of a buffer, it
5700 is first necessary to understand the @code{or} function.
5701
5702 Before doing this, let me rewrite this part of the function using
5703 @code{if} so that you can see what is done in a manner that will be familiar.
5704
5705 @node if & or
5706 @subsection @code{insert-buffer} With an @code{if} Instead of an @code{or}
5707
5708 The job to be done is to make sure the value of @code{buffer} is a
5709 buffer itself and not the name of a buffer. If the value is the name,
5710 then the buffer itself must be got.
5711
5712 You can imagine yourself at a conference where an usher is wandering
5713 around holding a list with your name on it and looking for you: the
5714 usher is ``bound'' to your name, not to you; but when the usher finds
5715 you and takes your arm, the usher becomes ``bound'' to you.
5716
5717 @need 800
5718 In Lisp, you might describe this situation like this:
5719
5720 @smallexample
5721 @group
5722 (if (not (holding-on-to-guest))
5723 (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5724 @end group
5725 @end smallexample
5726
5727 We want to do the same thing with a buffer---if we do not have the
5728 buffer itself, we want to get it.
5729
5730 @need 1200
5731 Using a predicate called @code{bufferp} that tells us whether we have a
5732 buffer (rather than its name), we can write the code like this:
5733
5734 @smallexample
5735 @group
5736 (if (not (bufferp buffer)) ; @r{if-part}
5737 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))) ; @r{then-part}
5738 @end group
5739 @end smallexample
5740
5741 @noindent
5742 Here, the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression is
5743 @w{@code{(not (bufferp buffer))}}; and the then-part is the expression
5744 @w{@code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}}.
5745
5746 In the test, the function @code{bufferp} returns true if its argument is
5747 a buffer---but false if its argument is the name of the buffer. (The
5748 last character of the function name @code{bufferp} is the character
5749 @samp{p}; as we saw earlier, such use of @samp{p} is a convention that
5750 indicates that the function is a predicate, which is a term that means
5751 that the function will determine whether some property is true or false.
5752 @xref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong Type Object as an
5753 Argument}.)
5754
5755 @need 1200
5756 The function @code{not} precedes the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)},
5757 so the true-or-false-test looks like this:
5758
5759 @smallexample
5760 (not (bufferp buffer))
5761 @end smallexample
5762
5763 @noindent
5764 @code{not} is a function that returns true if its argument is false
5765 and false if its argument is true. So if @code{(bufferp buffer)}
5766 returns true, the @code{not} expression returns false and vice versa:
5767 what is ``not true'' is false and what is ``not false'' is true.
5768
5769 Using this test, the @code{if} expression works as follows: when the
5770 value of the variable @code{buffer} is actually a buffer rather than
5771 its name, the true-or-false-test returns false and the @code{if}
5772 expression does not evaluate the then-part. This is fine, since we do
5773 not need to do anything to the variable @code{buffer} if it really is
5774 a buffer.
5775
5776 On the other hand, when the value of @code{buffer} is not a buffer
5777 itself, but the name of a buffer, the true-or-false-test returns true
5778 and the then-part of the expression is evaluated. In this case, the
5779 then-part is @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer buffer))}. This
5780 expression uses the @code{get-buffer} function to return an actual
5781 buffer itself, given its name. The @code{setq} then sets the variable
5782 @code{buffer} to the value of the buffer itself, replacing its previous
5783 value (which was the name of the buffer).
5784
5785 @node Insert or
5786 @subsection The @code{or} in the Body
5787
5788 The purpose of the @code{or} expression in the @code{insert-buffer}
5789 function is to ensure that the argument @code{buffer} is bound to a
5790 buffer and not just to the name of a buffer. The previous section shows
5791 how the job could have been done using an @code{if} expression.
5792 However, the @code{insert-buffer} function actually uses @code{or}.
5793 To understand this, it is necessary to understand how @code{or} works.
5794
5795 @findex or
5796 An @code{or} function can have any number of arguments. It evaluates
5797 each argument in turn and returns the value of the first of its
5798 arguments that is not @code{nil}. Also, and this is a crucial feature
5799 of @code{or}, it does not evaluate any subsequent arguments after
5800 returning the first non-@code{nil} value.
5801
5802 @need 800
5803 The @code{or} expression looks like this:
5804
5805 @smallexample
5806 @group
5807 (or (bufferp buffer)
5808 (setq buffer (get-buffer buffer)))
5809 @end group
5810 @end smallexample
5811
5812 @noindent
5813 The first argument to @code{or} is the expression @code{(bufferp buffer)}.
5814 This expression returns true (a non-@code{nil} value) if the buffer is
5815 actually a buffer, and not just the name of a buffer. In the @code{or}
5816 expression, if this is the case, the @code{or} expression returns this
5817 true value and does not evaluate the next expression---and this is fine
5818 with us, since we do not want to do anything to the value of
5819 @code{buffer} if it really is a buffer.
5820
5821 On the other hand, if the value of @code{(bufferp buffer)} is @code{nil},
5822 which it will be if the value of @code{buffer} is the name of a buffer,
5823 the Lisp interpreter evaluates the next element of the @code{or}
5824 expression. This is the expression @code{(setq buffer (get-buffer
5825 buffer))}. This expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, which
5826 is the value to which it sets the variable @code{buffer}---and this
5827 value is a buffer itself, not the name of a buffer.
5828
5829 The result of all this is that the symbol @code{buffer} is always
5830 bound to a buffer itself rather than to the name of a buffer. All
5831 this is necessary because the @code{set-buffer} function in a
5832 following line only works with a buffer itself, not with the name to a
5833 buffer.
5834
5835 @need 1250
5836 Incidentally, using @code{or}, the situation with the usher would be
5837 written like this:
5838
5839 @smallexample
5840 (or (holding-on-to-guest) (find-and-take-arm-of-guest))
5841 @end smallexample
5842
5843 @node Insert let
5844 @subsection The @code{let} Expression in @code{insert-buffer}
5845
5846 After ensuring that the variable @code{buffer} refers to a buffer itself
5847 and not just to the name of a buffer, the @code{insert-buffer function}
5848 continues with a @code{let} expression. This specifies three local
5849 variables, @code{start}, @code{end}, and @code{newmark} and binds them
5850 to the initial value @code{nil}. These variables are used inside the
5851 remainder of the @code{let} and temporarily hide any other occurrence of
5852 variables of the same name in Emacs until the end of the @code{let}.
5853
5854 @need 1200
5855 The body of the @code{let} contains two @code{save-excursion}
5856 expressions. First, we will look at the inner @code{save-excursion}
5857 expression in detail. The expression looks like this:
5858
5859 @smallexample
5860 @group
5861 (save-excursion
5862 (set-buffer buffer)
5863 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5864 @end group
5865 @end smallexample
5866
5867 @noindent
5868 The expression @code{(set-buffer buffer)} changes Emacs's attention
5869 from the current buffer to the one from which the text will copied.
5870 In that buffer, the variables @code{start} and @code{end} are set to
5871 the beginning and end of the buffer, using the commands
5872 @code{point-min} and @code{point-max}. Note that we have here an
5873 illustration of how @code{setq} is able to set two variables in the
5874 same expression. The first argument of @code{setq} is set to the
5875 value of its second, and its third argument is set to the value of its
5876 fourth.
5877
5878 After the body of the inner @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, the
5879 @code{save-excursion} restores the original buffer, but @code{start} and
5880 @code{end} remain set to the values of the beginning and end of the
5881 buffer from which the text will be copied.
5882
5883 @need 1250
5884 The outer @code{save-excursion} expression looks like this:
5885
5886 @smallexample
5887 @group
5888 (save-excursion
5889 (@var{inner-}@code{save-excursion}@var{-expression}
5890 (@var{go-to-new-buffer-and-set-}@code{start}@var{-and-}@code{end})
5891 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5892 (setq newmark (point)))
5893 @end group
5894 @end smallexample
5895
5896 @noindent
5897 The @code{insert-buffer-substring} function copies the text
5898 @emph{into} the current buffer @emph{from} the region indicated by
5899 @code{start} and @code{end} in @code{buffer}. Since the whole of the
5900 second buffer lies between @code{start} and @code{end}, the whole of
5901 the second buffer is copied into the buffer you are editing. Next,
5902 the value of point, which will be at the end of the inserted text, is
5903 recorded in the variable @code{newmark}.
5904
5905 After the body of the outer @code{save-excursion} is evaluated, point
5906 is relocated to its original place.
5907
5908 However, it is convenient to locate a mark at the end of the newly
5909 inserted text and locate point at its beginning. The @code{newmark}
5910 variable records the end of the inserted text. In the last line of
5911 the @code{let} expression, the @code{(push-mark newmark)} expression
5912 function sets a mark to this location. (The previous location of the
5913 mark is still accessible; it is recorded on the mark ring and you can
5914 go back to it with @kbd{C-u C-@key{SPC}}.) Meanwhile, point is
5915 located at the beginning of the inserted text, which is where it was
5916 before you called the insert function, the position of which was saved
5917 by the first @code{save-excursion}.
5918
5919 @need 1250
5920 The whole @code{let} expression looks like this:
5921
5922 @smallexample
5923 @group
5924 (let (start end newmark)
5925 (save-excursion
5926 (save-excursion
5927 (set-buffer buffer)
5928 (setq start (point-min) end (point-max)))
5929 (insert-buffer-substring buffer start end)
5930 (setq newmark (point)))
5931 (push-mark newmark))
5932 @end group
5933 @end smallexample
5934
5935 Like the @code{append-to-buffer} function, the @code{insert-buffer}
5936 function uses @code{let}, @code{save-excursion}, and
5937 @code{set-buffer}. In addition, the function illustrates one way to
5938 use @code{or}. All these functions are building blocks that we will
5939 find and use again and again.
5940
5941 @node New insert-buffer
5942 @subsection New Body for @code{insert-buffer}
5943 @findex insert-buffer, new version body
5944 @findex new version body for insert-buffer
5945
5946 The body in the GNU Emacs 22 version is more confusing than the original.
5947
5948 @need 1250
5949 It consists of two expressions,
5950
5951 @smallexample
5952 @group
5953 (push-mark
5954 (save-excursion
5955 (insert-buffer-substring (get-buffer buffer))
5956 (point)))
5957
5958 nil
5959 @end group
5960 @end smallexample
5961
5962 @noindent
5963 except, and this is what confuses novices, very important work is done
5964 inside the @code{push-mark} expression.
5965
5966 The @code{get-buffer} function returns a buffer with the name
5967 provided. You will note that the function is @emph{not} called
5968 @code{get-buffer-create}; it does not create a buffer if one does not
5969 already exist. The buffer returned by @code{get-buffer}, an existing
5970 buffer, is passed to @code{insert-buffer-substring}, which inserts the
5971 whole of the buffer (since you did not specify anything else).
5972
5973 The location into which the buffer is inserted is recorded by
5974 @code{push-mark}. Then the function returns @code{nil}, the value of
5975 its last command. Put another way, the @code{insert-buffer} function
5976 exists only to produce a side effect, inserting another buffer, not to
5977 return any value.
5978
5979 @node beginning-of-buffer
5980 @section Complete Definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
5981 @findex beginning-of-buffer
5982
5983 The basic structure of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function has
5984 already been discussed. (@xref{simplified-beginning-of-buffer, , A
5985 Simplified @code{beginning-of-buffer} Definition}.)
5986 This section describes the complex part of the definition.
5987
5988 As previously described, when invoked without an argument,
5989 @code{beginning-of-buffer} moves the cursor to the beginning of the
5990 buffer (in truth, the beginning of the accessible portion of the
5991 buffer), leaving the mark at the previous position. However, when the
5992 command is invoked with a number between one and ten, the function
5993 considers that number to be a fraction of the length of the buffer,
5994 measured in tenths, and Emacs moves the cursor that fraction of the
5995 way from the beginning of the buffer. Thus, you can either call this
5996 function with the key command @kbd{M-<}, which will move the cursor to
5997 the beginning of the buffer, or with a key command such as @kbd{C-u 7
5998 M-<} which will move the cursor to a point 70% of the way through the
5999 buffer. If a number bigger than ten is used for the argument, it
6000 moves to the end of the buffer.
6001
6002 The @code{beginning-of-buffer} function can be called with or without an
6003 argument. The use of the argument is optional.
6004
6005 @menu
6006 * Optional Arguments::
6007 * beginning-of-buffer opt arg:: Example with optional argument.
6008 * beginning-of-buffer complete::
6009 @end menu
6010
6011 @node Optional Arguments
6012 @subsection Optional Arguments
6013
6014 Unless told otherwise, Lisp expects that a function with an argument in
6015 its function definition will be called with a value for that argument.
6016 If that does not happen, you get an error and a message that says
6017 @samp{Wrong number of arguments}.
6018
6019 @cindex Optional arguments
6020 @cindex Keyword
6021 @findex optional
6022 However, optional arguments are a feature of Lisp: a particular
6023 @dfn{keyword} is used to tell the Lisp interpreter that an argument is
6024 optional. The keyword is @code{&optional}. (The @samp{&} in front of
6025 @samp{optional} is part of the keyword.) In a function definition, if
6026 an argument follows the keyword @code{&optional}, no value need be
6027 passed to that argument when the function is called.
6028
6029 @need 1200
6030 The first line of the function definition of @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6031 therefore looks like this:
6032
6033 @smallexample
6034 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6035 @end smallexample
6036
6037 @need 1250
6038 In outline, the whole function looks like this:
6039
6040 @smallexample
6041 @group
6042 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6043 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
6044 (interactive "P")
6045 (or (@var{is-the-argument-a-cons-cell} arg)
6046 (and @var{are-both-transient-mark-mode-and-mark-active-true})
6047 (push-mark))
6048 (let (@var{determine-size-and-set-it})
6049 (goto-char
6050 (@var{if-there-is-an-argument}
6051 @var{figure-out-where-to-go}
6052 @var{else-go-to}
6053 (point-min))))
6054 @var{do-nicety}
6055 @end group
6056 @end smallexample
6057
6058 The function is similar to the @code{simplified-beginning-of-buffer}
6059 function except that the @code{interactive} expression has @code{"P"}
6060 as an argument and the @code{goto-char} function is followed by an
6061 if-then-else expression that figures out where to put the cursor if
6062 there is an argument that is not a cons cell.
6063
6064 (Since I do not explain a cons cell for many more chapters, please
6065 consider ignoring the function @code{consp}. @xref{List
6066 Implementation, , How Lists are Implemented}, and @ref{Cons Cell Type,
6067 , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6068 Manual}.)
6069
6070 The @code{"P"} in the @code{interactive} expression tells Emacs to
6071 pass a prefix argument, if there is one, to the function in raw form.
6072 A prefix argument is made by typing the @key{META} key followed by a
6073 number, or by typing @kbd{C-u} and then a number. (If you don't type
6074 a number, @kbd{C-u} defaults to a cons cell with a 4. A lowercase
6075 @code{"p"} in the @code{interactive} expression causes the function to
6076 convert a prefix arg to a number.)
6077
6078 The true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression looks complex, but
6079 it is not: it checks whether @code{arg} has a value that is not
6080 @code{nil} and whether it is a cons cell. (That is what @code{consp}
6081 does; it checks whether its argument is a cons cell.) If @code{arg}
6082 has a value that is not @code{nil} (and is not a cons cell), which
6083 will be the case if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with a
6084 numeric argument, then this true-or-false-test will return true and
6085 the then-part of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. On the
6086 other hand, if @code{beginning-of-buffer} is not called with an
6087 argument, the value of @code{arg} will be @code{nil} and the else-part
6088 of the @code{if} expression will be evaluated. The else-part is
6089 simply @code{point-min}, and when this is the outcome, the whole
6090 @code{goto-char} expression is @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, which
6091 is how we saw the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function in its
6092 simplified form.
6093
6094 @node beginning-of-buffer opt arg
6095 @subsection @code{beginning-of-buffer} with an Argument
6096
6097 When @code{beginning-of-buffer} is called with an argument, an
6098 expression is evaluated which calculates what value to pass to
6099 @code{goto-char}. This expression is rather complicated at first sight.
6100 It includes an inner @code{if} expression and much arithmetic. It looks
6101 like this:
6102
6103 @smallexample
6104 @group
6105 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6106 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6107 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6108 (/ size 10))
6109 (/
6110 (+ 10
6111 (*
6112 size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10)))
6113 @end group
6114 @end smallexample
6115
6116 @menu
6117 * Disentangle beginning-of-buffer::
6118 * Large buffer case::
6119 * Small buffer case::
6120 @end menu
6121
6122 @ifnottex
6123 @node Disentangle beginning-of-buffer
6124 @unnumberedsubsubsec Disentangle @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6125 @end ifnottex
6126
6127 Like other complex-looking expressions, the conditional expression
6128 within @code{beginning-of-buffer} can be disentangled by looking at it
6129 as parts of a template, in this case, the template for an if-then-else
6130 expression. In skeletal form, the expression looks like this:
6131
6132 @smallexample
6133 @group
6134 (if (@var{buffer-is-large}
6135 @var{divide-buffer-size-by-10-and-multiply-by-arg}
6136 @var{else-use-alternate-calculation}
6137 @end group
6138 @end smallexample
6139
6140 The true-or-false-test of this inner @code{if} expression checks the
6141 size of the buffer. The reason for this is that the old version 18
6142 Emacs used numbers that are no bigger than eight million or so and in
6143 the computation that followed, the programmer feared that Emacs might
6144 try to use over-large numbers if the buffer were large. The term
6145 ``overflow'', mentioned in the comment, means numbers that are over
6146 large. More recent versions of Emacs use larger numbers, but this
6147 code has not been touched, if only because people now look at buffers
6148 that are far, far larger than ever before.
6149
6150 There are two cases: if the buffer is large and if it is not.
6151
6152 @node Large buffer case
6153 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a large buffer
6154
6155 In @code{beginning-of-buffer}, the inner @code{if} expression tests
6156 whether the size of the buffer is greater than 10,000 characters. To do
6157 this, it uses the @code{>} function and the computation of @code{size}
6158 that comes from the let expression.
6159
6160 In the old days, the function @code{buffer-size} was used. Not only
6161 was that function called several times, it gave the size of the whole
6162 buffer, not the accessible part. The computation makes much more
6163 sense when it handles just the accessible part. (@xref{Narrowing &
6164 Widening, , Narrowing and Widening}, for more information on focusing
6165 attention to an ``accessible'' part.)
6166
6167 @need 800
6168 The line looks like this:
6169
6170 @smallexample
6171 (if (> size 10000)
6172 @end smallexample
6173
6174 @need 1200
6175 @noindent
6176 When the buffer is large, the then-part of the @code{if} expression is
6177 evaluated. It reads like this (after formatting for easy reading):
6178
6179 @smallexample
6180 @group
6181 (*
6182 (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6183 (/ size 10))
6184 @end group
6185 @end smallexample
6186
6187 @noindent
6188 This expression is a multiplication, with two arguments to the function
6189 @code{*}.
6190
6191 The first argument is @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}. When
6192 @code{"P"} is used as the argument for @code{interactive}, the value
6193 passed to the function as its argument is passed a ``raw prefix
6194 argument'', and not a number. (It is a number in a list.) To perform
6195 the arithmetic, a conversion is necessary, and
6196 @code{prefix-numeric-value} does the job.
6197
6198 @findex / @r{(division)}
6199 @cindex Division
6200 The second argument is @code{(/ size 10)}. This expression divides
6201 the numeric value by ten---the numeric value of the size of the
6202 accessible portion of the buffer. This produces a number that tells
6203 how many characters make up one tenth of the buffer size. (In Lisp,
6204 @code{/} is used for division, just as @code{*} is used for
6205 multiplication.)
6206
6207 @need 1200
6208 In the multiplication expression as a whole, this amount is multiplied
6209 by the value of the prefix argument---the multiplication looks like this:
6210
6211 @smallexample
6212 @group
6213 (* @var{numeric-value-of-prefix-arg}
6214 @var{number-of-characters-in-one-tenth-of-the-accessible-buffer})
6215 @end group
6216 @end smallexample
6217
6218 @noindent
6219 If, for example, the prefix argument is @samp{7}, the one-tenth value
6220 will be multiplied by 7 to give a position 70% of the way through.
6221
6222 @need 1200
6223 The result of all this is that if the accessible portion of the buffer
6224 is large, the @code{goto-char} expression reads like this:
6225
6226 @smallexample
6227 @group
6228 (goto-char (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6229 (/ size 10)))
6230 @end group
6231 @end smallexample
6232
6233 This puts the cursor where we want it.
6234
6235 @node Small buffer case
6236 @unnumberedsubsubsec What happens in a small buffer
6237
6238 If the buffer contains fewer than 10,000 characters, a slightly
6239 different computation is performed. You might think this is not
6240 necessary, since the first computation could do the job. However, in
6241 a small buffer, the first method may not put the cursor on exactly the
6242 desired line; the second method does a better job.
6243
6244 @need 800
6245 The code looks like this:
6246
6247 @c Keep this on one line.
6248 @smallexample
6249 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))) 10))
6250 @end smallexample
6251
6252 @need 1200
6253 @noindent
6254 This is code in which you figure out what happens by discovering how the
6255 functions are embedded in parentheses. It is easier to read if you
6256 reformat it with each expression indented more deeply than its
6257 enclosing expression:
6258
6259 @smallexample
6260 @group
6261 (/
6262 (+ 10
6263 (*
6264 size
6265 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6266 10))
6267 @end group
6268 @end smallexample
6269
6270 @need 1200
6271 @noindent
6272 Looking at parentheses, we see that the innermost operation is
6273 @code{(prefix-numeric-value arg)}, which converts the raw argument to
6274 a number. In the following expression, this number is multiplied by
6275 the size of the accessible portion of the buffer:
6276
6277 @smallexample
6278 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg))
6279 @end smallexample
6280
6281 @noindent
6282 This multiplication creates a number that may be larger than the size of
6283 the buffer---seven times larger if the argument is 7, for example. Ten
6284 is then added to this number and finally the large number is divided by
6285 ten to provide a value that is one character larger than the percentage
6286 position in the buffer.
6287
6288 The number that results from all this is passed to @code{goto-char} and
6289 the cursor is moved to that point.
6290
6291 @need 1500
6292 @node beginning-of-buffer complete
6293 @subsection The Complete @code{beginning-of-buffer}
6294
6295 @need 1000
6296 Here is the complete text of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} function:
6297 @sp 1
6298
6299 @c In GNU Emacs 22
6300 @smallexample
6301 @group
6302 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6303 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6304 leave mark at previous position.
6305 With \\[universal-argument] prefix,
6306 do not set mark at previous position.
6307 With numeric arg N,
6308 put point N/10 of the way from the beginning.
6309
6310 If the buffer is narrowed,
6311 this command uses the beginning and size
6312 of the accessible part of the buffer.
6313 @end group
6314
6315 @group
6316 Don't use this command in Lisp programs!
6317 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6318 and avoids clobbering the mark."
6319 (interactive "P")
6320 (or (consp arg)
6321 (and transient-mark-mode mark-active)
6322 (push-mark))
6323 @end group
6324 @group
6325 (let ((size (- (point-max) (point-min))))
6326 (goto-char (if (and arg (not (consp arg)))
6327 (+ (point-min)
6328 (if (> size 10000)
6329 ;; Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!
6330 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6331 (/ size 10))
6332 (/ (+ 10 (* size (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6333 10)))
6334 (point-min))))
6335 (if (and arg (not (consp arg))) (forward-line 1)))
6336 @end group
6337 @end smallexample
6338
6339 @ignore
6340 From before GNU Emacs 22
6341 @smallexample
6342 @group
6343 (defun beginning-of-buffer (&optional arg)
6344 "Move point to the beginning of the buffer;
6345 leave mark at previous position.
6346 With arg N, put point N/10 of the way
6347 from the true beginning.
6348 @end group
6349 @group
6350 Don't use this in Lisp programs!
6351 \(goto-char (point-min)) is faster
6352 and does not set the mark."
6353 (interactive "P")
6354 (push-mark)
6355 @end group
6356 @group
6357 (goto-char
6358 (if arg
6359 (if (> (buffer-size) 10000)
6360 ;; @r{Avoid overflow for large buffer sizes!}
6361 (* (prefix-numeric-value arg)
6362 (/ (buffer-size) 10))
6363 @end group
6364 @group
6365 (/ (+ 10 (* (buffer-size)
6366 (prefix-numeric-value arg)))
6367 10))
6368 (point-min)))
6369 (if arg (forward-line 1)))
6370 @end group
6371 @end smallexample
6372 @end ignore
6373
6374 @noindent
6375 Except for two small points, the previous discussion shows how this
6376 function works. The first point deals with a detail in the
6377 documentation string, and the second point concerns the last line of
6378 the function.
6379
6380 @need 800
6381 In the documentation string, there is reference to an expression:
6382
6383 @smallexample
6384 \\[universal-argument]
6385 @end smallexample
6386
6387 @noindent
6388 A @samp{\\} is used before the first square bracket of this
6389 expression. This @samp{\\} tells the Lisp interpreter to substitute
6390 whatever key is currently bound to the @samp{[@dots{}]}. In the case
6391 of @code{universal-argument}, that is usually @kbd{C-u}, but it might
6392 be different. (@xref{Documentation Tips, , Tips for Documentation
6393 Strings, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
6394 information.)
6395
6396 @need 1200
6397 Finally, the last line of the @code{beginning-of-buffer} command says
6398 to move point to the beginning of the next line if the command is
6399 invoked with an argument:
6400
6401 @smallexample
6402 (if (and arg (not (consp arg))) (forward-line 1))
6403 @end smallexample
6404
6405 @noindent
6406 This puts the cursor at the beginning of the first line after the
6407 appropriate tenths position in the buffer. This is a flourish that
6408 means that the cursor is always located @emph{at least} the requested
6409 tenths of the way through the buffer, which is a nicety that is,
6410 perhaps, not necessary, but which, if it did not occur, would be sure
6411 to draw complaints. (The @code{(not (consp arg))} portion is so that
6412 if you specify the command with a @kbd{C-u}, but without a number,
6413 that is to say, if the ``raw prefix argument'' is simply a cons cell,
6414 the command does not put you at the beginning of the second line.)
6415
6416 @node Second Buffer Related Review
6417 @section Review
6418
6419 Here is a brief summary of some of the topics covered in this chapter.
6420
6421 @table @code
6422 @item or
6423 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and return the value of the first
6424 argument that is not @code{nil}; if none return a value that is not
6425 @code{nil}, return @code{nil}. In brief, return the first true value
6426 of the arguments; return a true value if one @emph{or} any of the
6427 others are true.
6428
6429 @item and
6430 Evaluate each argument in sequence, and if any are @code{nil}, return
6431 @code{nil}; if none are @code{nil}, return the value of the last
6432 argument. In brief, return a true value only if all the arguments are
6433 true; return a true value if one @emph{and} each of the others is
6434 true.
6435
6436 @item &optional
6437 A keyword used to indicate that an argument to a function definition
6438 is optional; this means that the function can be evaluated without the
6439 argument, if desired.
6440
6441 @item prefix-numeric-value
6442 Convert the ``raw prefix argument'' produced by @code{(interactive
6443 "P")} to a numeric value.
6444
6445 @item forward-line
6446 Move point forward to the beginning of the next line, or if the argument
6447 is greater than one, forward that many lines. If it can't move as far
6448 forward as it is supposed to, @code{forward-line} goes forward as far as
6449 it can and then returns a count of the number of additional lines it was
6450 supposed to move but couldn't.
6451
6452 @item erase-buffer
6453 Delete the entire contents of the current buffer.
6454
6455 @item bufferp
6456 Return @code{t} if its argument is a buffer; otherwise return @code{nil}.
6457 @end table
6458
6459 @node optional Exercise
6460 @section @code{optional} Argument Exercise
6461
6462 Write an interactive function with an optional argument that tests
6463 whether its argument, a number, is greater than or equal to, or else,
6464 less than the value of @code{fill-column}, and tells you which, in a
6465 message. However, if you do not pass an argument to the function, use
6466 56 as a default value.
6467
6468 @node Narrowing & Widening
6469 @chapter Narrowing and Widening
6470 @cindex Focusing attention (narrowing)
6471 @cindex Narrowing
6472 @cindex Widening
6473
6474 Narrowing is a feature of Emacs that makes it possible for you to focus
6475 on a specific part of a buffer, and work without accidentally changing
6476 other parts. Narrowing is normally disabled since it can confuse
6477 novices.
6478
6479 @menu
6480 * Narrowing advantages:: The advantages of narrowing
6481 * save-restriction:: The @code{save-restriction} special form.
6482 * what-line:: The number of the line that point is on.
6483 * narrow Exercise::
6484 @end menu
6485
6486 @ifnottex
6487 @node Narrowing advantages
6488 @unnumberedsec The Advantages of Narrowing
6489 @end ifnottex
6490
6491 With narrowing, the rest of a buffer is made invisible, as if it weren't
6492 there. This is an advantage if, for example, you want to replace a word
6493 in one part of a buffer but not in another: you narrow to the part you want
6494 and the replacement is carried out only in that section, not in the rest
6495 of the buffer. Searches will only work within a narrowed region, not
6496 outside of one, so if you are fixing a part of a document, you can keep
6497 yourself from accidentally finding parts you do not need to fix by
6498 narrowing just to the region you want.
6499 (The key binding for @code{narrow-to-region} is @kbd{C-x n n}.)
6500
6501 However, narrowing does make the rest of the buffer invisible, which
6502 can scare people who inadvertently invoke narrowing and think they
6503 have deleted a part of their file. Moreover, the @code{undo} command
6504 (which is usually bound to @kbd{C-x u}) does not turn off narrowing
6505 (nor should it), so people can become quite desperate if they do not
6506 know that they can return the rest of a buffer to visibility with the
6507 @code{widen} command.
6508 (The key binding for @code{widen} is @kbd{C-x n w}.)
6509
6510 Narrowing is just as useful to the Lisp interpreter as to a human.
6511 Often, an Emacs Lisp function is designed to work on just part of a
6512 buffer; or conversely, an Emacs Lisp function needs to work on all of a
6513 buffer that has been narrowed. The @code{what-line} function, for
6514 example, removes the narrowing from a buffer, if it has any narrowing
6515 and when it has finished its job, restores the narrowing to what it was.
6516 On the other hand, the @code{count-lines} function
6517 uses narrowing to restrict itself to just that portion
6518 of the buffer in which it is interested and then restores the previous
6519 situation.
6520
6521 @node save-restriction
6522 @section The @code{save-restriction} Special Form
6523 @findex save-restriction
6524
6525 In Emacs Lisp, you can use the @code{save-restriction} special form to
6526 keep track of whatever narrowing is in effect, if any. When the Lisp
6527 interpreter meets with @code{save-restriction}, it executes the code
6528 in the body of the @code{save-restriction} expression, and then undoes
6529 any changes to narrowing that the code caused. If, for example, the
6530 buffer is narrowed and the code that follows @code{save-restriction}
6531 gets rid of the narrowing, @code{save-restriction} returns the buffer
6532 to its narrowed region afterwards. In the @code{what-line} command,
6533 any narrowing the buffer may have is undone by the @code{widen}
6534 command that immediately follows the @code{save-restriction} command.
6535 Any original narrowing is restored just before the completion of the
6536 function.
6537
6538 @need 1250
6539 The template for a @code{save-restriction} expression is simple:
6540
6541 @smallexample
6542 @group
6543 (save-restriction
6544 @var{body}@dots{} )
6545 @end group
6546 @end smallexample
6547
6548 @noindent
6549 The body of the @code{save-restriction} is one or more expressions that
6550 will be evaluated in sequence by the Lisp interpreter.
6551
6552 Finally, a point to note: when you use both @code{save-excursion} and
6553 @code{save-restriction}, one right after the other, you should use
6554 @code{save-excursion} outermost. If you write them in reverse order,
6555 you may fail to record narrowing in the buffer to which Emacs switches
6556 after calling @code{save-excursion}. Thus, when written together,
6557 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} should be written
6558 like this:
6559
6560 @smallexample
6561 @group
6562 (save-excursion
6563 (save-restriction
6564 @var{body}@dots{}))
6565 @end group
6566 @end smallexample
6567
6568 In other circumstances, when not written together, the
6569 @code{save-excursion} and @code{save-restriction} special forms must
6570 be written in the order appropriate to the function.
6571
6572 @need 1250
6573 For example,
6574
6575 @smallexample
6576 @group
6577 (save-restriction
6578 (widen)
6579 (save-excursion
6580 @var{body}@dots{}))
6581 @end group
6582 @end smallexample
6583
6584 @ignore
6585 Emacs 22
6586 /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/simple.el
6587
6588 (defun what-line ()
6589 "Print the current buffer line number and narrowed line number of point."
6590 (interactive)
6591 (let ((start (point-min))
6592 (n (line-number-at-pos)))
6593 (if (= start 1)
6594 (message "Line %d" n)
6595 (save-excursion
6596 (save-restriction
6597 (widen)
6598 (message "line %d (narrowed line %d)"
6599 (+ n (line-number-at-pos start) -1) n))))))
6600
6601 (defun line-number-at-pos (&optional pos)
6602 "Return (narrowed) buffer line number at position POS.
6603 If POS is nil, use current buffer location.
6604 Counting starts at (point-min), so the value refers
6605 to the contents of the accessible portion of the buffer."
6606 (let ((opoint (or pos (point))) start)
6607 (save-excursion
6608 (goto-char (point-min))
6609 (setq start (point))
6610 (goto-char opoint)
6611 (forward-line 0)
6612 (1+ (count-lines start (point))))))
6613
6614 (defun count-lines (start end)
6615 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6616 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6617 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6618 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6619 (save-excursion
6620 (save-restriction
6621 (narrow-to-region start end)
6622 (goto-char (point-min))
6623 (if (eq selective-display t)
6624 (save-match-data
6625 (let ((done 0))
6626 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6627 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6628 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6629 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6630 (goto-char (point-max))
6631 (if (and (/= start end)
6632 (not (bolp)))
6633 (1+ done)
6634 done)))
6635 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6636 @end ignore
6637
6638 @node what-line
6639 @section @code{what-line}
6640 @findex what-line
6641 @cindex Widening, example of
6642
6643 The @code{what-line} command tells you the number of the line in which
6644 the cursor is located. The function illustrates the use of the
6645 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} commands. Here is the
6646 original text of the function:
6647
6648 @smallexample
6649 @group
6650 (defun what-line ()
6651 "Print the current line number (in the buffer) of point."
6652 (interactive)
6653 (save-restriction
6654 (widen)
6655 (save-excursion
6656 (beginning-of-line)
6657 (message "Line %d"
6658 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6659 @end group
6660 @end smallexample
6661
6662 (In recent versions of GNU Emacs, the @code{what-line} function has
6663 been expanded to tell you your line number in a narrowed buffer as
6664 well as your line number in a widened buffer. The recent version is
6665 more complex than the version shown here. If you feel adventurous,
6666 you might want to look at it after figuring out how this version
6667 works. You will probably need to use @kbd{C-h f}
6668 (@code{describe-function}). The newer version uses a conditional to
6669 determine whether the buffer has been narrowed.
6670
6671 (Also, it uses @code{line-number-at-pos}, which among other simple
6672 expressions, such as @code{(goto-char (point-min))}, moves point to
6673 the beginning of the current line with @code{(forward-line 0)} rather
6674 than @code{beginning-of-line}.)
6675
6676 The @code{what-line} function as shown here has a documentation line
6677 and is interactive, as you would expect. The next two lines use the
6678 functions @code{save-restriction} and @code{widen}.
6679
6680 The @code{save-restriction} special form notes whatever narrowing is in
6681 effect, if any, in the current buffer and restores that narrowing after
6682 the code in the body of the @code{save-restriction} has been evaluated.
6683
6684 The @code{save-restriction} special form is followed by @code{widen}.
6685 This function undoes any narrowing the current buffer may have had
6686 when @code{what-line} was called. (The narrowing that was there is
6687 the narrowing that @code{save-restriction} remembers.) This widening
6688 makes it possible for the line counting commands to count from the
6689 beginning of the buffer. Otherwise, they would have been limited to
6690 counting within the accessible region. Any original narrowing is
6691 restored just before the completion of the function by the
6692 @code{save-restriction} special form.
6693
6694 The call to @code{widen} is followed by @code{save-excursion}, which
6695 saves the location of the cursor (i.e., of point), and
6696 restores it after the code in the body of the @code{save-excursion}
6697 uses the @code{beginning-of-line} function to move point.
6698
6699 (Note that the @code{(widen)} expression comes between the
6700 @code{save-restriction} and @code{save-excursion} special forms. When
6701 you write the two @code{save- @dots{}} expressions in sequence, write
6702 @code{save-excursion} outermost.)
6703
6704 @need 1200
6705 The last two lines of the @code{what-line} function are functions to
6706 count the number of lines in the buffer and then print the number in the
6707 echo area.
6708
6709 @smallexample
6710 @group
6711 (message "Line %d"
6712 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))))))
6713 @end group
6714 @end smallexample
6715
6716 The @code{message} function prints a one-line message at the bottom of
6717 the Emacs screen. The first argument is inside of quotation marks and
6718 is printed as a string of characters. However, it may contain a
6719 @samp{%d} expression to print a following argument. @samp{%d} prints
6720 the argument as a decimal, so the message will say something such as
6721 @samp{Line 243}.
6722
6723 @need 1200
6724 The number that is printed in place of the @samp{%d} is computed by the
6725 last line of the function:
6726
6727 @smallexample
6728 (1+ (count-lines 1 (point)))
6729 @end smallexample
6730
6731 @ignore
6732 GNU Emacs 22
6733
6734 (defun count-lines (start end)
6735 "Return number of lines between START and END.
6736 This is usually the number of newlines between them,
6737 but can be one more if START is not equal to END
6738 and the greater of them is not at the start of a line."
6739 (save-excursion
6740 (save-restriction
6741 (narrow-to-region start end)
6742 (goto-char (point-min))
6743 (if (eq selective-display t)
6744 (save-match-data
6745 (let ((done 0))
6746 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 40)
6747 (setq done (+ 40 done)))
6748 (while (re-search-forward "[\n\C-m]" nil t 1)
6749 (setq done (+ 1 done)))
6750 (goto-char (point-max))
6751 (if (and (/= start end)
6752 (not (bolp)))
6753 (1+ done)
6754 done)))
6755 (- (buffer-size) (forward-line (buffer-size)))))))
6756 @end ignore
6757
6758 @noindent
6759 What this does is count the lines from the first position of the
6760 buffer, indicated by the @code{1}, up to @code{(point)}, and then add
6761 one to that number. (The @code{1+} function adds one to its
6762 argument.) We add one to it because line 2 has only one line before
6763 it, and @code{count-lines} counts only the lines @emph{before} the
6764 current line.
6765
6766 After @code{count-lines} has done its job, and the message has been
6767 printed in the echo area, the @code{save-excursion} restores point to
6768 its original position; and @code{save-restriction} restores
6769 the original narrowing, if any.
6770
6771 @node narrow Exercise
6772 @section Exercise with Narrowing
6773
6774 Write a function that will display the first 60 characters of the
6775 current buffer, even if you have narrowed the buffer to its latter
6776 half so that the first line is inaccessible. Restore point, mark, and
6777 narrowing. For this exercise, you need to use a whole potpourri of
6778 functions, including @code{save-restriction}, @code{widen},
6779 @code{goto-char}, @code{point-min}, @code{message}, and
6780 @code{buffer-substring}.
6781
6782 @cindex Properties, mention of @code{buffer-substring-no-properties}
6783 (@code{buffer-substring} is a previously unmentioned function you will
6784 have to investigate yourself; or perhaps you will have to use
6785 @code{buffer-substring-no-properties} or
6786 @code{filter-buffer-substring} @dots{}, yet other functions. Text
6787 properties are a feature otherwise not discussed here. @xref{Text
6788 Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
6789 Manual}.)
6790
6791 Additionally, do you really need @code{goto-char} or @code{point-min}?
6792 Or can you write the function without them?
6793
6794 @node car cdr & cons
6795 @chapter @code{car}, @code{cdr}, @code{cons}: Fundamental Functions
6796 @findex car, @r{introduced}
6797 @findex cdr, @r{introduced}
6798
6799 In Lisp, @code{car}, @code{cdr}, and @code{cons} are fundamental
6800 functions. The @code{cons} function is used to construct lists, and
6801 the @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used to take them apart.
6802
6803 In the walk through of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function, we
6804 will see @code{cons} as well as two variants on @code{cdr},
6805 namely, @code{setcdr} and @code{nthcdr}. (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
6806
6807 @menu
6808 * Strange Names:: An historical aside: why the strange names?
6809 * car & cdr:: Functions for extracting part of a list.
6810 * cons:: Constructing a list.
6811 * nthcdr:: Calling @code{cdr} repeatedly.
6812 * nth::
6813 * setcar:: Changing the first element of a list.
6814 * setcdr:: Changing the rest of a list.
6815 * cons Exercise::
6816 @end menu
6817
6818 @ifnottex
6819 @node Strange Names
6820 @unnumberedsec Strange Names
6821 @end ifnottex
6822
6823 The name of the @code{cons} function is not unreasonable: it is an
6824 abbreviation of the word ``construct''. The origins of the names for
6825 @code{car} and @code{cdr}, on the other hand, are esoteric: @code{car}
6826 is an acronym from the phrase ``Contents of the Address part of the
6827 Register''; and @code{cdr} (pronounced ``could-er'') is an acronym from
6828 the phrase ``Contents of the Decrement part of the Register''. These
6829 phrases refer to specific pieces of hardware on the very early
6830 computer on which the original Lisp was developed. Besides being
6831 obsolete, the phrases have been completely irrelevant for more than 25
6832 years to anyone thinking about Lisp. Nonetheless, although a few
6833 brave scholars have begun to use more reasonable names for these
6834 functions, the old terms are still in use. In particular, since the
6835 terms are used in the Emacs Lisp source code, we will use them in this
6836 introduction.
6837
6838 @node car & cdr
6839 @section @code{car} and @code{cdr}
6840
6841 The @sc{car} of a list is, quite simply, the first item in the list.
6842 Thus the @sc{car} of the list @code{(rose violet daisy buttercup)} is
6843 @code{rose}.
6844
6845 @need 1200
6846 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can see this by
6847 evaluating the following:
6848
6849 @smallexample
6850 (car '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
6851 @end smallexample
6852
6853 @noindent
6854 After evaluating the expression, @code{rose} will appear in the echo
6855 area.
6856
6857 Clearly, a more reasonable name for the @code{car} function would be
6858 @code{first} and this is often suggested.
6859
6860 @code{car} does not remove the first item from the list; it only reports
6861 what it is. After @code{car} has been applied to a list, the list is
6862 still the same as it was. In the jargon, @code{car} is
6863 ``non-destructive''. This feature turns out to be important.
6864
6865 The @sc{cdr} of a list is the rest of the list, that is, the
6866 @code{cdr} function returns the part of the list that follows the
6867 first item. Thus, while the @sc{car} of the list @code{'(rose violet
6868 daisy buttercup)} is @code{rose}, the rest of the list, the value
6869 returned by the @code{cdr} function, is @code{(violet daisy
6870 buttercup)}.
6871
6872 @need 800
6873 You can see this by evaluating the following in the usual way:
6874
6875 @smallexample
6876 (cdr '(rose violet daisy buttercup))
6877 @end smallexample
6878
6879 @noindent
6880 When you evaluate this, @code{(violet daisy buttercup)} will appear in
6881 the echo area.
6882
6883 Like @code{car}, @code{cdr} does not remove any elements from the
6884 list---it just returns a report of what the second and subsequent
6885 elements are.
6886
6887 Incidentally, in the example, the list of flowers is quoted. If it were
6888 not, the Lisp interpreter would try to evaluate the list by calling
6889 @code{rose} as a function. In this example, we do not want to do that.
6890
6891 Clearly, a more reasonable name for @code{cdr} would be @code{rest}.
6892
6893 (There is a lesson here: when you name new functions, consider very
6894 carefully what you are doing, since you may be stuck with the names
6895 for far longer than you expect. The reason this document perpetuates
6896 these names is that the Emacs Lisp source code uses them, and if I did
6897 not use them, you would have a hard time reading the code; but do,
6898 please, try to avoid using these terms yourself. The people who come
6899 after you will be grateful to you.)
6900
6901 When @code{car} and @code{cdr} are applied to a list made up of symbols,
6902 such as the list @code{(pine fir oak maple)}, the element of the list
6903 returned by the function @code{car} is the symbol @code{pine} without
6904 any parentheses around it. @code{pine} is the first element in the
6905 list. However, the @sc{cdr} of the list is a list itself, @code{(fir
6906 oak maple)}, as you can see by evaluating the following expressions in
6907 the usual way:
6908
6909 @smallexample
6910 @group
6911 (car '(pine fir oak maple))
6912
6913 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
6914 @end group
6915 @end smallexample
6916
6917 On the other hand, in a list of lists, the first element is itself a
6918 list. @code{car} returns this first element as a list. For example,
6919 the following list contains three sub-lists, a list of carnivores, a
6920 list of herbivores and a list of sea mammals:
6921
6922 @smallexample
6923 @group
6924 (car '((lion tiger cheetah)
6925 (gazelle antelope zebra)
6926 (whale dolphin seal)))
6927 @end group
6928 @end smallexample
6929
6930 @noindent
6931 In this example, the first element or @sc{car} of the list is the list of
6932 carnivores, @code{(lion tiger cheetah)}, and the rest of the list is
6933 @code{((gazelle antelope zebra) (whale dolphin seal))}.
6934
6935 @smallexample
6936 @group
6937 (cdr '((lion tiger cheetah)
6938 (gazelle antelope zebra)
6939 (whale dolphin seal)))
6940 @end group
6941 @end smallexample
6942
6943 It is worth saying again that @code{car} and @code{cdr} are
6944 non-destructive---that is, they do not modify or change lists to which
6945 they are applied. This is very important for how they are used.
6946
6947 Also, in the first chapter, in the discussion about atoms, I said that
6948 in Lisp, ``certain kinds of atom, such as an array, can be separated
6949 into parts; but the mechanism for doing this is different from the
6950 mechanism for splitting a list. As far as Lisp is concerned, the
6951 atoms of a list are unsplittable.'' (@xref{Lisp Atoms}.) The
6952 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions are used for splitting lists and
6953 are considered fundamental to Lisp. Since they cannot split or gain
6954 access to the parts of an array, an array is considered an atom.
6955 Conversely, the other fundamental function, @code{cons}, can put
6956 together or construct a list, but not an array. (Arrays are handled
6957 by array-specific functions. @xref{Arrays, , Arrays, elisp, The GNU
6958 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
6959
6960 @node cons
6961 @section @code{cons}
6962 @findex cons, @r{introduced}
6963
6964 The @code{cons} function constructs lists; it is the inverse of
6965 @code{car} and @code{cdr}. For example, @code{cons} can be used to make
6966 a four element list from the three element list, @code{(fir oak maple)}:
6967
6968 @smallexample
6969 (cons 'pine '(fir oak maple))
6970 @end smallexample
6971
6972 @need 800
6973 @noindent
6974 After evaluating this list, you will see
6975
6976 @smallexample
6977 (pine fir oak maple)
6978 @end smallexample
6979
6980 @noindent
6981 appear in the echo area. @code{cons} causes the creation of a new
6982 list in which the element is followed by the elements of the original
6983 list.
6984
6985 We often say that ``@code{cons} puts a new element at the beginning of
6986 a list; it attaches or pushes elements onto the list'', but this
6987 phrasing can be misleading, since @code{cons} does not change an
6988 existing list, but creates a new one.
6989
6990 Like @code{car} and @code{cdr}, @code{cons} is non-destructive.
6991
6992 @menu
6993 * Build a list::
6994 * length:: How to find the length of a list.
6995 @end menu
6996
6997 @ifnottex
6998 @node Build a list
6999 @unnumberedsubsec Build a list
7000 @end ifnottex
7001
7002 @code{cons} must have a list to attach to.@footnote{Actually, you can
7003 @code{cons} an element to an atom to produce a dotted pair. Dotted
7004 pairs are not discussed here; see @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted
7005 Pair Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.} You
7006 cannot start from absolutely nothing. If you are building a list, you
7007 need to provide at least an empty list at the beginning. Here is a
7008 series of @code{cons} expressions that build up a list of flowers. If
7009 you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can evaluate each of
7010 the expressions in the usual way; the value is printed in this text
7011 after @samp{@result{}}, which you may read as ``evaluates to''.
7012
7013 @smallexample
7014 @group
7015 (cons 'buttercup ())
7016 @result{} (buttercup)
7017 @end group
7018
7019 @group
7020 (cons 'daisy '(buttercup))
7021 @result{} (daisy buttercup)
7022 @end group
7023
7024 @group
7025 (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup))
7026 @result{} (violet daisy buttercup)
7027 @end group
7028
7029 @group
7030 (cons 'rose '(violet daisy buttercup))
7031 @result{} (rose violet daisy buttercup)
7032 @end group
7033 @end smallexample
7034
7035 @noindent
7036 In the first example, the empty list is shown as @code{()} and a list
7037 made up of @code{buttercup} followed by the empty list is constructed.
7038 As you can see, the empty list is not shown in the list that was
7039 constructed. All that you see is @code{(buttercup)}. The empty list is
7040 not counted as an element of a list because there is nothing in an empty
7041 list. Generally speaking, an empty list is invisible.
7042
7043 The second example, @code{(cons 'daisy '(buttercup))} constructs a new,
7044 two element list by putting @code{daisy} in front of @code{buttercup};
7045 and the third example constructs a three element list by putting
7046 @code{violet} in front of @code{daisy} and @code{buttercup}.
7047
7048 @node length
7049 @subsection Find the Length of a List: @code{length}
7050 @findex length
7051
7052 You can find out how many elements there are in a list by using the Lisp
7053 function @code{length}, as in the following examples:
7054
7055 @smallexample
7056 @group
7057 (length '(buttercup))
7058 @result{} 1
7059 @end group
7060
7061 @group
7062 (length '(daisy buttercup))
7063 @result{} 2
7064 @end group
7065
7066 @group
7067 (length (cons 'violet '(daisy buttercup)))
7068 @result{} 3
7069 @end group
7070 @end smallexample
7071
7072 @noindent
7073 In the third example, the @code{cons} function is used to construct a
7074 three element list which is then passed to the @code{length} function as
7075 its argument.
7076
7077 @need 1200
7078 We can also use @code{length} to count the number of elements in an
7079 empty list:
7080
7081 @smallexample
7082 @group
7083 (length ())
7084 @result{} 0
7085 @end group
7086 @end smallexample
7087
7088 @noindent
7089 As you would expect, the number of elements in an empty list is zero.
7090
7091 An interesting experiment is to find out what happens if you try to find
7092 the length of no list at all; that is, if you try to call @code{length}
7093 without giving it an argument, not even an empty list:
7094
7095 @smallexample
7096 (length )
7097 @end smallexample
7098
7099 @need 800
7100 @noindent
7101 What you see, if you evaluate this, is the error message
7102
7103 @smallexample
7104 Lisp error: (wrong-number-of-arguments length 0)
7105 @end smallexample
7106
7107 @noindent
7108 This means that the function receives the wrong number of
7109 arguments, zero, when it expects some other number of arguments. In
7110 this case, one argument is expected, the argument being a list whose
7111 length the function is measuring. (Note that @emph{one} list is
7112 @emph{one} argument, even if the list has many elements inside it.)
7113
7114 The part of the error message that says @samp{length} is the name of
7115 the function.
7116
7117 @ignore
7118 @code{length} is still a subroutine, but you need C-h f to discover that.
7119
7120 In an earlier version:
7121 This is written with a special notation, @samp{#<subr},
7122 that indicates that the function @code{length} is one of the primitive
7123 functions written in C rather than in Emacs Lisp. (@samp{subr} is an
7124 abbreviation for ``subroutine''.) @xref{What Is a Function, , What Is a
7125 Function?, elisp , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
7126 about subroutines.
7127 @end ignore
7128
7129 @node nthcdr
7130 @section @code{nthcdr}
7131 @findex nthcdr
7132
7133 The @code{nthcdr} function is associated with the @code{cdr} function.
7134 What it does is take the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7135
7136 If you take the @sc{cdr} of the list @code{(pine fir
7137 oak maple)}, you will be returned the list @code{(fir oak maple)}. If you
7138 repeat this on what was returned, you will be returned the list
7139 @code{(oak maple)}. (Of course, repeated @sc{cdr}ing on the original
7140 list will just give you the original @sc{cdr} since the function does
7141 not change the list. You need to evaluate the @sc{cdr} of the
7142 @sc{cdr} and so on.) If you continue this, eventually you will be
7143 returned an empty list, which in this case, instead of being shown as
7144 @code{()} is shown as @code{nil}.
7145
7146 @need 1200
7147 For review, here is a series of repeated @sc{cdr}s, the text following
7148 the @samp{@result{}} shows what is returned.
7149
7150 @smallexample
7151 @group
7152 (cdr '(pine fir oak maple))
7153 @result{}(fir oak maple)
7154 @end group
7155
7156 @group
7157 (cdr '(fir oak maple))
7158 @result{} (oak maple)
7159 @end group
7160
7161 @group
7162 (cdr '(oak maple))
7163 @result{}(maple)
7164 @end group
7165
7166 @group
7167 (cdr '(maple))
7168 @result{} nil
7169 @end group
7170
7171 @group
7172 (cdr 'nil)
7173 @result{} nil
7174 @end group
7175
7176 @group
7177 (cdr ())
7178 @result{} nil
7179 @end group
7180 @end smallexample
7181
7182 @need 1200
7183 You can also do several @sc{cdr}s without printing the values in
7184 between, like this:
7185
7186 @smallexample
7187 @group
7188 (cdr (cdr '(pine fir oak maple)))
7189 @result{} (oak maple)
7190 @end group
7191 @end smallexample
7192
7193 @noindent
7194 In this example, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the innermost list first.
7195 The innermost list is quoted, so it just passes the list as it is to the
7196 innermost @code{cdr}. This @code{cdr} passes a list made up of the
7197 second and subsequent elements of the list to the outermost @code{cdr},
7198 which produces a list composed of the third and subsequent elements of
7199 the original list. In this example, the @code{cdr} function is repeated
7200 and returns a list that consists of the original list without its
7201 first two elements.
7202
7203 The @code{nthcdr} function does the same as repeating the call to
7204 @code{cdr}. In the following example, the argument 2 is passed to the
7205 function @code{nthcdr}, along with the list, and the value returned is
7206 the list without its first two items, which is exactly the same
7207 as repeating @code{cdr} twice on the list:
7208
7209 @smallexample
7210 @group
7211 (nthcdr 2 '(pine fir oak maple))
7212 @result{} (oak maple)
7213 @end group
7214 @end smallexample
7215
7216 @need 1200
7217 Using the original four element list, we can see what happens when
7218 various numeric arguments are passed to @code{nthcdr}, including 0, 1,
7219 and 5:
7220
7221 @smallexample
7222 @group
7223 ;; @r{Leave the list as it was.}
7224 (nthcdr 0 '(pine fir oak maple))
7225 @result{} (pine fir oak maple)
7226 @end group
7227
7228 @group
7229 ;; @r{Return a copy without the first element.}
7230 (nthcdr 1 '(pine fir oak maple))
7231 @result{} (fir oak maple)
7232 @end group
7233
7234 @group
7235 ;; @r{Return a copy of the list without three elements.}
7236 (nthcdr 3 '(pine fir oak maple))
7237 @result{} (maple)
7238 @end group
7239
7240 @group
7241 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all four elements.}
7242 (nthcdr 4 '(pine fir oak maple))
7243 @result{} nil
7244 @end group
7245
7246 @group
7247 ;; @r{Return a copy lacking all elements.}
7248 (nthcdr 5 '(pine fir oak maple))
7249 @result{} nil
7250 @end group
7251 @end smallexample
7252
7253 @node nth
7254 @section @code{nth}
7255 @findex nth
7256
7257 The @code{nthcdr} function takes the @sc{cdr} of a list repeatedly.
7258 The @code{nth} function takes the @sc{car} of the result returned by
7259 @code{nthcdr}. It returns the Nth element of the list.
7260
7261 @need 1500
7262 Thus, if it were not defined in C for speed, the definition of
7263 @code{nth} would be:
7264
7265 @smallexample
7266 @group
7267 (defun nth (n list)
7268 "Returns the Nth element of LIST.
7269 N counts from zero. If LIST is not that long, nil is returned."
7270 (car (nthcdr n list)))
7271 @end group
7272 @end smallexample
7273
7274 @noindent
7275 (Originally, @code{nth} was defined in Emacs Lisp in @file{subr.el},
7276 but its definition was redone in C in the 1980s.)
7277
7278 The @code{nth} function returns a single element of a list.
7279 This can be very convenient.
7280
7281 Note that the elements are numbered from zero, not one. That is to
7282 say, the first element of a list, its @sc{car} is the zeroth element.
7283 This is called ``zero-based'' counting and often bothers people who
7284 are accustomed to the first element in a list being number one, which
7285 is ``one-based''.
7286
7287 @need 1250
7288 For example:
7289
7290 @smallexample
7291 @group
7292 (nth 0 '("one" "two" "three"))
7293 @result{} "one"
7294
7295 (nth 1 '("one" "two" "three"))
7296 @result{} "two"
7297 @end group
7298 @end smallexample
7299
7300 It is worth mentioning that @code{nth}, like @code{nthcdr} and
7301 @code{cdr}, does not change the original list---the function is
7302 non-destructive. This is in sharp contrast to the @code{setcar} and
7303 @code{setcdr} functions.
7304
7305 @node setcar
7306 @section @code{setcar}
7307 @findex setcar
7308
7309 As you might guess from their names, the @code{setcar} and @code{setcdr}
7310 functions set the @sc{car} or the @sc{cdr} of a list to a new value.
7311 They actually change the original list, unlike @code{car} and @code{cdr}
7312 which leave the original list as it was. One way to find out how this
7313 works is to experiment. We will start with the @code{setcar} function.
7314
7315 @need 1200
7316 First, we can make a list and then set the value of a variable to the
7317 list, using the @code{setq} function. Here is a list of animals:
7318
7319 @smallexample
7320 (setq animals '(antelope giraffe lion tiger))
7321 @end smallexample
7322
7323 @noindent
7324 If you are reading this in Info inside of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate
7325 this expression in the usual fashion, by positioning the cursor after
7326 the expression and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}. (I'm doing this right here
7327 as I write this. This is one of the advantages of having the
7328 interpreter built into the computing environment. Incidentally, when
7329 there is nothing on the line after the final parentheses, such as a
7330 comment, point can be on the next line. Thus, if your cursor is in
7331 the first column of the next line, you do not need to move it.
7332 Indeed, Emacs permits any amount of white space after the final
7333 parenthesis.)
7334
7335 @need 1200
7336 When we evaluate the variable @code{animals}, we see that it is bound to
7337 the list @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}:
7338
7339 @smallexample
7340 @group
7341 animals
7342 @result{} (antelope giraffe lion tiger)
7343 @end group
7344 @end smallexample
7345
7346 @noindent
7347 Put another way, the variable @code{animals} points to the list
7348 @code{(antelope giraffe lion tiger)}.
7349
7350 Next, evaluate the function @code{setcar} while passing it two
7351 arguments, the variable @code{animals} and the quoted symbol
7352 @code{hippopotamus}; this is done by writing the three element list
7353 @code{(setcar animals 'hippopotamus)} and then evaluating it in the
7354 usual fashion:
7355
7356 @smallexample
7357 (setcar animals 'hippopotamus)
7358 @end smallexample
7359
7360 @need 1200
7361 @noindent
7362 After evaluating this expression, evaluate the variable @code{animals}
7363 again. You will see that the list of animals has changed:
7364
7365 @smallexample
7366 @group
7367 animals
7368 @result{} (hippopotamus giraffe lion tiger)
7369 @end group
7370 @end smallexample
7371
7372 @noindent
7373 The first element on the list, @code{antelope} is replaced by
7374 @code{hippopotamus}.
7375
7376 So we can see that @code{setcar} did not add a new element to the list
7377 as @code{cons} would have; it replaced @code{antelope} with
7378 @code{hippopotamus}; it @emph{changed} the list.
7379
7380 @node setcdr
7381 @section @code{setcdr}
7382 @findex setcdr
7383
7384 The @code{setcdr} function is similar to the @code{setcar} function,
7385 except that the function replaces the second and subsequent elements of
7386 a list rather than the first element.
7387
7388 (To see how to change the last element of a list, look ahead to
7389 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, which uses
7390 the @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr} functions.)
7391
7392 @need 1200
7393 To see how this works, set the value of the variable to a list of
7394 domesticated animals by evaluating the following expression:
7395
7396 @smallexample
7397 (setq domesticated-animals '(horse cow sheep goat))
7398 @end smallexample
7399
7400 @need 1200
7401 @noindent
7402 If you now evaluate the list, you will be returned the list
7403 @code{(horse cow sheep goat)}:
7404
7405 @smallexample
7406 @group
7407 domesticated-animals
7408 @result{} (horse cow sheep goat)
7409 @end group
7410 @end smallexample
7411
7412 @need 1200
7413 Next, evaluate @code{setcdr} with two arguments, the name of the
7414 variable which has a list as its value, and the list to which the
7415 @sc{cdr} of the first list will be set;
7416
7417 @smallexample
7418 (setcdr domesticated-animals '(cat dog))
7419 @end smallexample
7420
7421 @noindent
7422 If you evaluate this expression, the list @code{(cat dog)} will appear
7423 in the echo area. This is the value returned by the function. The
7424 result we are interested in is the ``side effect'', which we can see by
7425 evaluating the variable @code{domesticated-animals}:
7426
7427 @smallexample
7428 @group
7429 domesticated-animals
7430 @result{} (horse cat dog)
7431 @end group
7432 @end smallexample
7433
7434 @noindent
7435 Indeed, the list is changed from @code{(horse cow sheep goat)} to
7436 @code{(horse cat dog)}. The @sc{cdr} of the list is changed from
7437 @code{(cow sheep goat)} to @code{(cat dog)}.
7438
7439 @node cons Exercise
7440 @section Exercise
7441
7442 Construct a list of four birds by evaluating several expressions with
7443 @code{cons}. Find out what happens when you @code{cons} a list onto
7444 itself. Replace the first element of the list of four birds with a
7445 fish. Replace the rest of that list with a list of other fish.
7446
7447 @node Cutting & Storing Text
7448 @chapter Cutting and Storing Text
7449 @cindex Cutting and storing text
7450 @cindex Storing and cutting text
7451 @cindex Killing text
7452 @cindex Clipping text
7453 @cindex Erasing text
7454 @cindex Deleting text
7455
7456 Whenever you cut or clip text out of a buffer with a ``kill'' command in
7457 GNU Emacs, it is stored in a list and you can bring it back with a
7458 ``yank'' command.
7459
7460 (The use of the word ``kill'' in Emacs for processes which specifically
7461 @emph{do not} destroy the values of the entities is an unfortunate
7462 historical accident. A much more appropriate word would be ``clip'' since
7463 that is what the kill commands do; they clip text out of a buffer and
7464 put it into storage from which it can be brought back. I have often
7465 been tempted to replace globally all occurrences of ``kill'' in the Emacs
7466 sources with ``clip'' and all occurrences of ``killed'' with ``clipped''.)
7467
7468 @menu
7469 * Storing Text:: Text is stored in a list.
7470 * zap-to-char:: Cutting out text up to a character.
7471 * kill-region:: Cutting text out of a region.
7472 * copy-region-as-kill:: A definition for copying text.
7473 * Digression into C:: Minor note on C programming language macros.
7474 * defvar:: How to give a variable an initial value.
7475 * cons & search-fwd Review::
7476 * search Exercises::
7477 @end menu
7478
7479 @ifnottex
7480 @node Storing Text
7481 @unnumberedsec Storing Text in a List
7482 @end ifnottex
7483
7484 When text is cut out of a buffer, it is stored on a list. Successive
7485 pieces of text are stored on the list successively, so the list might
7486 look like this:
7487
7488 @smallexample
7489 ("a piece of text" "previous piece")
7490 @end smallexample
7491
7492 @need 1200
7493 @noindent
7494 The function @code{cons} can be used to create a new list from a piece
7495 of text (an ``atom'', to use the jargon) and an existing list, like
7496 this:
7497
7498 @smallexample
7499 @group
7500 (cons "another piece"
7501 '("a piece of text" "previous piece"))
7502 @end group
7503 @end smallexample
7504
7505 @need 1200
7506 @noindent
7507 If you evaluate this expression, a list of three elements will appear in
7508 the echo area:
7509
7510 @smallexample
7511 ("another piece" "a piece of text" "previous piece")
7512 @end smallexample
7513
7514 With the @code{car} and @code{nthcdr} functions, you can retrieve
7515 whichever piece of text you want. For example, in the following code,
7516 @code{nthcdr 1 @dots{}} returns the list with the first item removed;
7517 and the @code{car} returns the first element of that remainder---the
7518 second element of the original list:
7519
7520 @smallexample
7521 @group
7522 (car (nthcdr 1 '("another piece"
7523 "a piece of text"
7524 "previous piece")))
7525 @result{} "a piece of text"
7526 @end group
7527 @end smallexample
7528
7529 The actual functions in Emacs are more complex than this, of course.
7530 The code for cutting and retrieving text has to be written so that
7531 Emacs can figure out which element in the list you want---the first,
7532 second, third, or whatever. In addition, when you get to the end of
7533 the list, Emacs should give you the first element of the list, rather
7534 than nothing at all.
7535
7536 The list that holds the pieces of text is called the @dfn{kill ring}.
7537 This chapter leads up to a description of the kill ring and how it is
7538 used by first tracing how the @code{zap-to-char} function works. This
7539 function uses (or ``calls'') a function that invokes a function that
7540 manipulates the kill ring. Thus, before reaching the mountains, we
7541 climb the foothills.
7542
7543 A subsequent chapter describes how text that is cut from the buffer is
7544 retrieved. @xref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}.
7545
7546 @node zap-to-char
7547 @section @code{zap-to-char}
7548 @findex zap-to-char
7549
7550 Let us look at the interactive @code{zap-to-char} function.
7551
7552 @menu
7553 * Complete zap-to-char:: The complete implementation.
7554 * zap-to-char interactive:: A three part interactive expression.
7555 * zap-to-char body:: A short overview.
7556 * search-forward:: How to search for a string.
7557 * progn:: The @code{progn} special form.
7558 * Summing up zap-to-char:: Using @code{point} and @code{search-forward}.
7559 @end menu
7560
7561 @ifnottex
7562 @node Complete zap-to-char
7563 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{zap-to-char} Implementation
7564 @end ifnottex
7565
7566 The @code{zap-to-char} function removes the text in the region between
7567 the location of the cursor (i.e., of point) up to and including the
7568 next occurrence of a specified character. The text that
7569 @code{zap-to-char} removes is put in the kill ring; and it can be
7570 retrieved from the kill ring by typing @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}). If
7571 the command is given an argument, it removes text through that number
7572 of occurrences. Thus, if the cursor were at the beginning of this
7573 sentence and the character were @samp{s}, @samp{Thus} would be
7574 removed. If the argument were two, @samp{Thus, if the curs} would be
7575 removed, up to and including the @samp{s} in @samp{cursor}.
7576
7577 If the specified character is not found, @code{zap-to-char} will say
7578 ``Search failed'', tell you the character you typed, and not remove
7579 any text.
7580
7581 In order to determine how much text to remove, @code{zap-to-char} uses
7582 a search function. Searches are used extensively in code that
7583 manipulates text, and we will focus attention on them as well as on the
7584 deletion command.
7585
7586 @ignore
7587 @c GNU Emacs version 19
7588 (defun zap-to-char (arg char) ; version 19 implementation
7589 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7590 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7591 (interactive "*p\ncZap to char: ")
7592 (kill-region (point)
7593 (progn
7594 (search-forward
7595 (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7596 (point))))
7597 @end ignore
7598
7599 @need 1250
7600 Here is the complete text of the version 22 implementation of the function:
7601
7602 @c GNU Emacs 22
7603 @smallexample
7604 @group
7605 (defun zap-to-char (arg char)
7606 "Kill up to and including ARG'th occurrence of CHAR.
7607 Case is ignored if `case-fold-search' is non-nil in the current buffer.
7608 Goes backward if ARG is negative; error if CHAR not found."
7609 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7610 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7611 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7612 (kill-region (point) (progn
7613 (search-forward (char-to-string char)
7614 nil nil arg)
7615 (point))))
7616 @end group
7617 @end smallexample
7618
7619 The documentation is thorough. You do need to know the jargon meaning
7620 of the word ``kill''.
7621
7622 @node zap-to-char interactive
7623 @subsection The @code{interactive} Expression
7624
7625 @need 800
7626 The interactive expression in the @code{zap-to-char} command looks like
7627 this:
7628
7629 @smallexample
7630 (interactive "p\ncZap to char: ")
7631 @end smallexample
7632
7633 The part within quotation marks, @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "}, specifies
7634 two different things. First, and most simply, is the @samp{p}.
7635 This part is separated from the next part by a newline, @samp{\n}.
7636 The @samp{p} means that the first argument to the function will be
7637 passed the value of a ``processed prefix''. The prefix argument is
7638 passed by typing @kbd{C-u} and a number, or @kbd{M-} and a number. If
7639 the function is called interactively without a prefix, 1 is passed to
7640 this argument.
7641
7642 The second part of @code{"p\ncZap to char:@: "} is
7643 @samp{cZap to char:@: }. In this part, the lower case @samp{c}
7644 indicates that @code{interactive} expects a prompt and that the
7645 argument will be a character. The prompt follows the @samp{c} and is
7646 the string @samp{Zap to char:@: } (with a space after the colon to
7647 make it look good).
7648
7649 What all this does is prepare the arguments to @code{zap-to-char} so they
7650 are of the right type, and give the user a prompt.
7651
7652 In a read-only buffer, the @code{zap-to-char} function copies the text
7653 to the kill ring, but does not remove it. The echo area displays a
7654 message saying that the buffer is read-only. Also, the terminal may
7655 beep or blink at you.
7656
7657 @node zap-to-char body
7658 @subsection The Body of @code{zap-to-char}
7659
7660 The body of the @code{zap-to-char} function contains the code that
7661 kills (that is, removes) the text in the region from the current
7662 position of the cursor up to and including the specified character.
7663
7664 The first part of the code looks like this:
7665
7666 @smallexample
7667 (if (char-table-p translation-table-for-input)
7668 (setq char (or (aref translation-table-for-input char) char)))
7669 (kill-region (point) (progn
7670 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7671 (point)))
7672 @end smallexample
7673
7674 @noindent
7675 @code{char-table-p} is an hitherto unseen function. It determines
7676 whether its argument is a character table. When it is, it sets the
7677 character passed to @code{zap-to-char} to one of them, if that
7678 character exists, or to the character itself. (This becomes important
7679 for certain characters in non-European languages. The @code{aref}
7680 function extracts an element from an array. It is an array-specific
7681 function that is not described in this document. @xref{Arrays, ,
7682 Arrays, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
7683
7684 @noindent
7685 @code{(point)} is the current position of the cursor.
7686
7687 The next part of the code is an expression using @code{progn}. The body
7688 of the @code{progn} consists of calls to @code{search-forward} and
7689 @code{point}.
7690
7691 It is easier to understand how @code{progn} works after learning about
7692 @code{search-forward}, so we will look at @code{search-forward} and
7693 then at @code{progn}.
7694
7695 @node search-forward
7696 @subsection The @code{search-forward} Function
7697 @findex search-forward
7698
7699 The @code{search-forward} function is used to locate the
7700 zapped-for-character in @code{zap-to-char}. If the search is
7701 successful, @code{search-forward} leaves point immediately after the
7702 last character in the target string. (In @code{zap-to-char}, the
7703 target string is just one character long. @code{zap-to-char} uses the
7704 function @code{char-to-string} to ensure that the computer treats that
7705 character as a string.) If the search is backwards,
7706 @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first character in
7707 the target. Also, @code{search-forward} returns @code{t} for true.
7708 (Moving point is therefore a ``side effect''.)
7709
7710 @need 1250
7711 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{search-forward} function looks like this:
7712
7713 @smallexample
7714 (search-forward (char-to-string char) nil nil arg)
7715 @end smallexample
7716
7717 The @code{search-forward} function takes four arguments:
7718
7719 @enumerate
7720 @item
7721 The first argument is the target, what is searched for. This must be a
7722 string, such as @samp{"z"}.
7723
7724 As it happens, the argument passed to @code{zap-to-char} is a single
7725 character. Because of the way computers are built, the Lisp
7726 interpreter may treat a single character as being different from a
7727 string of characters. Inside the computer, a single character has a
7728 different electronic format than a string of one character. (A single
7729 character can often be recorded in the computer using exactly one
7730 byte; but a string may be longer, and the computer needs to be ready
7731 for this.) Since the @code{search-forward} function searches for a
7732 string, the character that the @code{zap-to-char} function receives as
7733 its argument must be converted inside the computer from one format to
7734 the other; otherwise the @code{search-forward} function will fail.
7735 The @code{char-to-string} function is used to make this conversion.
7736
7737 @item
7738 The second argument bounds the search; it is specified as a position in
7739 the buffer. In this case, the search can go to the end of the buffer,
7740 so no bound is set and the second argument is @code{nil}.
7741
7742 @item
7743 The third argument tells the function what it should do if the search
7744 fails---it can signal an error (and print a message) or it can return
7745 @code{nil}. A @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
7746 signal an error when the search fails.
7747
7748 @item
7749 The fourth argument to @code{search-forward} is the repeat count---how
7750 many occurrences of the string to look for. This argument is optional
7751 and if the function is called without a repeat count, this argument is
7752 passed the value 1. If this argument is negative, the search goes
7753 backwards.
7754 @end enumerate
7755
7756 @need 800
7757 In template form, a @code{search-forward} expression looks like this:
7758
7759 @smallexample
7760 @group
7761 (search-forward "@var{target-string}"
7762 @var{limit-of-search}
7763 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
7764 @var{repeat-count})
7765 @end group
7766 @end smallexample
7767
7768 We will look at @code{progn} next.
7769
7770 @node progn
7771 @subsection The @code{progn} Special Form
7772 @findex progn
7773
7774 @code{progn} is a special form that causes each of its arguments to be
7775 evaluated in sequence and then returns the value of the last one. The
7776 preceding expressions are evaluated only for the side effects they
7777 perform. The values produced by them are discarded.
7778
7779 @need 800
7780 The template for a @code{progn} expression is very simple:
7781
7782 @smallexample
7783 @group
7784 (progn
7785 @var{body}@dots{})
7786 @end group
7787 @end smallexample
7788
7789 In @code{zap-to-char}, the @code{progn} expression has to do two things:
7790 put point in exactly the right position; and return the location of
7791 point so that @code{kill-region} will know how far to kill to.
7792
7793 The first argument to the @code{progn} is @code{search-forward}. When
7794 @code{search-forward} finds the string, the function leaves point
7795 immediately after the last character in the target string. (In this
7796 case the target string is just one character long.) If the search is
7797 backwards, @code{search-forward} leaves point just before the first
7798 character in the target. The movement of point is a side effect.
7799
7800 The second and last argument to @code{progn} is the expression
7801 @code{(point)}. This expression returns the value of point, which in
7802 this case will be the location to which it has been moved by
7803 @code{search-forward}. (In the source, a line that tells the function
7804 to go to the previous character, if it is going forward, was commented
7805 out in 1999; I don't remember whether that feature or mis-feature was
7806 ever a part of the distributed source.) The value of @code{point} is
7807 returned by the @code{progn} expression and is passed to
7808 @code{kill-region} as @code{kill-region}'s second argument.
7809
7810 @node Summing up zap-to-char
7811 @subsection Summing up @code{zap-to-char}
7812
7813 Now that we have seen how @code{search-forward} and @code{progn} work,
7814 we can see how the @code{zap-to-char} function works as a whole.
7815
7816 The first argument to @code{kill-region} is the position of the cursor
7817 when the @code{zap-to-char} command is given---the value of point at
7818 that time. Within the @code{progn}, the search function then moves
7819 point to just after the zapped-to-character and @code{point} returns the
7820 value of this location. The @code{kill-region} function puts together
7821 these two values of point, the first one as the beginning of the region
7822 and the second one as the end of the region, and removes the region.
7823
7824 The @code{progn} special form is necessary because the
7825 @code{kill-region} command takes two arguments; and it would fail if
7826 @code{search-forward} and @code{point} expressions were written in
7827 sequence as two additional arguments. The @code{progn} expression is
7828 a single argument to @code{kill-region} and returns the one value that
7829 @code{kill-region} needs for its second argument.
7830
7831 @node kill-region
7832 @section @code{kill-region}
7833 @findex kill-region
7834
7835 The @code{zap-to-char} function uses the @code{kill-region} function.
7836 This function clips text from a region and copies that text to
7837 the kill ring, from which it may be retrieved.
7838
7839 @ignore
7840 GNU Emacs 22:
7841
7842 (defun kill-region (beg end &optional yank-handler)
7843 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
7844 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
7845 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there.
7846 \(If you want to kill and then yank immediately, use \\[kill-ring-save].)
7847
7848 If you want to append the killed region to the last killed text,
7849 use \\[append-next-kill] before \\[kill-region].
7850
7851 If the buffer is read-only, Emacs will beep and refrain from deleting
7852 the text, but put the text in the kill ring anyway. This means that
7853 you can use the killing commands to copy text from a read-only buffer.
7854
7855 This is the primitive for programs to kill text (as opposed to deleting it).
7856 Supply two arguments, character positions indicating the stretch of text
7857 to be killed.
7858 Any command that calls this function is a \"kill command\".
7859 If the previous command was also a kill command,
7860 the text killed this time appends to the text killed last time
7861 to make one entry in the kill ring.
7862
7863 In Lisp code, optional third arg YANK-HANDLER, if non-nil,
7864 specifies the yank-handler text property to be set on the killed
7865 text. See `insert-for-yank'."
7866 ;; Pass point first, then mark, because the order matters
7867 ;; when calling kill-append.
7868 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
7869 (unless (and beg end)
7870 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
7871 (condition-case nil
7872 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
7873 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
7874 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
7875 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
7876 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
7877 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
7878 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
7879 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
7880 nil)
7881 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only)
7882 ;; The code above failed because the buffer, or some of the characters
7883 ;; in the region, are read-only.
7884 ;; We should beep, in case the user just isn't aware of this.
7885 ;; However, there's no harm in putting
7886 ;; the region's text in the kill ring, anyway.
7887 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
7888 ;; Set this-command now, so it will be set even if we get an error.
7889 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
7890 ;; This should barf, if appropriate, and give us the correct error.
7891 (if kill-read-only-ok
7892 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
7893 ;; Signal an error if the buffer is read-only.
7894 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
7895 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
7896 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
7897 @end ignore
7898
7899 The Emacs 22 version of that function uses @code{condition-case} and
7900 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, both of which we will explain.
7901 @code{condition-case} is an important special form.
7902
7903 In essence, the @code{kill-region} function calls
7904 @code{condition-case}, which takes three arguments. In this function,
7905 the first argument does nothing. The second argument contains the
7906 code that does the work when all goes well. The third argument
7907 contains the code that is called in the event of an error.
7908
7909 @menu
7910 * Complete kill-region:: The function definition.
7911 * condition-case:: Dealing with a problem.
7912 * Lisp macro::
7913 @end menu
7914
7915 @ifnottex
7916 @node Complete kill-region
7917 @unnumberedsubsec The Complete @code{kill-region} Definition
7918 @end ifnottex
7919
7920 @need 1200
7921 We will go through the @code{condition-case} code in a moment. First,
7922 let us look at the definition of @code{kill-region}, with comments
7923 added:
7924
7925 @c GNU Emacs 22:
7926 @smallexample
7927 @group
7928 (defun kill-region (beg end)
7929 "Kill (\"cut\") text between point and mark.
7930 This deletes the text from the buffer and saves it in the kill ring.
7931 The command \\[yank] can retrieve it from there. @dots{} "
7932 @end group
7933
7934 @group
7935 ;; @bullet{} Since order matters, pass point first.
7936 (interactive (list (point) (mark)))
7937 ;; @bullet{} And tell us if we cannot cut the text.
7938 ;; 'unless' is an 'if' without a then-part.
7939 (unless (and beg end)
7940 (error "The mark is not set now, so there is no region"))
7941 @end group
7942
7943 @group
7944 ;; @bullet{} 'condition-case' takes three arguments.
7945 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
7946 ;; information about the error signal is not
7947 ;; stored for use by another function.
7948 (condition-case nil
7949 @end group
7950
7951 @group
7952 ;; @bullet{} The second argument to 'condition-case' tells the
7953 ;; Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
7954 @end group
7955
7956 @group
7957 ;; It starts with a 'let' function that extracts the string
7958 ;; and tests whether it exists. If so (that is what the
7959 ;; 'when' checks), it calls an 'if' function that determines
7960 ;; whether the previous command was another call to
7961 ;; 'kill-region'; if it was, then the new text is appended to
7962 ;; the previous text; if not, then a different function,
7963 ;; 'kill-new', is called.
7964 @end group
7965
7966 @group
7967 ;; The 'kill-append' function concatenates the new string and
7968 ;; the old. The 'kill-new' function inserts text into a new
7969 ;; item in the kill ring.
7970 @end group
7971
7972 @group
7973 ;; 'when' is an 'if' without an else-part. The second 'when'
7974 ;; again checks whether the current string exists; in
7975 ;; addition, it checks whether the previous command was
7976 ;; another call to 'kill-region'. If one or the other
7977 ;; condition is true, then it sets the current command to
7978 ;; be 'kill-region'.
7979 @end group
7980 @group
7981 (let ((string (filter-buffer-substring beg end t)))
7982 (when string ;STRING is nil if BEG = END
7983 ;; Add that string to the kill ring, one way or another.
7984 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
7985 @end group
7986 @group
7987 ;; @minus{} 'yank-handler' is an optional argument to
7988 ;; 'kill-region' that tells the 'kill-append' and
7989 ;; 'kill-new' functions how deal with properties
7990 ;; added to the text, such as 'bold' or 'italics'.
7991 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
7992 (kill-new string nil yank-handler)))
7993 (when (or string (eq last-command 'kill-region))
7994 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
7995 nil)
7996 @end group
7997
7998 @group
7999 ;; @bullet{} The third argument to 'condition-case' tells the interpreter
8000 ;; what to do with an error.
8001 @end group
8002 @group
8003 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8004 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8005 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8006 ;; then the body is executed.
8007 @end group
8008 @group
8009 ;; The first part of the third argument is the following:
8010 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; the if-part
8011 ;; @dots{} the then-part
8012 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8013 @end group
8014 @group
8015 ;; Next, also as part of the then-part, set this-command, so
8016 ;; it will be set in an error
8017 (setq this-command 'kill-region)
8018 ;; Finally, in the then-part, send a message if you may copy
8019 ;; the text to the kill ring without signaling an error, but
8020 ;; don't if you may not.
8021 @end group
8022 @group
8023 (if kill-read-only-ok
8024 (progn (message "Read only text copied to kill ring") nil)
8025 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8026 ;; If the buffer isn't read-only, the text is.
8027 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))
8028 @end group
8029 @end smallexample
8030
8031 @ignore
8032 @c v 21
8033 @smallexample
8034 @group
8035 (defun kill-region (beg end)
8036 "Kill between point and mark.
8037 The text is deleted but saved in the kill ring."
8038 (interactive "r")
8039 @end group
8040
8041 @group
8042 ;; 1. 'condition-case' takes three arguments.
8043 ;; If the first argument is nil, as it is here,
8044 ;; information about the error signal is not
8045 ;; stored for use by another function.
8046 (condition-case nil
8047 @end group
8048
8049 @group
8050 ;; 2. The second argument to 'condition-case'
8051 ;; tells the Lisp interpreter what to do when all goes well.
8052 @end group
8053
8054 @group
8055 ;; The 'delete-and-extract-region' function usually does the
8056 ;; work. If the beginning and ending of the region are both
8057 ;; the same, then the variable 'string' will be empty, or nil
8058 (let ((string (delete-and-extract-region beg end)))
8059 @end group
8060
8061 @group
8062 ;; 'when' is an 'if' clause that cannot take an 'else-part'.
8063 ;; Emacs normally sets the value of 'last-command' to the
8064 ;; previous command.
8065 @end group
8066 @group
8067 ;; 'kill-append' concatenates the new string and the old.
8068 ;; 'kill-new' inserts text into a new item in the kill ring.
8069 (when string
8070 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8071 ;; if true, prepend string
8072 (kill-append string (< end beg))
8073 (kill-new string)))
8074 (setq this-command 'kill-region))
8075 @end group
8076
8077 @group
8078 ;; 3. The third argument to 'condition-case' tells the interpreter
8079 ;; what to do with an error.
8080 @end group
8081 @group
8082 ;; The third argument has a conditions part and a body part.
8083 ;; If the conditions are met (in this case,
8084 ;; if text or buffer are read-only)
8085 ;; then the body is executed.
8086 @end group
8087 @group
8088 ((buffer-read-only text-read-only) ;; this is the if-part
8089 ;; then...
8090 (copy-region-as-kill beg end)
8091 @end group
8092 @group
8093 (if kill-read-only-ok ;; usually this variable is nil
8094 (message "Read only text copied to kill ring")
8095 ;; or else, signal an error if the buffer is read-only;
8096 (barf-if-buffer-read-only)
8097 ;; and, in any case, signal that the text is read-only.
8098 (signal 'text-read-only (list (current-buffer)))))))
8099 @end group
8100 @end smallexample
8101 @end ignore
8102
8103 @node condition-case
8104 @subsection @code{condition-case}
8105 @findex condition-case
8106
8107 As we have seen earlier (@pxref{Making Errors, , Generate an Error
8108 Message}), when the Emacs Lisp interpreter has trouble evaluating an
8109 expression, it provides you with help; in the jargon, this is called
8110 ``signaling an error''. Usually, the computer stops the program and
8111 shows you a message.
8112
8113 However, some programs undertake complicated actions. They should not
8114 simply stop on an error. In the @code{kill-region} function, the most
8115 likely error is that you will try to kill text that is read-only and
8116 cannot be removed. So the @code{kill-region} function contains code
8117 to handle this circumstance. This code, which makes up the body of
8118 the @code{kill-region} function, is inside of a @code{condition-case}
8119 special form.
8120
8121 @need 800
8122 The template for @code{condition-case} looks like this:
8123
8124 @smallexample
8125 @group
8126 (condition-case
8127 @var{var}
8128 @var{bodyform}
8129 @var{error-handler}@dots{})
8130 @end group
8131 @end smallexample
8132
8133 The second argument, @var{bodyform}, is straightforward. The
8134 @code{condition-case} special form causes the Lisp interpreter to
8135 evaluate the code in @var{bodyform}. If no error occurs, the special
8136 form returns the code's value and produces the side-effects, if any.
8137
8138 In short, the @var{bodyform} part of a @code{condition-case}
8139 expression determines what should happen when everything works
8140 correctly.
8141
8142 However, if an error occurs, among its other actions, the function
8143 generating the error signal will define one or more error condition
8144 names.
8145
8146 An error handler is the third argument to @code{condition-case}.
8147 An error handler has two parts, a @var{condition-name} and a
8148 @var{body}. If the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8149 matches a condition name generated by an error, then the @var{body}
8150 part of the error handler is run.
8151
8152 As you will expect, the @var{condition-name} part of an error handler
8153 may be either a single condition name or a list of condition names.
8154
8155 Also, a complete @code{condition-case} expression may contain more
8156 than one error handler. When an error occurs, the first applicable
8157 handler is run.
8158
8159 Lastly, the first argument to the @code{condition-case} expression,
8160 the @var{var} argument, is sometimes bound to a variable that
8161 contains information about the error. However, if that argument is
8162 nil, as is the case in @code{kill-region}, that information is
8163 discarded.
8164
8165 @need 1200
8166 In brief, in the @code{kill-region} function, the code
8167 @code{condition-case} works like this:
8168
8169 @smallexample
8170 @group
8171 @var{If no errors}, @var{run only this code}
8172 @var{but}, @var{if errors}, @var{run this other code}.
8173 @end group
8174 @end smallexample
8175
8176 @ignore
8177 2006 Oct 24
8178 In Emacs 22,
8179 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8180 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8181 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8182 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8183
8184 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8185 this is line 8054
8186 Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar} includes line 8350
8187 @end ignore
8188
8189 @node Lisp macro
8190 @subsection Lisp macro
8191 @cindex Macro, lisp
8192 @cindex Lisp macro
8193
8194 The part of the @code{condition-case} expression that is evaluated in
8195 the expectation that all goes well has a @code{when}. The code uses
8196 @code{when} to determine whether the @code{string} variable points to
8197 text that exists.
8198
8199 A @code{when} expression is simply a programmers' convenience. It is
8200 an @code{if} without the possibility of an else clause. In your mind,
8201 you can replace @code{when} with @code{if} and understand what goes
8202 on. That is what the Lisp interpreter does.
8203
8204 Technically speaking, @code{when} is a Lisp macro. A Lisp macro
8205 enables you to define new control constructs and other language
8206 features. It tells the interpreter how to compute another Lisp
8207 expression which will in turn compute the value. In this case, the
8208 ``other expression'' is an @code{if} expression.
8209
8210 The @code{kill-region} function definition also has an @code{unless}
8211 macro; it is the converse of @code{when}. The @code{unless} macro is
8212 an @code{if} without a then clause
8213
8214 For more about Lisp macros, see @ref{Macros, , Macros, elisp, The GNU
8215 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. The C programming language also
8216 provides macros. These are different, but also useful.
8217
8218 @ignore
8219 We will briefly look at C macros in
8220 @ref{Digression into C}.
8221 @end ignore
8222
8223 @need 1200
8224 Regarding the @code{when} macro, in the @code{condition-case}
8225 expression, when the string has content, then another conditional
8226 expression is executed. This is an @code{if} with both a then-part
8227 and an else-part.
8228
8229 @smallexample
8230 @group
8231 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8232 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8233 (kill-new string nil yank-handler))
8234 @end group
8235 @end smallexample
8236
8237 The then-part is evaluated if the previous command was another call to
8238 @code{kill-region}; if not, the else-part is evaluated.
8239
8240 @code{yank-handler} is an optional argument to @code{kill-region} that
8241 tells the @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new} functions how deal
8242 with properties added to the text, such as ``bold'' or ``italics''.
8243
8244 @code{last-command} is a variable that comes with Emacs that we have
8245 not seen before. Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs
8246 sets the value of @code{last-command} to the previous command.
8247
8248 @need 1200
8249 In this segment of the definition, the @code{if} expression checks
8250 whether the previous command was @code{kill-region}. If it was,
8251
8252 @smallexample
8253 (kill-append string (< end beg) yank-handler)
8254 @end smallexample
8255
8256 @noindent
8257 concatenates a copy of the newly clipped text to the just previously
8258 clipped text in the kill ring.
8259
8260 @node copy-region-as-kill
8261 @section @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8262 @findex copy-region-as-kill
8263 @findex nthcdr
8264
8265 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function copies a region of text from a
8266 buffer and (via either @code{kill-append} or @code{kill-new}) saves it
8267 in the @code{kill-ring}.
8268
8269 If you call @code{copy-region-as-kill} immediately after a
8270 @code{kill-region} command, Emacs appends the newly copied text to the
8271 previously copied text. This means that if you yank back the text, you
8272 get it all, from both this and the previous operation. On the other
8273 hand, if some other command precedes the @code{copy-region-as-kill},
8274 the function copies the text into a separate entry in the kill ring.
8275
8276 @menu
8277 * Complete copy-region-as-kill:: The complete function definition.
8278 * copy-region-as-kill body:: The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}.
8279 @end menu
8280
8281 @ifnottex
8282 @node Complete copy-region-as-kill
8283 @unnumberedsubsec The complete @code{copy-region-as-kill} function definition
8284 @end ifnottex
8285
8286 @need 1200
8287 Here is the complete text of the version 22 @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8288 function:
8289
8290 @smallexample
8291 @group
8292 (defun copy-region-as-kill (beg end)
8293 "Save the region as if killed, but don't kill it.
8294 In Transient Mark mode, deactivate the mark.
8295 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, also save the text for a window
8296 system cut and paste."
8297 (interactive "r")
8298 @end group
8299 @group
8300 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8301 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8302 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8303 @end group
8304 @group
8305 (if transient-mark-mode
8306 (setq deactivate-mark t))
8307 nil)
8308 @end group
8309 @end smallexample
8310
8311 @need 800
8312 As usual, this function can be divided into its component parts:
8313
8314 @smallexample
8315 @group
8316 (defun copy-region-as-kill (@var{argument-list})
8317 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
8318 (interactive "r")
8319 @var{body}@dots{})
8320 @end group
8321 @end smallexample
8322
8323 The arguments are @code{beg} and @code{end} and the function is
8324 interactive with @code{"r"}, so the two arguments must refer to the
8325 beginning and end of the region. If you have been reading through this
8326 document from the beginning, understanding these parts of a function is
8327 almost becoming routine.
8328
8329 The documentation is somewhat confusing unless you remember that the
8330 word ``kill'' has a meaning different from usual. The ``Transient Mark''
8331 and @code{interprogram-cut-function} comments explain certain
8332 side-effects.
8333
8334 After you once set a mark, a buffer always contains a region. If you
8335 wish, you can use Transient Mark mode to highlight the region
8336 temporarily. (No one wants to highlight the region all the time, so
8337 Transient Mark mode highlights it only at appropriate times. Many
8338 people turn off Transient Mark mode, so the region is never
8339 highlighted.)
8340
8341 Also, a windowing system allows you to copy, cut, and paste among
8342 different programs. In the X windowing system, for example, the
8343 @code{interprogram-cut-function} function is @code{x-select-text},
8344 which works with the windowing system's equivalent of the Emacs kill
8345 ring.
8346
8347 The body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function starts with an
8348 @code{if} clause. What this clause does is distinguish between two
8349 different situations: whether or not this command is executed
8350 immediately after a previous @code{kill-region} command. In the first
8351 case, the new region is appended to the previously copied text.
8352 Otherwise, it is inserted into the beginning of the kill ring as a
8353 separate piece of text from the previous piece.
8354
8355 The last two lines of the function prevent the region from lighting up
8356 if Transient Mark mode is turned on.
8357
8358 The body of @code{copy-region-as-kill} merits discussion in detail.
8359
8360 @node copy-region-as-kill body
8361 @subsection The Body of @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8362
8363 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function works in much the same way as
8364 the @code{kill-region} function. Both are written so that two or more
8365 kills in a row combine their text into a single entry. If you yank
8366 back the text from the kill ring, you get it all in one piece.
8367 Moreover, kills that kill forward from the current position of the
8368 cursor are added to the end of the previously copied text and commands
8369 that copy text backwards add it to the beginning of the previously
8370 copied text. This way, the words in the text stay in the proper
8371 order.
8372
8373 Like @code{kill-region}, the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function makes
8374 use of the @code{last-command} variable that keeps track of the
8375 previous Emacs command.
8376
8377 @menu
8378 * last-command & this-command::
8379 * kill-append function::
8380 * kill-new function::
8381 @end menu
8382
8383 @ifnottex
8384 @node last-command & this-command
8385 @unnumberedsubsubsec @code{last-command} and @code{this-command}
8386 @end ifnottex
8387
8388 Normally, whenever a function is executed, Emacs sets the value of
8389 @code{this-command} to the function being executed (which in this case
8390 would be @code{copy-region-as-kill}). At the same time, Emacs sets
8391 the value of @code{last-command} to the previous value of
8392 @code{this-command}.
8393
8394 In the first part of the body of the @code{copy-region-as-kill}
8395 function, an @code{if} expression determines whether the value of
8396 @code{last-command} is @code{kill-region}. If so, the then-part of
8397 the @code{if} expression is evaluated; it uses the @code{kill-append}
8398 function to concatenate the text copied at this call to the function
8399 with the text already in the first element (the @sc{car}) of the kill
8400 ring. On the other hand, if the value of @code{last-command} is not
8401 @code{kill-region}, then the @code{copy-region-as-kill} function
8402 attaches a new element to the kill ring using the @code{kill-new}
8403 function.
8404
8405 @need 1250
8406 The @code{if} expression reads as follows; it uses @code{eq}:
8407
8408 @smallexample
8409 @group
8410 (if (eq last-command 'kill-region)
8411 ;; @r{then-part}
8412 (kill-append (filter-buffer-substring beg end) (< end beg))
8413 ;; @r{else-part}
8414 (kill-new (filter-buffer-substring beg end)))
8415 @end group
8416 @end smallexample
8417
8418 @findex filter-buffer-substring
8419 (The @code{filter-buffer-substring} function returns a filtered
8420 substring of the buffer, if any. Optionally---the arguments are not
8421 here, so neither is done---the function may delete the initial text or
8422 return the text without its properties; this function is a replacement
8423 for the older @code{buffer-substring} function, which came before text
8424 properties were implemented.)
8425
8426 @findex eq @r{(example of use)}
8427 @noindent
8428 The @code{eq} function tests whether its first argument is the same Lisp
8429 object as its second argument. The @code{eq} function is similar to the
8430 @code{equal} function in that it is used to test for equality, but
8431 differs in that it determines whether two representations are actually
8432 the same object inside the computer, but with different names.
8433 @code{equal} determines whether the structure and contents of two
8434 expressions are the same.
8435
8436 If the previous command was @code{kill-region}, then the Emacs Lisp
8437 interpreter calls the @code{kill-append} function
8438
8439 @node kill-append function
8440 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-append} function
8441 @findex kill-append
8442
8443 @need 800
8444 The @code{kill-append} function looks like this:
8445
8446 @c in GNU Emacs 22
8447 @smallexample
8448 @group
8449 (defun kill-append (string before-p &optional yank-handler)
8450 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8451 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8452 @dots{} "
8453 (let* ((cur (car kill-ring)))
8454 (kill-new (if before-p (concat string cur) (concat cur string))
8455 (or (= (length cur) 0)
8456 (equal yank-handler
8457 (get-text-property 0 'yank-handler cur)))
8458 yank-handler)))
8459 @end group
8460 @end smallexample
8461
8462 @ignore
8463 was:
8464 (defun kill-append (string before-p)
8465 "Append STRING to the end of the latest kill in the kill ring.
8466 If BEFORE-P is non-nil, prepend STRING to the kill.
8467 If `interprogram-cut-function' is set, pass the resulting kill to
8468 it."
8469 (kill-new (if before-p
8470 (concat string (car kill-ring))
8471 (concat (car kill-ring) string))
8472 t))
8473 @end ignore
8474
8475 @noindent
8476 The @code{kill-append} function is fairly straightforward. It uses
8477 the @code{kill-new} function, which we will discuss in more detail in
8478 a moment.
8479
8480 (Also, the function provides an optional argument called
8481 @code{yank-handler}; when invoked, this argument tells the function
8482 how to deal with properties added to the text, such as ``bold'' or
8483 ``italics''.)
8484
8485 @c !!! bug in GNU Emacs 22 version of kill-append ?
8486 It has a @code{let*} function to set the value of the first element of
8487 the kill ring to @code{cur}. (I do not know why the function does not
8488 use @code{let} instead; only one value is set in the expression.
8489 Perhaps this is a bug that produces no problems?)
8490
8491 Consider the conditional that is one of the two arguments to
8492 @code{kill-new}. It uses @code{concat} to concatenate the new text to
8493 the @sc{car} of the kill ring. Whether it prepends or appends the
8494 text depends on the results of an @code{if} expression:
8495
8496 @smallexample
8497 @group
8498 (if before-p ; @r{if-part}
8499 (concat string cur) ; @r{then-part}
8500 (concat cur string)) ; @r{else-part}
8501 @end group
8502 @end smallexample
8503
8504 @noindent
8505 If the region being killed is before the region that was killed in the
8506 last command, then it should be prepended before the material that was
8507 saved in the previous kill; and conversely, if the killed text follows
8508 what was just killed, it should be appended after the previous text.
8509 The @code{if} expression depends on the predicate @code{before-p} to
8510 decide whether the newly saved text should be put before or after the
8511 previously saved text.
8512
8513 The symbol @code{before-p} is the name of one of the arguments to
8514 @code{kill-append}. When the @code{kill-append} function is
8515 evaluated, it is bound to the value returned by evaluating the actual
8516 argument. In this case, this is the expression @code{(< end beg)}.
8517 This expression does not directly determine whether the killed text in
8518 this command is located before or after the kill text of the last
8519 command; what it does is determine whether the value of the variable
8520 @code{end} is less than the value of the variable @code{beg}. If it
8521 is, it means that the user is most likely heading towards the
8522 beginning of the buffer. Also, the result of evaluating the predicate
8523 expression, @code{(< end beg)}, will be true and the text will be
8524 prepended before the previous text. On the other hand, if the value of
8525 the variable @code{end} is greater than the value of the variable
8526 @code{beg}, the text will be appended after the previous text.
8527
8528 @need 800
8529 When the newly saved text will be prepended, then the string with the new
8530 text will be concatenated before the old text:
8531
8532 @smallexample
8533 (concat string cur)
8534 @end smallexample
8535
8536 @need 1200
8537 @noindent
8538 But if the text will be appended, it will be concatenated
8539 after the old text:
8540
8541 @smallexample
8542 (concat cur string))
8543 @end smallexample
8544
8545 To understand how this works, we first need to review the
8546 @code{concat} function. The @code{concat} function links together or
8547 unites two strings of text. The result is a string. For example:
8548
8549 @smallexample
8550 @group
8551 (concat "abc" "def")
8552 @result{} "abcdef"
8553 @end group
8554
8555 @group
8556 (concat "new "
8557 (car '("first element" "second element")))
8558 @result{} "new first element"
8559
8560 (concat (car
8561 '("first element" "second element")) " modified")
8562 @result{} "first element modified"
8563 @end group
8564 @end smallexample
8565
8566 We can now make sense of @code{kill-append}: it modifies the contents
8567 of the kill ring. The kill ring is a list, each element of which is
8568 saved text. The @code{kill-append} function uses the @code{kill-new}
8569 function which in turn uses the @code{setcar} function.
8570
8571 @node kill-new function
8572 @unnumberedsubsubsec The @code{kill-new} function
8573 @findex kill-new
8574
8575 @c in GNU Emacs 22, additional documentation to kill-new:
8576 @ignore
8577 Optional third arguments YANK-HANDLER controls how the STRING is later
8578 inserted into a buffer; see `insert-for-yank' for details.
8579 When a yank handler is specified, STRING must be non-empty (the yank
8580 handler, if non-nil, is stored as a `yank-handler' text property on STRING).
8581
8582 When the yank handler has a non-nil PARAM element, the original STRING
8583 argument is not used by `insert-for-yank'. However, since Lisp code
8584 may access and use elements from the kill ring directly, the STRING
8585 argument should still be a \"useful\" string for such uses."
8586 @end ignore
8587 @need 1200
8588 The @code{kill-new} function looks like this:
8589
8590 @smallexample
8591 @group
8592 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace yank-handler)
8593 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8594 Set `kill-ring-yank-pointer' to point to it.
8595
8596 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8597 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8598 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list.
8599 @dots{}"
8600 @end group
8601 @group
8602 (if (> (length string) 0)
8603 (if yank-handler
8604 (put-text-property 0 (length string)
8605 'yank-handler yank-handler string))
8606 (if yank-handler
8607 (signal 'args-out-of-range
8608 (list string "yank-handler specified for empty string"))))
8609 @end group
8610 @group
8611 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8612 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8613 @end group
8614 @group
8615 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8616 (setcar kill-ring string)
8617 (push string kill-ring)
8618 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8619 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8620 @end group
8621 @group
8622 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8623 (if interprogram-cut-function
8624 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8625 @end group
8626 @end smallexample
8627 @ignore
8628 was:
8629 (defun kill-new (string &optional replace)
8630 "Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8631 Set the kill-ring-yank pointer to point to it.
8632 If `interprogram-cut-function' is non-nil, apply it to STRING.
8633 Optional second argument REPLACE non-nil means that STRING will replace
8634 the front of the kill ring, rather than being added to the list."
8635 (and (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8636 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8637 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8638 (setcar kill-ring string)
8639 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8640 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8641 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8642 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8643 (if interprogram-cut-function
8644 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8645 @end ignore
8646
8647 (Notice that the function is not interactive.)
8648
8649 As usual, we can look at this function in parts.
8650
8651 The function definition has an optional @code{yank-handler} argument,
8652 which when invoked tells the function how to deal with properties
8653 added to the text, such as ``bold'' or ``italics''. We will skip that.
8654
8655 @need 1200
8656 The first line of the documentation makes sense:
8657
8658 @smallexample
8659 Make STRING the latest kill in the kill ring.
8660 @end smallexample
8661
8662 @noindent
8663 Let's skip over the rest of the documentation for the moment.
8664
8665 @noindent
8666 Also, let's skip over the initial @code{if} expression and those lines
8667 of code involving @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu}. We will explain
8668 them below.
8669
8670 @need 1200
8671 The critical lines are these:
8672
8673 @smallexample
8674 @group
8675 (if (and replace kill-ring)
8676 ;; @r{then}
8677 (setcar kill-ring string)
8678 @end group
8679 @group
8680 ;; @r{else}
8681 (push string kill-ring)
8682 @end group
8683 @group
8684 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8685 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8686 ;; @r{avoid overly long kill ring}
8687 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil)))
8688 @end group
8689 @group
8690 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8691 (if interprogram-cut-function
8692 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8693 @end group
8694 @end smallexample
8695
8696 The conditional test is @w{@code{(and replace kill-ring)}}.
8697 This will be true when two conditions are met: the kill ring has
8698 something in it, and the @code{replace} variable is true.
8699
8700 @need 1250
8701 When the @code{kill-append} function sets @code{replace} to be true
8702 and when the kill ring has at least one item in it, the @code{setcar}
8703 expression is executed:
8704
8705 @smallexample
8706 (setcar kill-ring string)
8707 @end smallexample
8708
8709 The @code{setcar} function actually changes the first element of the
8710 @code{kill-ring} list to the value of @code{string}. It replaces the
8711 first element.
8712
8713 @need 1250
8714 On the other hand, if the kill ring is empty, or replace is false, the
8715 else-part of the condition is executed:
8716
8717 @smallexample
8718 (push string kill-ring)
8719 @end smallexample
8720
8721 @noindent
8722 @need 1250
8723 @code{push} puts its first argument onto the second. It is similar to
8724 the older
8725
8726 @smallexample
8727 (setq kill-ring (cons string kill-ring))
8728 @end smallexample
8729
8730 @noindent
8731 @need 1250
8732 or the newer
8733
8734 @smallexample
8735 (add-to-list kill-ring string)
8736 @end smallexample
8737
8738 @noindent
8739 When it is false, the expression first constructs a new version of the
8740 kill ring by prepending @code{string} to the existing kill ring as a
8741 new element (that is what the @code{push} does). Then it executes a
8742 second @code{if} clause. This second @code{if} clause keeps the kill
8743 ring from growing too long.
8744
8745 Let's look at these two expressions in order.
8746
8747 The @code{push} line of the else-part sets the new value of the kill
8748 ring to what results from adding the string being killed to the old
8749 kill ring.
8750
8751 We can see how this works with an example.
8752
8753 @need 800
8754 First,
8755
8756 @smallexample
8757 (setq example-list '("here is a clause" "another clause"))
8758 @end smallexample
8759
8760 @need 1200
8761 @noindent
8762 After evaluating this expression with @kbd{C-x C-e}, you can evaluate
8763 @code{example-list} and see what it returns:
8764
8765 @smallexample
8766 @group
8767 example-list
8768 @result{} ("here is a clause" "another clause")
8769 @end group
8770 @end smallexample
8771
8772 @need 1200
8773 @noindent
8774 Now, we can add a new element on to this list by evaluating the
8775 following expression:
8776 @findex push, @r{example}
8777
8778 @smallexample
8779 (push "a third clause" example-list)
8780 @end smallexample
8781
8782 @need 800
8783 @noindent
8784 When we evaluate @code{example-list}, we find its value is:
8785
8786 @smallexample
8787 @group
8788 example-list
8789 @result{} ("a third clause" "here is a clause" "another clause")
8790 @end group
8791 @end smallexample
8792
8793 @noindent
8794 Thus, the third clause is added to the list by @code{push}.
8795
8796 @need 1200
8797 Now for the second part of the @code{if} clause. This expression
8798 keeps the kill ring from growing too long. It looks like this:
8799
8800 @smallexample
8801 @group
8802 (if (> (length kill-ring) kill-ring-max)
8803 (setcdr (nthcdr (1- kill-ring-max) kill-ring) nil))
8804 @end group
8805 @end smallexample
8806
8807 The code checks whether the length of the kill ring is greater than
8808 the maximum permitted length. This is the value of
8809 @code{kill-ring-max} (which is 60, by default). If the length of the
8810 kill ring is too long, then this code sets the last element of the
8811 kill ring to @code{nil}. It does this by using two functions,
8812 @code{nthcdr} and @code{setcdr}.
8813
8814 We looked at @code{setcdr} earlier (@pxref{setcdr, , @code{setcdr}}).
8815 It sets the @sc{cdr} of a list, just as @code{setcar} sets the
8816 @sc{car} of a list. In this case, however, @code{setcdr} will not be
8817 setting the @sc{cdr} of the whole kill ring; the @code{nthcdr}
8818 function is used to cause it to set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last
8819 element of the kill ring---this means that since the @sc{cdr} of the
8820 next to last element is the last element of the kill ring, it will set
8821 the last element of the kill ring.
8822
8823 @findex nthcdr, @r{example}
8824 The @code{nthcdr} function works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a
8825 list---it takes the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr}
8826 @dots{} It does this @var{N} times and returns the results.
8827 (@xref{nthcdr, , @code{nthcdr}}.)
8828
8829 @findex setcdr, @r{example}
8830 Thus, if we had a four element list that was supposed to be three
8831 elements long, we could set the @sc{cdr} of the next to last element
8832 to @code{nil}, and thereby shorten the list. (If you set the last
8833 element to some other value than @code{nil}, which you could do, then
8834 you would not have shortened the list. @xref{setcdr, ,
8835 @code{setcdr}}.)
8836
8837 You can see shortening by evaluating the following three expressions
8838 in turn. First set the value of @code{trees} to @code{(maple oak pine
8839 birch)}, then set the @sc{cdr} of its second @sc{cdr} to @code{nil}
8840 and then find the value of @code{trees}:
8841
8842 @smallexample
8843 @group
8844 (setq trees '(maple oak pine birch))
8845 @result{} (maple oak pine birch)
8846 @end group
8847
8848 @group
8849 (setcdr (nthcdr 2 trees) nil)
8850 @result{} nil
8851
8852 trees
8853 @result{} (maple oak pine)
8854 @end group
8855 @end smallexample
8856
8857 @noindent
8858 (The value returned by the @code{setcdr} expression is @code{nil} since
8859 that is what the @sc{cdr} is set to.)
8860
8861 To repeat, in @code{kill-new}, the @code{nthcdr} function takes the
8862 @sc{cdr} a number of times that is one less than the maximum permitted
8863 size of the kill ring and @code{setcdr} sets the @sc{cdr} of that
8864 element (which will be the rest of the elements in the kill ring) to
8865 @code{nil}. This prevents the kill ring from growing too long.
8866
8867 @need 800
8868 The next to last expression in the @code{kill-new} function is
8869
8870 @smallexample
8871 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
8872 @end smallexample
8873
8874 The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a global variable that is set to be
8875 the @code{kill-ring}.
8876
8877 Even though the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is called a
8878 @samp{pointer}, it is a variable just like the kill ring. However, the
8879 name has been chosen to help humans understand how the variable is used.
8880
8881 @need 1200
8882 Now, to return to an early expression in the body of the function:
8883
8884 @smallexample
8885 @group
8886 (if (fboundp 'menu-bar-update-yank-menu)
8887 (menu-bar-update-yank-menu string (and replace (car kill-ring))))
8888 @end group
8889 @end smallexample
8890
8891 @noindent
8892 It starts with an @code{if} expression
8893
8894 In this case, the expression tests first to see whether
8895 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} exists as a function, and if so,
8896 calls it. The @code{fboundp} function returns true if the symbol it
8897 is testing has a function definition that ``is not void''. If the
8898 symbol's function definition were void, we would receive an error
8899 message, as we did when we created errors intentionally (@pxref{Making
8900 Errors, , Generate an Error Message}).
8901
8902 @noindent
8903 The then-part contains an expression whose first element is the
8904 function @code{and}.
8905
8906 @findex and
8907 The @code{and} special form evaluates each of its arguments until one
8908 of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in which case the
8909 @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if none of the
8910 arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value resulting from
8911 evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such a value is not
8912 @code{nil}, it is considered true in Emacs Lisp.) In other words, an
8913 @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its arguments
8914 are true. (@xref{Second Buffer Related Review}.)
8915
8916 The expression determines whether the second argument to
8917 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is true or not.
8918 @ignore
8919 ;; If we're supposed to be extending an existing string, and that
8920 ;; string really is at the front of the menu, then update it in place.
8921 @end ignore
8922
8923 @code{menu-bar-update-yank-menu} is one of the functions that make it
8924 possible to use the ``Select and Paste'' menu in the Edit item of a menu
8925 bar; using a mouse, you can look at the various pieces of text you
8926 have saved and select one piece to paste.
8927
8928 The last expression in the @code{kill-new} function adds the newly
8929 copied string to whatever facility exists for copying and pasting
8930 among different programs running in a windowing system. In the X
8931 Windowing system, for example, the @code{x-select-text} function takes
8932 the string and stores it in memory operated by X@. You can paste the
8933 string in another program, such as an Xterm.
8934
8935 @need 1200
8936 The expression looks like this:
8937
8938 @smallexample
8939 @group
8940 (if interprogram-cut-function
8941 (funcall interprogram-cut-function string (not replace))))
8942 @end group
8943 @end smallexample
8944
8945 If an @code{interprogram-cut-function} exists, then Emacs executes
8946 @code{funcall}, which in turn calls its first argument as a function
8947 and passes the remaining arguments to it. (Incidentally, as far as I
8948 can see, this @code{if} expression could be replaced by an @code{and}
8949 expression similar to the one in the first part of the function.)
8950
8951 We are not going to discuss windowing systems and other programs
8952 further, but merely note that this is a mechanism that enables GNU
8953 Emacs to work easily and well with other programs.
8954
8955 This code for placing text in the kill ring, either concatenated with
8956 an existing element or as a new element, leads us to the code for
8957 bringing back text that has been cut out of the buffer---the yank
8958 commands. However, before discussing the yank commands, it is better
8959 to learn how lists are implemented in a computer. This will make
8960 clear such mysteries as the use of the term ``pointer''. But before
8961 that, we will digress into C.
8962
8963 @ignore
8964 @c is this true in Emacs 22? Does not seems to be
8965
8966 (If the @w{@code{(< end beg))}}
8967 expression is true, @code{kill-append} prepends the string to the just
8968 previously clipped text. For a detailed discussion, see
8969 @ref{kill-append function, , The @code{kill-append} function}.)
8970
8971 If you then yank back the text, i.e., ``paste'' it, you get both
8972 pieces of text at once. That way, if you delete two words in a row,
8973 and then yank them back, you get both words, in their proper order,
8974 with one yank. (The @w{@code{(< end beg))}} expression makes sure the
8975 order is correct.)
8976
8977 On the other hand, if the previous command is not @code{kill-region},
8978 then the @code{kill-new} function is called, which adds the text to
8979 the kill ring as the latest item, and sets the
8980 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable to point to it.
8981 @end ignore
8982 @ignore
8983
8984 @c Evidently, changed for Emacs 22. The zap-to-char command does not
8985 @c use the delete-and-extract-region function
8986
8987 2006 Oct 26, the Digression into C is now OK but should come after
8988 copy-region-as-kill and filter-buffer-substring
8989
8990 2006 Oct 24
8991 In Emacs 22,
8992 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
8993 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
8994 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
8995 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
8996
8997 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
8998 @end ignore
8999
9000 @node Digression into C
9001 @section Digression into C
9002 @findex delete-and-extract-region
9003 @cindex C, a digression into
9004 @cindex Digression into C
9005
9006 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function (@pxref{copy-region-as-kill, ,
9007 @code{copy-region-as-kill}}) uses the @code{filter-buffer-substring}
9008 function, which in turn uses the @code{delete-and-extract-region}
9009 function. It removes the contents of a region and you cannot get them
9010 back.
9011
9012 Unlike the other code discussed here, the
9013 @code{delete-and-extract-region} function is not written in Emacs
9014 Lisp; it is written in C and is one of the primitives of the GNU Emacs
9015 system. Since it is very simple, I will digress briefly from Lisp and
9016 describe it here.
9017
9018 @c GNU Emacs 24 in src/editfns.c
9019 @c the DEFUN for delete-and-extract-region
9020
9021 @need 1500
9022 Like many of the other Emacs primitives,
9023 @code{delete-and-extract-region} is written as an instance of a C
9024 macro, a macro being a template for code. The complete macro looks
9025 like this:
9026
9027 @smallexample
9028 @group
9029 DEFUN ("delete-and-extract-region", Fdelete_and_extract_region,
9030 Sdelete_and_extract_region, 2, 2, 0,
9031 doc: /* Delete the text between START and END and return it. */)
9032 (Lisp_Object start, Lisp_Object end)
9033 @{
9034 validate_region (&start, &end);
9035 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9036 return empty_unibyte_string;
9037 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9038 @}
9039 @end group
9040 @end smallexample
9041
9042 Without going into the details of the macro writing process, let me
9043 point out that this macro starts with the word @code{DEFUN}. The word
9044 @code{DEFUN} was chosen since the code serves the same purpose as
9045 @code{defun} does in Lisp. (The @code{DEFUN} C macro is defined in
9046 @file{emacs/src/lisp.h}.)
9047
9048 The word @code{DEFUN} is followed by seven parts inside of
9049 parentheses:
9050
9051 @itemize @bullet
9052 @item
9053 The first part is the name given to the function in Lisp,
9054 @code{delete-and-extract-region}.
9055
9056 @item
9057 The second part is the name of the function in C,
9058 @code{Fdelete_and_extract_region}. By convention, it starts with
9059 @samp{F}. Since C does not use hyphens in names, underscores are used
9060 instead.
9061
9062 @item
9063 The third part is the name for the C constant structure that records
9064 information on this function for internal use. It is the name of the
9065 function in C but begins with an @samp{S} instead of an @samp{F}.
9066
9067 @item
9068 The fourth and fifth parts specify the minimum and maximum number of
9069 arguments the function can have. This function demands exactly 2
9070 arguments.
9071
9072 @item
9073 The sixth part is nearly like the argument that follows the
9074 @code{interactive} declaration in a function written in Lisp: a letter
9075 followed, perhaps, by a prompt. The only difference from the Lisp is
9076 when the macro is called with no arguments. Then you write a @code{0}
9077 (which is a ``null string''), as in this macro.
9078
9079 If you were to specify arguments, you would place them between
9080 quotation marks. The C macro for @code{goto-char} includes
9081 @code{"NGoto char: "} in this position to indicate that the function
9082 expects a raw prefix, in this case, a numerical location in a buffer,
9083 and provides a prompt.
9084
9085 @item
9086 The seventh part is a documentation string, just like the one for a
9087 function written in Emacs Lisp. This is written as a C comment. (When
9088 you build Emacs, the program @command{lib-src/make-docfile} extracts
9089 these comments and uses them to make the ``real'' documentation.)
9090 @end itemize
9091
9092 @need 1200
9093 In a C macro, the formal parameters come next, with a statement of
9094 what kind of object they are, followed by what might be called the ``body''
9095 of the macro. For @code{delete-and-extract-region} the ``body''
9096 consists of the following four lines:
9097
9098 @smallexample
9099 @group
9100 validate_region (&start, &end);
9101 if (XINT (start) == XINT (end))
9102 return empty_unibyte_string;
9103 return del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9104 @end group
9105 @end smallexample
9106
9107 The @code{validate_region} function checks whether the values
9108 passed as the beginning and end of the region are the proper type and
9109 are within range. If the beginning and end positions are the same,
9110 then return an empty string.
9111
9112 The @code{del_range_1} function actually deletes the text. It is a
9113 complex function we will not look into. It updates the buffer and
9114 does other things. However, it is worth looking at the two arguments
9115 passed to @code{del_range}. These are @w{@code{XINT (start)}} and
9116 @w{@code{XINT (end)}}.
9117
9118 As far as the C language is concerned, @code{start} and @code{end} are
9119 two integers that mark the beginning and end of the region to be
9120 deleted@footnote{More precisely, and requiring more expert knowledge
9121 to understand, the two integers are of type @code{Lisp_Object}, which can
9122 also be a C union instead of an integer type.}.
9123
9124 In early versions of Emacs, these two numbers were thirty-two bits
9125 long, but the code is slowly being generalized to handle other
9126 lengths. Three of the available bits are used to specify the type of
9127 information; the remaining bits are used as ``content''.
9128
9129 @samp{XINT} is a C macro that extracts the relevant number from the
9130 longer collection of bits; the three other bits are discarded.
9131
9132 @need 800
9133 The command in @code{delete-and-extract-region} looks like this:
9134
9135 @smallexample
9136 del_range_1 (XINT (start), XINT (end), 1, 1);
9137 @end smallexample
9138
9139 @noindent
9140 It deletes the region between the beginning position, @code{start},
9141 and the ending position, @code{end}.
9142
9143 From the point of view of the person writing Lisp, Emacs is all very
9144 simple; but hidden underneath is a great deal of complexity to make it
9145 all work.
9146
9147 @node defvar
9148 @section Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9149 @findex defvar
9150 @cindex Initializing a variable
9151 @cindex Variable initialization
9152
9153 @ignore
9154 2006 Oct 24
9155 In Emacs 22,
9156 copy-region-as-kill is short, 12 lines, and uses
9157 filter-buffer-substring, which is longer, 39 lines
9158 and has delete-and-extract-region in it.
9159 delete-and-extract-region is written in C.
9160
9161 see Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}
9162
9163 @end ignore
9164
9165 The @code{copy-region-as-kill} function is written in Emacs Lisp. Two
9166 functions within it, @code{kill-append} and @code{kill-new}, copy a
9167 region in a buffer and save it in a variable called the
9168 @code{kill-ring}. This section describes how the @code{kill-ring}
9169 variable is created and initialized using the @code{defvar} special
9170 form.
9171
9172 (Again we note that the term @code{kill-ring} is a misnomer. The text
9173 that is clipped out of the buffer can be brought back; it is not a ring
9174 of corpses, but a ring of resurrectable text.)
9175
9176 In Emacs Lisp, a variable such as the @code{kill-ring} is created and
9177 given an initial value by using the @code{defvar} special form. The
9178 name comes from ``define variable''.
9179
9180 The @code{defvar} special form is similar to @code{setq} in that it sets
9181 the value of a variable. It is unlike @code{setq} in two ways: first,
9182 it only sets the value of the variable if the variable does not already
9183 have a value. If the variable already has a value, @code{defvar} does
9184 not override the existing value. Second, @code{defvar} has a
9185 documentation string.
9186
9187 (There is a related macro, @code{defcustom}, designed for variables
9188 that people customize. It has more features than @code{defvar}.
9189 (@xref{defcustom, , Setting Variables with @code{defcustom}}.)
9190
9191 @menu
9192 * See variable current value::
9193 * defvar and asterisk::
9194 @end menu
9195
9196 @ifnottex
9197 @node See variable current value
9198 @unnumberedsubsec Seeing the Current Value of a Variable
9199 @end ifnottex
9200
9201 You can see the current value of a variable, any variable, by using
9202 the @code{describe-variable} function, which is usually invoked by
9203 typing @kbd{C-h v}. If you type @kbd{C-h v} and then @code{kill-ring}
9204 (followed by @key{RET}) when prompted, you will see what is in your
9205 current kill ring---this may be quite a lot! Conversely, if you have
9206 been doing nothing this Emacs session except read this document, you
9207 may have nothing in it. Also, you will see the documentation for
9208 @code{kill-ring}:
9209
9210 @smallexample
9211 @group
9212 Documentation:
9213 List of killed text sequences.
9214 Since the kill ring is supposed to interact nicely with cut-and-paste
9215 facilities offered by window systems, use of this variable should
9216 @end group
9217 @group
9218 interact nicely with `interprogram-cut-function' and
9219 `interprogram-paste-function'. The functions `kill-new',
9220 `kill-append', and `current-kill' are supposed to implement this
9221 interaction; you may want to use them instead of manipulating the kill
9222 ring directly.
9223 @end group
9224 @end smallexample
9225
9226 @need 800
9227 The kill ring is defined by a @code{defvar} in the following way:
9228
9229 @smallexample
9230 @group
9231 (defvar kill-ring nil
9232 "List of killed text sequences.
9233 @dots{}")
9234 @end group
9235 @end smallexample
9236
9237 @noindent
9238 In this variable definition, the variable is given an initial value of
9239 @code{nil}, which makes sense, since if you have saved nothing, you want
9240 nothing back if you give a @code{yank} command. The documentation
9241 string is written just like the documentation string of a @code{defun}.
9242 As with the documentation string of the @code{defun}, the first line of
9243 the documentation should be a complete sentence, since some commands,
9244 like @code{apropos}, print only the first line of documentation.
9245 Succeeding lines should not be indented; otherwise they look odd when
9246 you use @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}).
9247
9248 @node defvar and asterisk
9249 @subsection @code{defvar} and an asterisk
9250 @findex defvar @r{for a user customizable variable}
9251 @findex defvar @r{with an asterisk}
9252
9253 In the past, Emacs used the @code{defvar} special form both for
9254 internal variables that you would not expect a user to change and for
9255 variables that you do expect a user to change. Although you can still
9256 use @code{defvar} for user customizable variables, please use
9257 @code{defcustom} instead, since it provides a path into
9258 the Customization commands. (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables
9259 using @code{defcustom}}.)
9260
9261 When you specified a variable using the @code{defvar} special form,
9262 you could distinguish a variable that a user might want to change from
9263 others by typing an asterisk, @samp{*}, in the first column of its
9264 documentation string. For example:
9265
9266 @smallexample
9267 @group
9268 (defvar shell-command-default-error-buffer nil
9269 "*Buffer name for `shell-command' @dots{} error output.
9270 @dots{} ")
9271 @end group
9272 @end smallexample
9273
9274 @findex set-variable
9275 @noindent
9276 You could (and still can) use the @code{set-variable} command to
9277 change the value of @code{shell-command-default-error-buffer}
9278 temporarily. However, options set using @code{set-variable} are set
9279 only for the duration of your editing session. The new values are not
9280 saved between sessions. Each time Emacs starts, it reads the original
9281 value, unless you change the value within your @file{.emacs} file,
9282 either by setting it manually or by using @code{customize}.
9283 @xref{Emacs Initialization, , Your @file{.emacs} File}.
9284
9285 For me, the major use of the @code{set-variable} command is to suggest
9286 variables that I might want to set in my @file{.emacs} file. There
9287 are now more than 700 such variables, far too many to remember
9288 readily. Fortunately, you can press @key{TAB} after calling the
9289 @code{M-x set-variable} command to see the list of variables.
9290 (@xref{Examining, , Examining and Setting Variables, emacs,
9291 The GNU Emacs Manual}.)
9292
9293 @need 1250
9294 @node cons & search-fwd Review
9295 @section Review
9296
9297 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
9298
9299 @table @code
9300 @item car
9301 @itemx cdr
9302 @code{car} returns the first element of a list; @code{cdr} returns the
9303 second and subsequent elements of a list.
9304
9305 @need 1250
9306 For example:
9307
9308 @smallexample
9309 @group
9310 (car '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9311 @result{} 1
9312 (cdr '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9313 @result{} (2 3 4 5 6 7)
9314 @end group
9315 @end smallexample
9316
9317 @item cons
9318 @code{cons} constructs a list by prepending its first argument to its
9319 second argument.
9320
9321 @need 1250
9322 For example:
9323
9324 @smallexample
9325 @group
9326 (cons 1 '(2 3 4))
9327 @result{} (1 2 3 4)
9328 @end group
9329 @end smallexample
9330
9331 @item funcall
9332 @code{funcall} evaluates its first argument as a function. It passes
9333 its remaining arguments to its first argument.
9334
9335 @item nthcdr
9336 Return the result of taking @sc{cdr} @var{n} times on a list.
9337 @iftex
9338 The
9339 @tex
9340 $n^{th}$
9341 @end tex
9342 @code{cdr}.
9343 @end iftex
9344 The ``rest of the rest'', as it were.
9345
9346 @need 1250
9347 For example:
9348
9349 @smallexample
9350 @group
9351 (nthcdr 3 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7))
9352 @result{} (4 5 6 7)
9353 @end group
9354 @end smallexample
9355
9356 @item setcar
9357 @itemx setcdr
9358 @code{setcar} changes the first element of a list; @code{setcdr}
9359 changes the second and subsequent elements of a list.
9360
9361 @need 1250
9362 For example:
9363
9364 @smallexample
9365 @group
9366 (setq triple '(1 2 3))
9367
9368 (setcar triple '37)
9369
9370 triple
9371 @result{} (37 2 3)
9372
9373 (setcdr triple '("foo" "bar"))
9374
9375 triple
9376 @result{} (37 "foo" "bar")
9377 @end group
9378 @end smallexample
9379
9380 @item progn
9381 Evaluate each argument in sequence and then return the value of the
9382 last.
9383
9384 @need 1250
9385 For example:
9386
9387 @smallexample
9388 @group
9389 (progn 1 2 3 4)
9390 @result{} 4
9391 @end group
9392 @end smallexample
9393
9394 @item save-restriction
9395 Record whatever narrowing is in effect in the current buffer, if any,
9396 and restore that narrowing after evaluating the arguments.
9397
9398 @item search-forward
9399 Search for a string, and if the string is found, move point. With a
9400 regular expression, use the similar @code{re-search-forward}.
9401 (@xref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, for an
9402 explanation of regular expression patterns and searches.)
9403
9404 @need 1250
9405 @noindent
9406 @code{search-forward} and @code{re-search-forward} take four
9407 arguments:
9408
9409 @enumerate
9410 @item
9411 The string or regular expression to search for.
9412
9413 @item
9414 Optionally, the limit of the search.
9415
9416 @item
9417 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
9418 error message.
9419
9420 @item
9421 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
9422 search goes backwards.
9423 @end enumerate
9424
9425 @item kill-region
9426 @itemx delete-and-extract-region
9427 @itemx copy-region-as-kill
9428
9429 @code{kill-region} cuts the text between point and mark from the
9430 buffer and stores that text in the kill ring, so you can get it back
9431 by yanking.
9432
9433 @code{copy-region-as-kill} copies the text between point and mark into
9434 the kill ring, from which you can get it by yanking. The function
9435 does not cut or remove the text from the buffer.
9436 @end table
9437
9438 @code{delete-and-extract-region} removes the text between point and
9439 mark from the buffer and throws it away. You cannot get it back.
9440 (This is not an interactive command.)
9441
9442 @need 1500
9443 @node search Exercises
9444 @section Searching Exercises
9445
9446 @itemize @bullet
9447 @item
9448 Write an interactive function that searches for a string. If the
9449 search finds the string, leave point after it and display a message
9450 that says ``Found!''. (Do not use @code{search-forward} for the name
9451 of this function; if you do, you will overwrite the existing version of
9452 @code{search-forward} that comes with Emacs. Use a name such as
9453 @code{test-search} instead.)
9454
9455 @item
9456 Write a function that prints the third element of the kill ring in the
9457 echo area, if any; if the kill ring does not contain a third element,
9458 print an appropriate message.
9459 @end itemize
9460
9461 @node List Implementation
9462 @chapter How Lists are Implemented
9463 @cindex Lists in a computer
9464
9465 In Lisp, atoms are recorded in a straightforward fashion; if the
9466 implementation is not straightforward in practice, it is, nonetheless,
9467 straightforward in theory. The atom @samp{rose}, for example, is
9468 recorded as the four contiguous letters @samp{r}, @samp{o}, @samp{s},
9469 @samp{e}. A list, on the other hand, is kept differently. The mechanism
9470 is equally simple, but it takes a moment to get used to the idea. A
9471 list is kept using a series of pairs of pointers. In the series, the
9472 first pointer in each pair points to an atom or to another list, and the
9473 second pointer in each pair points to the next pair, or to the symbol
9474 @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9475
9476 A pointer itself is quite simply the electronic address of what is
9477 pointed to. Hence, a list is kept as a series of electronic addresses.
9478
9479 @menu
9480 * Lists diagrammed::
9481 * Symbols as Chest:: Exploring a powerful metaphor.
9482 * List Exercise::
9483 @end menu
9484
9485 @ifnottex
9486 @node Lists diagrammed
9487 @unnumberedsec Lists diagrammed
9488 @end ifnottex
9489
9490 For example, the list @code{(rose violet buttercup)} has three elements,
9491 @samp{rose}, @samp{violet}, and @samp{buttercup}. In the computer, the
9492 electronic address of @samp{rose} is recorded in a segment of computer
9493 memory along with the address that gives the electronic address of where
9494 the atom @samp{violet} is located; and that address (the one that tells
9495 where @samp{violet} is located) is kept along with an address that tells
9496 where the address for the atom @samp{buttercup} is located.
9497
9498 @need 1200
9499 This sounds more complicated than it is and is easier seen in a diagram:
9500
9501 @c clear print-postscript-figures
9502 @c !!! cons-cell-diagram #1
9503 @ifnottex
9504 @smallexample
9505 @group
9506 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9507 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9508 | | |
9509 | | |
9510 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9511 @end group
9512 @end smallexample
9513 @end ifnottex
9514 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9515 @sp 1
9516 @tex
9517 @center @image{cons-1}
9518 @end tex
9519 @sp 1
9520 @end ifset
9521 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9522 @iftex
9523 @smallexample
9524 @group
9525 ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9526 |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9527 | | |
9528 | | |
9529 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9530 @end group
9531 @end smallexample
9532 @end iftex
9533 @end ifclear
9534
9535 @noindent
9536 In the diagram, each box represents a word of computer memory that
9537 holds a Lisp object, usually in the form of a memory address. The boxes,
9538 i.e., the addresses, are in pairs. Each arrow points to what the address
9539 is the address of, either an atom or another pair of addresses. The
9540 first box is the electronic address of @samp{rose} and the arrow points
9541 to @samp{rose}; the second box is the address of the next pair of boxes,
9542 the first part of which is the address of @samp{violet} and the second
9543 part of which is the address of the next pair. The very last box
9544 points to the symbol @code{nil}, which marks the end of the list.
9545
9546 @need 1200
9547 When a variable is set to a list with a function such as @code{setq},
9548 it stores the address of the first box in the variable. Thus,
9549 evaluation of the expression
9550
9551 @smallexample
9552 (setq bouquet '(rose violet buttercup))
9553 @end smallexample
9554
9555 @need 1250
9556 @noindent
9557 creates a situation like this:
9558
9559 @c cons-cell-diagram #2
9560 @ifnottex
9561 @smallexample
9562 @group
9563 bouquet
9564 |
9565 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9566 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9567 | | |
9568 | | |
9569 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9570 @end group
9571 @end smallexample
9572 @end ifnottex
9573 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9574 @sp 1
9575 @tex
9576 @center @image{cons-2}
9577 @end tex
9578 @sp 1
9579 @end ifset
9580 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9581 @iftex
9582 @smallexample
9583 @group
9584 bouquet
9585 |
9586 | ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
9587 --> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9588 | | |
9589 | | |
9590 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9591 @end group
9592 @end smallexample
9593 @end iftex
9594 @end ifclear
9595
9596 @noindent
9597 In this example, the symbol @code{bouquet} holds the address of the first
9598 pair of boxes.
9599
9600 @need 1200
9601 This same list can be illustrated in a different sort of box notation
9602 like this:
9603
9604 @c cons-cell-diagram #2a
9605 @ifnottex
9606 @smallexample
9607 @group
9608 bouquet
9609 |
9610 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9611 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9612 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9613 | | | | | | | cup | |
9614 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9615 @end group
9616 @end smallexample
9617 @end ifnottex
9618 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9619 @sp 1
9620 @tex
9621 @center @image{cons-2a}
9622 @end tex
9623 @sp 1
9624 @end ifset
9625 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9626 @iftex
9627 @smallexample
9628 @group
9629 bouquet
9630 |
9631 | -------------- --------------- ----------------
9632 | | car | cdr | | car | cdr | | car | cdr |
9633 -->| rose | o------->| violet | o------->| butter- | nil |
9634 | | | | | | | cup | |
9635 -------------- --------------- ----------------
9636 @end group
9637 @end smallexample
9638 @end iftex
9639 @end ifclear
9640
9641 (Symbols consist of more than pairs of addresses, but the structure of
9642 a symbol is made up of addresses. Indeed, the symbol @code{bouquet}
9643 consists of a group of address-boxes, one of which is the address of
9644 the printed word @samp{bouquet}, a second of which is the address of a
9645 function definition attached to the symbol, if any, a third of which
9646 is the address of the first pair of address-boxes for the list
9647 @code{(rose violet buttercup)}, and so on. Here we are showing that
9648 the symbol's third address-box points to the first pair of
9649 address-boxes for the list.)
9650
9651 If a symbol is set to the @sc{cdr} of a list, the list itself is not
9652 changed; the symbol simply has an address further down the list. (In
9653 the jargon, @sc{car} and @sc{cdr} are ``non-destructive''.) Thus,
9654 evaluation of the following expression
9655
9656 @smallexample
9657 (setq flowers (cdr bouquet))
9658 @end smallexample
9659
9660 @need 800
9661 @noindent
9662 produces this:
9663
9664 @c cons-cell-diagram #3
9665 @ifnottex
9666 @sp 1
9667 @smallexample
9668 @group
9669 bouquet flowers
9670 | |
9671 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9672 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9673 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9674 | | |
9675 | | |
9676 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9677 @end group
9678 @end smallexample
9679 @sp 1
9680 @end ifnottex
9681 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9682 @sp 1
9683 @tex
9684 @center @image{cons-3}
9685 @end tex
9686 @sp 1
9687 @end ifset
9688 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9689 @iftex
9690 @sp 1
9691 @smallexample
9692 @group
9693 bouquet flowers
9694 | |
9695 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9696 --> | | | --> | | | | | |
9697 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
9698 | | |
9699 | | |
9700 --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9701 @end group
9702 @end smallexample
9703 @sp 1
9704 @end iftex
9705 @end ifclear
9706
9707 @noindent
9708 The value of @code{flowers} is @code{(violet buttercup)}, which is
9709 to say, the symbol @code{flowers} holds the address of the pair of
9710 address-boxes, the first of which holds the address of @code{violet},
9711 and the second of which holds the address of @code{buttercup}.
9712
9713 A pair of address-boxes is called a @dfn{cons cell} or @dfn{dotted
9714 pair}. @xref{Cons Cell Type, , Cons Cell and List Types, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9715 Reference Manual}, and @ref{Dotted Pair Notation, , Dotted Pair
9716 Notation, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more
9717 information about cons cells and dotted pairs.
9718
9719 @need 1200
9720 The function @code{cons} adds a new pair of addresses to the front of
9721 a series of addresses like that shown above. For example, evaluating
9722 the expression
9723
9724 @smallexample
9725 (setq bouquet (cons 'lily bouquet))
9726 @end smallexample
9727
9728 @need 1500
9729 @noindent
9730 produces:
9731
9732 @c cons-cell-diagram #4
9733 @ifnottex
9734 @sp 1
9735 @smallexample
9736 @group
9737 bouquet flowers
9738 | |
9739 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9740 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9741 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9742 | | | |
9743 | | | |
9744 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9745 @end group
9746 @end smallexample
9747 @sp 1
9748 @end ifnottex
9749 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9750 @sp 1
9751 @tex
9752 @center @image{cons-4}
9753 @end tex
9754 @sp 1
9755 @end ifset
9756 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9757 @iftex
9758 @sp 1
9759 @smallexample
9760 @group
9761 bouquet flowers
9762 | |
9763 | ___ ___ ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
9764 --> | | | | | | --> | | | | | |
9765 |___|___|----> |___|___|----> |___|___|---->|___|___|--> nil
9766 | | | |
9767 | | | |
9768 --> lily --> rose --> violet --> buttercup
9769 @end group
9770 @end smallexample
9771 @sp 1
9772 @end iftex
9773 @end ifclear
9774
9775 @need 1200
9776 @noindent
9777 However, this does not change the value of the symbol
9778 @code{flowers}, as you can see by evaluating the following,
9779
9780 @smallexample
9781 (eq (cdr (cdr bouquet)) flowers)
9782 @end smallexample
9783
9784 @noindent
9785 which returns @code{t} for true.
9786
9787 Until it is reset, @code{flowers} still has the value
9788 @code{(violet buttercup)}; that is, it has the address of the cons
9789 cell whose first address is of @code{violet}. Also, this does not
9790 alter any of the pre-existing cons cells; they are all still there.
9791
9792 Thus, in Lisp, to get the @sc{cdr} of a list, you just get the address
9793 of the next cons cell in the series; to get the @sc{car} of a list,
9794 you get the address of the first element of the list; to @code{cons} a
9795 new element on a list, you add a new cons cell to the front of the list.
9796 That is all there is to it! The underlying structure of Lisp is
9797 brilliantly simple!
9798
9799 And what does the last address in a series of cons cells refer to? It
9800 is the address of the empty list, of @code{nil}.
9801
9802 In summary, when a Lisp variable is set to a value, it is provided with
9803 the address of the list to which the variable refers.
9804
9805 @node Symbols as Chest
9806 @section Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
9807 @cindex Symbols as a Chest of Drawers
9808 @cindex Chest of Drawers, metaphor for a symbol
9809 @cindex Drawers, Chest of, metaphor for a symbol
9810
9811 In an earlier section, I suggested that you might imagine a symbol as
9812 being a chest of drawers. The function definition is put in one
9813 drawer, the value in another, and so on. What is put in the drawer
9814 holding the value can be changed without affecting the contents of the
9815 drawer holding the function definition, and vice versa.
9816
9817 Actually, what is put in each drawer is the address of the value or
9818 function definition. It is as if you found an old chest in the attic,
9819 and in one of its drawers you found a map giving you directions to
9820 where the buried treasure lies.
9821
9822 (In addition to its name, symbol definition, and variable value, a
9823 symbol has a ``drawer'' for a @dfn{property list} which can be used to
9824 record other information. Property lists are not discussed here; see
9825 @ref{Property Lists, , Property Lists, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
9826 Reference Manual}.)
9827
9828 @need 1500
9829 Here is a fanciful representation:
9830
9831 @c chest-of-drawers diagram
9832 @ifnottex
9833 @sp 1
9834 @smallexample
9835 @group
9836 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
9837
9838 __ o0O0o __
9839 / \
9840 ---------------------
9841 | directions to | [map to]
9842 | symbol name | bouquet
9843 | |
9844 +---------------------+
9845 | directions to |
9846 | symbol definition | [none]
9847 | |
9848 +---------------------+
9849 | directions to | [map to]
9850 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
9851 | |
9852 +---------------------+
9853 | directions to |
9854 | property list | [not described here]
9855 | |
9856 +---------------------+
9857 |/ \|
9858 @end group
9859 @end smallexample
9860 @sp 1
9861 @end ifnottex
9862 @ifset print-postscript-figures
9863 @sp 1
9864 @tex
9865 @center @image{drawers}
9866 @end tex
9867 @sp 1
9868 @end ifset
9869 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
9870 @iftex
9871 @sp 1
9872 @smallexample
9873 @group
9874 Chest of Drawers Contents of Drawers
9875
9876 __ o0O0o __
9877 / \
9878 ---------------------
9879 | directions to | [map to]
9880 | symbol name | bouquet
9881 | |
9882 +---------------------+
9883 | directions to |
9884 | symbol definition | [none]
9885 | |
9886 +---------------------+
9887 | directions to | [map to]
9888 | variable value | (rose violet buttercup)
9889 | |
9890 +---------------------+
9891 | directions to |
9892 | property list | [not described here]
9893 | |
9894 +---------------------+
9895 |/ \|
9896 @end group
9897 @end smallexample
9898 @sp 1
9899 @end iftex
9900 @end ifclear
9901
9902 @node List Exercise
9903 @section Exercise
9904
9905 Set @code{flowers} to @code{violet} and @code{buttercup}. Cons two
9906 more flowers on to this list and set this new list to
9907 @code{more-flowers}. Set the @sc{car} of @code{flowers} to a fish.
9908 What does the @code{more-flowers} list now contain?
9909
9910 @node Yanking
9911 @chapter Yanking Text Back
9912 @findex yank
9913 @cindex Text retrieval
9914 @cindex Retrieving text
9915 @cindex Pasting text
9916
9917 Whenever you cut text out of a buffer with a ``kill'' command in GNU Emacs,
9918 you can bring it back with a ``yank'' command. The text that is cut out of
9919 the buffer is put in the kill ring and the yank commands insert the
9920 appropriate contents of the kill ring back into a buffer (not necessarily
9921 the original buffer).
9922
9923 A simple @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank}) command inserts the first item from
9924 the kill ring into the current buffer. If the @kbd{C-y} command is
9925 followed immediately by @kbd{M-y}, the first element is replaced by
9926 the second element. Successive @kbd{M-y} commands replace the second
9927 element with the third, fourth, or fifth element, and so on. When the
9928 last element in the kill ring is reached, it is replaced by the first
9929 element and the cycle is repeated. (Thus the kill ring is called a
9930 ``ring'' rather than just a ``list''. However, the actual data structure
9931 that holds the text is a list.
9932 @xref{Kill Ring, , Handling the Kill Ring}, for the details of how the
9933 list is handled as a ring.)
9934
9935 @menu
9936 * Kill Ring Overview::
9937 * kill-ring-yank-pointer:: The kill ring is a list.
9938 * yank nthcdr Exercises:: The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
9939 @end menu
9940
9941 @node Kill Ring Overview
9942 @section Kill Ring Overview
9943 @cindex Kill ring overview
9944
9945 The kill ring is a list of textual strings. This is what it looks like:
9946
9947 @smallexample
9948 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9949 @end smallexample
9950
9951 If this were the contents of my kill ring and I pressed @kbd{C-y}, the
9952 string of characters saying @samp{some text} would be inserted in this
9953 buffer where my cursor is located.
9954
9955 The @code{yank} command is also used for duplicating text by copying it.
9956 The copied text is not cut from the buffer, but a copy of it is put on the
9957 kill ring and is inserted by yanking it back.
9958
9959 Three functions are used for bringing text back from the kill ring:
9960 @code{yank}, which is usually bound to @kbd{C-y}; @code{yank-pop},
9961 which is usually bound to @kbd{M-y}; and @code{rotate-yank-pointer},
9962 which is used by the two other functions.
9963
9964 These functions refer to the kill ring through a variable called the
9965 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. Indeed, the insertion code for both the
9966 @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} functions is:
9967
9968 @smallexample
9969 (insert (car kill-ring-yank-pointer))
9970 @end smallexample
9971
9972 @noindent
9973 (Well, no more. In GNU Emacs 22, the function has been replaced by
9974 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{insert-for-yank-1}
9975 repetitively for each @code{yank-handler} segment. In turn,
9976 @code{insert-for-yank-1} strips text properties from the inserted text
9977 according to @code{yank-excluded-properties}. Otherwise, it is just
9978 like @code{insert}. We will stick with plain @code{insert} since it
9979 is easier to understand.)
9980
9981 To begin to understand how @code{yank} and @code{yank-pop} work, it is
9982 first necessary to look at the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
9983
9984 @node kill-ring-yank-pointer
9985 @section The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} Variable
9986
9987 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is a variable, just as @code{kill-ring} is
9988 a variable. It points to something by being bound to the value of what
9989 it points to, like any other Lisp variable.
9990
9991 @need 1000
9992 Thus, if the value of the kill ring is:
9993
9994 @smallexample
9995 ("some text" "a different piece of text" "yet more text")
9996 @end smallexample
9997
9998 @need 1250
9999 @noindent
10000 and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points to the second clause, the
10001 value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is:
10002
10003 @smallexample
10004 ("a different piece of text" "yet more text")
10005 @end smallexample
10006
10007 As explained in the previous chapter (@pxref{List Implementation}), the
10008 computer does not keep two different copies of the text being pointed to
10009 by both the @code{kill-ring} and the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}. The
10010 words ``a different piece of text'' and ``yet more text'' are not
10011 duplicated. Instead, the two Lisp variables point to the same pieces of
10012 text. Here is a diagram:
10013
10014 @c cons-cell-diagram #5
10015 @ifnottex
10016 @smallexample
10017 @group
10018 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10019 | |
10020 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10021 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10022 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10023 | | |
10024 | | |
10025 | | --> "yet more text"
10026 | |
10027 | --> "a different piece of text"
10028 |
10029 --> "some text"
10030 @end group
10031 @end smallexample
10032 @sp 1
10033 @end ifnottex
10034 @ifset print-postscript-figures
10035 @sp 1
10036 @tex
10037 @center @image{cons-5}
10038 @end tex
10039 @sp 1
10040 @end ifset
10041 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
10042 @iftex
10043 @smallexample
10044 @group
10045 kill-ring kill-ring-yank-pointer
10046 | |
10047 | ___ ___ | ___ ___ ___ ___
10048 ---> | | | --> | | | | | |
10049 |___|___|----> |___|___|--> |___|___|--> nil
10050 | | |
10051 | | |
10052 | | --> "yet more text"
10053 | |
10054 | --> "a different piece of text
10055 |
10056 --> "some text"
10057 @end group
10058 @end smallexample
10059 @sp 1
10060 @end iftex
10061 @end ifclear
10062
10063 Both the variable @code{kill-ring} and the variable
10064 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} are pointers. But the kill ring itself is
10065 usually described as if it were actually what it is composed of. The
10066 @code{kill-ring} is spoken of as if it were the list rather than that it
10067 points to the list. Conversely, the @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is
10068 spoken of as pointing to a list.
10069
10070 These two ways of talking about the same thing sound confusing at first but
10071 make sense on reflection. The kill ring is generally thought of as the
10072 complete structure of data that holds the information of what has recently
10073 been cut out of the Emacs buffers. The @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
10074 on the other hand, serves to indicate---that is, to ``point to''---that part
10075 of the kill ring of which the first element (the @sc{car}) will be
10076 inserted.
10077
10078 @ignore
10079 In GNU Emacs 22, the @code{kill-new} function calls
10080
10081 @code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)}
10082
10083 (defun rotate-yank-pointer (arg)
10084 "Rotate the yanking point in the kill ring.
10085 With argument, rotate that many kills forward (or backward, if negative)."
10086 (interactive "p")
10087 (current-kill arg))
10088
10089 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
10090 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
10091 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
10092 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
10093 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
10094 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
10095 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
10096 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
10097 interprogram-paste-function
10098 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
10099 (if interprogram-paste
10100 (progn
10101 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
10102 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
10103 ;; selection, with identical text.
10104 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
10105 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
10106 interprogram-paste)
10107 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
10108 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
10109 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
10110 (length kill-ring))
10111 kill-ring)))
10112 (or do-not-move
10113 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
10114 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
10115
10116 @end ignore
10117
10118 @need 1500
10119 @node yank nthcdr Exercises
10120 @section Exercises with @code{yank} and @code{nthcdr}
10121
10122 @itemize @bullet
10123 @item
10124 Using @kbd{C-h v} (@code{describe-variable}), look at the value of
10125 your kill ring. Add several items to your kill ring; look at its
10126 value again. Using @kbd{M-y} (@code{yank-pop)}, move all the way
10127 around the kill ring. How many items were in your kill ring? Find
10128 the value of @code{kill-ring-max}. Was your kill ring full, or could
10129 you have kept more blocks of text within it?
10130
10131 @item
10132 Using @code{nthcdr} and @code{car}, construct a series of expressions
10133 to return the first, second, third, and fourth elements of a list.
10134 @end itemize
10135
10136 @node Loops & Recursion
10137 @chapter Loops and Recursion
10138 @cindex Loops and recursion
10139 @cindex Recursion and loops
10140 @cindex Repetition (loops)
10141
10142 Emacs Lisp has two primary ways to cause an expression, or a series of
10143 expressions, to be evaluated repeatedly: one uses a @code{while}
10144 loop, and the other uses @dfn{recursion}.
10145
10146 Repetition can be very valuable. For example, to move forward four
10147 sentences, you need only write a program that will move forward one
10148 sentence and then repeat the process four times. Since a computer does
10149 not get bored or tired, such repetitive action does not have the
10150 deleterious effects that excessive or the wrong kinds of repetition can
10151 have on humans.
10152
10153 People mostly write Emacs Lisp functions using @code{while} loops and
10154 their kin; but you can use recursion, which provides a very powerful
10155 way to think about and then to solve problems@footnote{You can write
10156 recursive functions to be frugal or wasteful of mental or computer
10157 resources; as it happens, methods that people find easy---that are
10158 frugal of ``mental resources''---sometimes use considerable computer
10159 resources. Emacs was designed to run on machines that we now consider
10160 limited and its default settings are conservative. You may want to
10161 increase the values of @code{max-specpdl-size} and
10162 @code{max-lisp-eval-depth}. In my @file{.emacs} file, I set them to
10163 15 and 30 times their default value.}.
10164
10165 @menu
10166 * while:: Causing a stretch of code to repeat.
10167 * dolist dotimes::
10168 * Recursion:: Causing a function to call itself.
10169 * Looping exercise::
10170 @end menu
10171
10172 @node while
10173 @section @code{while}
10174 @cindex Loops
10175 @findex while
10176
10177 The @code{while} special form tests whether the value returned by
10178 evaluating its first argument is true or false. This is similar to what
10179 the Lisp interpreter does with an @code{if}; what the interpreter does
10180 next, however, is different.
10181
10182 In a @code{while} expression, if the value returned by evaluating the
10183 first argument is false, the Lisp interpreter skips the rest of the
10184 expression (the @dfn{body} of the expression) and does not evaluate it.
10185 However, if the value is true, the Lisp interpreter evaluates the body
10186 of the expression and then again tests whether the first argument to
10187 @code{while} is true or false. If the value returned by evaluating the
10188 first argument is again true, the Lisp interpreter again evaluates the
10189 body of the expression.
10190
10191 @need 1200
10192 The template for a @code{while} expression looks like this:
10193
10194 @smallexample
10195 @group
10196 (while @var{true-or-false-test}
10197 @var{body}@dots{})
10198 @end group
10199 @end smallexample
10200
10201 @menu
10202 * Looping with while:: Repeat so long as test returns true.
10203 * Loop Example:: A @code{while} loop that uses a list.
10204 * print-elements-of-list:: Uses @code{while}, @code{car}, @code{cdr}.
10205 * Incrementing Loop:: A loop with an incrementing counter.
10206 * Incrementing Loop Details::
10207 * Decrementing Loop:: A loop with a decrementing counter.
10208 @end menu
10209
10210 @ifnottex
10211 @node Looping with while
10212 @unnumberedsubsec Looping with @code{while}
10213 @end ifnottex
10214
10215 So long as the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} expression
10216 returns a true value when it is evaluated, the body is repeatedly
10217 evaluated. This process is called a loop since the Lisp interpreter
10218 repeats the same thing again and again, like an airplane doing a loop.
10219 When the result of evaluating the true-or-false-test is false, the
10220 Lisp interpreter does not evaluate the rest of the @code{while}
10221 expression and ``exits the loop''.
10222
10223 Clearly, if the value returned by evaluating the first argument to
10224 @code{while} is always true, the body following will be evaluated
10225 again and again @dots{} and again @dots{} forever. Conversely, if the
10226 value returned is never true, the expressions in the body will never
10227 be evaluated. The craft of writing a @code{while} loop consists of
10228 choosing a mechanism such that the true-or-false-test returns true
10229 just the number of times that you want the subsequent expressions to
10230 be evaluated, and then have the test return false.
10231
10232 The value returned by evaluating a @code{while} is the value of the
10233 true-or-false-test. An interesting consequence of this is that a
10234 @code{while} loop that evaluates without error will return @code{nil}
10235 or false regardless of whether it has looped 1 or 100 times or none at
10236 all. A @code{while} expression that evaluates successfully never
10237 returns a true value! What this means is that @code{while} is always
10238 evaluated for its side effects, which is to say, the consequences of
10239 evaluating the expressions within the body of the @code{while} loop.
10240 This makes sense. It is not the mere act of looping that is desired,
10241 but the consequences of what happens when the expressions in the loop
10242 are repeatedly evaluated.
10243
10244 @node Loop Example
10245 @subsection A @code{while} Loop and a List
10246
10247 A common way to control a @code{while} loop is to test whether a list
10248 has any elements. If it does, the loop is repeated; but if it does not,
10249 the repetition is ended. Since this is an important technique, we will
10250 create a short example to illustrate it.
10251
10252 A simple way to test whether a list has elements is to evaluate the
10253 list: if it has no elements, it is an empty list and will return the
10254 empty list, @code{()}, which is a synonym for @code{nil} or false. On
10255 the other hand, a list with elements will return those elements when it
10256 is evaluated. Since Emacs Lisp considers as true any value that is not
10257 @code{nil}, a list that returns elements will test true in a
10258 @code{while} loop.
10259
10260 @need 1200
10261 For example, you can set the variable @code{empty-list} to @code{nil} by
10262 evaluating the following @code{setq} expression:
10263
10264 @smallexample
10265 (setq empty-list ())
10266 @end smallexample
10267
10268 @noindent
10269 After evaluating the @code{setq} expression, you can evaluate the
10270 variable @code{empty-list} in the usual way, by placing the cursor after
10271 the symbol and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}; @code{nil} will appear in your
10272 echo area:
10273
10274 @smallexample
10275 empty-list
10276 @end smallexample
10277
10278 On the other hand, if you set a variable to be a list with elements, the
10279 list will appear when you evaluate the variable, as you can see by
10280 evaluating the following two expressions:
10281
10282 @smallexample
10283 @group
10284 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10285
10286 animals
10287 @end group
10288 @end smallexample
10289
10290 Thus, to create a @code{while} loop that tests whether there are any
10291 items in the list @code{animals}, the first part of the loop will be
10292 written like this:
10293
10294 @smallexample
10295 @group
10296 (while animals
10297 @dots{}
10298 @end group
10299 @end smallexample
10300
10301 @noindent
10302 When the @code{while} tests its first argument, the variable
10303 @code{animals} is evaluated. It returns a list. So long as the list
10304 has elements, the @code{while} considers the results of the test to be
10305 true; but when the list is empty, it considers the results of the test
10306 to be false.
10307
10308 To prevent the @code{while} loop from running forever, some mechanism
10309 needs to be provided to empty the list eventually. An oft-used
10310 technique is to have one of the subsequent forms in the @code{while}
10311 expression set the value of the list to be the @sc{cdr} of the list.
10312 Each time the @code{cdr} function is evaluated, the list will be made
10313 shorter, until eventually only the empty list will be left. At this
10314 point, the test of the @code{while} loop will return false, and the
10315 arguments to the @code{while} will no longer be evaluated.
10316
10317 For example, the list of animals bound to the variable @code{animals}
10318 can be set to be the @sc{cdr} of the original list with the
10319 following expression:
10320
10321 @smallexample
10322 (setq animals (cdr animals))
10323 @end smallexample
10324
10325 @noindent
10326 If you have evaluated the previous expressions and then evaluate this
10327 expression, you will see @code{(giraffe lion tiger)} appear in the echo
10328 area. If you evaluate the expression again, @code{(lion tiger)} will
10329 appear in the echo area. If you evaluate it again and yet again,
10330 @code{(tiger)} appears and then the empty list, shown by @code{nil}.
10331
10332 A template for a @code{while} loop that uses the @code{cdr} function
10333 repeatedly to cause the true-or-false-test eventually to test false
10334 looks like this:
10335
10336 @smallexample
10337 @group
10338 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
10339 @var{body}@dots{}
10340 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
10341 @end group
10342 @end smallexample
10343
10344 This test and use of @code{cdr} can be put together in a function that
10345 goes through a list and prints each element of the list on a line of its
10346 own.
10347
10348 @node print-elements-of-list
10349 @subsection An Example: @code{print-elements-of-list}
10350 @findex print-elements-of-list
10351
10352 The @code{print-elements-of-list} function illustrates a @code{while}
10353 loop with a list.
10354
10355 @cindex @file{*scratch*} buffer
10356 The function requires several lines for its output. If you are
10357 reading this in a recent instance of GNU Emacs,
10358 @c GNU Emacs 21, GNU Emacs 22, or a later version,
10359 you can evaluate the following expression inside of Info, as usual.
10360
10361 If you are using an earlier version of Emacs, you need to copy the
10362 necessary expressions to your @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate
10363 them there. This is because the echo area had only one line in the
10364 earlier versions.
10365
10366 You can copy the expressions by marking the beginning of the region
10367 with @kbd{C-@key{SPC}} (@code{set-mark-command}), moving the cursor to
10368 the end of the region and then copying the region using @kbd{M-w}
10369 (@code{kill-ring-save}, which calls @code{copy-region-as-kill} and
10370 then provides visual feedback). In the @file{*scratch*}
10371 buffer, you can yank the expressions back by typing @kbd{C-y}
10372 (@code{yank}).
10373
10374 After you have copied the expressions to the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
10375 evaluate each expression in turn. Be sure to evaluate the last
10376 expression, @code{(print-elements-of-list animals)}, by typing
10377 @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}, that is, by giving an argument to
10378 @code{eval-last-sexp}. This will cause the result of the evaluation
10379 to be printed in the @file{*scratch*} buffer instead of being printed
10380 in the echo area. (Otherwise you will see something like this in your
10381 echo area: @code{^Jgazelle^J^Jgiraffe^J^Jlion^J^Jtiger^Jnil}, in which
10382 each @samp{^J} stands for a ``newline''.)
10383
10384 @need 1500
10385 In a recent instance of GNU Emacs, you can evaluate these expressions
10386 directly in the Info buffer, and the echo area will grow to show the
10387 results.
10388
10389 @smallexample
10390 @group
10391 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10392
10393 (defun print-elements-of-list (list)
10394 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own."
10395 (while list
10396 (print (car list))
10397 (setq list (cdr list))))
10398
10399 (print-elements-of-list animals)
10400 @end group
10401 @end smallexample
10402
10403 @need 1200
10404 @noindent
10405 When you evaluate the three expressions in sequence, you will see
10406 this:
10407
10408 @smallexample
10409 @group
10410 gazelle
10411
10412 giraffe
10413
10414 lion
10415
10416 tiger
10417 nil
10418 @end group
10419 @end smallexample
10420
10421 Each element of the list is printed on a line of its own (that is what
10422 the function @code{print} does) and then the value returned by the
10423 function is printed. Since the last expression in the function is the
10424 @code{while} loop, and since @code{while} loops always return
10425 @code{nil}, a @code{nil} is printed after the last element of the list.
10426
10427 @node Incrementing Loop
10428 @subsection A Loop with an Incrementing Counter
10429
10430 A loop is not useful unless it stops when it ought. Besides
10431 controlling a loop with a list, a common way of stopping a loop is to
10432 write the first argument as a test that returns false when the correct
10433 number of repetitions are complete. This means that the loop must
10434 have a counter---an expression that counts how many times the loop
10435 repeats itself.
10436
10437 @ifnottex
10438 @node Incrementing Loop Details
10439 @unnumberedsubsec Details of an Incrementing Loop
10440 @end ifnottex
10441
10442 The test for a loop with an incrementing counter can be an expression
10443 such as @code{(< count desired-number)} which returns @code{t} for
10444 true if the value of @code{count} is less than the
10445 @code{desired-number} of repetitions and @code{nil} for false if the
10446 value of @code{count} is equal to or is greater than the
10447 @code{desired-number}. The expression that increments the count can
10448 be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq count (1+ count))}, where
10449 @code{1+} is a built-in function in Emacs Lisp that adds 1 to its
10450 argument. (The expression @w{@code{(1+ count)}} has the same result
10451 as @w{@code{(+ count 1)}}, but is easier for a human to read.)
10452
10453 @need 1250
10454 The template for a @code{while} loop controlled by an incrementing
10455 counter looks like this:
10456
10457 @smallexample
10458 @group
10459 @var{set-count-to-initial-value}
10460 (while (< count desired-number) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10461 @var{body}@dots{}
10462 (setq count (1+ count))) ; @r{incrementer}
10463 @end group
10464 @end smallexample
10465
10466 @noindent
10467 Note that you need to set the initial value of @code{count}; usually it
10468 is set to 1.
10469
10470 @menu
10471 * Incrementing Example:: Counting pebbles in a triangle.
10472 * Inc Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10473 * Inc Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10474 @end menu
10475
10476 @node Incrementing Example
10477 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with incrementing counter
10478
10479 Suppose you are playing on the beach and decide to make a triangle of
10480 pebbles, putting one pebble in the first row, two in the second row,
10481 three in the third row and so on, like this:
10482
10483 @sp 1
10484 @c pebble diagram
10485 @ifnottex
10486 @smallexample
10487 @group
10488 *
10489 * *
10490 * * *
10491 * * * *
10492 @end group
10493 @end smallexample
10494 @end ifnottex
10495 @iftex
10496 @smallexample
10497 @group
10498 @bullet{}
10499 @bullet{} @bullet{}
10500 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10501 @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{} @bullet{}
10502 @end group
10503 @end smallexample
10504 @end iftex
10505 @sp 1
10506
10507 @noindent
10508 (About 2500 years ago, Pythagoras and others developed the beginnings of
10509 number theory by considering questions such as this.)
10510
10511 Suppose you want to know how many pebbles you will need to make a
10512 triangle with 7 rows?
10513
10514 Clearly, what you need to do is add up the numbers from 1 to 7. There
10515 are two ways to do this; start with the smallest number, one, and add up
10516 the list in sequence, 1, 2, 3, 4 and so on; or start with the largest
10517 number and add the list going down: 7, 6, 5, 4 and so on. Because both
10518 mechanisms illustrate common ways of writing @code{while} loops, we will
10519 create two examples, one counting up and the other counting down. In
10520 this first example, we will start with 1 and add 2, 3, 4 and so on.
10521
10522 If you are just adding up a short list of numbers, the easiest way to do
10523 it is to add up all the numbers at once. However, if you do not know
10524 ahead of time how many numbers your list will have, or if you want to be
10525 prepared for a very long list, then you need to design your addition so
10526 that what you do is repeat a simple process many times instead of doing
10527 a more complex process once.
10528
10529 For example, instead of adding up all the pebbles all at once, what you
10530 can do is add the number of pebbles in the first row, 1, to the number
10531 in the second row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to the
10532 third row, 3. Then you can add the number in the fourth row, 4, to the
10533 total of the first three rows; and so on.
10534
10535 The critical characteristic of the process is that each repetitive
10536 action is simple. In this case, at each step we add only two numbers,
10537 the number of pebbles in the row and the total already found. This
10538 process of adding two numbers is repeated again and again until the last
10539 row has been added to the total of all the preceding rows. In a more
10540 complex loop the repetitive action might not be so simple, but it will
10541 be simpler than doing everything all at once.
10542
10543 @node Inc Example parts
10544 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10545
10546 The preceding analysis gives us the bones of our function definition:
10547 first, we will need a variable that we can call @code{total} that will
10548 be the total number of pebbles. This will be the value returned by
10549 the function.
10550
10551 Second, we know that the function will require an argument: this
10552 argument will be the total number of rows in the triangle. It can be
10553 called @code{number-of-rows}.
10554
10555 Finally, we need a variable to use as a counter. We could call this
10556 variable @code{counter}, but a better name is @code{row-number}. That
10557 is because what the counter does in this function is count rows, and a
10558 program should be written to be as understandable as possible.
10559
10560 When the Lisp interpreter first starts evaluating the expressions in the
10561 function, the value of @code{total} should be set to zero, since we have
10562 not added anything to it. Then the function should add the number of
10563 pebbles in the first row to the total, and then add the number of
10564 pebbles in the second to the total, and then add the number of
10565 pebbles in the third row to the total, and so on, until there are no
10566 more rows left to add.
10567
10568 Both @code{total} and @code{row-number} are used only inside the
10569 function, so they can be declared as local variables with @code{let}
10570 and given initial values. Clearly, the initial value for @code{total}
10571 should be 0. The initial value of @code{row-number} should be 1,
10572 since we start with the first row. This means that the @code{let}
10573 statement will look like this:
10574
10575 @smallexample
10576 @group
10577 (let ((total 0)
10578 (row-number 1))
10579 @var{body}@dots{})
10580 @end group
10581 @end smallexample
10582
10583 After the internal variables are declared and bound to their initial
10584 values, we can begin the @code{while} loop. The expression that serves
10585 as the test should return a value of @code{t} for true so long as the
10586 @code{row-number} is less than or equal to the @code{number-of-rows}.
10587 (If the expression tests true only so long as the row number is less
10588 than the number of rows in the triangle, the last row will never be
10589 added to the total; hence the row number has to be either less than or
10590 equal to the number of rows.)
10591
10592 @need 1500
10593 @findex <= @r{(less than or equal)}
10594 Lisp provides the @code{<=} function that returns true if the value of
10595 its first argument is less than or equal to the value of its second
10596 argument and false otherwise. So the expression that the @code{while}
10597 will evaluate as its test should look like this:
10598
10599 @smallexample
10600 (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10601 @end smallexample
10602
10603 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10604 of pebbles in a row to the total already found. Since the number of
10605 pebbles in the row is equal to the row number, the total can be found by
10606 adding the row number to the total. (Clearly, in a more complex
10607 situation, the number of pebbles in the row might be related to the row
10608 number in a more complicated way; if this were the case, the row number
10609 would be replaced by the appropriate expression.)
10610
10611 @smallexample
10612 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10613 @end smallexample
10614
10615 @noindent
10616 What this does is set the new value of @code{total} to be equal to the
10617 sum of adding the number of pebbles in the row to the previous total.
10618
10619 After setting the value of @code{total}, the conditions need to be
10620 established for the next repetition of the loop, if there is one. This
10621 is done by incrementing the value of the @code{row-number} variable,
10622 which serves as a counter. After the @code{row-number} variable has
10623 been incremented, the true-or-false-test at the beginning of the
10624 @code{while} loop tests whether its value is still less than or equal to
10625 the value of the @code{number-of-rows} and if it is, adds the new value
10626 of the @code{row-number} variable to the @code{total} of the previous
10627 repetition of the loop.
10628
10629 @need 1200
10630 The built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1+} adds 1 to a number, so the
10631 @code{row-number} variable can be incremented with this expression:
10632
10633 @smallexample
10634 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))
10635 @end smallexample
10636
10637 @node Inc Example altogether
10638 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10639
10640 We have created the parts for the function definition; now we need to
10641 put them together.
10642
10643 @need 800
10644 First, the contents of the @code{while} expression:
10645
10646 @smallexample
10647 @group
10648 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10649 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10650 (setq row-number (1+ row-number))) ; @r{incrementer}
10651 @end group
10652 @end smallexample
10653
10654 Along with the @code{let} expression varlist, this very nearly
10655 completes the body of the function definition. However, it requires
10656 one final element, the need for which is somewhat subtle.
10657
10658 The final touch is to place the variable @code{total} on a line by
10659 itself after the @code{while} expression. Otherwise, the value returned
10660 by the whole function is the value of the last expression that is
10661 evaluated in the body of the @code{let}, and this is the value
10662 returned by the @code{while}, which is always @code{nil}.
10663
10664 This may not be evident at first sight. It almost looks as if the
10665 incrementing expression is the last expression of the whole function.
10666 But that expression is part of the body of the @code{while}; it is the
10667 last element of the list that starts with the symbol @code{while}.
10668 Moreover, the whole of the @code{while} loop is a list within the body
10669 of the @code{let}.
10670
10671 @need 1250
10672 In outline, the function will look like this:
10673
10674 @smallexample
10675 @group
10676 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
10677 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
10678 (let (@var{varlist})
10679 (while (@var{true-or-false-test})
10680 @var{body-of-while}@dots{} )
10681 @dots{} )) ; @r{Need final expression here.}
10682 @end group
10683 @end smallexample
10684
10685 The result of evaluating the @code{let} is what is going to be returned
10686 by the @code{defun} since the @code{let} is not embedded within any
10687 containing list, except for the @code{defun} as a whole. However, if
10688 the @code{while} is the last element of the @code{let} expression, the
10689 function will always return @code{nil}. This is not what we want!
10690 Instead, what we want is the value of the variable @code{total}. This
10691 is returned by simply placing the symbol as the last element of the list
10692 starting with @code{let}. It gets evaluated after the preceding
10693 elements of the list are evaluated, which means it gets evaluated after
10694 it has been assigned the correct value for the total.
10695
10696 It may be easier to see this by printing the list starting with
10697 @code{let} all on one line. This format makes it evident that the
10698 @var{varlist} and @code{while} expressions are the second and third
10699 elements of the list starting with @code{let}, and the @code{total} is
10700 the last element:
10701
10702 @smallexample
10703 @group
10704 (let (@var{varlist}) (while (@var{true-or-false-test}) @var{body-of-while}@dots{} ) total)
10705 @end group
10706 @end smallexample
10707
10708 @need 1200
10709 Putting everything together, the @code{triangle} function definition
10710 looks like this:
10711
10712 @smallexample
10713 @group
10714 (defun triangle (number-of-rows) ; @r{Version with}
10715 ; @r{ incrementing counter.}
10716 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
10717 The first row has one pebble, the second row two pebbles,
10718 the third row three pebbles, and so on.
10719 The argument is NUMBER-OF-ROWS."
10720 @end group
10721 @group
10722 (let ((total 0)
10723 (row-number 1))
10724 (while (<= row-number number-of-rows)
10725 (setq total (+ total row-number))
10726 (setq row-number (1+ row-number)))
10727 total))
10728 @end group
10729 @end smallexample
10730
10731 @need 1200
10732 After you have installed @code{triangle} by evaluating the function, you
10733 can try it out. Here are two examples:
10734
10735 @smallexample
10736 @group
10737 (triangle 4)
10738
10739 (triangle 7)
10740 @end group
10741 @end smallexample
10742
10743 @noindent
10744 The sum of the first four numbers is 10 and the sum of the first seven
10745 numbers is 28.
10746
10747 @node Decrementing Loop
10748 @subsection Loop with a Decrementing Counter
10749
10750 Another common way to write a @code{while} loop is to write the test
10751 so that it determines whether a counter is greater than zero. So long
10752 as the counter is greater than zero, the loop is repeated. But when
10753 the counter is equal to or less than zero, the loop is stopped. For
10754 this to work, the counter has to start out greater than zero and then
10755 be made smaller and smaller by a form that is evaluated
10756 repeatedly.
10757
10758 The test will be an expression such as @code{(> counter 0)} which
10759 returns @code{t} for true if the value of @code{counter} is greater
10760 than zero, and @code{nil} for false if the value of @code{counter} is
10761 equal to or less than zero. The expression that makes the number
10762 smaller and smaller can be a simple @code{setq} such as @code{(setq
10763 counter (1- counter))}, where @code{1-} is a built-in function in
10764 Emacs Lisp that subtracts 1 from its argument.
10765
10766 @need 1250
10767 The template for a decrementing @code{while} loop looks like this:
10768
10769 @smallexample
10770 @group
10771 (while (> counter 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
10772 @var{body}@dots{}
10773 (setq counter (1- counter))) ; @r{decrementer}
10774 @end group
10775 @end smallexample
10776
10777 @menu
10778 * Decrementing Example:: More pebbles on the beach.
10779 * Dec Example parts:: The parts of the function definition.
10780 * Dec Example altogether:: Putting the function definition together.
10781 @end menu
10782
10783 @node Decrementing Example
10784 @unnumberedsubsubsec Example with decrementing counter
10785
10786 To illustrate a loop with a decrementing counter, we will rewrite the
10787 @code{triangle} function so the counter decreases to zero.
10788
10789 This is the reverse of the earlier version of the function. In this
10790 case, to find out how many pebbles are needed to make a triangle with
10791 3 rows, add the number of pebbles in the third row, 3, to the number
10792 in the preceding row, 2, and then add the total of those two rows to
10793 the row that precedes them, which is 1.
10794
10795 Likewise, to find the number of pebbles in a triangle with 7 rows, add
10796 the number of pebbles in the seventh row, 7, to the number in the
10797 preceding row, which is 6, and then add the total of those two rows to
10798 the row that precedes them, which is 5, and so on. As in the previous
10799 example, each addition only involves adding two numbers, the total of
10800 the rows already added up and the number of pebbles in the row that is
10801 being added to the total. This process of adding two numbers is
10802 repeated again and again until there are no more pebbles to add.
10803
10804 We know how many pebbles to start with: the number of pebbles in the
10805 last row is equal to the number of rows. If the triangle has seven
10806 rows, the number of pebbles in the last row is 7. Likewise, we know how
10807 many pebbles are in the preceding row: it is one less than the number in
10808 the row.
10809
10810 @node Dec Example parts
10811 @unnumberedsubsubsec The parts of the function definition
10812
10813 We start with three variables: the total number of rows in the
10814 triangle; the number of pebbles in a row; and the total number of
10815 pebbles, which is what we want to calculate. These variables can be
10816 named @code{number-of-rows}, @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}, and
10817 @code{total}, respectively.
10818
10819 Both @code{total} and @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} are used only
10820 inside the function and are declared with @code{let}. The initial
10821 value of @code{total} should, of course, be zero. However, the
10822 initial value of @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be equal to
10823 the number of rows in the triangle, since the addition will start with
10824 the longest row.
10825
10826 @need 1250
10827 This means that the beginning of the @code{let} expression will look
10828 like this:
10829
10830 @smallexample
10831 @group
10832 (let ((total 0)
10833 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
10834 @var{body}@dots{})
10835 @end group
10836 @end smallexample
10837
10838 The total number of pebbles can be found by repeatedly adding the number
10839 of pebbles in a row to the total already found, that is, by repeatedly
10840 evaluating the following expression:
10841
10842 @smallexample
10843 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10844 @end smallexample
10845
10846 @noindent
10847 After the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is added to the @code{total},
10848 the @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} should be decremented by one, since
10849 the next time the loop repeats, the preceding row will be
10850 added to the total.
10851
10852 The number of pebbles in a preceding row is one less than the number of
10853 pebbles in a row, so the built-in Emacs Lisp function @code{1-} can be
10854 used to compute the number of pebbles in the preceding row. This can be
10855 done with the following expression:
10856
10857 @smallexample
10858 @group
10859 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
10860 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10861 @end group
10862 @end smallexample
10863
10864 Finally, we know that the @code{while} loop should stop making repeated
10865 additions when there are no pebbles in a row. So the test for
10866 the @code{while} loop is simply:
10867
10868 @smallexample
10869 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
10870 @end smallexample
10871
10872 @node Dec Example altogether
10873 @unnumberedsubsubsec Putting the function definition together
10874
10875 We can put these expressions together to create a function definition
10876 that works. However, on examination, we find that one of the local
10877 variables is unneeded!
10878
10879 @need 1250
10880 The function definition looks like this:
10881
10882 @smallexample
10883 @group
10884 ;;; @r{First subtractive version.}
10885 (defun triangle (number-of-rows)
10886 "Add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
10887 (let ((total 0)
10888 (number-of-pebbles-in-row number-of-rows))
10889 (while (> number-of-pebbles-in-row 0)
10890 (setq total (+ total number-of-pebbles-in-row))
10891 (setq number-of-pebbles-in-row
10892 (1- number-of-pebbles-in-row)))
10893 total))
10894 @end group
10895 @end smallexample
10896
10897 As written, this function works.
10898
10899 However, we do not need @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row}.
10900
10901 @cindex Argument as local variable
10902 When the @code{triangle} function is evaluated, the symbol
10903 @code{number-of-rows} will be bound to a number, giving it an initial
10904 value. That number can be changed in the body of the function as if
10905 it were a local variable, without any fear that such a change will
10906 effect the value of the variable outside of the function. This is a
10907 very useful characteristic of Lisp; it means that the variable
10908 @code{number-of-rows} can be used anywhere in the function where
10909 @code{number-of-pebbles-in-row} is used.
10910
10911 @need 800
10912 Here is a second version of the function written a bit more cleanly:
10913
10914 @smallexample
10915 @group
10916 (defun triangle (number) ; @r{Second version.}
10917 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
10918 (let ((total 0))
10919 (while (> number 0)
10920 (setq total (+ total number))
10921 (setq number (1- number)))
10922 total))
10923 @end group
10924 @end smallexample
10925
10926 In brief, a properly written @code{while} loop will consist of three parts:
10927
10928 @enumerate
10929 @item
10930 A test that will return false after the loop has repeated itself the
10931 correct number of times.
10932
10933 @item
10934 An expression the evaluation of which will return the value desired
10935 after being repeatedly evaluated.
10936
10937 @item
10938 An expression to change the value passed to the true-or-false-test so
10939 that the test returns false after the loop has repeated itself the right
10940 number of times.
10941 @end enumerate
10942
10943 @node dolist dotimes
10944 @section Save your time: @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
10945
10946 In addition to @code{while}, both @code{dolist} and @code{dotimes}
10947 provide for looping. Sometimes these are quicker to write than the
10948 equivalent @code{while} loop. Both are Lisp macros. (@xref{Macros, ,
10949 Macros, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}. )
10950
10951 @code{dolist} works like a @code{while} loop that ``@sc{cdr}s down a
10952 list'': @code{dolist} automatically shortens the list each time it
10953 loops---takes the @sc{cdr} of the list---and binds the @sc{car} of
10954 each shorter version of the list to the first of its arguments.
10955
10956 @code{dotimes} loops a specific number of times: you specify the number.
10957
10958 @menu
10959 * dolist::
10960 * dotimes::
10961 @end menu
10962
10963 @node dolist
10964 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{dolist} Macro
10965 @findex dolist
10966
10967 Suppose, for example, you want to reverse a list, so that
10968 ``first'' ``second'' ``third'' becomes ``third'' ``second'' ``first''.
10969
10970 @need 1250
10971 In practice, you would use the @code{reverse} function, like this:
10972
10973 @smallexample
10974 @group
10975 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10976
10977 (reverse animals)
10978 @end group
10979 @end smallexample
10980
10981 @need 800
10982 @noindent
10983 Here is how you could reverse the list using a @code{while} loop:
10984
10985 @smallexample
10986 @group
10987 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
10988
10989 (defun reverse-list-with-while (list)
10990 "Using while, reverse the order of LIST."
10991 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
10992 (while list
10993 (setq value (cons (car list) value))
10994 (setq list (cdr list)))
10995 value))
10996
10997 (reverse-list-with-while animals)
10998 @end group
10999 @end smallexample
11000
11001 @need 800
11002 @noindent
11003 And here is how you could use the @code{dolist} macro:
11004
11005 @smallexample
11006 @group
11007 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11008
11009 (defun reverse-list-with-dolist (list)
11010 "Using dolist, reverse the order of LIST."
11011 (let (value) ; make sure list starts empty
11012 (dolist (element list value)
11013 (setq value (cons element value)))))
11014
11015 (reverse-list-with-dolist animals)
11016 @end group
11017 @end smallexample
11018
11019 @need 1250
11020 @noindent
11021 In Info, you can place your cursor after the closing parenthesis of
11022 each expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e}; in each case, you should see
11023
11024 @smallexample
11025 (tiger lion giraffe gazelle)
11026 @end smallexample
11027
11028 @noindent
11029 in the echo area.
11030
11031 For this example, the existing @code{reverse} function is obviously best.
11032 The @code{while} loop is just like our first example (@pxref{Loop
11033 Example, , A @code{while} Loop and a List}). The @code{while} first
11034 checks whether the list has elements; if so, it constructs a new list
11035 by adding the first element of the list to the existing list (which in
11036 the first iteration of the loop is @code{nil}). Since the second
11037 element is prepended in front of the first element, and the third
11038 element is prepended in front of the second element, the list is reversed.
11039
11040 In the expression using a @code{while} loop,
11041 the @w{@code{(setq list (cdr list))}}
11042 expression shortens the list, so the @code{while} loop eventually
11043 stops. In addition, it provides the @code{cons} expression with a new
11044 first element by creating a new and shorter list at each repetition of
11045 the loop.
11046
11047 The @code{dolist} expression does very much the same as the
11048 @code{while} expression, except that the @code{dolist} macro does some
11049 of the work you have to do when writing a @code{while} expression.
11050
11051 Like a @code{while} loop, a @code{dolist} loops. What is different is
11052 that it automatically shortens the list each time it loops---it
11053 ``@sc{cdr}s down the list'' on its own---and it automatically binds
11054 the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list to the first of its
11055 arguments.
11056
11057 In the example, the @sc{car} of each shorter version of the list is
11058 referred to using the symbol @samp{element}, the list itself is called
11059 @samp{list}, and the value returned is called @samp{value}. The
11060 remainder of the @code{dolist} expression is the body.
11061
11062 The @code{dolist} expression binds the @sc{car} of each shorter
11063 version of the list to @code{element} and then evaluates the body of
11064 the expression; and repeats the loop. The result is returned in
11065 @code{value}.
11066
11067 @node dotimes
11068 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{dotimes} Macro
11069 @findex dotimes
11070
11071 The @code{dotimes} macro is similar to @code{dolist}, except that it
11072 loops a specific number of times.
11073
11074 The first argument to @code{dotimes} is assigned the numbers 0, 1, 2
11075 and so forth each time around the loop, and the value of the third
11076 argument is returned. You need to provide the value of the second
11077 argument, which is how many times the macro loops.
11078
11079 @need 1250
11080 For example, the following binds the numbers from 0 up to, but not
11081 including, the number 3 to the first argument, @var{number}, and then
11082 constructs a list of the three numbers. (The first number is 0, the
11083 second number is 1, and the third number is 2; this makes a total of
11084 three numbers in all, starting with zero as the first number.)
11085
11086 @smallexample
11087 @group
11088 (let (value) ; otherwise a value is a void variable
11089 (dotimes (number 3 value)
11090 (setq value (cons number value))))
11091
11092 @result{} (2 1 0)
11093 @end group
11094 @end smallexample
11095
11096 @noindent
11097 @code{dotimes} returns @code{value}, so the way to use
11098 @code{dotimes} is to operate on some expression @var{number} number of
11099 times and then return the result, either as a list or an atom.
11100
11101 @need 1250
11102 Here is an example of a @code{defun} that uses @code{dotimes} to add
11103 up the number of pebbles in a triangle.
11104
11105 @smallexample
11106 @group
11107 (defun triangle-using-dotimes (number-of-rows)
11108 "Using dotimes, add up the number of pebbles in a triangle."
11109 (let ((total 0)) ; otherwise a total is a void variable
11110 (dotimes (number number-of-rows total)
11111 (setq total (+ total (1+ number))))))
11112
11113 (triangle-using-dotimes 4)
11114 @end group
11115 @end smallexample
11116
11117 @node Recursion
11118 @section Recursion
11119 @cindex Recursion
11120
11121 A recursive function contains code that tells the Lisp interpreter to
11122 call a program that runs exactly like itself, but with slightly
11123 different arguments. The code runs exactly the same because it has
11124 the same name. However, even though the program has the same name, it
11125 is not the same entity. It is different. In the jargon, it is a
11126 different ``instance''.
11127
11128 Eventually, if the program is written correctly, the ``slightly
11129 different arguments'' will become sufficiently different from the first
11130 arguments that the final instance will stop.
11131
11132 @menu
11133 * Building Robots:: Same model, different serial number ...
11134 * Recursive Definition Parts:: Walk until you stop ...
11135 * Recursion with list:: Using a list as the test whether to recurse.
11136 * Recursive triangle function::
11137 * Recursion with cond::
11138 * Recursive Patterns:: Often used templates.
11139 * No Deferment:: Don't store up work ...
11140 * No deferment solution::
11141 @end menu
11142
11143 @node Building Robots
11144 @subsection Building Robots: Extending the Metaphor
11145 @cindex Building robots
11146 @cindex Robots, building
11147
11148 It is sometimes helpful to think of a running program as a robot that
11149 does a job. In doing its job, a recursive function calls on a second
11150 robot to help it. The second robot is identical to the first in every
11151 way, except that the second robot helps the first and has been
11152 passed different arguments than the first.
11153
11154 In a recursive function, the second robot may call a third; and the
11155 third may call a fourth, and so on. Each of these is a different
11156 entity; but all are clones.
11157
11158 Since each robot has slightly different instructions---the arguments
11159 will differ from one robot to the next---the last robot should know
11160 when to stop.
11161
11162 Let's expand on the metaphor in which a computer program is a robot.
11163
11164 A function definition provides the blueprints for a robot. When you
11165 install a function definition, that is, when you evaluate a
11166 @code{defun} macro, you install the necessary equipment to build
11167 robots. It is as if you were in a factory, setting up an assembly
11168 line. Robots with the same name are built according to the same
11169 blueprints. So they have, as it were, the same ``model number'', but a
11170 different ``serial number''.
11171
11172 We often say that a recursive function ``calls itself''. What we mean
11173 is that the instructions in a recursive function cause the Lisp
11174 interpreter to run a different function that has the same name and
11175 does the same job as the first, but with different arguments.
11176
11177 It is important that the arguments differ from one instance to the
11178 next; otherwise, the process will never stop.
11179
11180 @node Recursive Definition Parts
11181 @subsection The Parts of a Recursive Definition
11182 @cindex Parts of a Recursive Definition
11183 @cindex Recursive Definition Parts
11184
11185 A recursive function typically contains a conditional expression which
11186 has three parts:
11187
11188 @enumerate
11189 @item
11190 A true-or-false-test that determines whether the function is called
11191 again, here called the @dfn{do-again-test}.
11192
11193 @item
11194 The name of the function. When this name is called, a new instance of
11195 the function---a new robot, as it were---is created and told what to do.
11196
11197 @item
11198 An expression that returns a different value each time the function is
11199 called, here called the @dfn{next-step-expression}. Consequently, the
11200 argument (or arguments) passed to the new instance of the function
11201 will be different from that passed to the previous instance. This
11202 causes the conditional expression, the @dfn{do-again-test}, to test
11203 false after the correct number of repetitions.
11204 @end enumerate
11205
11206 Recursive functions can be much simpler than any other kind of
11207 function. Indeed, when people first start to use them, they often look
11208 so mysteriously simple as to be incomprehensible. Like riding a
11209 bicycle, reading a recursive function definition takes a certain knack
11210 which is hard at first but then seems simple.
11211
11212 @need 1200
11213 There are several different common recursive patterns. A very simple
11214 pattern looks like this:
11215
11216 @smallexample
11217 @group
11218 (defun @var{name-of-recursive-function} (@var{argument-list})
11219 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
11220 (if @var{do-again-test}
11221 @var{body}@dots{}
11222 (@var{name-of-recursive-function}
11223 @var{next-step-expression})))
11224 @end group
11225 @end smallexample
11226
11227 Each time a recursive function is evaluated, a new instance of it is
11228 created and told what to do. The arguments tell the instance what to do.
11229
11230 An argument is bound to the value of the next-step-expression. Each
11231 instance runs with a different value of the next-step-expression.
11232
11233 The value in the next-step-expression is used in the do-again-test.
11234
11235 The value returned by the next-step-expression is passed to the new
11236 instance of the function, which evaluates it (or some
11237 transmogrification of it) to determine whether to continue or stop.
11238 The next-step-expression is designed so that the do-again-test returns
11239 false when the function should no longer be repeated.
11240
11241 The do-again-test is sometimes called the @dfn{stop condition},
11242 since it stops the repetitions when it tests false.
11243
11244 @node Recursion with list
11245 @subsection Recursion with a List
11246
11247 The example of a @code{while} loop that printed the elements of a list
11248 of numbers can be written recursively. Here is the code, including
11249 an expression to set the value of the variable @code{animals} to a list.
11250
11251 If you are reading this in Info in Emacs, you can evaluate this
11252 expression directly in Info. Otherwise, you must copy the example
11253 to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and evaluate each expression there.
11254 Use @kbd{C-u C-x C-e} to evaluate the
11255 @code{(print-elements-recursively animals)} expression so that the
11256 results are printed in the buffer; otherwise the Lisp interpreter will
11257 try to squeeze the results into the one line of the echo area.
11258
11259 Also, place your cursor immediately after the last closing parenthesis
11260 of the @code{print-elements-recursively} function, before the comment.
11261 Otherwise, the Lisp interpreter will try to evaluate the comment.
11262
11263 @findex print-elements-recursively
11264 @smallexample
11265 @group
11266 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11267
11268 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11269 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11270 Uses recursion."
11271 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11272 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11273 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11274 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11275
11276 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11277 @end group
11278 @end smallexample
11279
11280 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function first tests whether
11281 there is any content in the list; if there is, the function prints the
11282 first element of the list, the @sc{car} of the list. Then the
11283 function ``invokes itself'', but gives itself as its argument, not the
11284 whole list, but the second and subsequent elements of the list, the
11285 @sc{cdr} of the list.
11286
11287 Put another way, if the list is not empty, the function invokes
11288 another instance of code that is similar to the initial code, but is a
11289 different thread of execution, with different arguments than the first
11290 instance.
11291
11292 Put in yet another way, if the list is not empty, the first robot
11293 assembles a second robot and tells it what to do; the second robot is
11294 a different individual from the first, but is the same model.
11295
11296 When the second evaluation occurs, the @code{when} expression is
11297 evaluated and if true, prints the first element of the list it
11298 receives as its argument (which is the second element of the original
11299 list). Then the function ``calls itself'' with the @sc{cdr} of the list
11300 it is invoked with, which (the second time around) is the @sc{cdr} of
11301 the @sc{cdr} of the original list.
11302
11303 Note that although we say that the function ``calls itself'', what we
11304 mean is that the Lisp interpreter assembles and instructs a new
11305 instance of the program. The new instance is a clone of the first,
11306 but is a separate individual.
11307
11308 Each time the function ``invokes itself'', it invokes itself on a
11309 shorter version of the original list. It creates a new instance that
11310 works on a shorter list.
11311
11312 Eventually, the function invokes itself on an empty list. It creates
11313 a new instance whose argument is @code{nil}. The conditional expression
11314 tests the value of @code{list}. Since the value of @code{list} is
11315 @code{nil}, the @code{when} expression tests false so the then-part is
11316 not evaluated. The function as a whole then returns @code{nil}.
11317
11318 @need 1200
11319 When you evaluate the expression @code{(print-elements-recursively
11320 animals)} in the @file{*scratch*} buffer, you see this result:
11321
11322 @smallexample
11323 @group
11324 gazelle
11325
11326 giraffe
11327
11328 lion
11329
11330 tiger
11331 nil
11332 @end group
11333 @end smallexample
11334
11335 @need 2000
11336 @node Recursive triangle function
11337 @subsection Recursion in Place of a Counter
11338 @findex triangle-recursively
11339
11340 @need 1200
11341 The @code{triangle} function described in a previous section can also
11342 be written recursively. It looks like this:
11343
11344 @smallexample
11345 @group
11346 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11347 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11348 Uses recursion."
11349 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11350 1 ; @r{then-part}
11351 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11352 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11353 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11354
11355 (triangle-recursively 7)
11356 @end group
11357 @end smallexample
11358
11359 @noindent
11360 You can install this function by evaluating it and then try it by
11361 evaluating @code{(triangle-recursively 7)}. (Remember to put your
11362 cursor immediately after the last parenthesis of the function
11363 definition, before the comment.) The function evaluates to 28.
11364
11365 To understand how this function works, let's consider what happens in the
11366 various cases when the function is passed 1, 2, 3, or 4 as the value of
11367 its argument.
11368
11369 @menu
11370 * Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2::
11371 * Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4::
11372 @end menu
11373
11374 @ifnottex
11375 @node Recursive Example arg of 1 or 2
11376 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 1 or 2
11377 @end ifnottex
11378
11379 First, what happens if the value of the argument is 1?
11380
11381 The function has an @code{if} expression after the documentation
11382 string. It tests whether the value of @code{number} is equal to 1; if
11383 so, Emacs evaluates the then-part of the @code{if} expression, which
11384 returns the number 1 as the value of the function. (A triangle with
11385 one row has one pebble in it.)
11386
11387 Suppose, however, that the value of the argument is 2. In this case,
11388 Emacs evaluates the else-part of the @code{if} expression.
11389
11390 @need 1200
11391 The else-part consists of an addition, the recursive call to
11392 @code{triangle-recursively} and a decrementing action; and it looks like
11393 this:
11394
11395 @smallexample
11396 (+ number (triangle-recursively (1- number)))
11397 @end smallexample
11398
11399 When Emacs evaluates this expression, the innermost expression is
11400 evaluated first; then the other parts in sequence. Here are the steps
11401 in detail:
11402
11403 @table @i
11404 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression.
11405
11406 The innermost expression is @code{(1- number)} so Emacs decrements the
11407 value of @code{number} from 2 to 1.
11408
11409 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11410
11411 The Lisp interpreter creates an individual instance of
11412 @code{triangle-recursively}. It does not matter that this function is
11413 contained within itself. Emacs passes the result Step 1 as the
11414 argument used by this instance of the @code{triangle-recursively}
11415 function
11416
11417 In this case, Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with an
11418 argument of 1. This means that this evaluation of
11419 @code{triangle-recursively} returns 1.
11420
11421 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the value of @code{number}.
11422
11423 The variable @code{number} is the second element of the list that
11424 starts with @code{+}; its value is 2.
11425
11426 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{+} expression.
11427
11428 The @code{+} expression receives two arguments, the first
11429 from the evaluation of @code{number} (Step 3) and the second from the
11430 evaluation of @code{triangle-recursively} (Step 2).
11431
11432 The result of the addition is the sum of 2 plus 1, and the number 3 is
11433 returned, which is correct. A triangle with two rows has three
11434 pebbles in it.
11435 @end table
11436
11437 @node Recursive Example arg of 3 or 4
11438 @unnumberedsubsubsec An argument of 3 or 4
11439
11440 Suppose that @code{triangle-recursively} is called with an argument of
11441 3.
11442
11443 @table @i
11444 @item Step 1 @w{ } Evaluate the do-again-test.
11445
11446 The @code{if} expression is evaluated first. This is the do-again
11447 test and returns false, so the else-part of the @code{if} expression
11448 is evaluated. (Note that in this example, the do-again-test causes
11449 the function to call itself when it tests false, not when it tests
11450 true.)
11451
11452 @item Step 2 @w{ } Evaluate the innermost expression of the else-part.
11453
11454 The innermost expression of the else-part is evaluated, which decrements
11455 3 to 2. This is the next-step-expression.
11456
11457 @item Step 3 @w{ } Evaluate the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11458
11459 The number 2 is passed to the @code{triangle-recursively} function.
11460
11461 We already know what happens when Emacs evaluates @code{triangle-recursively} with
11462 an argument of 2. After going through the sequence of actions described
11463 earlier, it returns a value of 3. So that is what will happen here.
11464
11465 @item Step 4 @w{ } Evaluate the addition.
11466
11467 3 will be passed as an argument to the addition and will be added to the
11468 number with which the function was called, which is 3.
11469 @end table
11470
11471 @noindent
11472 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 6.
11473
11474 Now that we know what will happen when @code{triangle-recursively} is
11475 called with an argument of 3, it is evident what will happen if it is
11476 called with an argument of 4:
11477
11478 @quotation
11479 @need 800
11480 In the recursive call, the evaluation of
11481
11482 @smallexample
11483 (triangle-recursively (1- 4))
11484 @end smallexample
11485
11486 @need 800
11487 @noindent
11488 will return the value of evaluating
11489
11490 @smallexample
11491 (triangle-recursively 3)
11492 @end smallexample
11493
11494 @noindent
11495 which is 6 and this value will be added to 4 by the addition in the
11496 third line.
11497 @end quotation
11498
11499 @noindent
11500 The value returned by the function as a whole will be 10.
11501
11502 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is evaluated, it evaluates a
11503 version of itself---a different instance of itself---with a smaller
11504 argument, until the argument is small enough so that it does not
11505 evaluate itself.
11506
11507 Note that this particular design for a recursive function
11508 requires that operations be deferred.
11509
11510 Before @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} can calculate its answer, it
11511 must call @code{(triangle-recursively 6)}; and before
11512 @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} can calculate its answer, it must call
11513 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)}; and so on. That is to say, the
11514 calculation that @code{(triangle-recursively 7)} makes must be
11515 deferred until @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} makes its calculation;
11516 and @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} must defer until
11517 @code{(triangle-recursively 5)} completes; and so on.
11518
11519 If each of these instances of @code{triangle-recursively} are thought
11520 of as different robots, the first robot must wait for the second to
11521 complete its job, which must wait until the third completes, and so
11522 on.
11523
11524 There is a way around this kind of waiting, which we will discuss in
11525 @ref{No Deferment, , Recursion without Deferments}.
11526
11527 @node Recursion with cond
11528 @subsection Recursion Example Using @code{cond}
11529 @findex cond
11530
11531 The version of @code{triangle-recursively} described earlier is written
11532 with the @code{if} special form. It can also be written using another
11533 special form called @code{cond}. The name of the special form
11534 @code{cond} is an abbreviation of the word @samp{conditional}.
11535
11536 Although the @code{cond} special form is not used as often in the
11537 Emacs Lisp sources as @code{if}, it is used often enough to justify
11538 explaining it.
11539
11540 @need 800
11541 The template for a @code{cond} expression looks like this:
11542
11543 @smallexample
11544 @group
11545 (cond
11546 @var{body}@dots{})
11547 @end group
11548 @end smallexample
11549
11550 @noindent
11551 where the @var{body} is a series of lists.
11552
11553 @need 800
11554 Written out more fully, the template looks like this:
11555
11556 @smallexample
11557 @group
11558 (cond
11559 (@var{first-true-or-false-test} @var{first-consequent})
11560 (@var{second-true-or-false-test} @var{second-consequent})
11561 (@var{third-true-or-false-test} @var{third-consequent})
11562 @dots{})
11563 @end group
11564 @end smallexample
11565
11566 When the Lisp interpreter evaluates the @code{cond} expression, it
11567 evaluates the first element (the @sc{car} or true-or-false-test) of
11568 the first expression in a series of expressions within the body of the
11569 @code{cond}.
11570
11571 If the true-or-false-test returns @code{nil} the rest of that
11572 expression, the consequent, is skipped and the true-or-false-test of the
11573 next expression is evaluated. When an expression is found whose
11574 true-or-false-test returns a value that is not @code{nil}, the
11575 consequent of that expression is evaluated. The consequent can be one
11576 or more expressions. If the consequent consists of more than one
11577 expression, the expressions are evaluated in sequence and the value of
11578 the last one is returned. If the expression does not have a consequent,
11579 the value of the true-or-false-test is returned.
11580
11581 If none of the true-or-false-tests test true, the @code{cond} expression
11582 returns @code{nil}.
11583
11584 @need 1250
11585 Written using @code{cond}, the @code{triangle} function looks like this:
11586
11587 @smallexample
11588 @group
11589 (defun triangle-using-cond (number)
11590 (cond ((<= number 0) 0)
11591 ((= number 1) 1)
11592 ((> number 1)
11593 (+ number (triangle-using-cond (1- number))))))
11594 @end group
11595 @end smallexample
11596
11597 @noindent
11598 In this example, the @code{cond} returns 0 if the number is less than or
11599 equal to 0, it returns 1 if the number is 1 and it evaluates @code{(+
11600 number (triangle-using-cond (1- number)))} if the number is greater than
11601 1.
11602
11603 @node Recursive Patterns
11604 @subsection Recursive Patterns
11605 @cindex Recursive Patterns
11606
11607 Here are three common recursive patterns. Each involves a list.
11608 Recursion does not need to involve lists, but Lisp is designed for lists
11609 and this provides a sense of its primal capabilities.
11610
11611 @menu
11612 * Every::
11613 * Accumulate::
11614 * Keep::
11615 @end menu
11616
11617 @node Every
11618 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{every}
11619 @cindex Every, type of recursive pattern
11620 @cindex Recursive pattern - every
11621
11622 In the @code{every} recursive pattern, an action is performed on every
11623 element of a list.
11624
11625 @need 1500
11626 The basic pattern is:
11627
11628 @itemize @bullet
11629 @item
11630 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11631 @item
11632 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list)
11633 @itemize @minus
11634 @item
11635 through a recursive call by the function on the rest (the
11636 @sc{cdr}) of the list,
11637 @item
11638 and, optionally, combine the acted-on element, using @code{cons},
11639 with the results of acting on the rest.
11640 @end itemize
11641 @end itemize
11642
11643 @need 1500
11644 Here is example:
11645
11646 @smallexample
11647 @group
11648 (defun square-each (numbers-list)
11649 "Square each of a NUMBERS LIST, recursively."
11650 (if (not numbers-list) ; do-again-test
11651 nil
11652 (cons
11653 (* (car numbers-list) (car numbers-list))
11654 (square-each (cdr numbers-list))))) ; next-step-expression
11655 @end group
11656
11657 @group
11658 (square-each '(1 2 3))
11659 @result{} (1 4 9)
11660 @end group
11661 @end smallexample
11662
11663 @need 1200
11664 @noindent
11665 If @code{numbers-list} is empty, do nothing. But if it has content,
11666 construct a list combining the square of the first number in the list
11667 with the result of the recursive call.
11668
11669 (The example follows the pattern exactly: @code{nil} is returned if
11670 the numbers' list is empty. In practice, you would write the
11671 conditional so it carries out the action when the numbers' list is not
11672 empty.)
11673
11674 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function (@pxref{Recursion with
11675 list, , Recursion with a List}) is another example of an @code{every}
11676 pattern, except in this case, rather than bring the results together
11677 using @code{cons}, we print each element of output.
11678
11679 @need 1250
11680 The @code{print-elements-recursively} function looks like this:
11681
11682 @smallexample
11683 @group
11684 (setq animals '(gazelle giraffe lion tiger))
11685 @end group
11686
11687 @group
11688 (defun print-elements-recursively (list)
11689 "Print each element of LIST on a line of its own.
11690 Uses recursion."
11691 (when list ; @r{do-again-test}
11692 (print (car list)) ; @r{body}
11693 (print-elements-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11694 (cdr list)))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11695
11696 (print-elements-recursively animals)
11697 @end group
11698 @end smallexample
11699
11700 @need 1500
11701 The pattern for @code{print-elements-recursively} is:
11702
11703 @itemize @bullet
11704 @item
11705 When the list is empty, do nothing.
11706 @item
11707 But when the list has at least one element,
11708 @itemize @minus
11709 @item
11710 act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11711 @item
11712 and make a recursive call on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11713 @end itemize
11714 @end itemize
11715
11716 @node Accumulate
11717 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{accumulate}
11718 @cindex Accumulate, type of recursive pattern
11719 @cindex Recursive pattern - accumulate
11720
11721 Another recursive pattern is called the @code{accumulate} pattern. In
11722 the @code{accumulate} recursive pattern, an action is performed on
11723 every element of a list and the result of that action is accumulated
11724 with the results of performing the action on the other elements.
11725
11726 This is very like the ``every'' pattern using @code{cons}, except that
11727 @code{cons} is not used, but some other combiner.
11728
11729 @need 1500
11730 The pattern is:
11731
11732 @itemize @bullet
11733 @item
11734 If a list be empty, return zero or some other constant.
11735 @item
11736 Else, act on the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list),
11737 @itemize @minus
11738 @item
11739 and combine that acted-on element, using @code{+} or
11740 some other combining function, with
11741 @item
11742 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11743 @end itemize
11744 @end itemize
11745
11746 @need 1500
11747 Here is an example:
11748
11749 @smallexample
11750 @group
11751 (defun add-elements (numbers-list)
11752 "Add the elements of NUMBERS-LIST together."
11753 (if (not numbers-list)
11754 0
11755 (+ (car numbers-list) (add-elements (cdr numbers-list)))))
11756 @end group
11757
11758 @group
11759 (add-elements '(1 2 3 4))
11760 @result{} 10
11761 @end group
11762 @end smallexample
11763
11764 @xref{Files List, , Making a List of Files}, for an example of the
11765 accumulate pattern.
11766
11767 @node Keep
11768 @unnumberedsubsubsec Recursive Pattern: @emph{keep}
11769 @cindex Keep, type of recursive pattern
11770 @cindex Recursive pattern - keep
11771
11772 A third recursive pattern is called the @code{keep} pattern.
11773 In the @code{keep} recursive pattern, each element of a list is tested;
11774 the element is acted on and the results are kept only if the element
11775 meets a criterion.
11776
11777 Again, this is very like the ``every'' pattern, except the element is
11778 skipped unless it meets a criterion.
11779
11780 @need 1500
11781 The pattern has three parts:
11782
11783 @itemize @bullet
11784 @item
11785 If a list be empty, return @code{nil}.
11786 @item
11787 Else, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) passes
11788 a test
11789 @itemize @minus
11790 @item
11791 act on that element and combine it, using @code{cons} with
11792 @item
11793 a recursive call by the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11794 @end itemize
11795 @item
11796 Otherwise, if the beginning of the list (the @sc{car} of the list) fails
11797 the test
11798 @itemize @minus
11799 @item
11800 skip on that element,
11801 @item
11802 and, recursively call the function on the rest (the @sc{cdr}) of the list.
11803 @end itemize
11804 @end itemize
11805
11806 @need 1500
11807 Here is an example that uses @code{cond}:
11808
11809 @smallexample
11810 @group
11811 (defun keep-three-letter-words (word-list)
11812 "Keep three letter words in WORD-LIST."
11813 (cond
11814 ;; First do-again-test: stop-condition
11815 ((not word-list) nil)
11816
11817 ;; Second do-again-test: when to act
11818 ((eq 3 (length (symbol-name (car word-list))))
11819 ;; combine acted-on element with recursive call on shorter list
11820 (cons (car word-list) (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list))))
11821
11822 ;; Third do-again-test: when to skip element;
11823 ;; recursively call shorter list with next-step expression
11824 (t (keep-three-letter-words (cdr word-list)))))
11825 @end group
11826
11827 @group
11828 (keep-three-letter-words '(one two three four five six))
11829 @result{} (one two six)
11830 @end group
11831 @end smallexample
11832
11833 It goes without saying that you need not use @code{nil} as the test for
11834 when to stop; and you can, of course, combine these patterns.
11835
11836 @node No Deferment
11837 @subsection Recursion without Deferments
11838 @cindex Deferment in recursion
11839 @cindex Recursion without Deferments
11840
11841 Let's consider again what happens with the @code{triangle-recursively}
11842 function. We will find that the intermediate calculations are
11843 deferred until all can be done.
11844
11845 @need 800
11846 Here is the function definition:
11847
11848 @smallexample
11849 @group
11850 (defun triangle-recursively (number)
11851 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11852 Uses recursion."
11853 (if (= number 1) ; @r{do-again-test}
11854 1 ; @r{then-part}
11855 (+ number ; @r{else-part}
11856 (triangle-recursively ; @r{recursive call}
11857 (1- number))))) ; @r{next-step-expression}
11858 @end group
11859 @end smallexample
11860
11861 What happens when we call this function with a argument of 7?
11862
11863 The first instance of the @code{triangle-recursively} function adds
11864 the number 7 to the value returned by a second instance of
11865 @code{triangle-recursively}, an instance that has been passed an
11866 argument of 6. That is to say, the first calculation is:
11867
11868 @smallexample
11869 (+ 7 (triangle-recursively 6))
11870 @end smallexample
11871
11872 @noindent
11873 The first instance of @code{triangle-recursively}---you may want to
11874 think of it as a little robot---cannot complete its job. It must hand
11875 off the calculation for @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} to a second
11876 instance of the program, to a second robot. This second individual is
11877 completely different from the first one; it is, in the jargon, a
11878 ``different instantiation''. Or, put another way, it is a different
11879 robot. It is the same model as the first; it calculates triangle
11880 numbers recursively; but it has a different serial number.
11881
11882 And what does @code{(triangle-recursively 6)} return? It returns the
11883 number 6 added to the value returned by evaluating
11884 @code{triangle-recursively} with an argument of 5. Using the robot
11885 metaphor, it asks yet another robot to help it.
11886
11887 @need 800
11888 Now the total is:
11889
11890 @smallexample
11891 (+ 7 6 (triangle-recursively 5))
11892 @end smallexample
11893
11894 @need 800
11895 And what happens next?
11896
11897 @smallexample
11898 (+ 7 6 5 (triangle-recursively 4))
11899 @end smallexample
11900
11901 Each time @code{triangle-recursively} is called, except for the last
11902 time, it creates another instance of the program---another robot---and
11903 asks it to make a calculation.
11904
11905 @need 800
11906 Eventually, the full addition is set up and performed:
11907
11908 @smallexample
11909 (+ 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
11910 @end smallexample
11911
11912 This design for the function defers the calculation of the first step
11913 until the second can be done, and defers that until the third can be
11914 done, and so on. Each deferment means the computer must remember what
11915 is being waited on. This is not a problem when there are only a few
11916 steps, as in this example. But it can be a problem when there are
11917 more steps.
11918
11919 @node No deferment solution
11920 @subsection No Deferment Solution
11921 @cindex No deferment solution
11922 @cindex Solution without deferment
11923
11924 The solution to the problem of deferred operations is to write in a
11925 manner that does not defer operations@footnote{The phrase @dfn{tail
11926 recursive} is used to describe such a process, one that uses
11927 ``constant space''.}. This requires
11928 writing to a different pattern, often one that involves writing two
11929 function definitions, an ``initialization'' function and a ``helper''
11930 function.
11931
11932 The ``initialization'' function sets up the job; the ``helper'' function
11933 does the work.
11934
11935 @need 1200
11936 Here are the two function definitions for adding up numbers. They are
11937 so simple, I find them hard to understand.
11938
11939 @smallexample
11940 @group
11941 (defun triangle-initialization (number)
11942 "Return the sum of the numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
11943 This is the `initialization' component of a two function
11944 duo that uses recursion."
11945 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 number))
11946 @end group
11947 @end smallexample
11948
11949 @smallexample
11950 @group
11951 (defun triangle-recursive-helper (sum counter number)
11952 "Return SUM, using COUNTER, through NUMBER inclusive.
11953 This is the `helper' component of a two function duo
11954 that uses recursion."
11955 (if (> counter number)
11956 sum
11957 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum}
11958 (1+ counter) ; @r{counter}
11959 number))) ; @r{number}
11960 @end group
11961 @end smallexample
11962
11963 @need 1250
11964 Install both function definitions by evaluating them, then call
11965 @code{triangle-initialization} with 2 rows:
11966
11967 @smallexample
11968 @group
11969 (triangle-initialization 2)
11970 @result{} 3
11971 @end group
11972 @end smallexample
11973
11974 The ``initialization'' function calls the first instance of the ``helper''
11975 function with three arguments: zero, zero, and a number which is the
11976 number of rows in the triangle.
11977
11978 The first two arguments passed to the ``helper'' function are
11979 initialization values. These values are changed when
11980 @code{triangle-recursive-helper} invokes new instances.@footnote{The
11981 jargon is mildly confusing: @code{triangle-recursive-helper} uses a
11982 process that is iterative in a procedure that is recursive. The
11983 process is called iterative because the computer need only record the
11984 three values, @code{sum}, @code{counter}, and @code{number}; the
11985 procedure is recursive because the function ``calls itself''. On the
11986 other hand, both the process and the procedure used by
11987 @code{triangle-recursively} are called recursive. The word
11988 ``recursive'' has different meanings in the two contexts.}
11989
11990 Let's see what happens when we have a triangle that has one row. (This
11991 triangle will have one pebble in it!)
11992
11993 @need 1200
11994 @code{triangle-initialization} will call its helper with
11995 the arguments @w{@code{0 0 1}}. That function will run the conditional
11996 test whether @code{(> counter number)}:
11997
11998 @smallexample
11999 (> 0 1)
12000 @end smallexample
12001
12002 @need 1200
12003 @noindent
12004 and find that the result is false, so it will invoke
12005 the else-part of the @code{if} clause:
12006
12007 @smallexample
12008 @group
12009 (triangle-recursive-helper
12010 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12011 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12012 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12013 @end group
12014 @end smallexample
12015
12016 @need 800
12017 @noindent
12018 which will first compute:
12019
12020 @smallexample
12021 @group
12022 (triangle-recursive-helper (+ 0 0) ; @r{sum}
12023 (1+ 0) ; @r{counter}
12024 1) ; @r{number}
12025 @exdent which is:
12026
12027 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 1)
12028 @end group
12029 @end smallexample
12030
12031 Again, @code{(> counter number)} will be false, so again, the Lisp
12032 interpreter will evaluate @code{triangle-recursive-helper}, creating a
12033 new instance with new arguments.
12034
12035 @need 800
12036 This new instance will be;
12037
12038 @smallexample
12039 @group
12040 (triangle-recursive-helper
12041 (+ sum counter) ; @r{sum plus counter} @result{} @r{sum}
12042 (1+ counter) ; @r{increment counter} @result{} @r{counter}
12043 number) ; @r{number stays the same}
12044
12045 @exdent which is:
12046
12047 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 1)
12048 @end group
12049 @end smallexample
12050
12051 In this case, the @code{(> counter number)} test will be true! So the
12052 instance will return the value of the sum, which will be 1, as
12053 expected.
12054
12055 Now, let's pass @code{triangle-initialization} an argument
12056 of 2, to find out how many pebbles there are in a triangle with two rows.
12057
12058 That function calls @code{(triangle-recursive-helper 0 0 2)}.
12059
12060 @need 800
12061 In stages, the instances called will be:
12062
12063 @smallexample
12064 @group
12065 @r{sum counter number}
12066 (triangle-recursive-helper 0 1 2)
12067
12068 (triangle-recursive-helper 1 2 2)
12069
12070 (triangle-recursive-helper 3 3 2)
12071 @end group
12072 @end smallexample
12073
12074 When the last instance is called, the @code{(> counter number)} test
12075 will be true, so the instance will return the value of @code{sum},
12076 which will be 3.
12077
12078 This kind of pattern helps when you are writing functions that can use
12079 many resources in a computer.
12080
12081 @need 1500
12082 @node Looping exercise
12083 @section Looping Exercise
12084
12085 @itemize @bullet
12086 @item
12087 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} in which each row has a
12088 value which is the square of the row number. Use a @code{while} loop.
12089
12090 @item
12091 Write a function similar to @code{triangle} that multiplies instead of
12092 adds the values.
12093
12094 @item
12095 Rewrite these two functions recursively. Rewrite these functions
12096 using @code{cond}.
12097
12098 @c comma in printed title causes problem in Info cross reference
12099 @item
12100 Write a function for Texinfo mode that creates an index entry at the
12101 beginning of a paragraph for every @samp{@@dfn} within the paragraph.
12102 (In a Texinfo file, @samp{@@dfn} marks a definition. This book is
12103 written in Texinfo.)
12104
12105 Many of the functions you will need are described in two of the
12106 previous chapters, @ref{Cutting & Storing Text, , Cutting and Storing
12107 Text}, and @ref{Yanking, , Yanking Text Back}. If you use
12108 @code{forward-paragraph} to put the index entry at the beginning of
12109 the paragraph, you will have to use @w{@kbd{C-h f}}
12110 (@code{describe-function}) to find out how to make the command go
12111 backwards.
12112
12113 For more information, see
12114 @ifinfo
12115 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating Definitions, texinfo}.
12116 @end ifinfo
12117 @ifhtml
12118 @ref{Indicating, , Indicating, texinfo, Texinfo Manual}, which goes to
12119 a Texinfo manual in the current directory. Or, if you are on the
12120 Internet, see
12121 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/manual/texinfo/}
12122 @end ifhtml
12123 @iftex
12124 ``Indicating Definitions, Commands, etc.''@: in @cite{Texinfo, The GNU
12125 Documentation Format}.
12126 @end iftex
12127 @end itemize
12128
12129 @node Regexp Search
12130 @chapter Regular Expression Searches
12131 @cindex Searches, illustrating
12132 @cindex Regular expression searches
12133 @cindex Patterns, searching for
12134 @cindex Motion by sentence and paragraph
12135 @cindex Sentences, movement by
12136 @cindex Paragraphs, movement by
12137
12138 Regular expression searches are used extensively in GNU Emacs. The
12139 two functions, @code{forward-sentence} and @code{forward-paragraph},
12140 illustrate these searches well. They use regular expressions to find
12141 where to move point. The phrase ``regular expression'' is often written
12142 as ``regexp''.
12143
12144 Regular expression searches are described in @ref{Regexp Search, ,
12145 Regular Expression Search, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, as well as in
12146 @ref{Regular Expressions, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
12147 Manual}. In writing this chapter, I am presuming that you have at
12148 least a mild acquaintance with them. The major point to remember is
12149 that regular expressions permit you to search for patterns as well as
12150 for literal strings of characters. For example, the code in
12151 @code{forward-sentence} searches for the pattern of possible
12152 characters that could mark the end of a sentence, and moves point to
12153 that spot.
12154
12155 Before looking at the code for the @code{forward-sentence} function, it
12156 is worth considering what the pattern that marks the end of a sentence
12157 must be. The pattern is discussed in the next section; following that
12158 is a description of the regular expression search function,
12159 @code{re-search-forward}. The @code{forward-sentence} function
12160 is described in the section following. Finally, the
12161 @code{forward-paragraph} function is described in the last section of
12162 this chapter. @code{forward-paragraph} is a complex function that
12163 introduces several new features.
12164
12165 @menu
12166 * sentence-end:: The regular expression for @code{sentence-end}.
12167 * re-search-forward:: Very similar to @code{search-forward}.
12168 * forward-sentence:: A straightforward example of regexp search.
12169 * forward-paragraph:: A somewhat complex example.
12170 * etags:: How to create your own @file{TAGS} table.
12171 * Regexp Review::
12172 * re-search Exercises::
12173 @end menu
12174
12175 @node sentence-end
12176 @section The Regular Expression for @code{sentence-end}
12177 @findex sentence-end
12178
12179 The symbol @code{sentence-end} is bound to the pattern that marks the
12180 end of a sentence. What should this regular expression be?
12181
12182 Clearly, a sentence may be ended by a period, a question mark, or an
12183 exclamation mark. Indeed, in English, only clauses that end with one
12184 of those three characters should be considered the end of a sentence.
12185 This means that the pattern should include the character set:
12186
12187 @smallexample
12188 [.?!]
12189 @end smallexample
12190
12191 However, we do not want @code{forward-sentence} merely to jump to a
12192 period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark, because such a character
12193 might be used in the middle of a sentence. A period, for example, is
12194 used after abbreviations. So other information is needed.
12195
12196 According to convention, you type two spaces after every sentence, but
12197 only one space after a period, a question mark, or an exclamation mark in
12198 the body of a sentence. So a period, a question mark, or an exclamation
12199 mark followed by two spaces is a good indicator of an end of sentence.
12200 However, in a file, the two spaces may instead be a tab or the end of a
12201 line. This means that the regular expression should include these three
12202 items as alternatives.
12203
12204 @need 800
12205 This group of alternatives will look like this:
12206
12207 @smallexample
12208 @group
12209 \\($\\| \\| \\)
12210 ^ ^^
12211 TAB SPC
12212 @end group
12213 @end smallexample
12214
12215 @noindent
12216 Here, @samp{$} indicates the end of the line, and I have pointed out
12217 where the tab and two spaces are inserted in the expression. Both are
12218 inserted by putting the actual characters into the expression.
12219
12220 Two backslashes, @samp{\\}, are required before the parentheses and
12221 vertical bars: the first backslash quotes the following backslash in
12222 Emacs; and the second indicates that the following character, the
12223 parenthesis or the vertical bar, is special.
12224
12225 @need 1000
12226 Also, a sentence may be followed by one or more carriage returns, like
12227 this:
12228
12229 @smallexample
12230 @group
12231 [
12232 ]*
12233 @end group
12234 @end smallexample
12235
12236 @noindent
12237 Like tabs and spaces, a carriage return is inserted into a regular
12238 expression by inserting it literally. The asterisk indicates that the
12239 @key{RET} is repeated zero or more times.
12240
12241 But a sentence end does not consist only of a period, a question mark or
12242 an exclamation mark followed by appropriate space: a closing quotation
12243 mark or a closing brace of some kind may precede the space. Indeed more
12244 than one such mark or brace may precede the space. These require a
12245 expression that looks like this:
12246
12247 @smallexample
12248 []\"')@}]*
12249 @end smallexample
12250
12251 In this expression, the first @samp{]} is the first character in the
12252 expression; the second character is @samp{"}, which is preceded by a
12253 @samp{\} to tell Emacs the @samp{"} is @emph{not} special. The last
12254 three characters are @samp{'}, @samp{)}, and @samp{@}}.
12255
12256 All this suggests what the regular expression pattern for matching the
12257 end of a sentence should be; and, indeed, if we evaluate
12258 @code{sentence-end} we find that it returns the following value:
12259
12260 @smallexample
12261 @group
12262 sentence-end
12263 @result{} "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12264 ]*"
12265 @end group
12266 @end smallexample
12267
12268 @noindent
12269 (Well, not in GNU Emacs 22; that is because of an effort to make the
12270 process simpler and to handle more glyphs and languages. When the
12271 value of @code{sentence-end} is @code{nil}, then use the value defined
12272 by the function @code{sentence-end}. (Here is a use of the difference
12273 between a value and a function in Emacs Lisp.) The function returns a
12274 value constructed from the variables @code{sentence-end-base},
12275 @code{sentence-end-double-space}, @code{sentence-end-without-period},
12276 and @code{sentence-end-without-space}. The critical variable is
12277 @code{sentence-end-base}; its global value is similar to the one
12278 described above but it also contains two additional quotation marks.
12279 These have differing degrees of curliness. The
12280 @code{sentence-end-without-period} variable, when true, tells Emacs
12281 that a sentence may end without a period, such as text in Thai.)
12282
12283 @ignore
12284 @noindent
12285 (Note that here the @key{TAB}, two spaces, and @key{RET} are shown
12286 literally in the pattern.)
12287
12288 This regular expression can be deciphered as follows:
12289
12290 @table @code
12291 @item [.?!]
12292 The first part of the pattern is the three characters, a period, a question
12293 mark and an exclamation mark, within square brackets. The pattern must
12294 begin with one or other of these characters.
12295
12296 @item []\"')@}]*
12297 The second part of the pattern is the group of closing braces and
12298 quotation marks, which can appear zero or more times. These may follow
12299 the period, question mark or exclamation mark. In a regular expression,
12300 the backslash, @samp{\}, followed by the double quotation mark,
12301 @samp{"}, indicates the class of string-quote characters. Usually, the
12302 double quotation mark is the only character in this class. The
12303 asterisk, @samp{*}, indicates that the items in the previous group (the
12304 group surrounded by square brackets, @samp{[]}) may be repeated zero or
12305 more times.
12306
12307 @item \\($\\| \\| \\)
12308 The third part of the pattern is one or other of: either the end of a
12309 line, or two blank spaces, or a tab. The double back-slashes are used
12310 to prevent Emacs from reading the parentheses and vertical bars as part
12311 of the search pattern; the parentheses are used to mark the group and
12312 the vertical bars are used to indicated that the patterns to either side
12313 of them are alternatives. The dollar sign is used to indicate the end
12314 of a line and both the two spaces and the tab are each inserted as is to
12315 indicate what they are.
12316
12317 @item [@key{RET}]*
12318 Finally, the last part of the pattern indicates that the end of the line
12319 or the whitespace following the period, question mark or exclamation
12320 mark may, but need not, be followed by one or more carriage returns. In
12321 the pattern, the carriage return is inserted as an actual carriage
12322 return between square brackets but here it is shown as @key{RET}.
12323 @end table
12324 @end ignore
12325
12326 @node re-search-forward
12327 @section The @code{re-search-forward} Function
12328 @findex re-search-forward
12329
12330 The @code{re-search-forward} function is very like the
12331 @code{search-forward} function. (@xref{search-forward, , The
12332 @code{search-forward} Function}.)
12333
12334 @code{re-search-forward} searches for a regular expression. If the
12335 search is successful, it leaves point immediately after the last
12336 character in the target. If the search is backwards, it leaves point
12337 just before the first character in the target. You may tell
12338 @code{re-search-forward} to return @code{t} for true. (Moving point
12339 is therefore a ``side effect''.)
12340
12341 Like @code{search-forward}, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes
12342 four arguments:
12343
12344 @enumerate
12345 @item
12346 The first argument is the regular expression that the function searches
12347 for. The regular expression will be a string between quotation marks.
12348
12349 @item
12350 The optional second argument limits how far the function will search; it is a
12351 bound, which is specified as a position in the buffer.
12352
12353 @item
12354 The optional third argument specifies how the function responds to
12355 failure: @code{nil} as the third argument causes the function to
12356 signal an error (and print a message) when the search fails; any other
12357 value causes it to return @code{nil} if the search fails and @code{t}
12358 if the search succeeds.
12359
12360 @item
12361 The optional fourth argument is the repeat count. A negative repeat
12362 count causes @code{re-search-forward} to search backwards.
12363 @end enumerate
12364
12365 @need 800
12366 The template for @code{re-search-forward} looks like this:
12367
12368 @smallexample
12369 @group
12370 (re-search-forward "@var{regular-expression}"
12371 @var{limit-of-search}
12372 @var{what-to-do-if-search-fails}
12373 @var{repeat-count})
12374 @end group
12375 @end smallexample
12376
12377 The second, third, and fourth arguments are optional. However, if you
12378 want to pass a value to either or both of the last two arguments, you
12379 must also pass a value to all the preceding arguments. Otherwise, the
12380 Lisp interpreter will mistake which argument you are passing the value
12381 to.
12382
12383 @need 1200
12384 In the @code{forward-sentence} function, the regular expression will be
12385 the value of the variable @code{sentence-end}. In simple form, that is:
12386
12387 @smallexample
12388 @group
12389 "[.?!][]\"')@}]*\\($\\| \\| \\)[
12390 ]*"
12391 @end group
12392 @end smallexample
12393
12394 @noindent
12395 The limit of the search will be the end of the paragraph (since a
12396 sentence cannot go beyond a paragraph). If the search fails, the
12397 function will return @code{nil}; and the repeat count will be provided
12398 by the argument to the @code{forward-sentence} function.
12399
12400 @node forward-sentence
12401 @section @code{forward-sentence}
12402 @findex forward-sentence
12403
12404 The command to move the cursor forward a sentence is a straightforward
12405 illustration of how to use regular expression searches in Emacs Lisp.
12406 Indeed, the function looks longer and more complicated than it is; this
12407 is because the function is designed to go backwards as well as forwards;
12408 and, optionally, over more than one sentence. The function is usually
12409 bound to the key command @kbd{M-e}.
12410
12411 @menu
12412 * Complete forward-sentence::
12413 * fwd-sentence while loops:: Two @code{while} loops.
12414 * fwd-sentence re-search:: A regular expression search.
12415 @end menu
12416
12417 @ifnottex
12418 @node Complete forward-sentence
12419 @unnumberedsubsec Complete @code{forward-sentence} function definition
12420 @end ifnottex
12421
12422 @need 1250
12423 Here is the code for @code{forward-sentence}:
12424
12425 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12426 @smallexample
12427 @group
12428 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12429 "Move forward to next `sentence-end'. With argument, repeat.
12430 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to `sentence-beginning'.
12431
12432 The variable `sentence-end' is a regular expression that matches ends of
12433 sentences. Also, every paragraph boundary terminates sentences as well."
12434 @end group
12435 @group
12436 (interactive "p")
12437 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12438 (let ((opoint (point))
12439 (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12440 (while (< arg 0)
12441 (let ((pos (point))
12442 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12443 (if (and (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)
12444 (or (< (match-end 0) pos)
12445 (re-search-backward sentence-end par-beg t)))
12446 (goto-char (match-end 0))
12447 (goto-char par-beg)))
12448 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12449 @end group
12450 @group
12451 (while (> arg 0)
12452 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12453 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12454 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12455 (goto-char par-end)))
12456 (setq arg (1- arg)))
12457 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)))
12458 @end group
12459 @end smallexample
12460
12461 @ignore
12462 GNU Emacs 21
12463 @smallexample
12464 @group
12465 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12466 "Move forward to next sentence-end. With argument, repeat.
12467 With negative argument, move backward repeatedly to sentence-beginning.
12468 Sentence ends are identified by the value of sentence-end
12469 treated as a regular expression. Also, every paragraph boundary
12470 terminates sentences as well."
12471 @end group
12472 @group
12473 (interactive "p")
12474 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12475 (while (< arg 0)
12476 (let ((par-beg
12477 (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12478 (if (re-search-backward
12479 (concat sentence-end "[^ \t\n]") par-beg t)
12480 (goto-char (1- (match-end 0)))
12481 (goto-char par-beg)))
12482 (setq arg (1+ arg)))
12483 (while (> arg 0)
12484 (let ((par-end
12485 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12486 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12487 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12488 (goto-char par-end)))
12489 (setq arg (1- arg))))
12490 @end group
12491 @end smallexample
12492 @end ignore
12493
12494 The function looks long at first sight and it is best to look at its
12495 skeleton first, and then its muscle. The way to see the skeleton is to
12496 look at the expressions that start in the left-most columns:
12497
12498 @smallexample
12499 @group
12500 (defun forward-sentence (&optional arg)
12501 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12502 (interactive "p")
12503 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12504 (let ((opoint (point)) (sentence-end (sentence-end)))
12505 (while (< arg 0)
12506 (let ((pos (point))
12507 (par-beg (save-excursion (start-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12508 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-backwards}
12509 (while (> arg 0)
12510 (let ((par-end (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12511 @var{rest-of-body-of-while-loop-when-going-forwards}
12512 @var{handle-forms-and-equivalent}
12513 @end group
12514 @end smallexample
12515
12516 This looks much simpler! The function definition consists of
12517 documentation, an @code{interactive} expression, an @code{or}
12518 expression, a @code{let} expression, and @code{while} loops.
12519
12520 Let's look at each of these parts in turn.
12521
12522 We note that the documentation is thorough and understandable.
12523
12524 The function has an @code{interactive "p"} declaration. This means
12525 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the
12526 function as its argument. (This will be a number.) If the function
12527 is not passed an argument (it is optional) then the argument
12528 @code{arg} will be bound to 1.
12529
12530 When @code{forward-sentence} is called non-interactively without an
12531 argument, @code{arg} is bound to @code{nil}. The @code{or} expression
12532 handles this. What it does is either leave the value of @code{arg} as
12533 it is, but only if @code{arg} is bound to a value; or it sets the
12534 value of @code{arg} to 1, in the case when @code{arg} is bound to
12535 @code{nil}.
12536
12537 Next is a @code{let}. That specifies the values of two local
12538 variables, @code{point} and @code{sentence-end}. The local value of
12539 point, from before the search, is used in the
12540 @code{constrain-to-field} function which handles forms and
12541 equivalents. The @code{sentence-end} variable is set by the
12542 @code{sentence-end} function.
12543
12544 @node fwd-sentence while loops
12545 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{while} loops
12546
12547 Two @code{while} loops follow. The first @code{while} has a
12548 true-or-false-test that tests true if the prefix argument for
12549 @code{forward-sentence} is a negative number. This is for going
12550 backwards. The body of this loop is similar to the body of the second
12551 @code{while} clause, but it is not exactly the same. We will skip
12552 this @code{while} loop and concentrate on the second @code{while}
12553 loop.
12554
12555 @need 1500
12556 The second @code{while} loop is for moving point forward. Its skeleton
12557 looks like this:
12558
12559 @smallexample
12560 @group
12561 (while (> arg 0) ; @r{true-or-false-test}
12562 (let @var{varlist}
12563 (if (@var{true-or-false-test})
12564 @var{then-part}
12565 @var{else-part}
12566 (setq arg (1- arg)))) ; @code{while} @r{loop decrementer}
12567 @end group
12568 @end smallexample
12569
12570 The @code{while} loop is of the decrementing kind.
12571 (@xref{Decrementing Loop, , A Loop with a Decrementing Counter}.) It
12572 has a true-or-false-test that tests true so long as the counter (in
12573 this case, the variable @code{arg}) is greater than zero; and it has a
12574 decrementer that subtracts 1 from the value of the counter every time
12575 the loop repeats.
12576
12577 If no prefix argument is given to @code{forward-sentence}, which is
12578 the most common way the command is used, this @code{while} loop will
12579 run once, since the value of @code{arg} will be 1.
12580
12581 The body of the @code{while} loop consists of a @code{let} expression,
12582 which creates and binds a local variable, and has, as its body, an
12583 @code{if} expression.
12584
12585 @need 1250
12586 The body of the @code{while} loop looks like this:
12587
12588 @smallexample
12589 @group
12590 (let ((par-end
12591 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))))
12592 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t)
12593 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n")
12594 (goto-char par-end)))
12595 @end group
12596 @end smallexample
12597
12598 The @code{let} expression creates and binds the local variable
12599 @code{par-end}. As we shall see, this local variable is designed to
12600 provide a bound or limit to the regular expression search. If the
12601 search fails to find a proper sentence ending in the paragraph, it will
12602 stop on reaching the end of the paragraph.
12603
12604 But first, let us examine how @code{par-end} is bound to the value of
12605 the end of the paragraph. What happens is that the @code{let} sets the
12606 value of @code{par-end} to the value returned when the Lisp interpreter
12607 evaluates the expression
12608
12609 @smallexample
12610 @group
12611 (save-excursion (end-of-paragraph-text) (point))
12612 @end group
12613 @end smallexample
12614
12615 @noindent
12616 In this expression, @code{(end-of-paragraph-text)} moves point to the
12617 end of the paragraph, @code{(point)} returns the value of point, and then
12618 @code{save-excursion} restores point to its original position. Thus,
12619 the @code{let} binds @code{par-end} to the value returned by the
12620 @code{save-excursion} expression, which is the position of the end of
12621 the paragraph. (The @code{end-of-paragraph-text} function uses
12622 @code{forward-paragraph}, which we will discuss shortly.)
12623
12624 @need 1200
12625 Emacs next evaluates the body of the @code{let}, which is an @code{if}
12626 expression that looks like this:
12627
12628 @smallexample
12629 @group
12630 (if (re-search-forward sentence-end par-end t) ; @r{if-part}
12631 (skip-chars-backward " \t\n") ; @r{then-part}
12632 (goto-char par-end))) ; @r{else-part}
12633 @end group
12634 @end smallexample
12635
12636 The @code{if} tests whether its first argument is true and if so,
12637 evaluates its then-part; otherwise, the Emacs Lisp interpreter
12638 evaluates the else-part. The true-or-false-test of the @code{if}
12639 expression is the regular expression search.
12640
12641 It may seem odd to have what looks like the ``real work'' of
12642 the @code{forward-sentence} function buried here, but this is a common
12643 way this kind of operation is carried out in Lisp.
12644
12645 @node fwd-sentence re-search
12646 @unnumberedsubsec The regular expression search
12647
12648 The @code{re-search-forward} function searches for the end of the
12649 sentence, that is, for the pattern defined by the @code{sentence-end}
12650 regular expression. If the pattern is found---if the end of the sentence is
12651 found---then the @code{re-search-forward} function does two things:
12652
12653 @enumerate
12654 @item
12655 The @code{re-search-forward} function carries out a side effect, which
12656 is to move point to the end of the occurrence found.
12657
12658 @item
12659 The @code{re-search-forward} function returns a value of true. This is
12660 the value received by the @code{if}, and means that the search was
12661 successful.
12662 @end enumerate
12663
12664 @noindent
12665 The side effect, the movement of point, is completed before the
12666 @code{if} function is handed the value returned by the successful
12667 conclusion of the search.
12668
12669 When the @code{if} function receives the value of true from a successful
12670 call to @code{re-search-forward}, the @code{if} evaluates the then-part,
12671 which is the expression @code{(skip-chars-backward " \t\n")}. This
12672 expression moves backwards over any blank spaces, tabs or carriage
12673 returns until a printed character is found and then leaves point after
12674 the character. Since point has already been moved to the end of the
12675 pattern that marks the end of the sentence, this action leaves point
12676 right after the closing printed character of the sentence, which is
12677 usually a period.
12678
12679 On the other hand, if the @code{re-search-forward} function fails to
12680 find a pattern marking the end of the sentence, the function returns
12681 false. The false then causes the @code{if} to evaluate its third
12682 argument, which is @code{(goto-char par-end)}: it moves point to the
12683 end of the paragraph.
12684
12685 (And if the text is in a form or equivalent, and point may not move
12686 fully, then the @code{constrain-to-field} function comes into play.)
12687
12688 Regular expression searches are exceptionally useful and the pattern
12689 illustrated by @code{re-search-forward}, in which the search is the
12690 test of an @code{if} expression, is handy. You will see or write code
12691 incorporating this pattern often.
12692
12693 @node forward-paragraph
12694 @section @code{forward-paragraph}: a Goldmine of Functions
12695 @findex forward-paragraph
12696
12697 @ignore
12698 @c in GNU Emacs 22
12699 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12700 "Move forward to end of paragraph.
12701 With argument ARG, do it ARG times;
12702 a negative argument ARG = -N means move backward N paragraphs.
12703
12704 A line which `paragraph-start' matches either separates paragraphs
12705 \(if `paragraph-separate' matches it also) or is the first line of a paragraph.
12706 A paragraph end is the beginning of a line which is not part of the paragraph
12707 to which the end of the previous line belongs, or the end of the buffer.
12708 Returns the count of paragraphs left to move."
12709 (interactive "p")
12710 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12711 (let* ((opoint (point))
12712 (fill-prefix-regexp
12713 (and fill-prefix (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12714 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12715 (regexp-quote fill-prefix)))
12716 ;; Remove ^ from paragraph-start and paragraph-sep if they are there.
12717 ;; These regexps shouldn't be anchored, because we look for them
12718 ;; starting at the left-margin. This allows paragraph commands to
12719 ;; work normally with indented text.
12720 ;; This hack will not find problem cases like "whatever\\|^something".
12721 (parstart (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-start))
12722 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-start 0)))
12723 (substring paragraph-start 1)
12724 paragraph-start))
12725 (parsep (if (and (not (equal "" paragraph-separate))
12726 (equal ?^ (aref paragraph-separate 0)))
12727 (substring paragraph-separate 1)
12728 paragraph-separate))
12729 (parsep
12730 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12731 (concat parsep "\\|"
12732 fill-prefix-regexp "[ \t]*$")
12733 parsep))
12734 ;; This is used for searching.
12735 (sp-parstart (concat "^[ \t]*\\(?:" parstart "\\|" parsep "\\)"))
12736 start found-start)
12737 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp)))
12738 (if (and (not (looking-at parsep))
12739 (re-search-backward "^\n" (max (1- (point)) (point-min)) t)
12740 (looking-at parsep))
12741 (setq arg (1+ arg))
12742 (setq start (point))
12743 ;; Move back over paragraph-separating lines.
12744 (forward-char -1) (beginning-of-line)
12745 (while (and (not (bobp))
12746 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12747 (looking-at parsep)))
12748 (forward-line -1))
12749 (if (bobp)
12750 nil
12751 (setq arg (1+ arg))
12752 ;; Go to end of the previous (non-separating) line.
12753 (end-of-line)
12754 ;; Search back for line that starts or separates paragraphs.
12755 (if (if fill-prefix-regexp
12756 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
12757 (let (multiple-lines)
12758 (while (and (progn (beginning-of-line) (not (bobp)))
12759 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12760 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12761 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12762 (unless (= (point) start)
12763 (setq multiple-lines t))
12764 (forward-line -1))
12765 (move-to-left-margin)
12766 ;; This deleted code caused a long hanging-indent line
12767 ;; not to be filled together with the following lines.
12768 ;; ;; Don't move back over a line before the paragraph
12769 ;; ;; which doesn't start with fill-prefix
12770 ;; ;; unless that is the only line we've moved over.
12771 ;; (and (not (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12772 ;; multiple-lines
12773 ;; (forward-line 1))
12774 (not (bobp)))
12775 (while (and (re-search-backward sp-parstart nil 1)
12776 (setq found-start t)
12777 ;; Found a candidate, but need to check if it is a
12778 ;; REAL parstart.
12779 (progn (setq start (point))
12780 (move-to-left-margin)
12781 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12782 (not (and (looking-at parstart)
12783 (or (not use-hard-newlines)
12784 (bobp)
12785 (get-text-property
12786 (1- start) 'hard)))))
12787 (setq found-start nil)
12788 (goto-char start))
12789 found-start)
12790 ;; Found one.
12791 (progn
12792 ;; Move forward over paragraph separators.
12793 ;; We know this cannot reach the place we started
12794 ;; because we know we moved back over a non-separator.
12795 (while (and (not (eobp))
12796 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12797 (looking-at parsep)))
12798 (forward-line 1))
12799 ;; If line before paragraph is just margin, back up to there.
12800 (end-of-line 0)
12801 (if (> (current-column) (current-left-margin))
12802 (forward-char 1)
12803 (skip-chars-backward " \t")
12804 (if (not (bolp))
12805 (forward-line 1))))
12806 ;; No starter or separator line => use buffer beg.
12807 (goto-char (point-min))))))
12808
12809 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
12810 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
12811 (while (and (not (eobp))
12812 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
12813 (looking-at parsep))
12814 (forward-line 1))
12815 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
12816 ;; ... and one more line.
12817 (forward-line 1)
12818 (if fill-prefix-regexp
12819 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
12820 (while (and (not (eobp))
12821 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
12822 (not (looking-at parsep))
12823 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
12824 (forward-line 1))
12825 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
12826 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
12827 (goto-char start)
12828 (not (eobp)))
12829 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
12830 (not (looking-at parsep)))
12831 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
12832 (and use-hard-newlines
12833 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
12834 (forward-char 1))
12835 (if (< (point) (point-max))
12836 (goto-char start))))
12837 (constrain-to-field nil opoint t)
12838 ;; Return the number of steps that could not be done.
12839 arg))
12840 @end ignore
12841
12842 The @code{forward-paragraph} function moves point forward to the end
12843 of the paragraph. It is usually bound to @kbd{M-@}} and makes use of a
12844 number of functions that are important in themselves, including
12845 @code{let*}, @code{match-beginning}, and @code{looking-at}.
12846
12847 The function definition for @code{forward-paragraph} is considerably
12848 longer than the function definition for @code{forward-sentence}
12849 because it works with a paragraph, each line of which may begin with a
12850 fill prefix.
12851
12852 A fill prefix consists of a string of characters that are repeated at
12853 the beginning of each line. For example, in Lisp code, it is a
12854 convention to start each line of a paragraph-long comment with
12855 @samp{;;; }. In Text mode, four blank spaces make up another common
12856 fill prefix, creating an indented paragraph. (@xref{Fill Prefix, , ,
12857 emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for more information about fill
12858 prefixes.)
12859
12860 The existence of a fill prefix means that in addition to being able to
12861 find the end of a paragraph whose lines begin on the left-most
12862 column, the @code{forward-paragraph} function must be able to find the
12863 end of a paragraph when all or many of the lines in the buffer begin
12864 with the fill prefix.
12865
12866 Moreover, it is sometimes practical to ignore a fill prefix that
12867 exists, especially when blank lines separate paragraphs.
12868 This is an added complication.
12869
12870 @menu
12871 * forward-paragraph in brief:: Key parts of the function definition.
12872 * fwd-para let:: The @code{let*} expression.
12873 * fwd-para while:: The forward motion @code{while} loop.
12874 @end menu
12875
12876 @ifnottex
12877 @node forward-paragraph in brief
12878 @unnumberedsubsec Shortened @code{forward-paragraph} function definition
12879 @end ifnottex
12880
12881 Rather than print all of the @code{forward-paragraph} function, we
12882 will only print parts of it. Read without preparation, the function
12883 can be daunting!
12884
12885 @need 800
12886 In outline, the function looks like this:
12887
12888 @smallexample
12889 @group
12890 (defun forward-paragraph (&optional arg)
12891 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
12892 (interactive "p")
12893 (or arg (setq arg 1))
12894 (let*
12895 @var{varlist}
12896 (while (and (< arg 0) (not (bobp))) ; @r{backward-moving-code}
12897 @dots{}
12898 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp))) ; @r{forward-moving-code}
12899 @dots{}
12900 @end group
12901 @end smallexample
12902
12903 The first parts of the function are routine: the function's argument
12904 list consists of one optional argument. Documentation follows.
12905
12906 The lower case @samp{p} in the @code{interactive} declaration means
12907 that the processed prefix argument, if any, is passed to the function.
12908 This will be a number, and is the repeat count of how many paragraphs
12909 point will move. The @code{or} expression in the next line handles
12910 the common case when no argument is passed to the function, which occurs
12911 if the function is called from other code rather than interactively.
12912 This case was described earlier. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
12913 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Now we reach the end of the
12914 familiar part of this function.
12915
12916 @node fwd-para let
12917 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{let*} expression
12918
12919 The next line of the @code{forward-paragraph} function begins a
12920 @code{let*} expression. This is a different than @code{let}. The
12921 symbol is @code{let*} not @code{let}.
12922
12923 The @code{let*} special form is like @code{let} except that Emacs sets
12924 each variable in sequence, one after another, and variables in the
12925 latter part of the varlist can make use of the values to which Emacs
12926 set variables in the earlier part of the varlist.
12927
12928 @ignore
12929 ( refappend save-excursion, , code save-excursion in code append-to-buffer .)
12930 @end ignore
12931
12932 (@ref{append save-excursion, , @code{save-excursion} in @code{append-to-buffer}}.)
12933
12934 In the @code{let*} expression in this function, Emacs binds a total of
12935 seven variables: @code{opoint}, @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
12936 @code{parstart}, @code{parsep}, @code{sp-parstart}, @code{start}, and
12937 @code{found-start}.
12938
12939 The variable @code{parsep} appears twice, first, to remove instances
12940 of @samp{^}, and second, to handle fill prefixes.
12941
12942 The variable @code{opoint} is just the value of @code{point}. As you
12943 can guess, it is used in a @code{constrain-to-field} expression, just
12944 as in @code{forward-sentence}.
12945
12946 The variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is set to the value returned by
12947 evaluating the following list:
12948
12949 @smallexample
12950 @group
12951 (and fill-prefix
12952 (not (equal fill-prefix ""))
12953 (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12954 (regexp-quote fill-prefix))
12955 @end group
12956 @end smallexample
12957
12958 @noindent
12959 This is an expression whose first element is the @code{and} special form.
12960
12961 As we learned earlier (@pxref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new}
12962 function}), the @code{and} special form evaluates each of its
12963 arguments until one of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, in
12964 which case the @code{and} expression returns @code{nil}; however, if
12965 none of the arguments returns a value of @code{nil}, the value
12966 resulting from evaluating the last argument is returned. (Since such
12967 a value is not @code{nil}, it is considered true in Lisp.) In other
12968 words, an @code{and} expression returns a true value only if all its
12969 arguments are true.
12970 @findex and
12971
12972 In this case, the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to a
12973 non-@code{nil} value only if the following four expressions produce a
12974 true (i.e., a non-@code{nil}) value when they are evaluated; otherwise,
12975 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} is bound to @code{nil}.
12976
12977 @table @code
12978 @item fill-prefix
12979 When this variable is evaluated, the value of the fill prefix, if any,
12980 is returned. If there is no fill prefix, this variable returns
12981 @code{nil}.
12982
12983 @item (not (equal fill-prefix "")
12984 This expression checks whether an existing fill prefix is an empty
12985 string, that is, a string with no characters in it. An empty string is
12986 not a useful fill prefix.
12987
12988 @item (not paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix)
12989 This expression returns @code{nil} if the variable
12990 @code{paragraph-ignore-fill-prefix} has been turned on by being set to a
12991 true value such as @code{t}.
12992
12993 @item (regexp-quote fill-prefix)
12994 This is the last argument to the @code{and} special form. If all the
12995 arguments to the @code{and} are true, the value resulting from
12996 evaluating this expression will be returned by the @code{and} expression
12997 and bound to the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp},
12998 @end table
12999
13000 @findex regexp-quote
13001 @noindent
13002 The result of evaluating this @code{and} expression successfully is that
13003 @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be bound to the value of
13004 @code{fill-prefix} as modified by the @code{regexp-quote} function.
13005 What @code{regexp-quote} does is read a string and return a regular
13006 expression that will exactly match the string and match nothing else.
13007 This means that @code{fill-prefix-regexp} will be set to a value that
13008 will exactly match the fill prefix if the fill prefix exists.
13009 Otherwise, the variable will be set to @code{nil}.
13010
13011 The next two local variables in the @code{let*} expression are
13012 designed to remove instances of @samp{^} from @code{parstart} and
13013 @code{parsep}, the local variables which indicate the paragraph start
13014 and the paragraph separator. The next expression sets @code{parsep}
13015 again. That is to handle fill prefixes.
13016
13017 This is the setting that requires the definition call @code{let*}
13018 rather than @code{let}. The true-or-false-test for the @code{if}
13019 depends on whether the variable @code{fill-prefix-regexp} evaluates to
13020 @code{nil} or some other value.
13021
13022 If @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does not have a value, Emacs evaluates
13023 the else-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to
13024 its local value. (@code{parsep} is a regular expression that matches
13025 what separates paragraphs.)
13026
13027 But if @code{fill-prefix-regexp} does have a value, Emacs evaluates
13028 the then-part of the @code{if} expression and binds @code{parsep} to a
13029 regular expression that includes the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} as part
13030 of the pattern.
13031
13032 Specifically, @code{parsep} is set to the original value of the
13033 paragraph separate regular expression concatenated with an alternative
13034 expression that consists of the @code{fill-prefix-regexp} followed by
13035 optional whitespace to the end of the line. The whitespace is defined
13036 by @w{@code{"[ \t]*$"}}.) The @samp{\\|} defines this portion of the
13037 regexp as an alternative to @code{parsep}.
13038
13039 According to a comment in the code, the next local variable,
13040 @code{sp-parstart}, is used for searching, and then the final two,
13041 @code{start} and @code{found-start}, are set to @code{nil}.
13042
13043 Now we get into the body of the @code{let*}. The first part of the body
13044 of the @code{let*} deals with the case when the function is given a
13045 negative argument and is therefore moving backwards. We will skip this
13046 section.
13047
13048 @node fwd-para while
13049 @unnumberedsubsec The forward motion @code{while} loop
13050
13051 The second part of the body of the @code{let*} deals with forward
13052 motion. It is a @code{while} loop that repeats itself so long as the
13053 value of @code{arg} is greater than zero. In the most common use of
13054 the function, the value of the argument is 1, so the body of the
13055 @code{while} loop is evaluated exactly once, and the cursor moves
13056 forward one paragraph.
13057
13058 @ignore
13059 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13060
13061 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13062 (while (and (not (eobp))
13063 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13064 (looking-at parsep))
13065 (forward-line 1))
13066 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13067 ;; ... and one more line.
13068 (forward-line 1)
13069
13070 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13071 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart.
13072 (while (and (not (eobp))
13073 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13074 (not (looking-at parsep))
13075 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13076 (forward-line 1))
13077
13078 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13079 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13080 (goto-char start)
13081 (not (eobp)))
13082 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13083 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13084 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13085 (and use-hard-newlines
13086 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13087 (forward-char 1))
13088
13089 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13090 (goto-char start))))
13091 @end ignore
13092
13093 This part handles three situations: when point is between paragraphs,
13094 when there is a fill prefix and when there is no fill prefix.
13095
13096 @need 800
13097 The @code{while} loop looks like this:
13098
13099 @smallexample
13100 @group
13101 ;; @r{going forwards and not at the end of the buffer}
13102 (while (and (> arg 0) (not (eobp)))
13103
13104 ;; @r{between paragraphs}
13105 ;; Move forward over separator lines...
13106 (while (and (not (eobp))
13107 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13108 (looking-at parsep))
13109 (forward-line 1))
13110 ;; @r{This decrements the loop}
13111 (unless (eobp) (setq arg (1- arg)))
13112 ;; ... and one more line.
13113 (forward-line 1)
13114 @end group
13115
13116 @group
13117 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13118 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13119 ;; we go forward line by line
13120 (while (and (not (eobp))
13121 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13122 (not (looking-at parsep))
13123 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13124 (forward-line 1))
13125 @end group
13126
13127 @group
13128 ;; There is no fill prefix;
13129 ;; we go forward character by character
13130 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13131 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13132 (goto-char start)
13133 (not (eobp)))
13134 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13135 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13136 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13137 (and use-hard-newlines
13138 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13139 (forward-char 1))
13140 @end group
13141
13142 @group
13143 ;; and if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the end,
13144 ;; go to whatever was found in the regular expression search
13145 ;; for sp-parstart
13146 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13147 (goto-char start))))
13148 @end group
13149 @end smallexample
13150
13151 @findex eobp
13152 We can see that this is a decrementing counter @code{while} loop,
13153 using the expression @code{(setq arg (1- arg))} as the decrementer.
13154 That expression is not far from the @code{while}, but is hidden in
13155 another Lisp macro, an @code{unless} macro. Unless we are at the end
13156 of the buffer---that is what the @code{eobp} function determines; it
13157 is an abbreviation of @samp{End Of Buffer P}---we decrease the value
13158 of @code{arg} by one.
13159
13160 (If we are at the end of the buffer, we cannot go forward any more and
13161 the next loop of the @code{while} expression will test false since the
13162 test is an @code{and} with @code{(not (eobp))}. The @code{not}
13163 function means exactly as you expect; it is another name for
13164 @code{null}, a function that returns true when its argument is false.)
13165
13166 Interestingly, the loop count is not decremented until we leave the
13167 space between paragraphs, unless we come to the end of buffer or stop
13168 seeing the local value of the paragraph separator.
13169
13170 That second @code{while} also has a @code{(move-to-left-margin)}
13171 expression. The function is self-explanatory. It is inside a
13172 @code{progn} expression and not the last element of its body, so it is
13173 only invoked for its side effect, which is to move point to the left
13174 margin of the current line.
13175
13176 @findex looking-at
13177 The @code{looking-at} function is also self-explanatory; it returns
13178 true if the text after point matches the regular expression given as
13179 its argument.
13180
13181 The rest of the body of the loop looks difficult at first, but makes
13182 sense as you come to understand it.
13183
13184 @need 800
13185 First consider what happens if there is a fill prefix:
13186
13187 @smallexample
13188 @group
13189 (if fill-prefix-regexp
13190 ;; There is a fill prefix; it overrides parstart;
13191 ;; we go forward line by line
13192 (while (and (not (eobp))
13193 (progn (move-to-left-margin) (not (eobp)))
13194 (not (looking-at parsep))
13195 (looking-at fill-prefix-regexp))
13196 (forward-line 1))
13197 @end group
13198 @end smallexample
13199
13200 @noindent
13201 This expression moves point forward line by line so long
13202 as four conditions are true:
13203
13204 @enumerate
13205 @item
13206 Point is not at the end of the buffer.
13207
13208 @item
13209 We can move to the left margin of the text and are
13210 not at the end of the buffer.
13211
13212 @item
13213 The text following point does not separate paragraphs.
13214
13215 @item
13216 The pattern following point is the fill prefix regular expression.
13217 @end enumerate
13218
13219 The last condition may be puzzling, until you remember that point was
13220 moved to the beginning of the line early in the @code{forward-paragraph}
13221 function. This means that if the text has a fill prefix, the
13222 @code{looking-at} function will see it.
13223
13224 @need 1250
13225 Consider what happens when there is no fill prefix.
13226
13227 @smallexample
13228 @group
13229 (while (and (re-search-forward sp-parstart nil 1)
13230 (progn (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13231 (goto-char start)
13232 (not (eobp)))
13233 (progn (move-to-left-margin)
13234 (not (looking-at parsep)))
13235 (or (not (looking-at parstart))
13236 (and use-hard-newlines
13237 (not (get-text-property (1- start) 'hard)))))
13238 (forward-char 1))
13239 @end group
13240 @end smallexample
13241
13242 @noindent
13243 This @code{while} loop has us searching forward for
13244 @code{sp-parstart}, which is the combination of possible whitespace
13245 with the local value of the start of a paragraph or of a paragraph
13246 separator. (The latter two are within an expression starting
13247 @code{\(?:} so that they are not referenced by the
13248 @code{match-beginning} function.)
13249
13250 @need 800
13251 The two expressions,
13252
13253 @smallexample
13254 @group
13255 (setq start (match-beginning 0))
13256 (goto-char start)
13257 @end group
13258 @end smallexample
13259
13260 @noindent
13261 mean go to the start of the text matched by the regular expression
13262 search.
13263
13264 The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression is new. It returns a number
13265 specifying the location of the start of the text that was matched by
13266 the last search.
13267
13268 The @code{match-beginning} function is used here because of a
13269 characteristic of a forward search: a successful forward search,
13270 regardless of whether it is a plain search or a regular expression
13271 search, moves point to the end of the text that is found. In this
13272 case, a successful search moves point to the end of the pattern for
13273 @code{sp-parstart}.
13274
13275 However, we want to put point at the end of the current paragraph, not
13276 somewhere else. Indeed, since the search possibly includes the
13277 paragraph separator, point may end up at the beginning of the next one
13278 unless we use an expression that includes @code{match-beginning}.
13279
13280 @findex match-beginning
13281 When given an argument of 0, @code{match-beginning} returns the
13282 position that is the start of the text matched by the most recent
13283 search. In this case, the most recent search looks for
13284 @code{sp-parstart}. The @code{(match-beginning 0)} expression returns
13285 the beginning position of that pattern, rather than the end position
13286 of that pattern.
13287
13288 (Incidentally, when passed a positive number as an argument, the
13289 @code{match-beginning} function returns the location of point at that
13290 parenthesized expression in the last search unless that parenthesized
13291 expression begins with @code{\(?:}. I don't know why @code{\(?:}
13292 appears here since the argument is 0.)
13293
13294 @need 1250
13295 The last expression when there is no fill prefix is
13296
13297 @smallexample
13298 @group
13299 (if (< (point) (point-max))
13300 (goto-char start))))
13301 @end group
13302 @end smallexample
13303
13304 @noindent
13305 This says that if there is no fill prefix and if we are not at the
13306 end, point should move to the beginning of whatever was found by the
13307 regular expression search for @code{sp-parstart}.
13308
13309 The full definition for the @code{forward-paragraph} function not only
13310 includes code for going forwards, but also code for going backwards.
13311
13312 If you are reading this inside of GNU Emacs and you want to see the
13313 whole function, you can type @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function})
13314 and the name of the function. This gives you the function
13315 documentation and the name of the library containing the function's
13316 source. Place point over the name of the library and press the RET
13317 key; you will be taken directly to the source. (Be sure to install
13318 your sources! Without them, you are like a person who tries to drive
13319 a car with his eyes shut!)
13320
13321 @node etags
13322 @section Create Your Own @file{TAGS} File
13323 @findex etags
13324 @cindex @file{TAGS} file, create own
13325
13326 Besides @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}), another way to see the
13327 source of a function is to type @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) and the
13328 name of the function when prompted for it. This is a good habit to
13329 get into. The @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) command takes you directly
13330 to the source for a function, variable, or node. The function depends
13331 on tags tables to tell it where to go.
13332
13333 If the @code{find-tag} function first asks you for the name of a
13334 @file{TAGS} table, give it the name of a @file{TAGS} file such as
13335 @file{/usr/local/src/emacs/src/TAGS}. (The exact path to your
13336 @file{TAGS} file depends on how your copy of Emacs was installed. I
13337 just told you the location that provides both my C and my Emacs Lisp
13338 sources.)
13339
13340 You can also create your own @file{TAGS} file for directories that
13341 lack one.
13342
13343 You often need to build and install tags tables yourself. They are
13344 not built automatically. A tags table is called a @file{TAGS} file;
13345 the name is in upper case letters.
13346
13347 You can create a @file{TAGS} file by calling the @code{etags} program
13348 that comes as a part of the Emacs distribution. Usually, @code{etags}
13349 is compiled and installed when Emacs is built. (@code{etags} is not
13350 an Emacs Lisp function or a part of Emacs; it is a C program.)
13351
13352 @need 1250
13353 To create a @file{TAGS} file, first switch to the directory in which
13354 you want to create the file. In Emacs you can do this with the
13355 @kbd{M-x cd} command, or by visiting a file in the directory, or by
13356 listing the directory with @kbd{C-x d} (@code{dired}). Then run the
13357 compile command, with @w{@code{etags *.el}} as the command to execute
13358
13359 @smallexample
13360 M-x compile RET etags *.el RET
13361 @end smallexample
13362
13363 @noindent
13364 to create a @file{TAGS} file for Emacs Lisp.
13365
13366 For example, if you have a large number of files in your
13367 @file{~/emacs} directory, as I do---I have 137 @file{.el} files in it,
13368 of which I load 12---you can create a @file{TAGS} file for the Emacs
13369 Lisp files in that directory.
13370
13371 @need 1250
13372 The @code{etags} program takes all the usual shell ``wildcards''. For
13373 example, if you have two directories for which you want a single
13374 @file{TAGS} file, type @w{@code{etags *.el ../elisp/*.el}}, where
13375 @file{../elisp/} is the second directory:
13376
13377 @smallexample
13378 M-x compile RET etags *.el ../elisp/*.el RET
13379 @end smallexample
13380
13381 @need 1250
13382 Type
13383
13384 @smallexample
13385 M-x compile RET etags --help RET
13386 @end smallexample
13387
13388 @noindent
13389 to see a list of the options accepted by @code{etags} as well as a
13390 list of supported languages.
13391
13392 The @code{etags} program handles more than 20 languages, including
13393 Emacs Lisp, Common Lisp, Scheme, C, C++, Ada, Fortran, HTML, Java,
13394 LaTeX, Pascal, Perl, PostScript, Python, TeX, Texinfo, makefiles, and
13395 most assemblers. The program has no switches for specifying the
13396 language; it recognizes the language in an input file according to its
13397 file name and contents.
13398
13399 @file{etags} is very helpful when you are writing code yourself and
13400 want to refer back to functions you have already written. Just run
13401 @code{etags} again at intervals as you write new functions, so they
13402 become part of the @file{TAGS} file.
13403
13404 If you think an appropriate @file{TAGS} file already exists for what
13405 you want, but do not know where it is, you can use the @code{locate}
13406 program to attempt to find it.
13407
13408 Type @w{@kbd{M-x locate @key{RET} TAGS @key{RET}}} and Emacs will list
13409 for you the full path names of all your @file{TAGS} files. On my
13410 system, this command lists 34 @file{TAGS} files. On the other hand, a
13411 ``plain vanilla'' system I recently installed did not contain any
13412 @file{TAGS} files.
13413
13414 If the tags table you want has been created, you can use the @code{M-x
13415 visit-tags-table} command to specify it. Otherwise, you will need to
13416 create the tag table yourself and then use @code{M-x
13417 visit-tags-table}.
13418
13419 @subsubheading Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13420 @cindex Building Tags in the Emacs sources
13421 @cindex Tags in the Emacs sources
13422 @findex make tags
13423
13424 The GNU Emacs sources come with a @file{Makefile} that contains a
13425 sophisticated @code{etags} command that creates, collects, and merges
13426 tags tables from all over the Emacs sources and puts the information
13427 into one @file{TAGS} file in the @file{src/} directory. (The
13428 @file{src/} directory is below the top level of your Emacs directory.)
13429
13430 @need 1250
13431 To build this @file{TAGS} file, go to the top level of your Emacs
13432 source directory and run the compile command @code{make tags}:
13433
13434 @smallexample
13435 M-x compile RET make tags RET
13436 @end smallexample
13437
13438 @noindent
13439 (The @code{make tags} command works well with the GNU Emacs sources,
13440 as well as with some other source packages.)
13441
13442 For more information, see @ref{Tags, , Tag Tables, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13443 Manual}.
13444
13445 @node Regexp Review
13446 @section Review
13447
13448 Here is a brief summary of some recently introduced functions.
13449
13450 @table @code
13451 @item while
13452 Repeatedly evaluate the body of the expression so long as the first
13453 element of the body tests true. Then return @code{nil}. (The
13454 expression is evaluated only for its side effects.)
13455
13456 @need 1250
13457 For example:
13458
13459 @smallexample
13460 @group
13461 (let ((foo 2))
13462 (while (> foo 0)
13463 (insert (format "foo is %d.\n" foo))
13464 (setq foo (1- foo))))
13465
13466 @result{} foo is 2.
13467 foo is 1.
13468 nil
13469 @end group
13470 @end smallexample
13471
13472 @noindent
13473 (The @code{insert} function inserts its arguments at point; the
13474 @code{format} function returns a string formatted from its arguments
13475 the way @code{message} formats its arguments; @code{\n} produces a new
13476 line.)
13477
13478 @item re-search-forward
13479 Search for a pattern, and if the pattern is found, move point to rest
13480 just after it.
13481
13482 @noindent
13483 Takes four arguments, like @code{search-forward}:
13484
13485 @enumerate
13486 @item
13487 A regular expression that specifies the pattern to search for.
13488 (Remember to put quotation marks around this argument!)
13489
13490 @item
13491 Optionally, the limit of the search.
13492
13493 @item
13494 Optionally, what to do if the search fails, return @code{nil} or an
13495 error message.
13496
13497 @item
13498 Optionally, how many times to repeat the search; if negative, the
13499 search goes backwards.
13500 @end enumerate
13501
13502 @item let*
13503 Bind some variables locally to particular values,
13504 and then evaluate the remaining arguments, returning the value of the
13505 last one. While binding the local variables, use the local values of
13506 variables bound earlier, if any.
13507
13508 @need 1250
13509 For example:
13510
13511 @smallexample
13512 @group
13513 (let* ((foo 7)
13514 (bar (* 3 foo)))
13515 (message "'bar' is %d." bar))
13516 @result{} 'bar' is 21.
13517 @end group
13518 @end smallexample
13519
13520 @item match-beginning
13521 Return the position of the start of the text found by the last regular
13522 expression search.
13523
13524 @item looking-at
13525 Return @code{t} for true if the text after point matches the argument,
13526 which should be a regular expression.
13527
13528 @item eobp
13529 Return @code{t} for true if point is at the end of the accessible part
13530 of a buffer. The end of the accessible part is the end of the buffer
13531 if the buffer is not narrowed; it is the end of the narrowed part if
13532 the buffer is narrowed.
13533 @end table
13534
13535 @need 1500
13536 @node re-search Exercises
13537 @section Exercises with @code{re-search-forward}
13538
13539 @itemize @bullet
13540 @item
13541 Write a function to search for a regular expression that matches two
13542 or more blank lines in sequence.
13543
13544 @item
13545 Write a function to search for duplicated words, such as ``the the''.
13546 @xref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
13547 Manual}, for information on how to write a regexp (a regular
13548 expression) to match a string that is composed of two identical
13549 halves. You can devise several regexps; some are better than others.
13550 The function I use is described in an appendix, along with several
13551 regexps. @xref{the-the, , @code{the-the} Duplicated Words Function}.
13552 @end itemize
13553
13554 @node Counting Words
13555 @chapter Counting via Repetition and Regexps
13556 @cindex Repetition for word counting
13557 @cindex Regular expressions for word counting
13558
13559 Repetition and regular expression searches are powerful tools that you
13560 often use when you write code in Emacs Lisp. This chapter illustrates
13561 the use of regular expression searches through the construction of
13562 word count commands using @code{while} loops and recursion.
13563
13564 @menu
13565 * Why Count Words::
13566 * @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: Use a regexp, but find a problem.
13567 * recursive-count-words:: Start with case of no words in region.
13568 * Counting Exercise::
13569 @end menu
13570
13571 @ifnottex
13572 @node Why Count Words
13573 @unnumberedsec Counting words
13574 @end ifnottex
13575
13576 The standard Emacs distribution contains functions for counting the
13577 number of lines and words within a region.
13578
13579 Certain types of writing ask you to count words. Thus, if you write
13580 an essay, you may be limited to 800 words; if you write a novel, you
13581 may discipline yourself to write 1000 words a day. It seems odd, but
13582 for a long time, Emacs lacked a word count command. Perhaps people used
13583 Emacs mostly for code or types of documentation that did not require
13584 word counts; or perhaps they restricted themselves to the operating
13585 system word count command, @code{wc}. Alternatively, people may have
13586 followed the publishers' convention and computed a word count by
13587 dividing the number of characters in a document by five.
13588
13589 There are many ways to implement a command to count words. Here are
13590 some examples, which you may wish to compare with the standard Emacs
13591 command, @code{count-words-region}.
13592
13593 @node @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13594 @section The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} Function
13595 @findex @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13596
13597 A word count command could count words in a line, paragraph, region,
13598 or buffer. What should the command cover? You could design the
13599 command to count the number of words in a complete buffer. However,
13600 the Emacs tradition encourages flexibility---you may want to count
13601 words in just a section, rather than all of a buffer. So it makes
13602 more sense to design the command to count the number of words in a
13603 region. Once you have a command to count words in a region, you can,
13604 if you wish, count words in a whole buffer by marking it with
13605 @w{@kbd{C-x h}} (@code{mark-whole-buffer}).
13606
13607 Clearly, counting words is a repetitive act: starting from the
13608 beginning of the region, you count the first word, then the second
13609 word, then the third word, and so on, until you reach the end of the
13610 region. This means that word counting is ideally suited to recursion
13611 or to a @code{while} loop.
13612
13613 @menu
13614 * Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}:: The definition using a @code{while} loop.
13615 * Whitespace Bug:: The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13616 @end menu
13617
13618 @ifnottex
13619 @node Design @value{COUNT-WORDS}
13620 @unnumberedsubsec Designing @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13621 @end ifnottex
13622
13623 First, we will implement the word count command with a @code{while}
13624 loop, then with recursion. The command will, of course, be
13625 interactive.
13626
13627 @need 800
13628 The template for an interactive function definition is, as always:
13629
13630 @smallexample
13631 @group
13632 (defun @var{name-of-function} (@var{argument-list})
13633 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
13634 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
13635 @var{body}@dots{})
13636 @end group
13637 @end smallexample
13638
13639 What we need to do is fill in the slots.
13640
13641 The name of the function should be self-explanatory and similar to the
13642 existing @code{count-lines-region} name. This makes the name easier
13643 to remember. @code{count-words-region} is the obvious choice. Since
13644 that name is now used for the standard Emacs command to count words, we
13645 will name our implementation @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
13646
13647 The function counts words within a region. This means that the
13648 argument list must contain symbols that are bound to the two
13649 positions, the beginning and end of the region. These two positions
13650 can be called @samp{beginning} and @samp{end} respectively. The first
13651 line of the documentation should be a single sentence, since that is
13652 all that is printed as documentation by a command such as
13653 @code{apropos}. The interactive expression will be of the form
13654 @samp{(interactive "r")}, since that will cause Emacs to pass the
13655 beginning and end of the region to the function's argument list. All
13656 this is routine.
13657
13658 The body of the function needs to be written to do three tasks:
13659 first, to set up conditions under which the @code{while} loop can
13660 count words, second, to run the @code{while} loop, and third, to send
13661 a message to the user.
13662
13663 When a user calls @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, point may be at the
13664 beginning or the end of the region. However, the counting process
13665 must start at the beginning of the region. This means we will want
13666 to put point there if it is not already there. Executing
13667 @code{(goto-char beginning)} ensures this. Of course, we will want to
13668 return point to its expected position when the function finishes its
13669 work. For this reason, the body must be enclosed in a
13670 @code{save-excursion} expression.
13671
13672 The central part of the body of the function consists of a
13673 @code{while} loop in which one expression jumps point forward word by
13674 word, and another expression counts those jumps. The true-or-false-test
13675 of the @code{while} loop should test true so long as point should jump
13676 forward, and false when point is at the end of the region.
13677
13678 We could use @code{(forward-word 1)} as the expression for moving point
13679 forward word by word, but it is easier to see what Emacs identifies as a
13680 ``word'' if we use a regular expression search.
13681
13682 A regular expression search that finds the pattern for which it is
13683 searching leaves point after the last character matched. This means
13684 that a succession of successful word searches will move point forward
13685 word by word.
13686
13687 As a practical matter, we want the regular expression search to jump
13688 over whitespace and punctuation between words as well as over the
13689 words themselves. A regexp that refuses to jump over interword
13690 whitespace would never jump more than one word! This means that
13691 the regexp should include the whitespace and punctuation that follows
13692 a word, if any, as well as the word itself. (A word may end a buffer
13693 and not have any following whitespace or punctuation, so that part of
13694 the regexp must be optional.)
13695
13696 Thus, what we want for the regexp is a pattern defining one or more
13697 word constituent characters followed, optionally, by one or more
13698 characters that are not word constituents. The regular expression for
13699 this is:
13700
13701 @smallexample
13702 \w+\W*
13703 @end smallexample
13704
13705 @noindent
13706 The buffer's syntax table determines which characters are and are not
13707 word constituents. For more information about syntax,
13708 @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
13709 Reference Manual}.
13710
13711 @need 800
13712 The search expression looks like this:
13713
13714 @smallexample
13715 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13716 @end smallexample
13717
13718 @noindent
13719 (Note that paired backslashes precede the @samp{w} and @samp{W}. A
13720 single backslash has special meaning to the Emacs Lisp interpreter.
13721 It indicates that the following character is interpreted differently
13722 than usual. For example, the two characters, @samp{\n}, stand for
13723 @samp{newline}, rather than for a backslash followed by @samp{n}. Two
13724 backslashes in a row stand for an ordinary, ``unspecial'' backslash, so
13725 Emacs Lisp interpreter ends of seeing a single backslash followed by a
13726 letter. So it discovers the letter is special.)
13727
13728 We need a counter to count how many words there are; this variable
13729 must first be set to 0 and then incremented each time Emacs goes
13730 around the @code{while} loop. The incrementing expression is simply:
13731
13732 @smallexample
13733 (setq count (1+ count))
13734 @end smallexample
13735
13736 Finally, we want to tell the user how many words there are in the
13737 region. The @code{message} function is intended for presenting this
13738 kind of information to the user. The message has to be phrased so
13739 that it reads properly regardless of how many words there are in the
13740 region: we don't want to say that ``there are 1 words in the region''.
13741 The conflict between singular and plural is ungrammatical. We can
13742 solve this problem by using a conditional expression that evaluates
13743 different messages depending on the number of words in the region.
13744 There are three possibilities: no words in the region, one word in the
13745 region, and more than one word. This means that the @code{cond}
13746 special form is appropriate.
13747
13748 @need 1500
13749 All this leads to the following function definition:
13750
13751 @smallexample
13752 @group
13753 ;;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
13754 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
13755 "Print number of words in the region.
13756 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
13757 character followed by at least one character that
13758 is not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax
13759 table determines which characters these are."
13760 (interactive "r")
13761 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
13762 @end group
13763
13764 @group
13765 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
13766 (save-excursion
13767 (goto-char beginning)
13768 (let ((count 0))
13769 @end group
13770
13771 @group
13772 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
13773 (while (< (point) end)
13774 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13775 (setq count (1+ count)))
13776 @end group
13777
13778 @group
13779 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
13780 (cond ((zerop count)
13781 (message
13782 "The region does NOT have any words."))
13783 ((= 1 count)
13784 (message
13785 "The region has 1 word."))
13786 (t
13787 (message
13788 "The region has %d words." count))))))
13789 @end group
13790 @end smallexample
13791
13792 @noindent
13793 As written, the function works, but not in all circumstances.
13794
13795 @node Whitespace Bug
13796 @subsection The Whitespace Bug in @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13797
13798 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command described in the preceding
13799 section has two bugs, or rather, one bug with two manifestations.
13800 First, if you mark a region containing only whitespace in the middle
13801 of some text, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} command tells you that the
13802 region contains one word! Second, if you mark a region containing
13803 only whitespace at the end of the buffer or the accessible portion of
13804 a narrowed buffer, the command displays an error message that looks
13805 like this:
13806
13807 @smallexample
13808 Search failed: "\\w+\\W*"
13809 @end smallexample
13810
13811 If you are reading this in Info in GNU Emacs, you can test for these
13812 bugs yourself.
13813
13814 First, evaluate the function in the usual manner to install it.
13815 @ifinfo
13816 Here is a copy of the definition. Place your cursor after the closing
13817 parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e} to install it.
13818
13819 @smallexample
13820 @group
13821 ;; @r{First version; has bugs!}
13822 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
13823 "Print number of words in the region.
13824 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent character followed
13825 by at least one character that is not a word-constituent. The buffer's
13826 syntax table determines which characters these are."
13827 @end group
13828 @group
13829 (interactive "r")
13830 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
13831 @end group
13832
13833 @group
13834 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
13835 (save-excursion
13836 (goto-char beginning)
13837 (let ((count 0))
13838 @end group
13839
13840 @group
13841 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
13842 (while (< (point) end)
13843 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*")
13844 (setq count (1+ count)))
13845 @end group
13846
13847 @group
13848 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
13849 (cond ((zerop count)
13850 (message "The region does NOT have any words."))
13851 ((= 1 count) (message "The region has 1 word."))
13852 (t (message "The region has %d words." count))))))
13853 @end group
13854 @end smallexample
13855 @end ifinfo
13856
13857 @need 1000
13858 If you wish, you can also install this keybinding by evaluating it:
13859
13860 @smallexample
13861 (global-set-key "\C-c=" '@value{COUNT-WORDS})
13862 @end smallexample
13863
13864 To conduct the first test, set mark and point to the beginning and end
13865 of the following line and then type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x
13866 @value{COUNT-WORDS}} if you have not bound @kbd{C-c =}):
13867
13868 @smallexample
13869 one two three
13870 @end smallexample
13871
13872 @noindent
13873 Emacs will tell you, correctly, that the region has three words.
13874
13875 Repeat the test, but place mark at the beginning of the line and place
13876 point just @emph{before} the word @samp{one}. Again type the command
13877 @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}). Emacs should tell you
13878 that the region has no words, since it is composed only of the
13879 whitespace at the beginning of the line. But instead Emacs tells you
13880 that the region has one word!
13881
13882 For the third test, copy the sample line to the end of the
13883 @file{*scratch*} buffer and then type several spaces at the end of the
13884 line. Place mark right after the word @samp{three} and point at the
13885 end of line. (The end of the line will be the end of the buffer.)
13886 Type @kbd{C-c =} (or @kbd{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}) as you did before.
13887 Again, Emacs should tell you that the region has no words, since it is
13888 composed only of the whitespace at the end of the line. Instead,
13889 Emacs displays an error message saying @samp{Search failed}.
13890
13891 The two bugs stem from the same problem.
13892
13893 Consider the first manifestation of the bug, in which the command
13894 tells you that the whitespace at the beginning of the line contains
13895 one word. What happens is this: The @code{M-x @value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13896 command moves point to the beginning of the region. The @code{while}
13897 tests whether the value of point is smaller than the value of
13898 @code{end}, which it is. Consequently, the regular expression search
13899 looks for and finds the first word. It leaves point after the word.
13900 @code{count} is set to one. The @code{while} loop repeats; but this
13901 time the value of point is larger than the value of @code{end}, the
13902 loop is exited; and the function displays a message saying the number
13903 of words in the region is one. In brief, the regular expression
13904 search looks for and finds the word even though it is outside
13905 the marked region.
13906
13907 In the second manifestation of the bug, the region is whitespace at
13908 the end of the buffer. Emacs says @samp{Search failed}. What happens
13909 is that the true-or-false-test in the @code{while} loop tests true, so
13910 the search expression is executed. But since there are no more words
13911 in the buffer, the search fails.
13912
13913 In both manifestations of the bug, the search extends or attempts to
13914 extend outside of the region.
13915
13916 The solution is to limit the search to the region---this is a fairly
13917 simple action, but as you may have come to expect, it is not quite as
13918 simple as you might think.
13919
13920 As we have seen, the @code{re-search-forward} function takes a search
13921 pattern as its first argument. But in addition to this first,
13922 mandatory argument, it accepts three optional arguments. The optional
13923 second argument bounds the search. The optional third argument, if
13924 @code{t}, causes the function to return @code{nil} rather than signal
13925 an error if the search fails. The optional fourth argument is a
13926 repeat count. (In Emacs, you can see a function's documentation by
13927 typing @kbd{C-h f}, the name of the function, and then @key{RET}.)
13928
13929 In the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition, the value of the end of
13930 the region is held by the variable @code{end} which is passed as an
13931 argument to the function. Thus, we can add @code{end} as an argument
13932 to the regular expression search expression:
13933
13934 @smallexample
13935 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end)
13936 @end smallexample
13937
13938 However, if you make only this change to the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
13939 definition and then test the new version of the definition on a
13940 stretch of whitespace, you will receive an error message saying
13941 @samp{Search failed}.
13942
13943 What happens is this: the search is limited to the region, and fails
13944 as you expect because there are no word-constituent characters in the
13945 region. Since it fails, we receive an error message. But we do not
13946 want to receive an error message in this case; we want to receive the
13947 message that "The region does NOT have any words."
13948
13949 The solution to this problem is to provide @code{re-search-forward}
13950 with a third argument of @code{t}, which causes the function to return
13951 @code{nil} rather than signal an error if the search fails.
13952
13953 However, if you make this change and try it, you will see the message
13954 ``Counting words in region ... '' and @dots{} you will keep on seeing
13955 that message @dots{}, until you type @kbd{C-g} (@code{keyboard-quit}).
13956
13957 Here is what happens: the search is limited to the region, as before,
13958 and it fails because there are no word-constituent characters in the
13959 region, as expected. Consequently, the @code{re-search-forward}
13960 expression returns @code{nil}. It does nothing else. In particular,
13961 it does not move point, which it does as a side effect if it finds the
13962 search target. After the @code{re-search-forward} expression returns
13963 @code{nil}, the next expression in the @code{while} loop is evaluated.
13964 This expression increments the count. Then the loop repeats. The
13965 true-or-false-test tests true because the value of point is still less
13966 than the value of end, since the @code{re-search-forward} expression
13967 did not move point. @dots{} and the cycle repeats @dots{}
13968
13969 The @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition requires yet another
13970 modification, to cause the true-or-false-test of the @code{while} loop
13971 to test false if the search fails. Put another way, there are two
13972 conditions that must be satisfied in the true-or-false-test before the
13973 word count variable is incremented: point must still be within the
13974 region and the search expression must have found a word to count.
13975
13976 Since both the first condition and the second condition must be true
13977 together, the two expressions, the region test and the search
13978 expression, can be joined with an @code{and} special form and embedded in
13979 the @code{while} loop as the true-or-false-test, like this:
13980
13981 @smallexample
13982 (and (< (point) end) (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
13983 @end smallexample
13984
13985 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
13986 @c also trouble with an overfull hbox
13987 @iftex
13988 @noindent
13989 (For information about @code{and}, see
13990 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
13991 @end iftex
13992 @ifinfo
13993 @noindent
13994 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
13995 information about @code{and}.)
13996 @end ifinfo
13997
13998 The @code{re-search-forward} expression returns @code{t} if the search
13999 succeeds and as a side effect moves point. Consequently, as words are
14000 found, point is moved through the region. When the search expression
14001 fails to find another word, or when point reaches the end of the
14002 region, the true-or-false-test tests false, the @code{while} loop
14003 exits, and the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function displays one or
14004 other of its messages.
14005
14006 After incorporating these final changes, the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14007 works without bugs (or at least, without bugs that I have found!).
14008 Here is what it looks like:
14009
14010 @smallexample
14011 @group
14012 ;;; @r{Final version:} @code{while}
14013 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14014 "Print number of words in the region."
14015 (interactive "r")
14016 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14017 @end group
14018
14019 @group
14020 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14021 (save-excursion
14022 (let ((count 0))
14023 (goto-char beginning)
14024 @end group
14025
14026 @group
14027 ;;; @r{2. Run the} while @r{loop.}
14028 (while (and (< (point) end)
14029 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" end t))
14030 (setq count (1+ count)))
14031 @end group
14032
14033 @group
14034 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14035 (cond ((zerop count)
14036 (message
14037 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14038 ((= 1 count)
14039 (message
14040 "The region has 1 word."))
14041 (t
14042 (message
14043 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14044 @end group
14045 @end smallexample
14046
14047 @node recursive-count-words
14048 @section Count Words Recursively
14049 @cindex Count words recursively
14050 @cindex Recursively counting words
14051 @cindex Words, counted recursively
14052
14053 You can write the function for counting words recursively as well as
14054 with a @code{while} loop. Let's see how this is done.
14055
14056 First, we need to recognize that the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14057 function has three jobs: it sets up the appropriate conditions for
14058 counting to occur; it counts the words in the region; and it sends a
14059 message to the user telling how many words there are.
14060
14061 If we write a single recursive function to do everything, we will
14062 receive a message for every recursive call. If the region contains 13
14063 words, we will receive thirteen messages, one right after the other.
14064 We don't want this! Instead, we must write two functions to do the
14065 job, one of which (the recursive function) will be used inside of the
14066 other. One function will set up the conditions and display the
14067 message; the other will return the word count.
14068
14069 Let us start with the function that causes the message to be displayed.
14070 We can continue to call this @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14071
14072 This is the function that the user will call. It will be interactive.
14073 Indeed, it will be similar to our previous versions of this
14074 function, except that it will call @code{recursive-count-words} to
14075 determine how many words are in the region.
14076
14077 @need 1250
14078 We can readily construct a template for this function, based on our
14079 previous versions:
14080
14081 @smallexample
14082 @group
14083 ;; @r{Recursive version; uses regular expression search}
14084 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14085 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14086 (@var{interactive-expression}@dots{})
14087 @end group
14088 @group
14089
14090 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14091 (@var{explanatory message})
14092 (@var{set-up functions}@dots{}
14093 @end group
14094 @group
14095
14096 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14097 @var{recursive call}
14098 @end group
14099 @group
14100
14101 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14102 @var{message providing word count}))
14103 @end group
14104 @end smallexample
14105
14106 The definition looks straightforward, except that somehow the count
14107 returned by the recursive call must be passed to the message
14108 displaying the word count. A little thought suggests that this can be
14109 done by making use of a @code{let} expression: we can bind a variable
14110 in the varlist of a @code{let} expression to the number of words in
14111 the region, as returned by the recursive call; and then the
14112 @code{cond} expression, using binding, can display the value to the
14113 user.
14114
14115 Often, one thinks of the binding within a @code{let} expression as
14116 somehow secondary to the ``primary'' work of a function. But in this
14117 case, what you might consider the ``primary'' job of the function,
14118 counting words, is done within the @code{let} expression.
14119
14120 @need 1250
14121 Using @code{let}, the function definition looks like this:
14122
14123 @smallexample
14124 @group
14125 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14126 "Print number of words in the region."
14127 (interactive "r")
14128 @end group
14129
14130 @group
14131 ;;; @r{1. Set up appropriate conditions.}
14132 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14133 (save-excursion
14134 (goto-char beginning)
14135 @end group
14136
14137 @group
14138 ;;; @r{2. Count the words.}
14139 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14140 @end group
14141
14142 @group
14143 ;;; @r{3. Send a message to the user.}
14144 (cond ((zerop count)
14145 (message
14146 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14147 ((= 1 count)
14148 (message
14149 "The region has 1 word."))
14150 (t
14151 (message
14152 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14153 @end group
14154 @end smallexample
14155
14156 Next, we need to write the recursive counting function.
14157
14158 A recursive function has at least three parts: the ``do-again-test'', the
14159 ``next-step-expression'', and the recursive call.
14160
14161 The do-again-test determines whether the function will or will not be
14162 called again. Since we are counting words in a region and can use a
14163 function that moves point forward for every word, the do-again-test
14164 can check whether point is still within the region. The do-again-test
14165 should find the value of point and determine whether point is before,
14166 at, or after the value of the end of the region. We can use the
14167 @code{point} function to locate point. Clearly, we must pass the
14168 value of the end of the region to the recursive counting function as an
14169 argument.
14170
14171 In addition, the do-again-test should also test whether the search finds a
14172 word. If it does not, the function should not call itself again.
14173
14174 The next-step-expression changes a value so that when the recursive
14175 function is supposed to stop calling itself, it stops. More
14176 precisely, the next-step-expression changes a value so that at the
14177 right time, the do-again-test stops the recursive function from
14178 calling itself again. In this case, the next-step-expression can be
14179 the expression that moves point forward, word by word.
14180
14181 The third part of a recursive function is the recursive call.
14182
14183 Somewhere, also, we also need a part that does the ``work'' of the
14184 function, a part that does the counting. A vital part!
14185
14186 @need 1250
14187 But already, we have an outline of the recursive counting function:
14188
14189 @smallexample
14190 @group
14191 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14192 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14193 @var{do-again-test}
14194 @var{next-step-expression}
14195 @var{recursive call})
14196 @end group
14197 @end smallexample
14198
14199 Now we need to fill in the slots. Let's start with the simplest cases
14200 first: if point is at or beyond the end of the region, there cannot
14201 be any words in the region, so the function should return zero.
14202 Likewise, if the search fails, there are no words to count, so the
14203 function should return zero.
14204
14205 On the other hand, if point is within the region and the search
14206 succeeds, the function should call itself again.
14207
14208 @need 800
14209 Thus, the do-again-test should look like this:
14210
14211 @smallexample
14212 @group
14213 (and (< (point) region-end)
14214 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14215 @end group
14216 @end smallexample
14217
14218 Note that the search expression is part of the do-again-test---the
14219 function returns @code{t} if its search succeeds and @code{nil} if it
14220 fails. (@xref{Whitespace Bug, , The Whitespace Bug in
14221 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}}, for an explanation of how
14222 @code{re-search-forward} works.)
14223
14224 The do-again-test is the true-or-false test of an @code{if} clause.
14225 Clearly, if the do-again-test succeeds, the then-part of the @code{if}
14226 clause should call the function again; but if it fails, the else-part
14227 should return zero since either point is outside the region or the
14228 search failed because there were no words to find.
14229
14230 But before considering the recursive call, we need to consider the
14231 next-step-expression. What is it? Interestingly, it is the search
14232 part of the do-again-test.
14233
14234 In addition to returning @code{t} or @code{nil} for the
14235 do-again-test, @code{re-search-forward} moves point forward as a side
14236 effect of a successful search. This is the action that changes the
14237 value of point so that the recursive function stops calling itself
14238 when point completes its movement through the region. Consequently,
14239 the @code{re-search-forward} expression is the next-step-expression.
14240
14241 @need 1200
14242 In outline, then, the body of the @code{recursive-count-words}
14243 function looks like this:
14244
14245 @smallexample
14246 @group
14247 (if @var{do-again-test-and-next-step-combined}
14248 ;; @r{then}
14249 @var{recursive-call-returning-count}
14250 ;; @r{else}
14251 @var{return-zero})
14252 @end group
14253 @end smallexample
14254
14255 How to incorporate the mechanism that counts?
14256
14257 If you are not used to writing recursive functions, a question like
14258 this can be troublesome. But it can and should be approached
14259 systematically.
14260
14261 We know that the counting mechanism should be associated in some way
14262 with the recursive call. Indeed, since the next-step-expression moves
14263 point forward by one word, and since a recursive call is made for
14264 each word, the counting mechanism must be an expression that adds one
14265 to the value returned by a call to @code{recursive-count-words}.
14266
14267 @need 800
14268 Consider several cases:
14269
14270 @itemize @bullet
14271 @item
14272 If there are two words in the region, the function should return
14273 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14274 the first word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14275 words in the region, which in this case is one.
14276
14277 @item
14278 If there is one word in the region, the function should return
14279 a value resulting from adding one to the value returned when it counts
14280 that word, plus the number returned when it counts the remaining
14281 words in the region, which in this case is zero.
14282
14283 @item
14284 If there are no words in the region, the function should return zero.
14285 @end itemize
14286
14287 From the sketch we can see that the else-part of the @code{if} returns
14288 zero for the case of no words. This means that the then-part of the
14289 @code{if} must return a value resulting from adding one to the value
14290 returned from a count of the remaining words.
14291
14292 @need 1200
14293 The expression will look like this, where @code{1+} is a function that
14294 adds one to its argument.
14295
14296 @smallexample
14297 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14298 @end smallexample
14299
14300 @need 1200
14301 The whole @code{recursive-count-words} function will then look like
14302 this:
14303
14304 @smallexample
14305 @group
14306 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14307 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14308
14309 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14310 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14311 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14312 @end group
14313
14314 @group
14315 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14316 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14317
14318 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14319 0))
14320 @end group
14321 @end smallexample
14322
14323 @need 1250
14324 Let's examine how this works:
14325
14326 If there are no words in the region, the else part of the @code{if}
14327 expression is evaluated and consequently the function returns zero.
14328
14329 If there is one word in the region, the value of point is less than
14330 the value of @code{region-end} and the search succeeds. In this case,
14331 the true-or-false-test of the @code{if} expression tests true, and the
14332 then-part of the @code{if} expression is evaluated. The counting
14333 expression is evaluated. This expression returns a value (which will
14334 be the value returned by the whole function) that is the sum of one
14335 added to the value returned by a recursive call.
14336
14337 Meanwhile, the next-step-expression has caused point to jump over the
14338 first (and in this case only) word in the region. This means that
14339 when @code{(recursive-count-words region-end)} is evaluated a second
14340 time, as a result of the recursive call, the value of point will be
14341 equal to or greater than the value of region end. So this time,
14342 @code{recursive-count-words} will return zero. The zero will be added
14343 to one, and the original evaluation of @code{recursive-count-words}
14344 will return one plus zero, which is one, which is the correct amount.
14345
14346 Clearly, if there are two words in the region, the first call to
14347 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14348 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14349 remaining word---that is, it adds one to one, producing two, which is
14350 the correct amount.
14351
14352 Similarly, if there are three words in the region, the first call to
14353 @code{recursive-count-words} returns one added to the value returned
14354 by calling @code{recursive-count-words} on a region containing the
14355 remaining two words---and so on and so on.
14356
14357 @need 1250
14358 @noindent
14359 With full documentation the two functions look like this:
14360
14361 @need 1250
14362 @noindent
14363 The recursive function:
14364
14365 @findex recursive-count-words
14366 @smallexample
14367 @group
14368 (defun recursive-count-words (region-end)
14369 "Number of words between point and REGION-END."
14370 @end group
14371
14372 @group
14373 ;;; @r{1. do-again-test}
14374 (if (and (< (point) region-end)
14375 (re-search-forward "\\w+\\W*" region-end t))
14376 @end group
14377
14378 @group
14379 ;;; @r{2. then-part: the recursive call}
14380 (1+ (recursive-count-words region-end))
14381
14382 ;;; @r{3. else-part}
14383 0))
14384 @end group
14385 @end smallexample
14386
14387 @need 800
14388 @noindent
14389 The wrapper:
14390
14391 @smallexample
14392 @group
14393 ;;; @r{Recursive version}
14394 (defun @value{COUNT-WORDS} (beginning end)
14395 "Print number of words in the region.
14396 @end group
14397
14398 @group
14399 Words are defined as at least one word-constituent
14400 character followed by at least one character that is
14401 not a word-constituent. The buffer's syntax table
14402 determines which characters these are."
14403 @end group
14404 @group
14405 (interactive "r")
14406 (message "Counting words in region ... ")
14407 (save-excursion
14408 (goto-char beginning)
14409 (let ((count (recursive-count-words end)))
14410 @end group
14411 @group
14412 (cond ((zerop count)
14413 (message
14414 "The region does NOT have any words."))
14415 @end group
14416 @group
14417 ((= 1 count)
14418 (message "The region has 1 word."))
14419 (t
14420 (message
14421 "The region has %d words." count))))))
14422 @end group
14423 @end smallexample
14424
14425 @node Counting Exercise
14426 @section Exercise: Counting Punctuation
14427
14428 Using a @code{while} loop, write a function to count the number of
14429 punctuation marks in a region---period, comma, semicolon, colon,
14430 exclamation mark, and question mark. Do the same using recursion.
14431
14432 @node Words in a defun
14433 @chapter Counting Words in a @code{defun}
14434 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14435 @cindex Word counting in a @code{defun}
14436
14437 Our next project is to count the number of words in a function
14438 definition. Clearly, this can be done using some variant of
14439 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}. @xref{Counting Words, , Counting via
14440 Repetition and Regexps}. If we are just going to count the words in
14441 one definition, it is easy enough to mark the definition with the
14442 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}) command, and then call
14443 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14444
14445 However, I am more ambitious: I want to count the words and symbols in
14446 every definition in the Emacs sources and then print a graph that
14447 shows how many functions there are of each length: how many contain 40
14448 to 49 words or symbols, how many contain 50 to 59 words or symbols,
14449 and so on. I have often been curious how long a typical function is,
14450 and this will tell.
14451
14452 @menu
14453 * Divide and Conquer::
14454 * Words and Symbols:: What to count?
14455 * Syntax:: What constitutes a word or symbol?
14456 * count-words-in-defun:: Very like @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}.
14457 * Several defuns:: Counting several defuns in a file.
14458 * Find a File:: Do you want to look at a file?
14459 * lengths-list-file:: A list of the lengths of many definitions.
14460 * Several files:: Counting in definitions in different files.
14461 * Several files recursively:: Recursively counting in different files.
14462 * Prepare the data:: Prepare the data for display in a graph.
14463 @end menu
14464
14465 @ifnottex
14466 @node Divide and Conquer
14467 @unnumberedsec Divide and Conquer
14468 @end ifnottex
14469
14470 Described in one phrase, the histogram project is daunting; but
14471 divided into numerous small steps, each of which we can take one at a
14472 time, the project becomes less fearsome. Let us consider what the
14473 steps must be:
14474
14475 @itemize @bullet
14476 @item
14477 First, write a function to count the words in one definition. This
14478 includes the problem of handling symbols as well as words.
14479
14480 @item
14481 Second, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14482 in a file. This function can use the @code{count-words-in-defun}
14483 function.
14484
14485 @item
14486 Third, write a function to list the numbers of words in each function
14487 in each of several files. This entails automatically finding the
14488 various files, switching to them, and counting the words in the
14489 definitions within them.
14490
14491 @item
14492 Fourth, write a function to convert the list of numbers that we
14493 created in step three to a form that will be suitable for printing as
14494 a graph.
14495
14496 @item
14497 Fifth, write a function to print the results as a graph.
14498 @end itemize
14499
14500 This is quite a project! But if we take each step slowly, it will not
14501 be difficult.
14502
14503 @node Words and Symbols
14504 @section What to Count?
14505 @cindex Words and symbols in defun
14506
14507 When we first start thinking about how to count the words in a
14508 function definition, the first question is (or ought to be) what are
14509 we going to count? When we speak of ``words'' with respect to a Lisp
14510 function definition, we are actually speaking, in large part, of
14511 ``symbols''. For example, the following @code{multiply-by-seven}
14512 function contains the five symbols @code{defun},
14513 @code{multiply-by-seven}, @code{number}, @code{*}, and @code{7}. In
14514 addition, in the documentation string, it contains the four words
14515 @samp{Multiply}, @samp{NUMBER}, @samp{by}, and @samp{seven}. The
14516 symbol @samp{number} is repeated, so the definition contains a total
14517 of ten words and symbols.
14518
14519 @smallexample
14520 @group
14521 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14522 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14523 (* 7 number))
14524 @end group
14525 @end smallexample
14526
14527 @noindent
14528 However, if we mark the @code{multiply-by-seven} definition with
14529 @kbd{C-M-h} (@code{mark-defun}), and then call
14530 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} on it, we will find that
14531 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} claims the definition has eleven words, not
14532 ten! Something is wrong!
14533
14534 The problem is twofold: @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} does not count the
14535 @samp{*} as a word, and it counts the single symbol,
14536 @code{multiply-by-seven}, as containing three words. The hyphens are
14537 treated as if they were interword spaces rather than intraword
14538 connectors: @samp{multiply-by-seven} is counted as if it were written
14539 @samp{multiply by seven}.
14540
14541 The cause of this confusion is the regular expression search within
14542 the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition that moves point forward word
14543 by word. In the canonical version of @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}, the
14544 regexp is:
14545
14546 @smallexample
14547 "\\w+\\W*"
14548 @end smallexample
14549
14550 @noindent
14551 This regular expression is a pattern defining one or more word
14552 constituent characters possibly followed by one or more characters
14553 that are not word constituents. What is meant by ``word constituent
14554 characters'' brings us to the issue of syntax, which is worth a section
14555 of its own.
14556
14557 @node Syntax
14558 @section What Constitutes a Word or Symbol?
14559 @cindex Syntax categories and tables
14560
14561 Emacs treats different characters as belonging to different
14562 @dfn{syntax categories}. For example, the regular expression,
14563 @samp{\\w+}, is a pattern specifying one or more @emph{word
14564 constituent} characters. Word constituent characters are members of
14565 one syntax category. Other syntax categories include the class of
14566 punctuation characters, such as the period and the comma, and the
14567 class of whitespace characters, such as the blank space and the tab
14568 character. (For more information, @pxref{Syntax Tables, , Syntax
14569 Tables, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
14570
14571 Syntax tables specify which characters belong to which categories.
14572 Usually, a hyphen is not specified as a ``word constituent character''.
14573 Instead, it is specified as being in the ``class of characters that are
14574 part of symbol names but not words.'' This means that the
14575 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function treats it in the same way it treats
14576 an interword white space, which is why @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}
14577 counts @samp{multiply-by-seven} as three words.
14578
14579 There are two ways to cause Emacs to count @samp{multiply-by-seven} as
14580 one symbol: modify the syntax table or modify the regular expression.
14581
14582 We could redefine a hyphen as a word constituent character by
14583 modifying the syntax table that Emacs keeps for each mode. This
14584 action would serve our purpose, except that a hyphen is merely the
14585 most common character within symbols that is not typically a word
14586 constituent character; there are others, too.
14587
14588 Alternatively, we can redefine the regexp used in the
14589 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} definition so as to include symbols. This
14590 procedure has the merit of clarity, but the task is a little tricky.
14591
14592 @need 1200
14593 The first part is simple enough: the pattern must match ``at least one
14594 character that is a word or symbol constituent''. Thus:
14595
14596 @smallexample
14597 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+"
14598 @end smallexample
14599
14600 @noindent
14601 The @samp{\\(} is the first part of the grouping construct that
14602 includes the @samp{\\w} and the @samp{\\s_} as alternatives, separated
14603 by the @samp{\\|}. The @samp{\\w} matches any word-constituent
14604 character and the @samp{\\s_} matches any character that is part of a
14605 symbol name but not a word-constituent character. The @samp{+}
14606 following the group indicates that the word or symbol constituent
14607 characters must be matched at least once.
14608
14609 However, the second part of the regexp is more difficult to design.
14610 What we want is to follow the first part with ``optionally one or more
14611 characters that are not constituents of a word or symbol''. At first,
14612 I thought I could define this with the following:
14613
14614 @smallexample
14615 "\\(\\W\\|\\S_\\)*"
14616 @end smallexample
14617
14618 @noindent
14619 The upper case @samp{W} and @samp{S} match characters that are
14620 @emph{not} word or symbol constituents. Unfortunately, this
14621 expression matches any character that is either not a word constituent
14622 or not a symbol constituent. This matches any character!
14623
14624 I then noticed that every word or symbol in my test region was
14625 followed by white space (blank space, tab, or newline). So I tried
14626 placing a pattern to match one or more blank spaces after the pattern
14627 for one or more word or symbol constituents. This failed, too. Words
14628 and symbols are often separated by whitespace, but in actual code
14629 parentheses may follow symbols and punctuation may follow words. So
14630 finally, I designed a pattern in which the word or symbol constituents
14631 are followed optionally by characters that are not white space and
14632 then followed optionally by white space.
14633
14634 @need 800
14635 Here is the full regular expression:
14636
14637 @smallexample
14638 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14639 @end smallexample
14640
14641 @node count-words-in-defun
14642 @section The @code{count-words-in-defun} Function
14643 @cindex Counting words in a @code{defun}
14644
14645 We have seen that there are several ways to write a
14646 @code{count-words-region} function. To write a
14647 @code{count-words-in-defun}, we need merely adapt one of these
14648 versions.
14649
14650 The version that uses a @code{while} loop is easy to understand, so I
14651 am going to adapt that. Because @code{count-words-in-defun} will be
14652 part of a more complex program, it need not be interactive and it need
14653 not display a message but just return the count. These considerations
14654 simplify the definition a little.
14655
14656 On the other hand, @code{count-words-in-defun} will be used within a
14657 buffer that contains function definitions. Consequently, it is
14658 reasonable to ask that the function determine whether it is called
14659 when point is within a function definition, and if it is, to return
14660 the count for that definition. This adds complexity to the
14661 definition, but saves us from needing to pass arguments to the
14662 function.
14663
14664 @need 1250
14665 These considerations lead us to prepare the following template:
14666
14667 @smallexample
14668 @group
14669 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14670 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
14671 (@var{set up}@dots{}
14672 (@var{while loop}@dots{})
14673 @var{return count})
14674 @end group
14675 @end smallexample
14676
14677 @noindent
14678 As usual, our job is to fill in the slots.
14679
14680 First, the set up.
14681
14682 We are presuming that this function will be called within a buffer
14683 containing function definitions. Point will either be within a
14684 function definition or not. For @code{count-words-in-defun} to work,
14685 point must move to the beginning of the definition, a counter must
14686 start at zero, and the counting loop must stop when point reaches the
14687 end of the definition.
14688
14689 The @code{beginning-of-defun} function searches backwards for an
14690 opening delimiter such as a @samp{(} at the beginning of a line, and
14691 moves point to that position, or else to the limit of the search. In
14692 practice, this means that @code{beginning-of-defun} moves point to the
14693 beginning of an enclosing or preceding function definition, or else to
14694 the beginning of the buffer. We can use @code{beginning-of-defun} to
14695 place point where we wish to start.
14696
14697 The @code{while} loop requires a counter to keep track of the words or
14698 symbols being counted. A @code{let} expression can be used to create
14699 a local variable for this purpose, and bind it to an initial value of zero.
14700
14701 The @code{end-of-defun} function works like @code{beginning-of-defun}
14702 except that it moves point to the end of the definition.
14703 @code{end-of-defun} can be used as part of an expression that
14704 determines the position of the end of the definition.
14705
14706 The set up for @code{count-words-in-defun} takes shape rapidly: first
14707 we move point to the beginning of the definition, then we create a
14708 local variable to hold the count, and finally, we record the position
14709 of the end of the definition so the @code{while} loop will know when to stop
14710 looping.
14711
14712 @need 1250
14713 The code looks like this:
14714
14715 @smallexample
14716 @group
14717 (beginning-of-defun)
14718 (let ((count 0)
14719 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14720 @end group
14721 @end smallexample
14722
14723 @noindent
14724 The code is simple. The only slight complication is likely to concern
14725 @code{end}: it is bound to the position of the end of the definition
14726 by a @code{save-excursion} expression that returns the value of point
14727 after @code{end-of-defun} temporarily moves it to the end of the
14728 definition.
14729
14730 The second part of the @code{count-words-in-defun}, after the set up,
14731 is the @code{while} loop.
14732
14733 The loop must contain an expression that jumps point forward word by
14734 word and symbol by symbol, and another expression that counts the
14735 jumps. The true-or-false-test for the @code{while} loop should test
14736 true so long as point should jump forward, and false when point is at
14737 the end of the definition. We have already redefined the regular
14738 expression for this, so the loop is straightforward:
14739
14740 @smallexample
14741 @group
14742 (while (and (< (point) end)
14743 (re-search-forward
14744 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*" end t))
14745 (setq count (1+ count)))
14746 @end group
14747 @end smallexample
14748
14749 The third part of the function definition returns the count of words
14750 and symbols. This part is the last expression within the body of the
14751 @code{let} expression, and can be, very simply, the local variable
14752 @code{count}, which when evaluated returns the count.
14753
14754 @need 1250
14755 Put together, the @code{count-words-in-defun} definition looks like this:
14756
14757 @findex count-words-in-defun
14758 @smallexample
14759 @group
14760 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
14761 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
14762 (beginning-of-defun)
14763 (let ((count 0)
14764 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
14765 @end group
14766 @group
14767 (while
14768 (and (< (point) end)
14769 (re-search-forward
14770 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
14771 end t))
14772 (setq count (1+ count)))
14773 count))
14774 @end group
14775 @end smallexample
14776
14777 How to test this? The function is not interactive, but it is easy to
14778 put a wrapper around the function to make it interactive; we can use
14779 almost the same code as for the recursive version of
14780 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}}:
14781
14782 @smallexample
14783 @group
14784 ;;; @r{Interactive version.}
14785 (defun count-words-defun ()
14786 "Number of words and symbols in a function definition."
14787 (interactive)
14788 (message
14789 "Counting words and symbols in function definition ... ")
14790 @end group
14791 @group
14792 (let ((count (count-words-in-defun)))
14793 (cond
14794 ((zerop count)
14795 (message
14796 "The definition does NOT have any words or symbols."))
14797 @end group
14798 @group
14799 ((= 1 count)
14800 (message
14801 "The definition has 1 word or symbol."))
14802 (t
14803 (message
14804 "The definition has %d words or symbols." count)))))
14805 @end group
14806 @end smallexample
14807
14808 @need 800
14809 @noindent
14810 Let's re-use @kbd{C-c =} as a convenient keybinding:
14811
14812 @smallexample
14813 (global-set-key "\C-c=" 'count-words-defun)
14814 @end smallexample
14815
14816 Now we can try out @code{count-words-defun}: install both
14817 @code{count-words-in-defun} and @code{count-words-defun}, and set the
14818 keybinding, and then place the cursor within the following definition:
14819
14820 @smallexample
14821 @group
14822 (defun multiply-by-seven (number)
14823 "Multiply NUMBER by seven."
14824 (* 7 number))
14825 @result{} 10
14826 @end group
14827 @end smallexample
14828
14829 @noindent
14830 Success! The definition has 10 words and symbols.
14831
14832 The next problem is to count the numbers of words and symbols in
14833 several definitions within a single file.
14834
14835 @node Several defuns
14836 @section Count Several @code{defuns} Within a File
14837
14838 A file such as @file{simple.el} may have a hundred or more function
14839 definitions within it. Our long term goal is to collect statistics on
14840 many files, but as a first step, our immediate goal is to collect
14841 statistics on one file.
14842
14843 The information will be a series of numbers, each number being the
14844 length of a function definition. We can store the numbers in a list.
14845
14846 We know that we will want to incorporate the information regarding one
14847 file with information about many other files; this means that the
14848 function for counting definition lengths within one file need only
14849 return the list of lengths. It need not and should not display any
14850 messages.
14851
14852 The word count commands contain one expression to jump point forward
14853 word by word and another expression to count the jumps. The function
14854 to return the lengths of definitions can be designed to work the same
14855 way, with one expression to jump point forward definition by
14856 definition and another expression to construct the lengths' list.
14857
14858 This statement of the problem makes it elementary to write the
14859 function definition. Clearly, we will start the count at the
14860 beginning of the file, so the first command will be @code{(goto-char
14861 (point-min))}. Next, we start the @code{while} loop; and the
14862 true-or-false test of the loop can be a regular expression search for
14863 the next function definition---so long as the search succeeds, point
14864 is moved forward and then the body of the loop is evaluated. The body
14865 needs an expression that constructs the lengths' list. @code{cons},
14866 the list construction command, can be used to create the list. That
14867 is almost all there is to it.
14868
14869 @need 800
14870 Here is what this fragment of code looks like:
14871
14872 @smallexample
14873 @group
14874 (goto-char (point-min))
14875 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
14876 (setq lengths-list
14877 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
14878 @end group
14879 @end smallexample
14880
14881 What we have left out is the mechanism for finding the file that
14882 contains the function definitions.
14883
14884 In previous examples, we either used this, the Info file, or we
14885 switched back and forth to some other buffer, such as the
14886 @file{*scratch*} buffer.
14887
14888 Finding a file is a new process that we have not yet discussed.
14889
14890 @node Find a File
14891 @section Find a File
14892 @cindex Find a File
14893
14894 To find a file in Emacs, you use the @kbd{C-x C-f} (@code{find-file})
14895 command. This command is almost, but not quite right for the lengths
14896 problem.
14897
14898 @need 1200
14899 Let's look at the source for @code{find-file}:
14900
14901 @smallexample
14902 @group
14903 (defun find-file (filename)
14904 "Edit file FILENAME.
14905 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
14906 creating one if none already exists."
14907 (interactive "FFind file: ")
14908 (switch-to-buffer (find-file-noselect filename)))
14909 @end group
14910 @end smallexample
14911
14912 @noindent
14913 (The most recent version of the @code{find-file} function definition
14914 permits you to specify optional wildcards to visit multiple files; that
14915 makes the definition more complex and we will not discuss it here,
14916 since it is not relevant. You can see its source using either
14917 @kbd{M-.} (@code{find-tag}) or @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}).)
14918
14919 @ignore
14920 In Emacs 22
14921 (defun find-file (filename &optional wildcards)
14922 "Edit file FILENAME.
14923 Switch to a buffer visiting file FILENAME,
14924 creating one if none already exists.
14925 Interactively, the default if you just type RET is the current directory,
14926 but the visited file name is available through the minibuffer history:
14927 type M-n to pull it into the minibuffer.
14928
14929 Interactively, or if WILDCARDS is non-nil in a call from Lisp,
14930 expand wildcards (if any) and visit multiple files. You can
14931 suppress wildcard expansion by setting `find-file-wildcards' to nil.
14932
14933 To visit a file without any kind of conversion and without
14934 automatically choosing a major mode, use \\[find-file-literally]."
14935 (interactive (find-file-read-args "Find file: " nil))
14936 (let ((value (find-file-noselect filename nil nil wildcards)))
14937 (if (listp value)
14938 (mapcar 'switch-to-buffer (nreverse value))
14939 (switch-to-buffer value))))
14940 @end ignore
14941
14942 The definition I am showing possesses short but complete documentation
14943 and an interactive specification that prompts you for a file name when
14944 you use the command interactively. The body of the definition
14945 contains two functions, @code{find-file-noselect} and
14946 @code{switch-to-buffer}.
14947
14948 According to its documentation as shown by @kbd{C-h f} (the
14949 @code{describe-function} command), the @code{find-file-noselect}
14950 function reads the named file into a buffer and returns the buffer.
14951 (Its most recent version includes an optional wildcards argument,
14952 too, as well as another to read a file literally and an other you
14953 suppress warning messages. These optional arguments are irrelevant.)
14954
14955 However, the @code{find-file-noselect} function does not select the
14956 buffer in which it puts the file. Emacs does not switch its attention
14957 (or yours if you are using @code{find-file-noselect}) to the selected
14958 buffer. That is what @code{switch-to-buffer} does: it switches the
14959 buffer to which Emacs attention is directed; and it switches the
14960 buffer displayed in the window to the new buffer. We have discussed
14961 buffer switching elsewhere. (@xref{Switching Buffers}.)
14962
14963 In this histogram project, we do not need to display each file on the
14964 screen as the program determines the length of each definition within
14965 it. Instead of employing @code{switch-to-buffer}, we can work with
14966 @code{set-buffer}, which redirects the attention of the computer
14967 program to a different buffer but does not redisplay it on the screen.
14968 So instead of calling on @code{find-file} to do the job, we must write
14969 our own expression.
14970
14971 The task is easy: use @code{find-file-noselect} and @code{set-buffer}.
14972
14973 @node lengths-list-file
14974 @section @code{lengths-list-file} in Detail
14975
14976 The core of the @code{lengths-list-file} function is a @code{while}
14977 loop containing a function to move point forward ``defun by defun'' and
14978 a function to count the number of words and symbols in each defun.
14979 This core must be surrounded by functions that do various other tasks,
14980 including finding the file, and ensuring that point starts out at the
14981 beginning of the file. The function definition looks like this:
14982 @findex lengths-list-file
14983
14984 @smallexample
14985 @group
14986 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
14987 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
14988 The returned list is a list of numbers.
14989 Each number is the number of words or
14990 symbols in one function definition."
14991 @end group
14992 @group
14993 (message "Working on '%s' ... " filename)
14994 (save-excursion
14995 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
14996 (lengths-list))
14997 (set-buffer buffer)
14998 (setq buffer-read-only t)
14999 (widen)
15000 (goto-char (point-min))
15001 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
15002 (setq lengths-list
15003 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
15004 (kill-buffer buffer)
15005 lengths-list)))
15006 @end group
15007 @end smallexample
15008
15009 @noindent
15010 The function is passed one argument, the name of the file on which it
15011 will work. It has four lines of documentation, but no interactive
15012 specification. Since people worry that a computer is broken if they
15013 don't see anything going on, the first line of the body is a
15014 message.
15015
15016 The next line contains a @code{save-excursion} that returns Emacs's
15017 attention to the current buffer when the function completes. This is
15018 useful in case you embed this function in another function that
15019 presumes point is restored to the original buffer.
15020
15021 In the varlist of the @code{let} expression, Emacs finds the file and
15022 binds the local variable @code{buffer} to the buffer containing the
15023 file. At the same time, Emacs creates @code{lengths-list} as a local
15024 variable.
15025
15026 Next, Emacs switches its attention to the buffer.
15027
15028 In the following line, Emacs makes the buffer read-only. Ideally,
15029 this line is not necessary. None of the functions for counting words
15030 and symbols in a function definition should change the buffer.
15031 Besides, the buffer is not going to be saved, even if it were changed.
15032 This line is entirely the consequence of great, perhaps excessive,
15033 caution. The reason for the caution is that this function and those
15034 it calls work on the sources for Emacs and it is inconvenient if they
15035 are inadvertently modified. It goes without saying that I did not
15036 realize a need for this line until an experiment went awry and started
15037 to modify my Emacs source files @dots{}
15038
15039 Next comes a call to widen the buffer if it is narrowed. This
15040 function is usually not needed---Emacs creates a fresh buffer if none
15041 already exists; but if a buffer visiting the file already exists Emacs
15042 returns that one. In this case, the buffer may be narrowed and must
15043 be widened. If we wanted to be fully ``user-friendly'', we would
15044 arrange to save the restriction and the location of point, but we
15045 won't.
15046
15047 The @code{(goto-char (point-min))} expression moves point to the
15048 beginning of the buffer.
15049
15050 Then comes a @code{while} loop in which the ``work'' of the function is
15051 carried out. In the loop, Emacs determines the length of each
15052 definition and constructs a lengths' list containing the information.
15053
15054 Emacs kills the buffer after working through it. This is to save
15055 space inside of Emacs. My version of GNU Emacs 19 contained over 300
15056 source files of interest; GNU Emacs 22 contains over a thousand source
15057 files. Another function will apply @code{lengths-list-file} to each
15058 of the files.
15059
15060 Finally, the last expression within the @code{let} expression is the
15061 @code{lengths-list} variable; its value is returned as the value of
15062 the whole function.
15063
15064 You can try this function by installing it in the usual fashion. Then
15065 place your cursor after the following expression and type @kbd{C-x
15066 C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}).
15067
15068 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15069 @smallexample
15070 (lengths-list-file
15071 "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el")
15072 @end smallexample
15073
15074 @noindent
15075 You may need to change the pathname of the file; the one here is for
15076 GNU Emacs version 22.1. To change the expression, copy it to
15077 the @file{*scratch*} buffer and edit it.
15078
15079 @need 1200
15080 @noindent
15081 Also, to see the full length of the list, rather than a truncated
15082 version, you may have to evaluate the following:
15083 @c We do not want to insert, so do not mention the zero prefix argument.
15084
15085 @smallexample
15086 (custom-set-variables '(eval-expression-print-length nil))
15087 @end smallexample
15088
15089 @noindent
15090 (@xref{defcustom, , Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}}.
15091 Then evaluate the @code{lengths-list-file} expression.)
15092
15093 @need 1200
15094 The lengths' list for @file{debug.el} takes less than a second to
15095 produce and looks like this in GNU Emacs 22:
15096
15097 @smallexample
15098 (83 113 105 144 289 22 30 97 48 89 25 52 52 88 28 29 77 49 43 290 232 587)
15099 @end smallexample
15100
15101 @need 1500
15102 (Using my old machine, the version 19 lengths' list for @file{debug.el}
15103 took seven seconds to produce and looked like this:
15104
15105 @smallexample
15106 (75 41 80 62 20 45 44 68 45 12 34 235)
15107 @end smallexample
15108
15109 @noindent
15110 The newer version of @file{debug.el} contains more defuns than the
15111 earlier one; and my new machine is much faster than the old one.)
15112
15113 Note that the length of the last definition in the file is first in
15114 the list.
15115
15116 @node Several files
15117 @section Count Words in @code{defuns} in Different Files
15118
15119 In the previous section, we created a function that returns a list of
15120 the lengths of each definition in a file. Now, we want to define a
15121 function to return a master list of the lengths of the definitions in
15122 a list of files.
15123
15124 Working on each of a list of files is a repetitious act, so we can use
15125 either a @code{while} loop or recursion.
15126
15127 @menu
15128 * lengths-list-many-files:: Return a list of the lengths of defuns.
15129 * append:: Attach one list to another.
15130 @end menu
15131
15132 @ifnottex
15133 @node lengths-list-many-files
15134 @unnumberedsubsec Determine the lengths of @code{defuns}
15135 @end ifnottex
15136
15137 The design using a @code{while} loop is routine. The argument passed
15138 the function is a list of files. As we saw earlier (@pxref{Loop
15139 Example}), you can write a @code{while} loop so that the body of the
15140 loop is evaluated if such a list contains elements, but to exit the
15141 loop if the list is empty. For this design to work, the body of the
15142 loop must contain an expression that shortens the list each time the
15143 body is evaluated, so that eventually the list is empty. The usual
15144 technique is to set the value of the list to the value of the @sc{cdr}
15145 of the list each time the body is evaluated.
15146
15147 @need 800
15148 The template looks like this:
15149
15150 @smallexample
15151 @group
15152 (while @var{test-whether-list-is-empty}
15153 @var{body}@dots{}
15154 @var{set-list-to-cdr-of-list})
15155 @end group
15156 @end smallexample
15157
15158 Also, we remember that a @code{while} loop returns @code{nil} (the
15159 result of evaluating the true-or-false-test), not the result of any
15160 evaluation within its body. (The evaluations within the body of the
15161 loop are done for their side effects.) However, the expression that
15162 sets the lengths' list is part of the body---and that is the value
15163 that we want returned by the function as a whole. To do this, we
15164 enclose the @code{while} loop within a @code{let} expression, and
15165 arrange that the last element of the @code{let} expression contains
15166 the value of the lengths' list. (@xref{Incrementing Example, , Loop
15167 Example with an Incrementing Counter}.)
15168
15169 @findex lengths-list-many-files
15170 @need 1250
15171 These considerations lead us directly to the function itself:
15172
15173 @smallexample
15174 @group
15175 ;;; @r{Use @code{while} loop.}
15176 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15177 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
15178 @end group
15179 @group
15180 (let (lengths-list)
15181
15182 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
15183 (while list-of-files
15184 (setq lengths-list
15185 (append
15186 lengths-list
15187
15188 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
15189 (lengths-list-file
15190 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
15191 @end group
15192
15193 @group
15194 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
15195 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
15196
15197 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
15198 lengths-list))
15199 @end group
15200 @end smallexample
15201
15202 @code{expand-file-name} is a built-in function that converts a file
15203 name to the absolute, long, path name form. The function employs the
15204 name of the directory in which the function is called.
15205
15206 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15207 @need 1500
15208 Thus, if @code{expand-file-name} is called on @code{debug.el} when
15209 Emacs is visiting the
15210 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/} directory,
15211
15212 @smallexample
15213 debug.el
15214 @end smallexample
15215
15216 @need 800
15217 @noindent
15218 becomes
15219
15220 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15221 @smallexample
15222 /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/emacs-lisp/debug.el
15223 @end smallexample
15224
15225 The only other new element of this function definition is the as yet
15226 unstudied function @code{append}, which merits a short section for
15227 itself.
15228
15229 @node append
15230 @subsection The @code{append} Function
15231
15232 @need 800
15233 The @code{append} function attaches one list to another. Thus,
15234
15235 @smallexample
15236 (append '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15237 @end smallexample
15238
15239 @need 800
15240 @noindent
15241 produces the list
15242
15243 @smallexample
15244 (1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8)
15245 @end smallexample
15246
15247 This is exactly how we want to attach two lengths' lists produced by
15248 @code{lengths-list-file} to each other. The results contrast with
15249 @code{cons},
15250
15251 @smallexample
15252 (cons '(1 2 3 4) '(5 6 7 8))
15253 @end smallexample
15254
15255 @need 1250
15256 @noindent
15257 which constructs a new list in which the first argument to @code{cons}
15258 becomes the first element of the new list:
15259
15260 @smallexample
15261 ((1 2 3 4) 5 6 7 8)
15262 @end smallexample
15263
15264 @node Several files recursively
15265 @section Recursively Count Words in Different Files
15266
15267 Besides a @code{while} loop, you can work on each of a list of files
15268 with recursion. A recursive version of @code{lengths-list-many-files}
15269 is short and simple.
15270
15271 The recursive function has the usual parts: the ``do-again-test'', the
15272 ``next-step-expression'', and the recursive call. The ``do-again-test''
15273 determines whether the function should call itself again, which it
15274 will do if the @code{list-of-files} contains any remaining elements;
15275 the ``next-step-expression'' resets the @code{list-of-files} to the
15276 @sc{cdr} of itself, so eventually the list will be empty; and the
15277 recursive call calls itself on the shorter list. The complete
15278 function is shorter than this description!
15279 @findex recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15280
15281 @smallexample
15282 @group
15283 (defun recursive-lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
15284 "Return list of lengths of each defun in LIST-OF-FILES."
15285 (if list-of-files ; @r{do-again-test}
15286 (append
15287 (lengths-list-file
15288 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))
15289 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15290 (cdr list-of-files)))))
15291 @end group
15292 @end smallexample
15293
15294 @noindent
15295 In a sentence, the function returns the lengths' list for the first of
15296 the @code{list-of-files} appended to the result of calling itself on
15297 the rest of the @code{list-of-files}.
15298
15299 Here is a test of @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}, along with
15300 the results of running @code{lengths-list-file} on each of the files
15301 individually.
15302
15303 Install @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} and
15304 @code{lengths-list-file}, if necessary, and then evaluate the
15305 following expressions. You may need to change the files' pathnames;
15306 those here work when this Info file and the Emacs sources are located
15307 in their customary places. To change the expressions, copy them to
15308 the @file{*scratch*} buffer, edit them, and then evaluate them.
15309
15310 The results are shown after the @samp{@result{}}. (These results are
15311 for files from Emacs version 22.1.1; files from other versions of
15312 Emacs may produce different results.)
15313
15314 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15315 @smallexample
15316 @group
15317 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/")
15318
15319 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/macros.el")
15320 @result{} (283 263 480 90)
15321 @end group
15322
15323 @group
15324 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el")
15325 @result{} (38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324)
15326 @end group
15327
15328 @group
15329 (lengths-list-file "./lisp/makesum.el")
15330 @result{} (85 181)
15331 @end group
15332
15333 @group
15334 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15335 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15336 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15337 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15338 @result{} (283 263 480 90 38 32 29 95 178 180 321 218 324 85 181)
15339 @end group
15340 @end smallexample
15341
15342 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function produces the
15343 output we want.
15344
15345 The next step is to prepare the data in the list for display in a graph.
15346
15347 @node Prepare the data
15348 @section Prepare the Data for Display in a Graph
15349
15350 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a list
15351 of numbers. Each number records the length of a function definition.
15352 What we need to do now is transform this data into a list of numbers
15353 suitable for generating a graph. The new list will tell how many
15354 functions definitions contain less than 10 words and
15355 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
15356 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15357
15358 In brief, we need to go through the lengths' list produced by the
15359 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function and count the number
15360 of defuns within each range of lengths, and produce a list of those
15361 numbers.
15362
15363 @menu
15364 * Data for Display in Detail::
15365 * Sorting:: Sorting lists.
15366 * Files List:: Making a list of files.
15367 * Counting function definitions::
15368 @end menu
15369
15370 @ifnottex
15371 @node Data for Display in Detail
15372 @unnumberedsubsec The Data for Display in Detail
15373 @end ifnottex
15374
15375 Based on what we have done before, we can readily foresee that it
15376 should not be too hard to write a function that ``@sc{cdr}s'' down the
15377 lengths' list, looks at each element, determines which length range it
15378 is in, and increments a counter for that range.
15379
15380 However, before beginning to write such a function, we should consider
15381 the advantages of sorting the lengths' list first, so the numbers are
15382 ordered from smallest to largest. First, sorting will make it easier
15383 to count the numbers in each range, since two adjacent numbers will
15384 either be in the same length range or in adjacent ranges. Second, by
15385 inspecting a sorted list, we can discover the highest and lowest
15386 number, and thereby determine the largest and smallest length range
15387 that we will need.
15388
15389 @node Sorting
15390 @subsection Sorting Lists
15391 @findex sort
15392
15393 Emacs contains a function to sort lists, called (as you might guess)
15394 @code{sort}. The @code{sort} function takes two arguments, the list
15395 to be sorted, and a predicate that determines whether the first of
15396 two list elements is ``less'' than the second.
15397
15398 As we saw earlier (@pxref{Wrong Type of Argument, , Using the Wrong
15399 Type Object as an Argument}), a predicate is a function that
15400 determines whether some property is true or false. The @code{sort}
15401 function will reorder a list according to whatever property the
15402 predicate uses; this means that @code{sort} can be used to sort
15403 non-numeric lists by non-numeric criteria---it can, for example,
15404 alphabetize a list.
15405
15406 @need 1250
15407 The @code{<} function is used when sorting a numeric list. For example,
15408
15409 @smallexample
15410 (sort '(4 8 21 17 33 7 21 7) '<)
15411 @end smallexample
15412
15413 @need 800
15414 @noindent
15415 produces this:
15416
15417 @smallexample
15418 (4 7 7 8 17 21 21 33)
15419 @end smallexample
15420
15421 @noindent
15422 (Note that in this example, both the arguments are quoted so that the
15423 symbols are not evaluated before being passed to @code{sort} as
15424 arguments.)
15425
15426 Sorting the list returned by the
15427 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function is straightforward;
15428 it uses the @code{<} function:
15429
15430 @ignore
15431 2006 Oct 29
15432 In GNU Emacs 22, eval
15433 (progn
15434 (cd "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.0.50/")
15435 (sort
15436 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15437 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15438 "./lisp/mail/mailalias.el"
15439 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15440 '<))
15441
15442 @end ignore
15443
15444 @smallexample
15445 @group
15446 (sort
15447 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15448 '("./lisp/macros.el"
15449 "./lisp/mailalias.el"
15450 "./lisp/makesum.el"))
15451 '<)
15452 @end group
15453 @end smallexample
15454
15455 @need 800
15456 @noindent
15457 which produces:
15458
15459 @smallexample
15460 (29 32 38 85 90 95 178 180 181 218 263 283 321 324 480)
15461 @end smallexample
15462
15463 @noindent
15464 (Note that in this example, the first argument to @code{sort} is not
15465 quoted, since the expression must be evaluated so as to produce the
15466 list that is passed to @code{sort}.)
15467
15468 @node Files List
15469 @subsection Making a List of Files
15470
15471 The @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function requires a list
15472 of files as its argument. For our test examples, we constructed such
15473 a list by hand; but the Emacs Lisp source directory is too large for
15474 us to do for that. Instead, we will write a function to do the job
15475 for us. In this function, we will use both a @code{while} loop and a
15476 recursive call.
15477
15478 @findex directory-files
15479 We did not have to write a function like this for older versions of
15480 GNU Emacs, since they placed all the @samp{.el} files in one
15481 directory. Instead, we were able to use the @code{directory-files}
15482 function, which lists the names of files that match a specified
15483 pattern within a single directory.
15484
15485 However, recent versions of Emacs place Emacs Lisp files in
15486 sub-directories of the top level @file{lisp} directory. This
15487 re-arrangement eases navigation. For example, all the mail related
15488 files are in a @file{lisp} sub-directory called @file{mail}. But at
15489 the same time, this arrangement forces us to create a file listing
15490 function that descends into the sub-directories.
15491
15492 @findex files-in-below-directory
15493 We can create this function, called @code{files-in-below-directory},
15494 using familiar functions such as @code{car}, @code{nthcdr}, and
15495 @code{substring} in conjunction with an existing function called
15496 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}. This latter function not only
15497 lists all the filenames in a directory, including the names
15498 of sub-directories, but also their attributes.
15499
15500 To restate our goal: to create a function that will enable us
15501 to feed filenames to @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files}
15502 as a list that looks like this (but with more elements):
15503
15504 @smallexample
15505 @group
15506 ("./lisp/macros.el"
15507 "./lisp/mail/rmail.el"
15508 "./lisp/makesum.el")
15509 @end group
15510 @end smallexample
15511
15512 The @code{directory-files-and-attributes} function returns a list of
15513 lists. Each of the lists within the main list consists of 13
15514 elements. The first element is a string that contains the name of the
15515 file---which, in GNU/Linux, may be a ``directory file'', that is to
15516 say, a file with the special attributes of a directory. The second
15517 element of the list is @code{t} for a directory, a string
15518 for symbolic link (the string is the name linked to), or @code{nil}.
15519
15520 For example, the first @samp{.el} file in the @file{lisp/} directory
15521 is @file{abbrev.el}. Its name is
15522 @file{/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/abbrev.el} and it is not a
15523 directory or a symbolic link.
15524
15525 @need 1000
15526 This is how @code{directory-files-and-attributes} lists that file and
15527 its attributes:
15528
15529 @smallexample
15530 @group
15531 ("abbrev.el"
15532 nil
15533 1
15534 1000
15535 100
15536 @end group
15537 @group
15538 (20615 27034 579989 697000)
15539 (17905 55681 0 0)
15540 (20615 26327 734791 805000)
15541 13188
15542 "-rw-r--r--"
15543 @end group
15544 @group
15545 t
15546 2971624
15547 773)
15548 @end group
15549 @end smallexample
15550
15551 @need 1200
15552 On the other hand, @file{mail/} is a directory within the @file{lisp/}
15553 directory. The beginning of its listing looks like this:
15554
15555 @smallexample
15556 @group
15557 ("mail"
15558 t
15559 @dots{}
15560 )
15561 @end group
15562 @end smallexample
15563
15564 (To learn about the different attributes, look at the documentation of
15565 @code{file-attributes}. Bear in mind that the @code{file-attributes}
15566 function does not list the filename, so its first element is
15567 @code{directory-files-and-attributes}'s second element.)
15568
15569 We will want our new function, @code{files-in-below-directory}, to
15570 list the @samp{.el} files in the directory it is told to check, and in
15571 any directories below that directory.
15572
15573 This gives us a hint on how to construct
15574 @code{files-in-below-directory}: within a directory, the function
15575 should add @samp{.el} filenames to a list; and if, within a directory,
15576 the function comes upon a sub-directory, it should go into that
15577 sub-directory and repeat its actions.
15578
15579 However, we should note that every directory contains a name that
15580 refers to itself, called @file{.}, (``dot'') and a name that refers to
15581 its parent directory, called @file{..} (``double dot''). (In
15582 @file{/}, the root directory, @file{..} refers to itself, since
15583 @file{/} has no parent.) Clearly, we do not want our
15584 @code{files-in-below-directory} function to enter those directories,
15585 since they always lead us, directly or indirectly, to the current
15586 directory.
15587
15588 Consequently, our @code{files-in-below-directory} function must do
15589 several tasks:
15590
15591 @itemize @bullet
15592 @item
15593 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that ends in
15594 @samp{.el}; and if so, add its name to a list.
15595
15596 @item
15597 Check to see whether it is looking at a filename that is the name of a
15598 directory; and if so,
15599
15600 @itemize @minus
15601 @item
15602 Check to see whether it is looking at @file{.} or @file{..}; and if
15603 so skip it.
15604
15605 @item
15606 Or else, go into that directory and repeat the process.
15607 @end itemize
15608 @end itemize
15609
15610 Let's write a function definition to do these tasks. We will use a
15611 @code{while} loop to move from one filename to another within a
15612 directory, checking what needs to be done; and we will use a recursive
15613 call to repeat the actions on each sub-directory. The recursive
15614 pattern is ``accumulate''
15615 (@pxref{Accumulate}),
15616 using @code{append} as the combiner.
15617
15618 @ignore
15619 (directory-files "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15620 (shell-command "find /usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15621
15622 (directory-files "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/" t "\\.el$")
15623 (shell-command "find /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/ -name '*.el'")
15624 @end ignore
15625
15626 @c /usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/
15627
15628 @need 800
15629 Here is the function:
15630
15631 @smallexample
15632 @group
15633 (defun files-in-below-directory (directory)
15634 "List the .el files in DIRECTORY and in its sub-directories."
15635 ;; Although the function will be used non-interactively,
15636 ;; it will be easier to test if we make it interactive.
15637 ;; The directory will have a name such as
15638 ;; "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"
15639 (interactive "DDirectory name: ")
15640 @end group
15641 @group
15642 (let (el-files-list
15643 (current-directory-list
15644 (directory-files-and-attributes directory t)))
15645 ;; while we are in the current directory
15646 (while current-directory-list
15647 @end group
15648 @group
15649 (cond
15650 ;; check to see whether filename ends in '.el'
15651 ;; and if so, append its name to a list.
15652 ((equal ".el" (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -3))
15653 (setq el-files-list
15654 (cons (car (car current-directory-list)) el-files-list)))
15655 @end group
15656 @group
15657 ;; check whether filename is that of a directory
15658 ((eq t (car (cdr (car current-directory-list))))
15659 ;; decide whether to skip or recurse
15660 (if
15661 (equal "."
15662 (substring (car (car current-directory-list)) -1))
15663 ;; then do nothing since filename is that of
15664 ;; current directory or parent, "." or ".."
15665 ()
15666 @end group
15667 @group
15668 ;; else descend into the directory and repeat the process
15669 (setq el-files-list
15670 (append
15671 (files-in-below-directory
15672 (car (car current-directory-list)))
15673 el-files-list)))))
15674 ;; move to the next filename in the list; this also
15675 ;; shortens the list so the while loop eventually comes to an end
15676 (setq current-directory-list (cdr current-directory-list)))
15677 ;; return the filenames
15678 el-files-list))
15679 @end group
15680 @end smallexample
15681
15682 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/")
15683 @c (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15684
15685 The @code{files-in-below-directory} @code{directory-files} function
15686 takes one argument, the name of a directory.
15687
15688 @need 1250
15689 Thus, on my system,
15690
15691 @c (length (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15692
15693 @c !!! 22.1.1 lisp sources location here
15694 @smallexample
15695 @group
15696 (length
15697 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/"))
15698 @end group
15699 @end smallexample
15700
15701 @noindent
15702 tells me that in and below my Lisp sources directory are 1031
15703 @samp{.el} files.
15704
15705 @code{files-in-below-directory} returns a list in reverse alphabetical
15706 order. An expression to sort the list in alphabetical order looks
15707 like this:
15708
15709 @smallexample
15710 @group
15711 (sort
15712 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/share/emacs/22.1.1/lisp/")
15713 'string-lessp)
15714 @end group
15715 @end smallexample
15716
15717 @ignore
15718 (defun test ()
15719 "Test how long it takes to find lengths of all sorted elisp defuns."
15720 (insert "\n" (current-time-string) "\n")
15721 (sit-for 0)
15722 (sort
15723 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
15724 (files-in-below-directory "/usr/local/src/emacs/lisp/"))
15725 '<)
15726 (insert (format "%s" (current-time-string))))
15727 @end ignore
15728
15729 @node Counting function definitions
15730 @subsection Counting function definitions
15731
15732 Our immediate goal is to generate a list that tells us how many
15733 function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and symbols, how many
15734 contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how many contain between
15735 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
15736
15737 With a sorted list of numbers, this is easy: count how many elements
15738 of the list are smaller than 10, then, after moving past the numbers
15739 just counted, count how many are smaller than 20, then, after moving
15740 past the numbers just counted, count how many are smaller than 30, and
15741 so on. Each of the numbers, 10, 20, 30, 40, and the like, is one
15742 larger than the top of that range. We can call the list of such
15743 numbers the @code{top-of-ranges} list.
15744
15745 @need 1200
15746 If we wished, we could generate this list automatically, but it is
15747 simpler to write a list manually. Here it is:
15748 @vindex top-of-ranges
15749
15750 @smallexample
15751 @group
15752 (defvar top-of-ranges
15753 '(10 20 30 40 50
15754 60 70 80 90 100
15755 110 120 130 140 150
15756 160 170 180 190 200
15757 210 220 230 240 250
15758 260 270 280 290 300)
15759 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
15760 @end group
15761 @end smallexample
15762
15763 To change the ranges, we edit this list.
15764
15765 Next, we need to write the function that creates the list of the
15766 number of definitions within each range. Clearly, this function must
15767 take the @code{sorted-lengths} and the @code{top-of-ranges} lists
15768 as arguments.
15769
15770 The @code{defuns-per-range} function must do two things again and
15771 again: it must count the number of definitions within a range
15772 specified by the current top-of-range value; and it must shift to the
15773 next higher value in the @code{top-of-ranges} list after counting the
15774 number of definitions in the current range. Since each of these
15775 actions is repetitive, we can use @code{while} loops for the job.
15776 One loop counts the number of definitions in the range defined by the
15777 current top-of-range value, and the other loop selects each of the
15778 top-of-range values in turn.
15779
15780 Several entries of the @code{sorted-lengths} list are counted for each
15781 range; this means that the loop for the @code{sorted-lengths} list
15782 will be inside the loop for the @code{top-of-ranges} list, like a
15783 small gear inside a big gear.
15784
15785 The inner loop counts the number of definitions within the range. It
15786 is a simple counting loop of the type we have seen before.
15787 (@xref{Incrementing Loop, , A loop with an incrementing counter}.)
15788 The true-or-false test of the loop tests whether the value from the
15789 @code{sorted-lengths} list is smaller than the current value of the
15790 top of the range. If it is, the function increments the counter and
15791 tests the next value from the @code{sorted-lengths} list.
15792
15793 @need 1250
15794 The inner loop looks like this:
15795
15796 @smallexample
15797 @group
15798 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
15799 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15800 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15801 @end group
15802 @end smallexample
15803
15804 The outer loop must start with the lowest value of the
15805 @code{top-of-ranges} list, and then be set to each of the succeeding
15806 higher values in turn. This can be done with a loop like this:
15807
15808 @smallexample
15809 @group
15810 (while top-of-ranges
15811 @var{body-of-loop}@dots{}
15812 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
15813 @end group
15814 @end smallexample
15815
15816 @need 1200
15817 Put together, the two loops look like this:
15818
15819 @smallexample
15820 @group
15821 (while top-of-ranges
15822
15823 ;; @r{Count the number of elements within the current range.}
15824 (while @var{length-element-smaller-than-top-of-range}
15825 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15826 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15827
15828 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
15829 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges)))
15830 @end group
15831 @end smallexample
15832
15833 In addition, in each circuit of the outer loop, Emacs should record
15834 the number of definitions within that range (the value of
15835 @code{number-within-range}) in a list. We can use @code{cons} for
15836 this purpose. (@xref{cons, , @code{cons}}.)
15837
15838 The @code{cons} function works fine, except that the list it
15839 constructs will contain the number of definitions for the highest
15840 range at its beginning and the number of definitions for the lowest
15841 range at its end. This is because @code{cons} attaches new elements
15842 of the list to the beginning of the list, and since the two loops are
15843 working their way through the lengths' list from the lower end first,
15844 the @code{defuns-per-range-list} will end up largest number first.
15845 But we will want to print our graph with smallest values first and the
15846 larger later. The solution is to reverse the order of the
15847 @code{defuns-per-range-list}. We can do this using the
15848 @code{nreverse} function, which reverses the order of a list.
15849 @findex nreverse
15850
15851 @need 800
15852 For example,
15853
15854 @smallexample
15855 (nreverse '(1 2 3 4))
15856 @end smallexample
15857
15858 @need 800
15859 @noindent
15860 produces:
15861
15862 @smallexample
15863 (4 3 2 1)
15864 @end smallexample
15865
15866 Note that the @code{nreverse} function is ``destructive''---that is,
15867 it changes the list to which it is applied; this contrasts with the
15868 @code{car} and @code{cdr} functions, which are non-destructive. In
15869 this case, we do not want the original @code{defuns-per-range-list},
15870 so it does not matter that it is destroyed. (The @code{reverse}
15871 function provides a reversed copy of a list, leaving the original list
15872 as is.)
15873 @findex reverse
15874
15875 @need 1250
15876 Put all together, the @code{defuns-per-range} looks like this:
15877
15878 @smallexample
15879 @group
15880 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
15881 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
15882 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
15883 (number-within-range 0)
15884 defuns-per-range-list)
15885 @end group
15886
15887 @group
15888 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
15889 (while top-of-ranges
15890 @end group
15891
15892 @group
15893 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
15894 (while (and
15895 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
15896 (car sorted-lengths)
15897 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
15898 @end group
15899
15900 @group
15901 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
15902 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
15903 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
15904
15905 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
15906 @end group
15907
15908 @group
15909 (setq defuns-per-range-list
15910 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
15911 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
15912 @end group
15913
15914 @group
15915 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
15916 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
15917 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
15918 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
15919 @end group
15920
15921 @group
15922 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
15923 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
15924 (setq defuns-per-range-list
15925 (cons
15926 (length sorted-lengths)
15927 defuns-per-range-list))
15928 @end group
15929
15930 @group
15931 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
15932 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
15933 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
15934 @end group
15935 @end smallexample
15936
15937 @need 1200
15938 @noindent
15939 The function is straightforward except for one subtle feature. The
15940 true-or-false test of the inner loop looks like this:
15941
15942 @smallexample
15943 @group
15944 (and (car sorted-lengths)
15945 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
15946 @end group
15947 @end smallexample
15948
15949 @need 800
15950 @noindent
15951 instead of like this:
15952
15953 @smallexample
15954 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range)
15955 @end smallexample
15956
15957 The purpose of the test is to determine whether the first item in the
15958 @code{sorted-lengths} list is less than the value of the top of the
15959 range.
15960
15961 The simple version of the test works fine unless the
15962 @code{sorted-lengths} list has a @code{nil} value. In that case, the
15963 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression function returns
15964 @code{nil}. The @code{<} function cannot compare a number to
15965 @code{nil}, which is an empty list, so Emacs signals an error and
15966 stops the function from attempting to continue to execute.
15967
15968 The @code{sorted-lengths} list always becomes @code{nil} when the
15969 counter reaches the end of the list. This means that any attempt to
15970 use the @code{defuns-per-range} function with the simple version of
15971 the test will fail.
15972
15973 We solve the problem by using the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
15974 expression in conjunction with the @code{and} expression. The
15975 @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression returns a non-@code{nil}
15976 value so long as the list has at least one number within it, but
15977 returns @code{nil} if the list is empty. The @code{and} expression
15978 first evaluates the @code{(car sorted-lengths)} expression, and
15979 if it is @code{nil}, returns false @emph{without} evaluating the
15980 @code{<} expression. But if the @code{(car sorted-lengths)}
15981 expression returns a non-@code{nil} value, the @code{and} expression
15982 evaluates the @code{<} expression, and returns that value as the value
15983 of the @code{and} expression.
15984
15985 @c colon in printed section title causes problem in Info cross reference
15986 This way, we avoid an error.
15987 @iftex
15988 @noindent
15989 (For information about @code{and}, see
15990 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.)
15991 @end iftex
15992 @ifinfo
15993 @noindent
15994 (@xref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}, for
15995 information about @code{and}.)
15996 @end ifinfo
15997
15998 Here is a short test of the @code{defuns-per-range} function. First,
15999 evaluate the expression that binds (a shortened)
16000 @code{top-of-ranges} list to the list of values, then evaluate the
16001 expression for binding the @code{sorted-lengths} list, and then
16002 evaluate the @code{defuns-per-range} function.
16003
16004 @smallexample
16005 @group
16006 ;; @r{(Shorter list than we will use later.)}
16007 (setq top-of-ranges
16008 '(110 120 130 140 150
16009 160 170 180 190 200))
16010
16011 (setq sorted-lengths
16012 '(85 86 110 116 122 129 154 176 179 200 265 300 300))
16013
16014 (defuns-per-range sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
16015 @end group
16016 @end smallexample
16017
16018 @need 800
16019 @noindent
16020 The list returned looks like this:
16021
16022 @smallexample
16023 (2 2 2 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 4)
16024 @end smallexample
16025
16026 @noindent
16027 Indeed, there are two elements of the @code{sorted-lengths} list
16028 smaller than 110, two elements between 110 and 119, two elements
16029 between 120 and 129, and so on. There are four elements with a value
16030 of 200 or larger.
16031
16032 @c The next step is to turn this numbers' list into a graph.
16033 @node Readying a Graph
16034 @chapter Readying a Graph
16035 @cindex Readying a graph
16036 @cindex Graph prototype
16037 @cindex Prototype graph
16038 @cindex Body of graph
16039
16040 Our goal is to construct a graph showing the numbers of function
16041 definitions of various lengths in the Emacs lisp sources.
16042
16043 As a practical matter, if you were creating a graph, you would
16044 probably use a program such as @code{gnuplot} to do the job.
16045 (@code{gnuplot} is nicely integrated into GNU Emacs.) In this case,
16046 however, we create one from scratch, and in the process we will
16047 re-acquaint ourselves with some of what we learned before and learn
16048 more.
16049
16050 In this chapter, we will first write a simple graph printing function.
16051 This first definition will be a @dfn{prototype}, a rapidly written
16052 function that enables us to reconnoiter this unknown graph-making
16053 territory. We will discover dragons, or find that they are myth.
16054 After scouting the terrain, we will feel more confident and enhance
16055 the function to label the axes automatically.
16056
16057 @menu
16058 * Columns of a graph::
16059 * graph-body-print:: How to print the body of a graph.
16060 * recursive-graph-body-print::
16061 * Printed Axes::
16062 * Line Graph Exercise::
16063 @end menu
16064
16065 @ifnottex
16066 @node Columns of a graph
16067 @unnumberedsec Printing the Columns of a Graph
16068 @end ifnottex
16069
16070 Since Emacs is designed to be flexible and work with all kinds of
16071 terminals, including character-only terminals, the graph will need to
16072 be made from one of the ``typewriter'' symbols. An asterisk will do; as
16073 we enhance the graph-printing function, we can make the choice of
16074 symbol a user option.
16075
16076 We can call this function @code{graph-body-print}; it will take a
16077 @code{numbers-list} as its only argument. At this stage, we will not
16078 label the graph, but only print its body.
16079
16080 The @code{graph-body-print} function inserts a vertical column of
16081 asterisks for each element in the @code{numbers-list}. The height of
16082 each line is determined by the value of that element of the
16083 @code{numbers-list}.
16084
16085 Inserting columns is a repetitive act; that means that this function can
16086 be written either with a @code{while} loop or recursively.
16087
16088 Our first challenge is to discover how to print a column of asterisks.
16089 Usually, in Emacs, we print characters onto a screen horizontally,
16090 line by line, by typing. We have two routes we can follow: write our
16091 own column-insertion function or discover whether one exists in Emacs.
16092
16093 To see whether there is one in Emacs, we can use the @kbd{M-x apropos}
16094 command. This command is like the @kbd{C-h a} (@code{command-apropos})
16095 command, except that the latter finds only those functions that are
16096 commands. The @kbd{M-x apropos} command lists all symbols that match
16097 a regular expression, including functions that are not interactive.
16098 @findex apropos
16099
16100 What we want to look for is some command that prints or inserts
16101 columns. Very likely, the name of the function will contain either
16102 the word ``print'' or the word ``insert'' or the word ``column''.
16103 Therefore, we can simply type @kbd{M-x apropos RET
16104 print\|insert\|column RET} and look at the result. On my system, this
16105 command once too takes quite some time, and then produced a list of 79
16106 functions and variables. Now it does not take much time at all and
16107 produces a list of 211 functions and variables. Scanning down the
16108 list, the only function that looks as if it might do the job is
16109 @code{insert-rectangle}.
16110
16111 @need 1200
16112 Indeed, this is the function we want; its documentation says:
16113
16114 @smallexample
16115 @group
16116 insert-rectangle:
16117 Insert text of RECTANGLE with upper left corner at point.
16118 RECTANGLE's first line is inserted at point,
16119 its second line is inserted at a point vertically under point, etc.
16120 RECTANGLE should be a list of strings.
16121 After this command, the mark is at the upper left corner
16122 and point is at the lower right corner.
16123 @end group
16124 @end smallexample
16125
16126 We can run a quick test, to make sure it does what we expect of it.
16127
16128 Here is the result of placing the cursor after the
16129 @code{insert-rectangle} expression and typing @kbd{C-u C-x C-e}
16130 (@code{eval-last-sexp}). The function inserts the strings
16131 @samp{"first"}, @samp{"second"}, and @samp{"third"} at and below
16132 point. Also the function returns @code{nil}.
16133
16134 @smallexample
16135 @group
16136 (insert-rectangle '("first" "second" "third"))first
16137 second
16138 thirdnil
16139 @end group
16140 @end smallexample
16141
16142 @noindent
16143 Of course, we won't be inserting the text of the
16144 @code{insert-rectangle} expression itself into the buffer in which we
16145 are making the graph, but will call the function from our program. We
16146 shall, however, have to make sure that point is in the buffer at the
16147 place where the @code{insert-rectangle} function will insert its
16148 column of strings.
16149
16150 If you are reading this in Info, you can see how this works by
16151 switching to another buffer, such as the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
16152 placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the
16153 @code{insert-rectangle} expression into the minibuffer at the prompt,
16154 and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the
16155 expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the
16156 position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the
16157 keybinding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not
16158 appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is
16159 evaluated in the minibuffer.)
16160
16161 We find when we do this that point ends up at the end of the last
16162 inserted line---that is to say, this function moves point as a
16163 side-effect. If we were to repeat the command, with point at this
16164 position, the next insertion would be below and to the right of the
16165 previous insertion. We don't want this! If we are going to make a
16166 bar graph, the columns need to be beside each other.
16167
16168 So we discover that each cycle of the column-inserting @code{while}
16169 loop must reposition point to the place we want it, and that place
16170 will be at the top, not the bottom, of the column. Moreover, we
16171 remember that when we print a graph, we do not expect all the columns
16172 to be the same height. This means that the top of each column may be
16173 at a different height from the previous one. We cannot simply
16174 reposition point to the same line each time, but moved over to the
16175 right---or perhaps we can@dots{}
16176
16177 We are planning to make the columns of the bar graph out of asterisks.
16178 The number of asterisks in the column is the number specified by the
16179 current element of the @code{numbers-list}. We need to construct a
16180 list of asterisks of the right length for each call to
16181 @code{insert-rectangle}. If this list consists solely of the requisite
16182 number of asterisks, then we will have position point the right number
16183 of lines above the base for the graph to print correctly. This could
16184 be difficult.
16185
16186 Alternatively, if we can figure out some way to pass
16187 @code{insert-rectangle} a list of the same length each time, then we
16188 can place point on the same line each time, but move it over one
16189 column to the right for each new column. If we do this, however, some
16190 of the entries in the list passed to @code{insert-rectangle} must be
16191 blanks rather than asterisks. For example, if the maximum height of
16192 the graph is 5, but the height of the column is 3, then
16193 @code{insert-rectangle} requires an argument that looks like this:
16194
16195 @smallexample
16196 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16197 @end smallexample
16198
16199 This last proposal is not so difficult, so long as we can determine
16200 the column height. There are two ways for us to specify the column
16201 height: we can arbitrarily state what it will be, which would work
16202 fine for graphs of that height; or we can search through the list of
16203 numbers and use the maximum height of the list as the maximum height
16204 of the graph. If the latter operation were difficult, then the former
16205 procedure would be easiest, but there is a function built into Emacs
16206 that determines the maximum of its arguments. We can use that
16207 function. The function is called @code{max} and it returns the
16208 largest of all its arguments, which must be numbers. Thus, for
16209 example,
16210
16211 @smallexample
16212 (max 3 4 6 5 7 3)
16213 @end smallexample
16214
16215 @noindent
16216 returns 7. (A corresponding function called @code{min} returns the
16217 smallest of all its arguments.)
16218 @findex max
16219 @findex min
16220
16221 However, we cannot simply call @code{max} on the @code{numbers-list};
16222 the @code{max} function expects numbers as its argument, not a list of
16223 numbers. Thus, the following expression,
16224
16225 @smallexample
16226 (max '(3 4 6 5 7 3))
16227 @end smallexample
16228
16229 @need 800
16230 @noindent
16231 produces the following error message;
16232
16233 @smallexample
16234 Wrong type of argument: number-or-marker-p, (3 4 6 5 7 3)
16235 @end smallexample
16236
16237 @findex apply
16238 We need a function that passes a list of arguments to a function.
16239 This function is @code{apply}. This function ``applies'' its first
16240 argument (a function) to its remaining arguments, the last of which
16241 may be a list.
16242
16243 @need 1250
16244 For example,
16245
16246 @smallexample
16247 (apply 'max 3 4 7 3 '(4 8 5))
16248 @end smallexample
16249
16250 @noindent
16251 returns 8.
16252
16253 (Incidentally, I don't know how you would learn of this function
16254 without a book such as this. It is possible to discover other
16255 functions, like @code{search-forward} or @code{insert-rectangle}, by
16256 guessing at a part of their names and then using @code{apropos}. Even
16257 though its base in metaphor is clear---``apply'' its first argument to
16258 the rest---I doubt a novice would come up with that particular word
16259 when using @code{apropos} or other aid. Of course, I could be wrong;
16260 after all, the function was first named by someone who had to invent
16261 it.)
16262
16263 The second and subsequent arguments to @code{apply} are optional, so
16264 we can use @code{apply} to call a function and pass the elements of a
16265 list to it, like this, which also returns 8:
16266
16267 @smallexample
16268 (apply 'max '(4 8 5))
16269 @end smallexample
16270
16271 This latter way is how we will use @code{apply}. The
16272 @code{recursive-lengths-list-many-files} function returns a numbers'
16273 list to which we can apply @code{max} (we could also apply @code{max} to
16274 the sorted numbers' list; it does not matter whether the list is
16275 sorted or not.)
16276
16277 @need 800
16278 Hence, the operation for finding the maximum height of the graph is this:
16279
16280 @smallexample
16281 (setq max-graph-height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16282 @end smallexample
16283
16284 Now we can return to the question of how to create a list of strings
16285 for a column of the graph. Told the maximum height of the graph
16286 and the number of asterisks that should appear in the column, the
16287 function should return a list of strings for the
16288 @code{insert-rectangle} command to insert.
16289
16290 Each column is made up of asterisks or blanks. Since the function is
16291 passed the value of the height of the column and the number of
16292 asterisks in the column, the number of blanks can be found by
16293 subtracting the number of asterisks from the height of the column.
16294 Given the number of blanks and the number of asterisks, two
16295 @code{while} loops can be used to construct the list:
16296
16297 @smallexample
16298 @group
16299 ;;; @r{First version.}
16300 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16301 "Return list of strings that is one column of a graph."
16302 (let ((insert-list nil)
16303 (number-of-top-blanks
16304 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16305 @end group
16306
16307 @group
16308 ;; @r{Fill in asterisks.}
16309 (while (> actual-height 0)
16310 (setq insert-list (cons "*" insert-list))
16311 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16312 @end group
16313
16314 @group
16315 ;; @r{Fill in blanks.}
16316 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16317 (setq insert-list (cons " " insert-list))
16318 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16319 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16320 @end group
16321
16322 @group
16323 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16324 insert-list))
16325 @end group
16326 @end smallexample
16327
16328 If you install this function and then evaluate the following
16329 expression you will see that it returns the list as desired:
16330
16331 @smallexample
16332 (column-of-graph 5 3)
16333 @end smallexample
16334
16335 @need 800
16336 @noindent
16337 returns
16338
16339 @smallexample
16340 (" " " " "*" "*" "*")
16341 @end smallexample
16342
16343 As written, @code{column-of-graph} contains a major flaw: the symbols
16344 used for the blank and for the marked entries in the column are
16345 ``hard-coded'' as a space and asterisk. This is fine for a prototype,
16346 but you, or another user, may wish to use other symbols. For example,
16347 in testing the graph function, you many want to use a period in place
16348 of the space, to make sure the point is being repositioned properly
16349 each time the @code{insert-rectangle} function is called; or you might
16350 want to substitute a @samp{+} sign or other symbol for the asterisk.
16351 You might even want to make a graph-column that is more than one
16352 display column wide. The program should be more flexible. The way to
16353 do that is to replace the blank and the asterisk with two variables
16354 that we can call @code{graph-blank} and @code{graph-symbol} and define
16355 those variables separately.
16356
16357 Also, the documentation is not well written. These considerations
16358 lead us to the second version of the function:
16359
16360 @smallexample
16361 @group
16362 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
16363 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
16364 @end group
16365
16366 @group
16367 (defvar graph-blank " "
16368 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
16369 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
16370 as graph-symbol.")
16371 @end group
16372 @end smallexample
16373
16374 @noindent
16375 (For an explanation of @code{defvar}, see
16376 @ref{defvar, , Initializing a Variable with @code{defvar}}.)
16377
16378 @smallexample
16379 @group
16380 ;;; @r{Second version.}
16381 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
16382 "Return MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings; ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
16383
16384 @end group
16385 @group
16386 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
16387 of the list.
16388 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
16389 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
16390 @end group
16391
16392 @group
16393 (let ((insert-list nil)
16394 (number-of-top-blanks
16395 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
16396 @end group
16397
16398 @group
16399 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
16400 (while (> actual-height 0)
16401 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
16402 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
16403 @end group
16404
16405 @group
16406 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
16407 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
16408 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
16409 (setq number-of-top-blanks
16410 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
16411
16412 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
16413 insert-list))
16414 @end group
16415 @end smallexample
16416
16417 If we wished, we could rewrite @code{column-of-graph} a third time to
16418 provide optionally for a line graph as well as for a bar graph. This
16419 would not be hard to do. One way to think of a line graph is that it
16420 is no more than a bar graph in which the part of each bar that is
16421 below the top is blank. To construct a column for a line graph, the
16422 function first constructs a list of blanks that is one shorter than
16423 the value, then it uses @code{cons} to attach a graph symbol to the
16424 list; then it uses @code{cons} again to attach the ``top blanks'' to
16425 the list.
16426
16427 It is easy to see how to write such a function, but since we don't
16428 need it, we will not do it. But the job could be done, and if it were
16429 done, it would be done with @code{column-of-graph}. Even more
16430 important, it is worth noting that few changes would have to be made
16431 anywhere else. The enhancement, if we ever wish to make it, is
16432 simple.
16433
16434 Now, finally, we come to our first actual graph printing function.
16435 This prints the body of a graph, not the labels for the vertical and
16436 horizontal axes, so we can call this @code{graph-body-print}.
16437
16438 @node graph-body-print
16439 @section The @code{graph-body-print} Function
16440 @findex graph-body-print
16441
16442 After our preparation in the preceding section, the
16443 @code{graph-body-print} function is straightforward. The function
16444 will print column after column of asterisks and blanks, using the
16445 elements of a numbers' list to specify the number of asterisks in each
16446 column. This is a repetitive act, which means we can use a
16447 decrementing @code{while} loop or recursive function for the job. In
16448 this section, we will write the definition using a @code{while} loop.
16449
16450 The @code{column-of-graph} function requires the height of the graph
16451 as an argument, so we should determine and record that as a local variable.
16452
16453 This leads us to the following template for the @code{while} loop
16454 version of this function:
16455
16456 @smallexample
16457 @group
16458 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16459 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
16460 (let ((height @dots{}
16461 @dots{}))
16462 @end group
16463
16464 @group
16465 (while numbers-list
16466 @var{insert-columns-and-reposition-point}
16467 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))))
16468 @end group
16469 @end smallexample
16470
16471 @noindent
16472 We need to fill in the slots of the template.
16473
16474 Clearly, we can use the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression to
16475 determine the height of the graph.
16476
16477 The @code{while} loop will cycle through the @code{numbers-list} one
16478 element at a time. As it is shortened by the @code{(setq numbers-list
16479 (cdr numbers-list))} expression, the @sc{car} of each instance of the
16480 list is the value of the argument for @code{column-of-graph}.
16481
16482 At each cycle of the @code{while} loop, the @code{insert-rectangle}
16483 function inserts the list returned by @code{column-of-graph}. Since
16484 the @code{insert-rectangle} function moves point to the lower right of
16485 the inserted rectangle, we need to save the location of point at the
16486 time the rectangle is inserted, move back to that position after the
16487 rectangle is inserted, and then move horizontally to the next place
16488 from which @code{insert-rectangle} is called.
16489
16490 If the inserted columns are one character wide, as they will be if
16491 single blanks and asterisks are used, the repositioning command is
16492 simply @code{(forward-char 1)}; however, the width of a column may be
16493 greater than one. This means that the repositioning command should be
16494 written @code{(forward-char symbol-width)}. The @code{symbol-width}
16495 itself is the length of a @code{graph-blank} and can be found using
16496 the expression @code{(length graph-blank)}. The best place to bind
16497 the @code{symbol-width} variable to the value of the width of graph
16498 column is in the varlist of the @code{let} expression.
16499
16500 @need 1250
16501 These considerations lead to the following function definition:
16502
16503 @smallexample
16504 @group
16505 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16506 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16507 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16508
16509 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16510 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16511 from-position)
16512 @end group
16513
16514 @group
16515 (while numbers-list
16516 (setq from-position (point))
16517 (insert-rectangle
16518 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16519 (goto-char from-position)
16520 (forward-char symbol-width)
16521 @end group
16522 @group
16523 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16524 (sit-for 0)
16525 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
16526 @end group
16527 @group
16528 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
16529 (forward-line height)
16530 (insert "\n")
16531 ))
16532 @end group
16533 @end smallexample
16534
16535 @noindent
16536 The one unexpected expression in this function is the
16537 @w{@code{(sit-for 0)}} expression in the @code{while} loop. This
16538 expression makes the graph printing operation more interesting to
16539 watch than it would be otherwise. The expression causes Emacs to
16540 ``sit'' or do nothing for a zero length of time and then redraw the
16541 screen. Placed here, it causes Emacs to redraw the screen column by
16542 column. Without it, Emacs would not redraw the screen until the
16543 function exits.
16544
16545 We can test @code{graph-body-print} with a short list of numbers.
16546
16547 @enumerate
16548 @item
16549 Install @code{graph-symbol}, @code{graph-blank},
16550 @code{column-of-graph}, which are in
16551 @iftex
16552 @ref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph},
16553 @end iftex
16554 @ifinfo
16555 @ref{Columns of a graph},
16556 @end ifinfo
16557 and @code{graph-body-print}.
16558
16559 @need 800
16560 @item
16561 Copy the following expression:
16562
16563 @smallexample
16564 (graph-body-print '(1 2 3 4 6 4 3 5 7 6 5 2 3))
16565 @end smallexample
16566
16567 @item
16568 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
16569 want the graph to start.
16570
16571 @item
16572 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
16573
16574 @item
16575 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
16576 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
16577
16578 @item
16579 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the @code{graph-body-print} expression.
16580 @end enumerate
16581
16582 @need 800
16583 Emacs will print a graph like this:
16584
16585 @smallexample
16586 @group
16587 *
16588 * **
16589 * ****
16590 *** ****
16591 ********* *
16592 ************
16593 *************
16594 @end group
16595 @end smallexample
16596
16597 @node recursive-graph-body-print
16598 @section The @code{recursive-graph-body-print} Function
16599 @findex recursive-graph-body-print
16600
16601 The @code{graph-body-print} function may also be written recursively.
16602 The recursive solution is divided into two parts: an outside ``wrapper''
16603 that uses a @code{let} expression to determine the values of several
16604 variables that need only be found once, such as the maximum height of
16605 the graph, and an inside function that is called recursively to print
16606 the graph.
16607
16608 @need 1250
16609 The ``wrapper'' is uncomplicated:
16610
16611 @smallexample
16612 @group
16613 (defun recursive-graph-body-print (numbers-list)
16614 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
16615 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values."
16616 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
16617 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))
16618 from-position)
16619 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16620 numbers-list
16621 height
16622 symbol-width)))
16623 @end group
16624 @end smallexample
16625
16626 The recursive function is a little more difficult. It has four parts:
16627 the ``do-again-test'', the printing code, the recursive call, and the
16628 ``next-step-expression''. The ``do-again-test'' is a @code{when}
16629 expression that determines whether the @code{numbers-list} contains
16630 any remaining elements; if it does, the function prints one column of
16631 the graph using the printing code and calls itself again. The
16632 function calls itself again according to the value produced by the
16633 ``next-step-expression'' which causes the call to act on a shorter
16634 version of the @code{numbers-list}.
16635
16636 @smallexample
16637 @group
16638 (defun recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16639 (numbers-list height symbol-width)
16640 "Print a bar graph.
16641 Used within recursive-graph-body-print function."
16642 @end group
16643
16644 @group
16645 (when numbers-list
16646 (setq from-position (point))
16647 (insert-rectangle
16648 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
16649 @end group
16650 @group
16651 (goto-char from-position)
16652 (forward-char symbol-width)
16653 (sit-for 0) ; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
16654 (recursive-graph-body-print-internal
16655 (cdr numbers-list) height symbol-width)))
16656 @end group
16657 @end smallexample
16658
16659 @need 1250
16660 After installation, this expression can be tested; here is a sample:
16661
16662 @smallexample
16663 (recursive-graph-body-print '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
16664 @end smallexample
16665
16666 @need 800
16667 Here is what @code{recursive-graph-body-print} produces:
16668
16669 @smallexample
16670 @group
16671 *
16672 ** *
16673 **** *
16674 **** ***
16675 * *********
16676 ************
16677 *************
16678 @end group
16679 @end smallexample
16680
16681 Either of these two functions, @code{graph-body-print} or
16682 @code{recursive-graph-body-print}, create the body of a graph.
16683
16684 @node Printed Axes
16685 @section Need for Printed Axes
16686
16687 A graph needs printed axes, so you can orient yourself. For a do-once
16688 project, it may be reasonable to draw the axes by hand using Emacs's
16689 Picture mode; but a graph drawing function may be used more than once.
16690
16691 For this reason, I have written enhancements to the basic
16692 @code{print-graph-body} function that automatically print labels for
16693 the horizontal and vertical axes. Since the label printing functions
16694 do not contain much new material, I have placed their description in
16695 an appendix. @xref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled Axes}.
16696
16697 @node Line Graph Exercise
16698 @section Exercise
16699
16700 Write a line graph version of the graph printing functions.
16701
16702 @node Emacs Initialization
16703 @chapter Your @file{.emacs} File
16704 @cindex @file{.emacs} file
16705 @cindex Customizing your @file{.emacs} file
16706 @cindex Initialization file
16707
16708 ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it''---this seemingly
16709 paradoxical statement is the secret of GNU Emacs. The plain, ``out of
16710 the box'' Emacs is a generic tool. Most people who use it, customize
16711 it to suit themselves.
16712
16713 GNU Emacs is mostly written in Emacs Lisp; this means that by writing
16714 expressions in Emacs Lisp you can change or extend Emacs.
16715
16716 @menu
16717 * Default Configuration::
16718 * Site-wide Init:: You can write site-wide init files.
16719 * defcustom:: Emacs will write code for you.
16720 * Beginning init File:: How to write a @file{.emacs} init file.
16721 * Text and Auto-fill:: Automatically wrap lines.
16722 * Mail Aliases:: Use abbreviations for email addresses.
16723 * Indent Tabs Mode:: Don't use tabs with @TeX{}
16724 * Keybindings:: Create some personal keybindings.
16725 * Keymaps:: More about key binding.
16726 * Loading Files:: Load (i.e., evaluate) files automatically.
16727 * Autoload:: Make functions available.
16728 * Simple Extension:: Define a function; bind it to a key.
16729 * X11 Colors:: Colors in X.
16730 * Miscellaneous::
16731 * Mode Line:: How to customize your mode line.
16732 @end menu
16733
16734 @ifnottex
16735 @node Default Configuration
16736 @unnumberedsec Emacs's Default Configuration
16737 @end ifnottex
16738
16739 There are those who appreciate Emacs's default configuration. After
16740 all, Emacs starts you in C mode when you edit a C file, starts you in
16741 Fortran mode when you edit a Fortran file, and starts you in
16742 Fundamental mode when you edit an unadorned file. This all makes
16743 sense, if you do not know who is going to use Emacs. Who knows what a
16744 person hopes to do with an unadorned file? Fundamental mode is the
16745 right default for such a file, just as C mode is the right default for
16746 editing C code. (Enough programming languages have syntaxes
16747 that enable them to share or nearly share features, so C mode is
16748 now provided by CC mode, the ``C Collection''.)
16749
16750 But when you do know who is going to use Emacs---you,
16751 yourself---then it makes sense to customize Emacs.
16752
16753 For example, I seldom want Fundamental mode when I edit an
16754 otherwise undistinguished file; I want Text mode. This is why I
16755 customize Emacs: so it suits me.
16756
16757 You can customize and extend Emacs by writing or adapting a
16758 @file{~/.emacs} file. This is your personal initialization file; its
16759 contents, written in Emacs Lisp, tell Emacs what to do.@footnote{You
16760 may also add @file{.el} to @file{~/.emacs} and call it a
16761 @file{~/.emacs.el} file. In the past, you were forbidden to type the
16762 extra keystrokes that the name @file{~/.emacs.el} requires, but now
16763 you may. The new format is consistent with the Emacs Lisp file
16764 naming conventions; the old format saves typing.}
16765
16766 A @file{~/.emacs} file contains Emacs Lisp code. You can write this
16767 code yourself; or you can use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to write
16768 the code for you. You can combine your own expressions and
16769 auto-written Customize expressions in your @file{.emacs} file.
16770
16771 (I myself prefer to write my own expressions, except for those,
16772 particularly fonts, that I find easier to manipulate using the
16773 @code{customize} command. I combine the two methods.)
16774
16775 Most of this chapter is about writing expressions yourself. It
16776 describes a simple @file{.emacs} file; for more information, see
16777 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and
16778 @ref{Init File, , The Init File, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
16779 Manual}.
16780
16781 @node Site-wide Init
16782 @section Site-wide Initialization Files
16783
16784 @cindex @file{default.el} init file
16785 @cindex @file{site-init.el} init file
16786 @cindex @file{site-load.el} init file
16787 In addition to your personal initialization file, Emacs automatically
16788 loads various site-wide initialization files, if they exist. These
16789 have the same form as your @file{.emacs} file, but are loaded by
16790 everyone.
16791
16792 Two site-wide initialization files, @file{site-load.el} and
16793 @file{site-init.el}, are loaded into Emacs and then ``dumped'' if a
16794 ``dumped'' version of Emacs is created, as is most common. (Dumped
16795 copies of Emacs load more quickly. However, once a file is loaded and
16796 dumped, a change to it does not lead to a change in Emacs unless you
16797 load it yourself or re-dump Emacs. @xref{Building Emacs, , Building
16798 Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, and the
16799 @file{INSTALL} file.)
16800
16801 Three other site-wide initialization files are loaded automatically
16802 each time you start Emacs, if they exist. These are
16803 @file{site-start.el}, which is loaded @emph{before} your @file{.emacs}
16804 file, and @file{default.el}, and the terminal type file, which are both
16805 loaded @emph{after} your @file{.emacs} file.
16806
16807 Settings and definitions in your @file{.emacs} file will overwrite
16808 conflicting settings and definitions in a @file{site-start.el} file,
16809 if it exists; but the settings and definitions in a @file{default.el}
16810 or terminal type file will overwrite those in your @file{.emacs} file.
16811 (You can prevent interference from a terminal type file by setting
16812 @code{term-file-prefix} to @code{nil}. @xref{Simple Extension, , A
16813 Simple Extension}.)
16814
16815 @c Rewritten to avoid overfull hbox.
16816 The @file{INSTALL} file that comes in the distribution contains
16817 descriptions of the @file{site-init.el} and @file{site-load.el} files.
16818
16819 The @file{loadup.el}, @file{startup.el}, and @file{loaddefs.el} files
16820 control loading. These files are in the @file{lisp} directory of the
16821 Emacs distribution and are worth perusing.
16822
16823 The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains a good many suggestions as to
16824 what to put into your own @file{.emacs} file, or into a site-wide
16825 initialization file.
16826
16827 @node defcustom
16828 @section Specifying Variables using @code{defcustom}
16829 @findex defcustom
16830
16831 You can specify variables using @code{defcustom} so that you and
16832 others can then use Emacs's @code{customize} feature to set their
16833 values. (You cannot use @code{customize} to write function
16834 definitions; but you can write @code{defuns} in your @file{.emacs}
16835 file. Indeed, you can write any Lisp expression in your @file{.emacs}
16836 file.)
16837
16838 The @code{customize} feature depends on the @code{defcustom} macro.
16839 Although you can use @code{defvar} or @code{setq} for variables that
16840 users set, the @code{defcustom} macro is designed for the job.
16841
16842 You can use your knowledge of @code{defvar} for writing the
16843 first three arguments for @code{defcustom}. The first argument to
16844 @code{defcustom} is the name of the variable. The second argument is
16845 the variable's initial value, if any; and this value is set only if
16846 the value has not already been set. The third argument is the
16847 documentation.
16848
16849 The fourth and subsequent arguments to @code{defcustom} specify types
16850 and options; these are not featured in @code{defvar}. (These
16851 arguments are optional.)
16852
16853 Each of these arguments consists of a keyword followed by a value.
16854 Each keyword starts with the colon character @samp{:}.
16855
16856 @need 1250
16857 For example, the customizable user option variable
16858 @code{text-mode-hook} looks like this:
16859
16860 @smallexample
16861 @group
16862 (defcustom text-mode-hook nil
16863 "Normal hook run when entering Text mode and many related modes."
16864 :type 'hook
16865 :options '(turn-on-auto-fill flyspell-mode)
16866 :group 'wp)
16867 @end group
16868 @end smallexample
16869
16870 @noindent
16871 The name of the variable is @code{text-mode-hook}; it has no default
16872 value; and its documentation string tells you what it does.
16873
16874 The @code{:type} keyword tells Emacs the kind of data to which
16875 @code{text-mode-hook} should be set and how to display the value in a
16876 Customization buffer.
16877
16878 The @code{:options} keyword specifies a suggested list of values for
16879 the variable. Usually, @code{:options} applies to a hook.
16880 The list is only a suggestion; it is not exclusive; a person who sets
16881 the variable may set it to other values; the list shown following the
16882 @code{:options} keyword is intended to offer convenient choices to a
16883 user.
16884
16885 Finally, the @code{:group} keyword tells the Emacs Customization
16886 command in which group the variable is located. This tells where to
16887 find it.
16888
16889 The @code{defcustom} macro recognizes more than a dozen keywords.
16890 For more information, see @ref{Customization, , Writing Customization
16891 Definitions, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
16892
16893 Consider @code{text-mode-hook} as an example.
16894
16895 There are two ways to customize this variable. You can use the
16896 customization command or write the appropriate expressions yourself.
16897
16898 @need 800
16899 Using the customization command, you can type:
16900
16901 @smallexample
16902 M-x customize
16903 @end smallexample
16904
16905 @noindent
16906 and find that the group for editing files of data is called ``data''.
16907 Enter that group. Text Mode Hook is the first member. You can click
16908 on its various options, such as @code{turn-on-auto-fill}, to set the
16909 values. After you click on the button to
16910
16911 @smallexample
16912 Save for Future Sessions
16913 @end smallexample
16914
16915 @noindent
16916 Emacs will write an expression into your @file{.emacs} file.
16917 It will look like this:
16918
16919 @smallexample
16920 @group
16921 (custom-set-variables
16922 ;; custom-set-variables was added by Custom.
16923 ;; If you edit it by hand, you could mess it up, so be careful.
16924 ;; Your init file should contain only one such instance.
16925 ;; If there is more than one, they won't work right.
16926 '(text-mode-hook (quote (turn-on-auto-fill text-mode-hook-identify))))
16927 @end group
16928 @end smallexample
16929
16930 @noindent
16931 (The @code{text-mode-hook-identify} function tells
16932 @code{toggle-text-mode-auto-fill} which buffers are in Text mode.
16933 It comes on automatically.)
16934
16935 The @code{custom-set-variables} function works somewhat differently
16936 than a @code{setq}. While I have never learned the differences, I
16937 modify the @code{custom-set-variables} expressions in my @file{.emacs}
16938 file by hand: I make the changes in what appears to me to be a
16939 reasonable manner and have not had any problems. Others prefer to use
16940 the Customization command and let Emacs do the work for them.
16941
16942 Another @code{custom-set-@dots{}} function is @code{custom-set-faces}.
16943 This function sets the various font faces. Over time, I have set a
16944 considerable number of faces. Some of the time, I re-set them using
16945 @code{customize}; other times, I simply edit the
16946 @code{custom-set-faces} expression in my @file{.emacs} file itself.
16947
16948 The second way to customize your @code{text-mode-hook} is to set it
16949 yourself in your @file{.emacs} file using code that has nothing to do
16950 with the @code{custom-set-@dots{}} functions.
16951
16952 @need 800
16953 When you do this, and later use @code{customize}, you will see a
16954 message that says
16955
16956 @smallexample
16957 CHANGED outside Customize; operating on it here may be unreliable.
16958 @end smallexample
16959
16960 @need 800
16961 This message is only a warning. If you click on the button to
16962
16963 @smallexample
16964 Save for Future Sessions
16965 @end smallexample
16966
16967 @noindent
16968 Emacs will write a @code{custom-set-@dots{}} expression near the end
16969 of your @file{.emacs} file that will be evaluated after your
16970 hand-written expression. It will, therefore, overrule your
16971 hand-written expression. No harm will be done. When you do this,
16972 however, be careful to remember which expression is active; if you
16973 forget, you may confuse yourself.
16974
16975 So long as you remember where the values are set, you will have no
16976 trouble. In any event, the values are always set in your
16977 initialization file, which is usually called @file{.emacs}.
16978
16979 I myself use @code{customize} for hardly anything. Mostly, I write
16980 expressions myself.
16981
16982 @findex defsubst
16983 @findex defconst
16984 Incidentally, to be more complete concerning defines: @code{defsubst}
16985 defines an inline function. The syntax is just like that of
16986 @code{defun}. @code{defconst} defines a symbol as a constant. The
16987 intent is that neither programs nor users should ever change a value
16988 set by @code{defconst}. (You can change it; the value set is a
16989 variable; but please do not.)
16990
16991 @node Beginning init File
16992 @section Beginning a @file{.emacs} File
16993 @cindex @file{.emacs} file, beginning of
16994
16995 When you start Emacs, it loads your @file{.emacs} file unless you tell
16996 it not to by specifying @samp{-q} on the command line. (The
16997 @code{emacs -q} command gives you a plain, out-of-the-box Emacs.)
16998
16999 A @file{.emacs} file contains Lisp expressions. Often, these are no
17000 more than expressions to set values; sometimes they are function
17001 definitions.
17002
17003 @xref{Init File, , The Init File @file{~/.emacs}, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17004 Manual}, for a short description of initialization files.
17005
17006 This chapter goes over some of the same ground, but is a walk among
17007 extracts from a complete, long-used @file{.emacs} file---my own.
17008
17009 The first part of the file consists of comments: reminders to myself.
17010 By now, of course, I remember these things, but when I started, I did
17011 not.
17012
17013 @need 1200
17014 @smallexample
17015 @group
17016 ;;;; Bob's .emacs file
17017 ; Robert J. Chassell
17018 ; 26 September 1985
17019 @end group
17020 @end smallexample
17021
17022 @noindent
17023 Look at that date! I started this file a long time ago. I have been
17024 adding to it ever since.
17025
17026 @smallexample
17027 @group
17028 ; Each section in this file is introduced by a
17029 ; line beginning with four semicolons; and each
17030 ; entry is introduced by a line beginning with
17031 ; three semicolons.
17032 @end group
17033 @end smallexample
17034
17035 @noindent
17036 This describes the usual conventions for comments in Emacs Lisp.
17037 Everything on a line that follows a semicolon is a comment. Two,
17038 three, and four semicolons are used as subsection and section markers.
17039 (@xref{Comments, ,, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for
17040 more about comments.)
17041
17042 @smallexample
17043 @group
17044 ;;;; The Help Key
17045 ; Control-h is the help key;
17046 ; after typing control-h, type a letter to
17047 ; indicate the subject about which you want help.
17048 ; For an explanation of the help facility,
17049 ; type control-h two times in a row.
17050 @end group
17051 @end smallexample
17052
17053 @noindent
17054 Just remember: type @kbd{C-h} two times for help.
17055
17056 @smallexample
17057 @group
17058 ; To find out about any mode, type control-h m
17059 ; while in that mode. For example, to find out
17060 ; about mail mode, enter mail mode and then type
17061 ; control-h m.
17062 @end group
17063 @end smallexample
17064
17065 @noindent
17066 ``Mode help'', as I call this, is very helpful. Usually, it tells you
17067 all you need to know.
17068
17069 Of course, you don't need to include comments like these in your
17070 @file{.emacs} file. I included them in mine because I kept forgetting
17071 about Mode help or the conventions for comments---but I was able to
17072 remember to look here to remind myself.
17073
17074 @node Text and Auto-fill
17075 @section Text and Auto Fill Mode
17076
17077 Now we come to the part that ``turns on'' Text mode and
17078 Auto Fill mode.
17079
17080 @smallexample
17081 @group
17082 ;;; Text mode and Auto Fill mode
17083 ;; The next two lines put Emacs into Text mode
17084 ;; and Auto Fill mode, and are for writers who
17085 ;; want to start writing prose rather than code.
17086 (setq-default major-mode 'text-mode)
17087 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17088 @end group
17089 @end smallexample
17090
17091 Here is the first part of this @file{.emacs} file that does something
17092 besides remind a forgetful human!
17093
17094 The first of the two lines in parentheses tells Emacs to turn on Text
17095 mode when you find a file, @emph{unless} that file should go into some
17096 other mode, such as C mode.
17097
17098 @cindex Per-buffer, local variables list
17099 @cindex Local variables list, per-buffer,
17100 @cindex Automatic mode selection
17101 @cindex Mode selection, automatic
17102 When Emacs reads a file, it looks at the extension to the file name,
17103 if any. (The extension is the part that comes after a @samp{.}.) If
17104 the file ends with a @samp{.c} or @samp{.h} extension then Emacs turns
17105 on C mode. Also, Emacs looks at first nonblank line of the file; if
17106 the line says @w{@samp{-*- C -*-}}, Emacs turns on C mode. Emacs
17107 possesses a list of extensions and specifications that it uses
17108 automatically. In addition, Emacs looks near the last page for a
17109 per-buffer, ``local variables list'', if any.
17110
17111 @ifinfo
17112 @xref{Choosing Modes, , How Major Modes are Chosen, emacs, The GNU
17113 Emacs Manual}.
17114
17115 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17116 Manual}.
17117 @end ifinfo
17118 @iftex
17119 See sections ``How Major Modes are Chosen'' and ``Local Variables in
17120 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17121 @end iftex
17122
17123 Now, back to the @file{.emacs} file.
17124
17125 @need 800
17126 Here is the line again; how does it work?
17127
17128 @cindex Text Mode turned on
17129 @smallexample
17130 (setq major-mode 'text-mode)
17131 @end smallexample
17132
17133 @noindent
17134 This line is a short, but complete Emacs Lisp expression.
17135
17136 We are already familiar with @code{setq}. It sets the following variable,
17137 @code{major-mode}, to the subsequent value, which is @code{text-mode}.
17138 The single quote mark before @code{text-mode} tells Emacs to deal directly
17139 with the @code{text-mode} symbol, not with whatever it might stand for.
17140 @xref{set & setq, , Setting the Value of a Variable},
17141 for a reminder of how @code{setq} works.
17142 The main point is that there is no difference between the procedure you
17143 use to set a value in your @file{.emacs} file and the procedure you use
17144 anywhere else in Emacs.
17145
17146 @need 800
17147 Here is the next line:
17148
17149 @cindex Auto Fill mode turned on
17150 @findex add-hook
17151 @smallexample
17152 (add-hook 'text-mode-hook 'turn-on-auto-fill)
17153 @end smallexample
17154
17155 @noindent
17156 In this line, the @code{add-hook} command adds
17157 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} to the variable.
17158
17159 @code{turn-on-auto-fill} is the name of a program, that, you guessed
17160 it!, turns on Auto Fill mode.
17161
17162 Every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs runs the commands ``hooked''
17163 onto Text mode. So every time Emacs turns on Text mode, Emacs also
17164 turns on Auto Fill mode.
17165
17166 In brief, the first line causes Emacs to enter Text mode when you edit a
17167 file, unless the file name extension, a first non-blank line, or local
17168 variables to tell Emacs otherwise.
17169
17170 Text mode among other actions, sets the syntax table to work
17171 conveniently for writers. In Text mode, Emacs considers an apostrophe
17172 as part of a word like a letter; but Emacs does not consider a period
17173 or a space as part of a word. Thus, @kbd{M-f} moves you over
17174 @samp{it's}. On the other hand, in C mode, @kbd{M-f} stops just after
17175 the @samp{t} of @samp{it's}.
17176
17177 The second line causes Emacs to turn on Auto Fill mode when it turns
17178 on Text mode. In Auto Fill mode, Emacs automatically breaks a line
17179 that is too wide and brings the excessively wide part of the line down
17180 to the next line. Emacs breaks lines between words, not within them.
17181
17182 When Auto Fill mode is turned off, lines continue to the right as you
17183 type them. Depending on how you set the value of
17184 @code{truncate-lines}, the words you type either disappear off the
17185 right side of the screen, or else are shown, in a rather ugly and
17186 unreadable manner, as a continuation line on the screen.
17187
17188 @need 1250
17189 In addition, in this part of my @file{.emacs} file, I tell the Emacs
17190 fill commands to insert two spaces after a colon:
17191
17192 @smallexample
17193 (setq colon-double-space t)
17194 @end smallexample
17195
17196 @node Mail Aliases
17197 @section Mail Aliases
17198
17199 Here is a @code{setq} that ``turns on'' mail aliases, along with more
17200 reminders.
17201
17202 @smallexample
17203 @group
17204 ;;; Mail mode
17205 ; To enter mail mode, type 'C-x m'
17206 ; To enter RMAIL (for reading mail),
17207 ; type 'M-x rmail'
17208 (setq mail-aliases t)
17209 @end group
17210 @end smallexample
17211
17212 @cindex Mail aliases
17213 @noindent
17214 This @code{setq} command sets the value of the variable
17215 @code{mail-aliases} to @code{t}. Since @code{t} means true, the line
17216 says, in effect, ``Yes, use mail aliases.''
17217
17218 Mail aliases are convenient short names for long email addresses or
17219 for lists of email addresses. The file where you keep your ``aliases''
17220 is @file{~/.mailrc}. You write an alias like this:
17221
17222 @smallexample
17223 alias geo george@@foobar.wiz.edu
17224 @end smallexample
17225
17226 @noindent
17227 When you write a message to George, address it to @samp{geo}; the
17228 mailer will automatically expand @samp{geo} to the full address.
17229
17230 @node Indent Tabs Mode
17231 @section Indent Tabs Mode
17232 @cindex Tabs, preventing
17233 @findex indent-tabs-mode
17234
17235 By default, Emacs inserts tabs in place of multiple spaces when it
17236 formats a region. (For example, you might indent many lines of text
17237 all at once with the @code{indent-region} command.) Tabs look fine on
17238 a terminal or with ordinary printing, but they produce badly indented
17239 output when you use @TeX{} or Texinfo since @TeX{} ignores tabs.
17240
17241 @need 1250
17242 The following turns off Indent Tabs mode:
17243
17244 @smallexample
17245 @group
17246 ;;; Prevent Extraneous Tabs
17247 (setq-default indent-tabs-mode nil)
17248 @end group
17249 @end smallexample
17250
17251 Note that this line uses @code{setq-default} rather than the
17252 @code{setq} command that we have seen before. The @code{setq-default}
17253 command sets values only in buffers that do not have their own local
17254 values for the variable.
17255
17256 @ifinfo
17257 @xref{Just Spaces, , Tabs vs.@: Spaces, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17258
17259 @xref{File Variables, , Local Variables in Files, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17260 Manual}.
17261 @end ifinfo
17262 @iftex
17263 See sections ``Tabs vs.@: Spaces'' and ``Local Variables in
17264 Files'' in @cite{The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17265 @end iftex
17266
17267 @need 1700
17268 @node Keybindings
17269 @section Some Keybindings
17270
17271 Now for some personal keybindings:
17272
17273 @smallexample
17274 @group
17275 ;;; Compare windows
17276 (global-set-key "\C-cw" 'compare-windows)
17277 @end group
17278 @end smallexample
17279
17280 @findex compare-windows
17281 @code{compare-windows} is a nifty command that compares the text in
17282 your current window with text in the next window. It makes the
17283 comparison by starting at point in each window, moving over text in
17284 each window as far as they match. I use this command all the time.
17285
17286 This also shows how to set a key globally, for all modes.
17287
17288 @cindex Setting a key globally
17289 @cindex Global set key
17290 @cindex Key setting globally
17291 @findex global-set-key
17292 The command is @code{global-set-key}. It is followed by the
17293 keybinding. In a @file{.emacs} file, the keybinding is written as
17294 shown: @code{\C-c} stands for ``control-c'', which means ``press the
17295 control key and the @key{c} key at the same time''. The @code{w} means
17296 ``press the @key{w} key''. The keybinding is surrounded by double
17297 quotation marks. In documentation, you would write this as
17298 @w{@kbd{C-c w}}. (If you were binding a @key{META} key, such as
17299 @kbd{M-c}, rather than a @key{CTRL} key, you would write
17300 @w{@code{\M-c}} in your @file{.emacs} file. @xref{Init Rebinding, ,
17301 Rebinding Keys in Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for
17302 details.)
17303
17304 The command invoked by the keys is @code{compare-windows}. Note that
17305 @code{compare-windows} is preceded by a single quote; otherwise, Emacs
17306 would first try to evaluate the symbol to determine its value.
17307
17308 These three things, the double quotation marks, the backslash before
17309 the @samp{C}, and the single quote mark are necessary parts of
17310 keybinding that I tend to forget. Fortunately, I have come to
17311 remember that I should look at my existing @file{.emacs} file, and
17312 adapt what is there.
17313
17314 As for the keybinding itself: @kbd{C-c w}. This combines the prefix
17315 key, @kbd{C-c}, with a single character, in this case, @kbd{w}. This
17316 set of keys, @kbd{C-c} followed by a single character, is strictly
17317 reserved for individuals' own use. (I call these ``own'' keys, since
17318 these are for my own use.) You should always be able to create such a
17319 keybinding for your own use without stomping on someone else's
17320 keybinding. If you ever write an extension to Emacs, please avoid
17321 taking any of these keys for public use. Create a key like @kbd{C-c
17322 C-w} instead. Otherwise, we will run out of ``own'' keys.
17323
17324 @need 1250
17325 Here is another keybinding, with a comment:
17326
17327 @smallexample
17328 @group
17329 ;;; Keybinding for 'occur'
17330 ; I use occur a lot, so let's bind it to a key:
17331 (global-set-key "\C-co" 'occur)
17332 @end group
17333 @end smallexample
17334
17335 @findex occur
17336 The @code{occur} command shows all the lines in the current buffer
17337 that contain a match for a regular expression. Matching lines are
17338 shown in a buffer called @file{*Occur*}. That buffer serves as a menu
17339 to jump to occurrences.
17340
17341 @findex global-unset-key
17342 @cindex Unbinding key
17343 @cindex Key unbinding
17344 @need 1250
17345 Here is how to unbind a key, so it does not
17346 work:
17347
17348 @smallexample
17349 @group
17350 ;;; Unbind 'C-x f'
17351 (global-unset-key "\C-xf")
17352 @end group
17353 @end smallexample
17354
17355 There is a reason for this unbinding: I found I inadvertently typed
17356 @w{@kbd{C-x f}} when I meant to type @kbd{C-x C-f}. Rather than find a
17357 file, as I intended, I accidentally set the width for filled text,
17358 almost always to a width I did not want. Since I hardly ever reset my
17359 default width, I simply unbound the key.
17360
17361 @findex list-buffers, @r{rebound}
17362 @findex buffer-menu, @r{bound to key}
17363 @need 1250
17364 The following rebinds an existing key:
17365
17366 @smallexample
17367 @group
17368 ;;; Rebind 'C-x C-b' for 'buffer-menu'
17369 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17370 @end group
17371 @end smallexample
17372
17373 By default, @kbd{C-x C-b} runs the
17374 @code{list-buffers} command. This command lists
17375 your buffers in @emph{another} window. Since I
17376 almost always want to do something in that
17377 window, I prefer the @code{buffer-menu}
17378 command, which not only lists the buffers,
17379 but moves point into that window.
17380
17381 @node Keymaps
17382 @section Keymaps
17383 @cindex Keymaps
17384 @cindex Rebinding keys
17385
17386 Emacs uses @dfn{keymaps} to record which keys call which commands.
17387 When you use @code{global-set-key} to set the keybinding for a single
17388 command in all parts of Emacs, you are specifying the keybinding in
17389 @code{current-global-map}.
17390
17391 Specific modes, such as C mode or Text mode, have their own keymaps;
17392 the mode-specific keymaps override the global map that is shared by
17393 all buffers.
17394
17395 The @code{global-set-key} function binds, or rebinds, the global
17396 keymap. For example, the following binds the key @kbd{C-x C-b} to the
17397 function @code{buffer-menu}:
17398
17399 @smallexample
17400 (global-set-key "\C-x\C-b" 'buffer-menu)
17401 @end smallexample
17402
17403 Mode-specific keymaps are bound using the @code{define-key} function,
17404 which takes a specific keymap as an argument, as well as the key and
17405 the command. For example, my @file{.emacs} file contains the
17406 following expression to bind the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} command
17407 to @kbd{C-c C-c g}:
17408
17409 @smallexample
17410 @group
17411 (define-key texinfo-mode-map "\C-c\C-cg" 'texinfo-insert-@@group)
17412 @end group
17413 @end smallexample
17414
17415 @noindent
17416 The @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function itself is a little extension
17417 to Texinfo mode that inserts @samp{@@group} into a Texinfo file. I
17418 use this command all the time and prefer to type the three strokes
17419 @kbd{C-c C-c g} rather than the six strokes @kbd{@@ g r o u p}.
17420 (@samp{@@group} and its matching @samp{@@end group} are commands that
17421 keep all enclosed text together on one page; many multi-line examples
17422 in this book are surrounded by @samp{@@group @dots{} @@end group}.)
17423
17424 @need 1250
17425 Here is the @code{texinfo-insert-@@group} function definition:
17426
17427 @smallexample
17428 @group
17429 (defun texinfo-insert-@@group ()
17430 "Insert the string @@group in a Texinfo buffer."
17431 (interactive)
17432 (beginning-of-line)
17433 (insert "@@group\n"))
17434 @end group
17435 @end smallexample
17436
17437 (Of course, I could have used Abbrev mode to save typing, rather than
17438 write a function to insert a word; but I prefer key strokes consistent
17439 with other Texinfo mode key bindings.)
17440
17441 You will see numerous @code{define-key} expressions in
17442 @file{loaddefs.el} as well as in the various mode libraries, such as
17443 @file{cc-mode.el} and @file{lisp-mode.el}.
17444
17445 @xref{Key Bindings, , Customizing Key Bindings, emacs, The GNU Emacs
17446 Manual}, and @ref{Keymaps, , Keymaps, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17447 Reference Manual}, for more information about keymaps.
17448
17449 @node Loading Files
17450 @section Loading Files
17451 @cindex Loading files
17452 @c findex load
17453
17454 Many people in the GNU Emacs community have written extensions to
17455 Emacs. As time goes by, these extensions are often included in new
17456 releases. For example, the Calendar and Diary packages are now part
17457 of the standard GNU Emacs, as is Calc.
17458
17459 You can use a @code{load} command to evaluate a complete file and
17460 thereby install all the functions and variables in the file into Emacs.
17461 For example:
17462
17463 @c (auto-compression-mode t)
17464
17465 @smallexample
17466 (load "~/emacs/slowsplit")
17467 @end smallexample
17468
17469 This evaluates, i.e., loads, the @file{slowsplit.el} file or if it
17470 exists, the faster, byte compiled @file{slowsplit.elc} file from the
17471 @file{emacs} sub-directory of your home directory. The file contains
17472 the function @code{split-window-quietly}, which John Robinson wrote in
17473 1989.
17474
17475 The @code{split-window-quietly} function splits a window with the
17476 minimum of redisplay. I installed it in 1989 because it worked well
17477 with the slow 1200 baud terminals I was then using. Nowadays, I only
17478 occasionally come across such a slow connection, but I continue to use
17479 the function because I like the way it leaves the bottom half of a
17480 buffer in the lower of the new windows and the top half in the upper
17481 window.
17482
17483 @need 1250
17484 To replace the key binding for the default
17485 @code{split-window-vertically}, you must also unset that key and bind
17486 the keys to @code{split-window-quietly}, like this:
17487
17488 @smallexample
17489 @group
17490 (global-unset-key "\C-x2")
17491 (global-set-key "\C-x2" 'split-window-quietly)
17492 @end group
17493 @end smallexample
17494
17495 @vindex load-path
17496 If you load many extensions, as I do, then instead of specifying the
17497 exact location of the extension file, as shown above, you can specify
17498 that directory as part of Emacs's @code{load-path}. Then, when Emacs
17499 loads a file, it will search that directory as well as its default
17500 list of directories. (The default list is specified in @file{paths.h}
17501 when Emacs is built.)
17502
17503 @need 1250
17504 The following command adds your @file{~/emacs} directory to the
17505 existing load path:
17506
17507 @smallexample
17508 @group
17509 ;;; Emacs Load Path
17510 (setq load-path (cons "~/emacs" load-path))
17511 @end group
17512 @end smallexample
17513
17514 Incidentally, @code{load-library} is an interactive interface to the
17515 @code{load} function. The complete function looks like this:
17516
17517 @findex load-library
17518 @smallexample
17519 @group
17520 (defun load-library (library)
17521 "Load the library named LIBRARY.
17522 This is an interface to the function `load'."
17523 (interactive
17524 (list (completing-read "Load library: "
17525 (apply-partially 'locate-file-completion-table
17526 load-path
17527 (get-load-suffixes)))))
17528 (load library))
17529 @end group
17530 @end smallexample
17531
17532 The name of the function, @code{load-library}, comes from the use of
17533 ``library'' as a conventional synonym for ``file''. The source for the
17534 @code{load-library} command is in the @file{files.el} library.
17535
17536 Another interactive command that does a slightly different job is
17537 @code{load-file}. @xref{Lisp Libraries, , Libraries of Lisp Code for
17538 Emacs, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, for information on the
17539 distinction between @code{load-library} and this command.
17540
17541 @node Autoload
17542 @section Autoloading
17543 @findex autoload
17544
17545 Instead of installing a function by loading the file that contains it,
17546 or by evaluating the function definition, you can make the function
17547 available but not actually install it until it is first called. This
17548 is called @dfn{autoloading}.
17549
17550 When you execute an autoloaded function, Emacs automatically evaluates
17551 the file that contains the definition, and then calls the function.
17552
17553 Emacs starts quicker with autoloaded functions, since their libraries
17554 are not loaded right away; but you need to wait a moment when you
17555 first use such a function, while its containing file is evaluated.
17556
17557 Rarely used functions are frequently autoloaded. The
17558 @file{loaddefs.el} library contains thousands of autoloaded functions,
17559 from @code{5x5} to @code{zone}. Of course, you may
17560 come to use a ``rare'' function frequently. When you do, you should
17561 load that function's file with a @code{load} expression in your
17562 @file{.emacs} file.
17563
17564 In my @file{.emacs} file, I load 14 libraries that contain functions
17565 that would otherwise be autoloaded. (Actually, it would have been
17566 better to include these files in my ``dumped'' Emacs, but I forgot.
17567 @xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
17568 Reference Manual}, and the @file{INSTALL} file for more about
17569 dumping.)
17570
17571 You may also want to include autoloaded expressions in your @file{.emacs}
17572 file. @code{autoload} is a built-in function that takes up to five
17573 arguments, the final three of which are optional. The first argument
17574 is the name of the function to be autoloaded; the second is the name
17575 of the file to be loaded. The third argument is documentation for the
17576 function, and the fourth tells whether the function can be called
17577 interactively. The fifth argument tells what type of
17578 object---@code{autoload} can handle a keymap or macro as well as a
17579 function (the default is a function).
17580
17581 @need 800
17582 Here is a typical example:
17583
17584 @smallexample
17585 @group
17586 (autoload 'html-helper-mode
17587 "html-helper-mode" "Edit HTML documents" t)
17588 @end group
17589 @end smallexample
17590
17591 @noindent
17592 (@code{html-helper-mode} is an older alternative to @code{html-mode},
17593 which is a standard part of the distribution.)
17594
17595 @noindent
17596 This expression autoloads the @code{html-helper-mode} function. It
17597 takes it from the @file{html-helper-mode.el} file (or from the byte
17598 compiled version @file{html-helper-mode.elc}, if that exists.) The
17599 file must be located in a directory specified by @code{load-path}.
17600 The documentation says that this is a mode to help you edit documents
17601 written in the HyperText Markup Language. You can call this mode
17602 interactively by typing @kbd{M-x html-helper-mode}. (You need to
17603 duplicate the function's regular documentation in the autoload
17604 expression because the regular function is not yet loaded, so its
17605 documentation is not available.)
17606
17607 @xref{Autoload, , Autoload, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
17608 Manual}, for more information.
17609
17610 @node Simple Extension
17611 @section A Simple Extension: @code{line-to-top-of-window}
17612 @findex line-to-top-of-window
17613 @cindex Simple extension in @file{.emacs} file
17614
17615 Here is a simple extension to Emacs that moves the line point is on to
17616 the top of the window. I use this all the time, to make text easier
17617 to read.
17618
17619 You can put the following code into a separate file and then load it
17620 from your @file{.emacs} file, or you can include it within your
17621 @file{.emacs} file.
17622
17623 @need 1250
17624 Here is the definition:
17625
17626 @smallexample
17627 @group
17628 ;;; Line to top of window;
17629 ;;; replace three keystroke sequence C-u 0 C-l
17630 (defun line-to-top-of-window ()
17631 "Move the line point is on to top of window."
17632 (interactive)
17633 (recenter 0))
17634 @end group
17635 @end smallexample
17636
17637 @need 1250
17638 Now for the keybinding.
17639
17640 Nowadays, function keys as well as mouse button events and
17641 non-@sc{ascii} characters are written within square brackets, without
17642 quotation marks. (In Emacs version 18 and before, you had to write
17643 different function key bindings for each different make of terminal.)
17644
17645 I bind @code{line-to-top-of-window} to my @key{F6} function key like
17646 this:
17647
17648 @smallexample
17649 (global-set-key [f6] 'line-to-top-of-window)
17650 @end smallexample
17651
17652 For more information, see @ref{Init Rebinding, , Rebinding Keys in
17653 Your Init File, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}.
17654
17655 @cindex Conditional 'twixt two versions of Emacs
17656 @cindex Version of Emacs, choosing
17657 @cindex Emacs version, choosing
17658 If you run two versions of GNU Emacs, such as versions 22 and 23, and
17659 use one @file{.emacs} file, you can select which code to evaluate with
17660 the following conditional:
17661
17662 @smallexample
17663 @group
17664 (cond
17665 ((= 22 emacs-major-version)
17666 ;; evaluate version 22 code
17667 ( @dots{} ))
17668 ((= 23 emacs-major-version)
17669 ;; evaluate version 23 code
17670 ( @dots{} )))
17671 @end group
17672 @end smallexample
17673
17674 For example, recent versions blink
17675 their cursors by default. I hate such blinking, as well as other
17676 features, so I placed the following in my @file{.emacs}
17677 file@footnote{When I start instances of Emacs that do not load my
17678 @file{.emacs} file or any site file, I also turn off blinking:
17679
17680 @smallexample
17681 emacs -q --no-site-file -eval '(blink-cursor-mode nil)'
17682
17683 @exdent Or nowadays, using an even more sophisticated set of options,
17684
17685 emacs -Q -D
17686 @end smallexample
17687 }:
17688
17689 @smallexample
17690 @group
17691 (when (>= emacs-major-version 21)
17692 (blink-cursor-mode 0)
17693 ;; Insert newline when you press 'C-n' (next-line)
17694 ;; at the end of the buffer
17695 (setq next-line-add-newlines t)
17696 @end group
17697 @group
17698 ;; Turn on image viewing
17699 (auto-image-file-mode t)
17700 @end group
17701 @group
17702 ;; Turn on menu bar (this bar has text)
17703 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17704 (menu-bar-mode 1)
17705 @end group
17706 @group
17707 ;; Turn off tool bar (this bar has icons)
17708 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17709 (tool-bar-mode nil)
17710 @end group
17711 @group
17712 ;; Turn off tooltip mode for tool bar
17713 ;; (This mode causes icon explanations to pop up)
17714 ;; (Use numeric argument to turn on)
17715 (tooltip-mode nil)
17716 ;; If tooltips turned on, make tips appear promptly
17717 (setq tooltip-delay 0.1) ; default is 0.7 second
17718 )
17719 @end group
17720 @end smallexample
17721
17722 @node X11 Colors
17723 @section X11 Colors
17724
17725 You can specify colors when you use Emacs with the MIT X Windowing
17726 system.
17727
17728 I dislike the default colors and specify my own.
17729
17730 @need 1250
17731 Here are the expressions in my @file{.emacs}
17732 file that set values:
17733
17734 @smallexample
17735 @group
17736 ;; Set cursor color
17737 (set-cursor-color "white")
17738
17739 ;; Set mouse color
17740 (set-mouse-color "white")
17741
17742 ;; Set foreground and background
17743 (set-foreground-color "white")
17744 (set-background-color "darkblue")
17745 @end group
17746
17747 @group
17748 ;;; Set highlighting colors for isearch and drag
17749 (set-face-foreground 'highlight "white")
17750 (set-face-background 'highlight "blue")
17751 @end group
17752
17753 @group
17754 (set-face-foreground 'region "cyan")
17755 (set-face-background 'region "blue")
17756 @end group
17757
17758 @group
17759 (set-face-foreground 'secondary-selection "skyblue")
17760 (set-face-background 'secondary-selection "darkblue")
17761 @end group
17762
17763 @group
17764 ;; Set calendar highlighting colors
17765 (add-hook 'calendar-load-hook
17766 (lambda ()
17767 (set-face-foreground 'diary-face "skyblue")
17768 (set-face-background 'holiday-face "slate blue")
17769 (set-face-foreground 'holiday-face "white")))
17770 @end group
17771 @end smallexample
17772
17773 The various shades of blue soothe my eye and prevent me from seeing
17774 the screen flicker.
17775
17776 Alternatively, I could have set my specifications in various X
17777 initialization files. For example, I could set the foreground,
17778 background, cursor, and pointer (i.e., mouse) colors in my
17779 @file{~/.Xresources} file like this:
17780
17781 @smallexample
17782 @group
17783 Emacs*foreground: white
17784 Emacs*background: darkblue
17785 Emacs*cursorColor: white
17786 Emacs*pointerColor: white
17787 @end group
17788 @end smallexample
17789
17790 In any event, since it is not part of Emacs, I set the root color of
17791 my X window in my @file{~/.xinitrc} file, like this@footnote{I also
17792 run more modern window managers, such as Enlightenment, Gnome, or KDE;
17793 in those cases, I often specify an image rather than a plain color.}:
17794
17795 @smallexample
17796 xsetroot -solid Navy -fg white &
17797 @end smallexample
17798
17799 @need 1700
17800 @node Miscellaneous
17801 @section Miscellaneous Settings for a @file{.emacs} File
17802
17803 @need 1250
17804 Here are a few miscellaneous settings:
17805 @sp 1
17806
17807 @itemize @minus
17808 @item
17809 Set the shape and color of the mouse cursor:
17810
17811 @smallexample
17812 @group
17813 ; Cursor shapes are defined in
17814 ; '/usr/include/X11/cursorfont.h';
17815 ; for example, the 'target' cursor is number 128;
17816 ; the 'top_left_arrow' cursor is number 132.
17817 @end group
17818
17819 @group
17820 (let ((mpointer (x-get-resource "*mpointer"
17821 "*emacs*mpointer")))
17822 ;; If you have not set your mouse pointer
17823 ;; then set it, otherwise leave as is:
17824 (if (eq mpointer nil)
17825 (setq mpointer "132")) ; top_left_arrow
17826 @end group
17827 @group
17828 (setq x-pointer-shape (string-to-int mpointer))
17829 (set-mouse-color "white"))
17830 @end group
17831 @end smallexample
17832
17833 @item
17834 Or you can set the values of a variety of features in an alist, like
17835 this:
17836
17837 @smallexample
17838 @group
17839 (setq-default
17840 default-frame-alist
17841 '((cursor-color . "white")
17842 (mouse-color . "white")
17843 (foreground-color . "white")
17844 (background-color . "DodgerBlue4")
17845 ;; (cursor-type . bar)
17846 (cursor-type . box)
17847 @end group
17848 @group
17849 (tool-bar-lines . 0)
17850 (menu-bar-lines . 1)
17851 (width . 80)
17852 (height . 58)
17853 (font .
17854 "-Misc-Fixed-Medium-R-Normal--20-200-75-75-C-100-ISO8859-1")
17855 ))
17856 @end group
17857 @end smallexample
17858
17859 @item
17860 Convert @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h} into @key{DEL} and @key{DEL}
17861 into @kbd{@key{CTRL}-h}.@*
17862 (Some older keyboards needed this, although I have not seen the
17863 problem recently.)
17864
17865 @smallexample
17866 @group
17867 ;; Translate 'C-h' to <DEL>.
17868 ; (keyboard-translate ?\C-h ?\C-?)
17869
17870 ;; Translate <DEL> to 'C-h'.
17871 (keyboard-translate ?\C-? ?\C-h)
17872 @end group
17873 @end smallexample
17874
17875 @item Turn off a blinking cursor!
17876
17877 @smallexample
17878 @group
17879 (if (fboundp 'blink-cursor-mode)
17880 (blink-cursor-mode -1))
17881 @end group
17882 @end smallexample
17883
17884 @noindent
17885 or start GNU Emacs with the command @code{emacs -nbc}.
17886
17887 @need 1250
17888 @item When using @command{grep}@*
17889 @samp{-i}@w{ } Ignore case distinctions@*
17890 @samp{-n}@w{ } Prefix each line of output with line number@*
17891 @samp{-H}@w{ } Print the filename for each match.@*
17892 @samp{-e}@w{ } Protect patterns beginning with a hyphen character, @samp{-}
17893
17894 @smallexample
17895 (setq grep-command "grep -i -nH -e ")
17896 @end smallexample
17897
17898 @ignore
17899 @c Evidently, no longer needed in GNU Emacs 22
17900
17901 item Automatically uncompress compressed files when visiting them
17902
17903 smallexample
17904 (load "uncompress")
17905 end smallexample
17906
17907 @end ignore
17908
17909 @item Find an existing buffer, even if it has a different name@*
17910 This avoids problems with symbolic links.
17911
17912 @smallexample
17913 (setq find-file-existing-other-name t)
17914 @end smallexample
17915
17916 @item Set your language environment and default input method
17917
17918 @smallexample
17919 @group
17920 (set-language-environment "latin-1")
17921 ;; Remember you can enable or disable multilingual text input
17922 ;; with the @code{toggle-input-method'} (@kbd{C-\}) command
17923 (setq default-input-method "latin-1-prefix")
17924 @end group
17925 @end smallexample
17926
17927 If you want to write with Chinese ``GB'' characters, set this instead:
17928
17929 @smallexample
17930 @group
17931 (set-language-environment "Chinese-GB")
17932 (setq default-input-method "chinese-tonepy")
17933 @end group
17934 @end smallexample
17935 @end itemize
17936
17937 @subsubheading Fixing Unpleasant Key Bindings
17938 @cindex Key bindings, fixing
17939 @cindex Bindings, key, fixing unpleasant
17940
17941 Some systems bind keys unpleasantly. Sometimes, for example, the
17942 @key{CTRL} key appears in an awkward spot rather than at the far left
17943 of the home row.
17944
17945 Usually, when people fix these sorts of keybindings, they do not
17946 change their @file{~/.emacs} file. Instead, they bind the proper keys
17947 on their consoles with the @code{loadkeys} or @code{install-keymap}
17948 commands in their boot script and then include @code{xmodmap} commands
17949 in their @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file for X Windows.
17950
17951 @need 1250
17952 @noindent
17953 For a boot script:
17954
17955 @smallexample
17956 @group
17957 loadkeys /usr/share/keymaps/i386/qwerty/emacs2.kmap.gz
17958 @exdent or
17959 install-keymap emacs2
17960 @end group
17961 @end smallexample
17962
17963 @need 1250
17964 @noindent
17965 For a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file when the @key{Caps
17966 Lock} key is at the far left of the home row:
17967
17968 @smallexample
17969 @group
17970 # Bind the key labeled 'Caps Lock' to 'Control'
17971 # (Such a broken user interface suggests that keyboard manufacturers
17972 # think that computers are typewriters from 1885.)
17973
17974 xmodmap -e "clear Lock"
17975 xmodmap -e "add Control = Caps_Lock"
17976 @end group
17977 @end smallexample
17978
17979 @need 1250
17980 @noindent
17981 In a @file{.xinitrc} or @file{.Xsession} file, to convert an @key{ALT}
17982 key to a @key{META} key:
17983
17984 @smallexample
17985 @group
17986 # Some ill designed keyboards have a key labeled ALT and no Meta
17987 xmodmap -e "keysym Alt_L = Meta_L Alt_L"
17988 @end group
17989 @end smallexample
17990
17991 @need 1700
17992 @node Mode Line
17993 @section A Modified Mode Line
17994 @vindex mode-line-format
17995 @cindex Mode line format
17996
17997 Finally, a feature I really like: a modified mode line.
17998
17999 When I work over a network, I forget which machine I am using. Also,
18000 I tend to I lose track of where I am, and which line point is on.
18001
18002 So I reset my mode line to look like this:
18003
18004 @smallexample
18005 -:-- foo.texi rattlesnake:/home/bob/ Line 1 (Texinfo Fill) Top
18006 @end smallexample
18007
18008 I am visiting a file called @file{foo.texi}, on my machine
18009 @file{rattlesnake} in my @file{/home/bob} buffer. I am on line 1, in
18010 Texinfo mode, and am at the top of the buffer.
18011
18012 @need 1200
18013 My @file{.emacs} file has a section that looks like this:
18014
18015 @smallexample
18016 @group
18017 ;; Set a Mode Line that tells me which machine, which directory,
18018 ;; and which line I am on, plus the other customary information.
18019 (setq-default mode-line-format
18020 (quote
18021 (#("-" 0 1
18022 (help-echo
18023 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18024 mode-line-mule-info
18025 mode-line-modified
18026 mode-line-frame-identification
18027 " "
18028 @end group
18029 @group
18030 mode-line-buffer-identification
18031 " "
18032 (:eval (substring
18033 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18034 ":"
18035 default-directory
18036 #(" " 0 1
18037 (help-echo
18038 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18039 (line-number-mode " Line %l ")
18040 global-mode-string
18041 @end group
18042 @group
18043 #(" %[(" 0 6
18044 (help-echo
18045 "mouse-1: select window, mouse-2: delete others ..."))
18046 (:eval (mode-line-mode-name))
18047 mode-line-process
18048 minor-mode-alist
18049 #("%n" 0 2 (help-echo "mouse-2: widen" local-map (keymap ...)))
18050 ")%] "
18051 (-3 . "%P")
18052 ;; "-%-"
18053 )))
18054 @end group
18055 @end smallexample
18056
18057 @noindent
18058 Here, I redefine the default mode line. Most of the parts are from
18059 the original; but I make a few changes. I set the @emph{default} mode
18060 line format so as to permit various modes, such as Info, to override
18061 it.
18062
18063 Many elements in the list are self-explanatory:
18064 @code{mode-line-modified} is a variable that tells whether the buffer
18065 has been modified, @code{mode-name} tells the name of the mode, and so
18066 on. However, the format looks complicated because of two features we
18067 have not discussed.
18068
18069 @cindex Properties, in mode line example
18070 The first string in the mode line is a dash or hyphen, @samp{-}. In
18071 the old days, it would have been specified simply as @code{"-"}. But
18072 nowadays, Emacs can add properties to a string, such as highlighting
18073 or, as in this case, a help feature. If you place your mouse cursor
18074 over the hyphen, some help information appears (By default, you must
18075 wait seven-tenths of a second before the information appears. You can
18076 change that timing by changing the value of @code{tooltip-delay}.)
18077
18078 @need 1000
18079 The new string format has a special syntax:
18080
18081 @smallexample
18082 #("-" 0 1 (help-echo "mouse-1: select window, ..."))
18083 @end smallexample
18084
18085 @noindent
18086 The @code{#(} begins a list. The first element of the list is the
18087 string itself, just one @samp{-}. The second and third
18088 elements specify the range over which the fourth element applies. A
18089 range starts @emph{after} a character, so a zero means the range
18090 starts just before the first character; a 1 means that the range ends
18091 just after the first character. The third element is the property for
18092 the range. It consists of a property list, a
18093 property name, in this case, @samp{help-echo}, followed by a value, in this
18094 case, a string. The second, third, and fourth elements of this new
18095 string format can be repeated.
18096
18097 @xref{Text Properties, , Text Properties, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18098 Reference Manual}, and see @ref{Mode Line Format, , Mode Line Format,
18099 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for more information.
18100
18101 @code{mode-line-buffer-identification}
18102 displays the current buffer name. It is a list
18103 beginning @code{(#("%12b" 0 4 @dots{}}.
18104 The @code{#(} begins the list.
18105
18106 The @samp{"%12b"} displays the current buffer name, using the
18107 @code{buffer-name} function with which we are familiar; the @samp{12}
18108 specifies the maximum number of characters that will be displayed.
18109 When a name has fewer characters, whitespace is added to fill out to
18110 this number. (Buffer names can and often should be longer than 12
18111 characters; this length works well in a typical 80 column wide
18112 window.)
18113
18114 @code{:eval} says to evaluate the following form and use the result as
18115 a string to display. In this case, the expression displays the first
18116 component of the full system name. The end of the first component is
18117 a @samp{.} (``period''), so I use the @code{string-match} function to
18118 tell me the length of the first component. The substring from the
18119 zeroth character to that length is the name of the machine.
18120
18121 @need 1250
18122 This is the expression:
18123
18124 @smallexample
18125 @group
18126 (:eval (substring
18127 (system-name) 0 (string-match "\\..+" (system-name))))
18128 @end group
18129 @end smallexample
18130
18131 @samp{%[} and @samp{%]} cause a pair of square brackets
18132 to appear for each recursive editing level. @samp{%n} says ``Narrow''
18133 when narrowing is in effect. @samp{%P} tells you the percentage of
18134 the buffer that is above the bottom of the window, or ``Top'', ``Bottom'',
18135 or ``All''. (A lower case @samp{p} tell you the percentage above the
18136 @emph{top} of the window.) @samp{%-} inserts enough dashes to fill
18137 out the line.
18138
18139 Remember, ``You don't have to like Emacs to like it''---your own
18140 Emacs can have different colors, different commands, and different
18141 keys than a default Emacs.
18142
18143 On the other hand, if you want to bring up a plain ``out of the box''
18144 Emacs, with no customization, type:
18145
18146 @smallexample
18147 emacs -q
18148 @end smallexample
18149
18150 @noindent
18151 This will start an Emacs that does @emph{not} load your
18152 @file{~/.emacs} initialization file. A plain, default Emacs. Nothing
18153 more.
18154
18155 @node Debugging
18156 @chapter Debugging
18157 @cindex debugging
18158
18159 GNU Emacs has two debuggers, @code{debug} and @code{edebug}. The
18160 first is built into the internals of Emacs and is always with you;
18161 the second requires that you instrument a function before you can use it.
18162
18163 Both debuggers are described extensively in @ref{Debugging, ,
18164 Debugging Lisp Programs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18165 In this chapter, I will walk through a short example of each.
18166
18167 @menu
18168 * debug:: How to use the built-in debugger.
18169 * debug-on-entry:: Start debugging when you call a function.
18170 * debug-on-quit:: Start debugging when you quit with @kbd{C-g}.
18171 * edebug:: How to use Edebug, a source level debugger.
18172 * Debugging Exercises::
18173 @end menu
18174
18175 @node debug
18176 @section @code{debug}
18177 @findex debug
18178
18179 Suppose you have written a function definition that is intended to
18180 return the sum of the numbers 1 through a given number. (This is the
18181 @code{triangle} function discussed earlier. @xref{Decrementing
18182 Example, , Example with Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18183 @c xref{Decrementing Loop,, Loop with a Decrementing Counter}, for a discussion.)
18184
18185 However, your function definition has a bug. You have mistyped
18186 @samp{1=} for @samp{1-}. Here is the broken definition:
18187
18188 @findex triangle-bugged
18189 @smallexample
18190 @group
18191 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18192 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18193 (let ((total 0))
18194 (while (> number 0)
18195 (setq total (+ total number))
18196 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18197 total))
18198 @end group
18199 @end smallexample
18200
18201 If you are reading this in Info, you can evaluate this definition in
18202 the normal fashion. You will see @code{triangle-bugged} appear in the
18203 echo area.
18204
18205 @need 1250
18206 Now evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged} function with an
18207 argument of 4:
18208
18209 @smallexample
18210 (triangle-bugged 4)
18211 @end smallexample
18212
18213 @noindent
18214 In a recent GNU Emacs, you will create and enter a @file{*Backtrace*}
18215 buffer that says:
18216
18217 @noindent
18218 @smallexample
18219 @group
18220 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18221 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18222 (1= number)
18223 (setq number (1= number))
18224 (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18225 (setq number (1= number)))
18226 (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18227 (setq number ...)) total)
18228 triangle-bugged(4)
18229 @end group
18230 @group
18231 eval((triangle-bugged 4))
18232 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18233 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18234 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18235 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18236 @end group
18237 @end smallexample
18238
18239 @noindent
18240 (I have reformatted this example slightly; the debugger does not fold
18241 long lines. As usual, you can quit the debugger by typing @kbd{q} in
18242 the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer.)
18243
18244 In practice, for a bug as simple as this, the ``Lisp error'' line will
18245 tell you what you need to know to correct the definition. The
18246 function @code{1=} is ``void''.
18247
18248 @ignore
18249 @need 800
18250 In GNU Emacs 20 and before, you will see:
18251
18252 @smallexample
18253 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18254 @end smallexample
18255
18256 @noindent
18257 which has the same meaning as the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer line in
18258 version 21.
18259 @end ignore
18260
18261 However, suppose you are not quite certain what is going on?
18262 You can read the complete backtrace.
18263
18264 In this case, you need to run a recent GNU Emacs, which automatically
18265 starts the debugger that puts you in the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer; or
18266 else, you need to start the debugger manually as described below.
18267
18268 Read the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer from the bottom up; it tells you
18269 what Emacs did that led to the error. Emacs made an interactive call
18270 to @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}), which led to the evaluation
18271 of the @code{triangle-bugged} expression. Each line above tells you
18272 what the Lisp interpreter evaluated next.
18273
18274 @need 1250
18275 The third line from the top of the buffer is
18276
18277 @smallexample
18278 (setq number (1= number))
18279 @end smallexample
18280
18281 @noindent
18282 Emacs tried to evaluate this expression; in order to do so, it tried
18283 to evaluate the inner expression shown on the second line from the
18284 top:
18285
18286 @smallexample
18287 (1= number)
18288 @end smallexample
18289
18290 @need 1250
18291 @noindent
18292 This is where the error occurred; as the top line says:
18293
18294 @smallexample
18295 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18296 @end smallexample
18297
18298 @noindent
18299 You can correct the mistake, re-evaluate the function definition, and
18300 then run your test again.
18301
18302 @node debug-on-entry
18303 @section @code{debug-on-entry}
18304 @findex debug-on-entry
18305
18306 A recent GNU Emacs starts the debugger automatically when your
18307 function has an error.
18308
18309 @ignore
18310 GNU Emacs version 20 and before did not; it simply
18311 presented you with an error message. You had to start the debugger
18312 manually.
18313 @end ignore
18314
18315 Incidentally, you can start the debugger manually for all versions of
18316 Emacs; the advantage is that the debugger runs even if you do not have
18317 a bug in your code. Sometimes your code will be free of bugs!
18318
18319 You can enter the debugger when you call the function by calling
18320 @code{debug-on-entry}.
18321
18322 @need 1250
18323 @noindent
18324 Type:
18325
18326 @smallexample
18327 M-x debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18328 @end smallexample
18329
18330 @need 1250
18331 @noindent
18332 Now, evaluate the following:
18333
18334 @smallexample
18335 (triangle-bugged 5)
18336 @end smallexample
18337
18338 @noindent
18339 All versions of Emacs will create a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer and tell
18340 you that it is beginning to evaluate the @code{triangle-bugged}
18341 function:
18342
18343 @smallexample
18344 @group
18345 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18346 Debugger entered--entering a function:
18347 * triangle-bugged(5)
18348 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18349 @end group
18350 @group
18351 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18352 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18353 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18354 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18355 @end group
18356 @end smallexample
18357
18358 In the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer, type @kbd{d}. Emacs will evaluate
18359 the first expression in @code{triangle-bugged}; the buffer will look
18360 like this:
18361
18362 @smallexample
18363 @group
18364 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18365 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18366 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18367 (setq number ...)) total)
18368 * triangle-bugged(5)
18369 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18370 @end group
18371 @group
18372 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18373 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18374 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18375 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18376 @end group
18377 @end smallexample
18378
18379 @noindent
18380 Now, type @kbd{d} again, eight times, slowly. Each time you type
18381 @kbd{d}, Emacs will evaluate another expression in the function
18382 definition.
18383
18384 @need 1750
18385 Eventually, the buffer will look like this:
18386
18387 @smallexample
18388 @group
18389 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18390 Debugger entered--beginning evaluation of function call form:
18391 * (setq number (1= number))
18392 * (while (> number 0) (setq total (+ total number))
18393 (setq number (1= number)))
18394 @group
18395 @end group
18396 * (let ((total 0)) (while (> number 0) (setq total ...)
18397 (setq number ...)) total)
18398 * triangle-bugged(5)
18399 eval((triangle-bugged 5))
18400 @group
18401 @end group
18402 eval-last-sexp-1(nil)
18403 eval-last-sexp(nil)
18404 call-interactively(eval-last-sexp)
18405 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18406 @end group
18407 @end smallexample
18408
18409 @need 1500
18410 @noindent
18411 Finally, after you type @kbd{d} two more times, Emacs will reach the
18412 error, and the top two lines of the @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will look
18413 like this:
18414
18415 @smallexample
18416 @group
18417 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18418 Debugger entered--Lisp error: (void-function 1=)
18419 * (1= number)
18420 @dots{}
18421 ---------- Buffer: *Backtrace* ----------
18422 @end group
18423 @end smallexample
18424
18425 By typing @kbd{d}, you were able to step through the function.
18426
18427 You can quit a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer by typing @kbd{q} in it; this
18428 quits the trace, but does not cancel @code{debug-on-entry}.
18429
18430 @findex cancel-debug-on-entry
18431 To cancel the effect of @code{debug-on-entry}, call
18432 @code{cancel-debug-on-entry} and the name of the function, like this:
18433
18434 @smallexample
18435 M-x cancel-debug-on-entry RET triangle-bugged RET
18436 @end smallexample
18437
18438 @noindent
18439 (If you are reading this in Info, cancel @code{debug-on-entry} now.)
18440
18441 @node debug-on-quit
18442 @section @code{debug-on-quit} and @code{(debug)}
18443
18444 In addition to setting @code{debug-on-error} or calling @code{debug-on-entry},
18445 there are two other ways to start @code{debug}.
18446
18447 @findex debug-on-quit
18448 You can start @code{debug} whenever you type @kbd{C-g}
18449 (@code{keyboard-quit}) by setting the variable @code{debug-on-quit} to
18450 @code{t}. This is useful for debugging infinite loops.
18451
18452 @need 1500
18453 @cindex @code{(debug)} in code
18454 Or, you can insert a line that says @code{(debug)} into your code
18455 where you want the debugger to start, like this:
18456
18457 @smallexample
18458 @group
18459 (defun triangle-bugged (number)
18460 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive."
18461 (let ((total 0))
18462 (while (> number 0)
18463 (setq total (+ total number))
18464 (debug) ; @r{Start debugger.}
18465 (setq number (1= number))) ; @r{Error here.}
18466 total))
18467 @end group
18468 @end smallexample
18469
18470 The @code{debug} function is described in detail in @ref{Debugger, ,
18471 The Lisp Debugger, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18472
18473 @node edebug
18474 @section The @code{edebug} Source Level Debugger
18475 @cindex Source level debugger
18476 @findex edebug
18477
18478 Edebug is a source level debugger. Edebug normally displays the
18479 source of the code you are debugging, with an arrow at the left that
18480 shows which line you are currently executing.
18481
18482 You can walk through the execution of a function, line by line, or run
18483 quickly until reaching a @dfn{breakpoint} where execution stops.
18484
18485 Edebug is described in @ref{Edebug, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs
18486 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18487
18488 @need 1250
18489 Here is a bugged function definition for @code{triangle-recursively}.
18490 @xref{Recursive triangle function, , Recursion in place of a counter},
18491 for a review of it.
18492
18493 @smallexample
18494 @group
18495 (defun triangle-recursively-bugged (number)
18496 "Return sum of numbers 1 through NUMBER inclusive.
18497 Uses recursion."
18498 (if (= number 1)
18499 1
18500 (+ number
18501 (triangle-recursively-bugged
18502 (1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18503 @end group
18504 @end smallexample
18505
18506 @noindent
18507 Normally, you would install this definition by positioning your cursor
18508 after the function's closing parenthesis and typing @kbd{C-x C-e}
18509 (@code{eval-last-sexp}) or else by positioning your cursor within the
18510 definition and typing @kbd{C-M-x} (@code{eval-defun}). (By default,
18511 the @code{eval-defun} command works only in Emacs Lisp mode or in Lisp
18512 Interaction mode.)
18513
18514 @need 1500
18515 However, to prepare this function definition for Edebug, you must
18516 first @dfn{instrument} the code using a different command. You can do
18517 this by positioning your cursor within or just after the definition
18518 and typing
18519
18520 @smallexample
18521 M-x edebug-defun RET
18522 @end smallexample
18523
18524 @noindent
18525 This will cause Emacs to load Edebug automatically if it is not
18526 already loaded, and properly instrument the function.
18527
18528 After instrumenting the function, place your cursor after the
18529 following expression and type @kbd{C-x C-e} (@code{eval-last-sexp}):
18530
18531 @smallexample
18532 (triangle-recursively-bugged 3)
18533 @end smallexample
18534
18535 @noindent
18536 You will be jumped back to the source for
18537 @code{triangle-recursively-bugged} and the cursor positioned at the
18538 beginning of the @code{if} line of the function. Also, you will see
18539 an arrowhead at the left hand side of that line. The arrowhead marks
18540 the line where the function is executing. (In the following examples,
18541 we show the arrowhead with @samp{=>}; in a windowing system, you may
18542 see the arrowhead as a solid triangle in the window ``fringe''.)
18543
18544 @smallexample
18545 =>@point{}(if (= number 1)
18546 @end smallexample
18547
18548 @noindent
18549 @iftex
18550 In the example, the location of point is displayed with a star,
18551 @samp{@point{}} (in Info, it is displayed as @samp{-!-}).
18552 @end iftex
18553 @ifnottex
18554 In the example, the location of point is displayed as @samp{@point{}}
18555 (in a printed book, it is displayed with a five pointed star).
18556 @end ifnottex
18557
18558 If you now press @key{SPC}, point will move to the next expression to
18559 be executed; the line will look like this:
18560
18561 @smallexample
18562 =>(if @point{}(= number 1)
18563 @end smallexample
18564
18565 @noindent
18566 As you continue to press @key{SPC}, point will move from expression to
18567 expression. At the same time, whenever an expression returns a value,
18568 that value will be displayed in the echo area. For example, after you
18569 move point past @code{number}, you will see the following:
18570
18571 @smallexample
18572 Result: 3 (#o3, #x3, ?\C-c)
18573 @end smallexample
18574
18575 @noindent
18576 This means the value of @code{number} is 3, which is octal three,
18577 hexadecimal three, and @sc{ascii} ``control-c'' (the third letter of the
18578 alphabet, in case you need to know this information).
18579
18580 You can continue moving through the code until you reach the line with
18581 the error. Before evaluation, that line looks like this:
18582
18583 @smallexample
18584 => @point{}(1= number))))) ; @r{Error here.}
18585 @end smallexample
18586
18587 @need 1250
18588 @noindent
18589 When you press @key{SPC} once again, you will produce an error message
18590 that says:
18591
18592 @smallexample
18593 Symbol's function definition is void:@: 1=
18594 @end smallexample
18595
18596 @noindent
18597 This is the bug.
18598
18599 Press @kbd{q} to quit Edebug.
18600
18601 To remove instrumentation from a function definition, simply
18602 re-evaluate it with a command that does not instrument it.
18603 For example, you could place your cursor after the definition's
18604 closing parenthesis and type @kbd{C-x C-e}.
18605
18606 Edebug does a great deal more than walk with you through a function.
18607 You can set it so it races through on its own, stopping only at an
18608 error or at specified stopping points; you can cause it to display the
18609 changing values of various expressions; you can find out how many
18610 times a function is called, and more.
18611
18612 Edebug is described in @ref{Edebug, , , elisp, The GNU Emacs
18613 Lisp Reference Manual}.
18614
18615 @need 1500
18616 @node Debugging Exercises
18617 @section Debugging Exercises
18618
18619 @itemize @bullet
18620 @item
18621 Install the @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} function and then cause it to
18622 enter the built-in debugger when you call it. Run the command on a
18623 region containing two words. You will need to press @kbd{d} a
18624 remarkable number of times. On your system, is a ``hook'' called after
18625 the command finishes? (For information on hooks, see @ref{Command
18626 Overview, , Command Loop Overview, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
18627 Manual}.)
18628
18629 @item
18630 Copy @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} into the @file{*scratch*} buffer,
18631 instrument the function for Edebug, and walk through its execution.
18632 The function does not need to have a bug, although you can introduce
18633 one if you wish. If the function lacks a bug, the walk-through
18634 completes without problems.
18635
18636 @item
18637 While running Edebug, type @kbd{?} to see a list of all the Edebug commands.
18638 (The @code{global-edebug-prefix} is usually @kbd{C-x X}, i.e.,
18639 @kbd{@key{CTRL}-x} followed by an upper case @kbd{X}; use this prefix
18640 for commands made outside of the Edebug debugging buffer.)
18641
18642 @item
18643 In the Edebug debugging buffer, use the @kbd{p}
18644 (@code{edebug-bounce-point}) command to see where in the region the
18645 @code{@value{COUNT-WORDS}} is working.
18646
18647 @item
18648 Move point to some spot further down the function and then type the
18649 @kbd{h} (@code{edebug-goto-here}) command to jump to that location.
18650
18651 @item
18652 Use the @kbd{t} (@code{edebug-trace-mode}) command to cause Edebug to
18653 walk through the function on its own; use an upper case @kbd{T} for
18654 @code{edebug-Trace-fast-mode}.
18655
18656 @item
18657 Set a breakpoint, then run Edebug in Trace mode until it reaches the
18658 stopping point.
18659 @end itemize
18660
18661 @node Conclusion
18662 @chapter Conclusion
18663
18664 We have now reached the end of this Introduction. You have now
18665 learned enough about programming in Emacs Lisp to set values, to write
18666 simple @file{.emacs} files for yourself and your friends, and write
18667 simple customizations and extensions to Emacs.
18668
18669 This is a place to stop. Or, if you wish, you can now go onward, and
18670 teach yourself.
18671
18672 You have learned some of the basic nuts and bolts of programming. But
18673 only some. There are a great many more brackets and hinges that are
18674 easy to use that we have not touched.
18675
18676 A path you can follow right now lies among the sources to GNU Emacs
18677 and in
18678 @ifnotinfo
18679 @cite{The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18680 @end ifnotinfo
18681 @ifinfo
18682 @ref{Top, , The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual, elisp, The GNU
18683 Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.
18684 @end ifinfo
18685
18686 The Emacs Lisp sources are an adventure. When you read the sources and
18687 come across a function or expression that is unfamiliar, you need to
18688 figure out or find out what it does.
18689
18690 Go to the Reference Manual. It is a thorough, complete, and fairly
18691 easy-to-read description of Emacs Lisp. It is written not only for
18692 experts, but for people who know what you know. (The @cite{Reference
18693 Manual} comes with the standard GNU Emacs distribution. Like this
18694 introduction, it comes as a Texinfo source file, so you can read it
18695 on your computer and as a typeset, printed book.)
18696
18697 Go to the other built-in help that is part of GNU Emacs: the built-in
18698 documentation for all functions and variables, and @code{find-tag},
18699 the program that takes you to sources.
18700
18701 Here is an example of how I explore the sources. Because of its name,
18702 @file{simple.el} is the file I looked at first, a long time ago. As
18703 it happens some of the functions in @file{simple.el} are complicated,
18704 or at least look complicated at first sight. The @code{open-line}
18705 function, for example, looks complicated.
18706
18707 You may want to walk through this function slowly, as we did with the
18708 @code{forward-sentence} function. (@xref{forward-sentence, The
18709 @code{forward-sentence} function}.) Or you may want to skip that
18710 function and look at another, such as @code{split-line}. You don't
18711 need to read all the functions. According to
18712 @code{count-words-in-defun}, the @code{split-line} function contains
18713 102 words and symbols.
18714
18715 Even though it is short, @code{split-line} contains expressions
18716 we have not studied: @code{skip-chars-forward}, @code{indent-to},
18717 @code{current-column} and @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18718
18719 Consider the @code{skip-chars-forward} function. (It is part of the
18720 function definition for @code{back-to-indentation}, which is shown in
18721 @ref{Review, , Review}.)
18722
18723 In GNU Emacs, you can find out more about @code{skip-chars-forward} by
18724 typing @kbd{C-h f} (@code{describe-function}) and the name of the
18725 function. This gives you the function documentation.
18726
18727 You may be able to guess what is done by a well named function such as
18728 @code{indent-to}; or you can look it up, too. Incidentally, the
18729 @code{describe-function} function itself is in @file{help.el}; it is
18730 one of those long, but decipherable functions. You can look up
18731 @code{describe-function} using the @kbd{C-h f} command!
18732
18733 In this instance, since the code is Lisp, the @file{*Help*} buffer
18734 contains the name of the library containing the function's source.
18735 You can put point over the name of the library and press the RET key,
18736 which in this situation is bound to @code{help-follow}, and be taken
18737 directly to the source, in the same way as @kbd{M-.}
18738 (@code{find-tag}).
18739
18740 The definition for @code{describe-function} illustrates how to
18741 customize the @code{interactive} expression without using the standard
18742 character codes; and it shows how to create a temporary buffer.
18743
18744 (The @code{indent-to} function is written in C rather than Emacs Lisp;
18745 it is a ``built-in'' function. @code{help-follow} takes you to its
18746 source as does @code{find-tag}, when properly set up.)
18747
18748 You can look at a function's source using @code{find-tag}, which is
18749 bound to @kbd{M-.} Finally, you can find out what the Reference
18750 Manual has to say by visiting the manual in Info, and typing @kbd{i}
18751 (@code{Info-index}) and the name of the function, or by looking up the
18752 function in the index to a printed copy of the manual.
18753
18754 Similarly, you can find out what is meant by
18755 @code{insert-and-inherit}.
18756
18757 Other interesting source files include @file{paragraphs.el},
18758 @file{loaddefs.el}, and @file{loadup.el}. The @file{paragraphs.el}
18759 file includes short, easily understood functions as well as longer
18760 ones. The @file{loaddefs.el} file contains the many standard
18761 autoloads and many keymaps. I have never looked at it all; only at
18762 parts. @file{loadup.el} is the file that loads the standard parts of
18763 Emacs; it tells you a great deal about how Emacs is built.
18764 (@xref{Building Emacs, , Building Emacs, elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp
18765 Reference Manual}, for more about building.)
18766
18767 As I said, you have learned some nuts and bolts; however, and very
18768 importantly, we have hardly touched major aspects of programming; I
18769 have said nothing about how to sort information, except to use the
18770 predefined @code{sort} function; I have said nothing about how to store
18771 information, except to use variables and lists; I have said nothing
18772 about how to write programs that write programs. These are topics for
18773 another, and different kind of book, a different kind of learning.
18774
18775 What you have done is learn enough for much practical work with GNU
18776 Emacs. What you have done is get started. This is the end of a
18777 beginning.
18778
18779 @c ================ Appendix ================
18780
18781 @node the-the
18782 @appendix The @code{the-the} Function
18783 @findex the-the
18784 @cindex Duplicated words function
18785 @cindex Words, duplicated
18786
18787 Sometimes when you you write text, you duplicate words---as with ``you
18788 you'' near the beginning of this sentence. I find that most
18789 frequently, I duplicate ``the''; hence, I call the function for
18790 detecting duplicated words, @code{the-the}.
18791
18792 @need 1250
18793 As a first step, you could use the following regular expression to
18794 search for duplicates:
18795
18796 @smallexample
18797 \\(\\w+[ \t\n]+\\)\\1
18798 @end smallexample
18799
18800 @noindent
18801 This regexp matches one or more word-constituent characters followed
18802 by one or more spaces, tabs, or newlines. However, it does not detect
18803 duplicated words on different lines, since the ending of the first
18804 word, the end of the line, is different from the ending of the second
18805 word, a space. (For more information about regular expressions, see
18806 @ref{Regexp Search, , Regular Expression Searches}, as well as
18807 @ref{Regexps, , Syntax of Regular Expressions, emacs, The GNU Emacs
18808 Manual}, and @ref{Regular Expressions, , Regular Expressions, elisp,
18809 The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}.)
18810
18811 You might try searching just for duplicated word-constituent
18812 characters but that does not work since the pattern detects doubles
18813 such as the two occurrences of ``th'' in ``with the''.
18814
18815 Another possible regexp searches for word-constituent characters
18816 followed by non-word-constituent characters, reduplicated. Here,
18817 @w{@samp{\\w+}} matches one or more word-constituent characters and
18818 @w{@samp{\\W*}} matches zero or more non-word-constituent characters.
18819
18820 @smallexample
18821 \\(\\(\\w+\\)\\W*\\)\\1
18822 @end smallexample
18823
18824 @noindent
18825 Again, not useful.
18826
18827 Here is the pattern that I use. It is not perfect, but good enough.
18828 @w{@samp{\\b}} matches the empty string, provided it is at the beginning
18829 or end of a word; @w{@samp{[^@@ \n\t]+}} matches one or more occurrences of
18830 any characters that are @emph{not} an @@-sign, space, newline, or tab.
18831
18832 @smallexample
18833 \\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b
18834 @end smallexample
18835
18836 One can write more complicated expressions, but I found that this
18837 expression is good enough, so I use it.
18838
18839 Here is the @code{the-the} function, as I include it in my
18840 @file{.emacs} file, along with a handy global key binding:
18841
18842 @smallexample
18843 @group
18844 (defun the-the ()
18845 "Search forward for for a duplicated word."
18846 (interactive)
18847 (message "Searching for for duplicated words ...")
18848 (push-mark)
18849 @end group
18850 @group
18851 ;; This regexp is not perfect
18852 ;; but is fairly good over all:
18853 (if (re-search-forward
18854 "\\b\\([^@@ \n\t]+\\)[ \n\t]+\\1\\b" nil 'move)
18855 (message "Found duplicated word.")
18856 (message "End of buffer")))
18857 @end group
18858
18859 @group
18860 ;; Bind 'the-the' to C-c \
18861 (global-set-key "\C-c\\" 'the-the)
18862 @end group
18863 @end smallexample
18864
18865 @sp 1
18866 Here is test text:
18867
18868 @smallexample
18869 @group
18870 one two two three four five
18871 five six seven
18872 @end group
18873 @end smallexample
18874
18875 You can substitute the other regular expressions shown above in the
18876 function definition and try each of them on this list.
18877
18878 @node Kill Ring
18879 @appendix Handling the Kill Ring
18880 @cindex Kill ring handling
18881 @cindex Handling the kill ring
18882 @cindex Ring, making a list like a
18883
18884 The kill ring is a list that is transformed into a ring by the
18885 workings of the @code{current-kill} function. The @code{yank} and
18886 @code{yank-pop} commands use the @code{current-kill} function.
18887
18888 This appendix describes the @code{current-kill} function as well as
18889 both the @code{yank} and the @code{yank-pop} commands, but first,
18890 consider the workings of the kill ring.
18891
18892 @menu
18893 * What the Kill Ring Does::
18894 * current-kill::
18895 * yank:: Paste a copy of a clipped element.
18896 * yank-pop:: Insert element pointed to.
18897 * ring file::
18898 @end menu
18899
18900 @ifnottex
18901 @node What the Kill Ring Does
18902 @unnumberedsec What the Kill Ring Does
18903 @end ifnottex
18904
18905 @need 1250
18906 The kill ring has a default maximum length of sixty items; this number
18907 is too large for an explanation. Instead, set it to four. Please
18908 evaluate the following:
18909
18910 @smallexample
18911 @group
18912 (setq old-kill-ring-max kill-ring-max)
18913 (setq kill-ring-max 4)
18914 @end group
18915 @end smallexample
18916
18917 @noindent
18918 Then, please copy each line of the following indented example into the
18919 kill ring. You may kill each line with @kbd{C-k} or mark it and copy
18920 it with @kbd{M-w}.
18921
18922 @noindent
18923 (In a read-only buffer, such as the @file{*info*} buffer, the kill
18924 command, @kbd{C-k} (@code{kill-line}), will not remove the text,
18925 merely copy it to the kill ring. However, your machine may beep at
18926 you. Alternatively, for silence, you may copy the region of each line
18927 with the @kbd{M-w} (@code{kill-ring-save}) command. You must mark
18928 each line for this command to succeed, but it does not matter at which
18929 end you put point or mark.)
18930
18931 @need 1250
18932 @noindent
18933 Please invoke the calls in order, so that five elements attempt to
18934 fill the kill ring:
18935
18936 @smallexample
18937 @group
18938 first some text
18939 second piece of text
18940 third line
18941 fourth line of text
18942 fifth bit of text
18943 @end group
18944 @end smallexample
18945
18946 @need 1250
18947 @noindent
18948 Then find the value of @code{kill-ring} by evaluating
18949
18950 @smallexample
18951 kill-ring
18952 @end smallexample
18953
18954 @need 800
18955 @noindent
18956 It is:
18957
18958 @smallexample
18959 @group
18960 ("fifth bit of text" "fourth line of text"
18961 "third line" "second piece of text")
18962 @end group
18963 @end smallexample
18964
18965 @noindent
18966 The first element, @samp{first some text}, was dropped.
18967
18968 @need 1250
18969 To return to the old value for the length of the kill ring, evaluate:
18970
18971 @smallexample
18972 (setq kill-ring-max old-kill-ring-max)
18973 @end smallexample
18974
18975 @node current-kill
18976 @appendixsec The @code{current-kill} Function
18977 @findex current-kill
18978
18979 The @code{current-kill} function changes the element in the kill ring
18980 to which @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points. (Also, the
18981 @code{kill-new} function sets @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to point
18982 to the latest element of the kill ring. The @code{kill-new}
18983 function is used directly or indirectly by @code{kill-append},
18984 @code{copy-region-as-kill}, @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line},
18985 and @code{kill-region}.)
18986
18987 @menu
18988 * Code for current-kill::
18989 * Understanding current-kill::
18990 @end menu
18991
18992 @ifnottex
18993 @node Code for current-kill
18994 @unnumberedsubsec The code for @code{current-kill}
18995 @end ifnottex
18996
18997
18998 @need 1500
18999 The @code{current-kill} function is used by @code{yank} and by
19000 @code{yank-pop}. Here is the code for @code{current-kill}:
19001
19002 @smallexample
19003 @group
19004 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19005 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill.
19006 If N is zero, `interprogram-paste-function' is set, and calling it
19007 returns a string, then that string is added to the front of the
19008 kill ring and returned as the latest kill.
19009 @end group
19010 @group
19011 If optional arg DO-NOT-MOVE is non-nil, then don't actually move the
19012 yanking point; just return the Nth kill forward."
19013 (let ((interprogram-paste (and (= n 0)
19014 interprogram-paste-function
19015 (funcall interprogram-paste-function))))
19016 @end group
19017 @group
19018 (if interprogram-paste
19019 (progn
19020 ;; Disable the interprogram cut function when we add the new
19021 ;; text to the kill ring, so Emacs doesn't try to own the
19022 ;; selection, with identical text.
19023 (let ((interprogram-cut-function nil))
19024 (kill-new interprogram-paste))
19025 interprogram-paste)
19026 @end group
19027 @group
19028 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19029 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19030 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19031 (length kill-ring))
19032 kill-ring)))
19033 (or do-not-move
19034 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19035 (car ARGth-kill-element)))))
19036 @end group
19037 @end smallexample
19038
19039 Remember also that the @code{kill-new} function sets
19040 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to the latest element of the kill
19041 ring, which means that all the functions that call it set the value
19042 indirectly: @code{kill-append}, @code{copy-region-as-kill},
19043 @code{kill-ring-save}, @code{kill-line}, and @code{kill-region}.
19044
19045 @need 1500
19046 Here is the line in @code{kill-new}, which is explained in
19047 @ref{kill-new function, , The @code{kill-new} function}.
19048
19049 @smallexample
19050 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer kill-ring)
19051 @end smallexample
19052
19053 @ifnottex
19054 @node Understanding current-kill
19055 @unnumberedsubsec @code{current-kill} in Outline
19056 @end ifnottex
19057
19058 The @code{current-kill} function looks complex, but as usual, it can
19059 be understood by taking it apart piece by piece. First look at it in
19060 skeletal form:
19061
19062 @smallexample
19063 @group
19064 (defun current-kill (n &optional do-not-move)
19065 "Rotate the yanking point by N places, and then return that kill."
19066 (let @var{varlist}
19067 @var{body}@dots{})
19068 @end group
19069 @end smallexample
19070
19071 This function takes two arguments, one of which is optional. It has a
19072 documentation string. It is @emph{not} interactive.
19073
19074 @menu
19075 * Body of current-kill::
19076 * Digression concerning error:: How to mislead humans, but not computers.
19077 * Determining the Element::
19078 @end menu
19079
19080 @ifnottex
19081 @node Body of current-kill
19082 @unnumberedsubsubsec The Body of @code{current-kill}
19083 @end ifnottex
19084
19085 The body of the function definition is a @code{let} expression, which
19086 itself has a body as well as a @var{varlist}.
19087
19088 The @code{let} expression declares a variable that will be only usable
19089 within the bounds of this function. This variable is called
19090 @code{interprogram-paste} and is for copying to another program. It
19091 is not for copying within this instance of GNU Emacs. Most window
19092 systems provide a facility for interprogram pasting. Sadly, that
19093 facility usually provides only for the last element. Most windowing
19094 systems have not adopted a ring of many possibilities, even though
19095 Emacs has provided it for decades.
19096
19097 The @code{if} expression has two parts, one if there exists
19098 @code{interprogram-paste} and one if not.
19099
19100 @need 2000
19101 Let us consider the ``if not'' or else-part of the @code{current-kill}
19102 function. (The then-part uses the @code{kill-new} function, which
19103 we have already described. @xref{kill-new function, , The
19104 @code{kill-new} function}.)
19105
19106 @smallexample
19107 @group
19108 (or kill-ring (error "Kill ring is empty"))
19109 (let ((ARGth-kill-element
19110 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19111 (length kill-ring))
19112 kill-ring)))
19113 (or do-not-move
19114 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))
19115 (car ARGth-kill-element))
19116 @end group
19117 @end smallexample
19118
19119 @noindent
19120 The code first checks whether the kill ring has content; otherwise it
19121 signals an error.
19122
19123 @need 1000
19124 Note that the @code{or} expression is very similar to testing length
19125 with an @code{if}:
19126
19127 @findex zerop
19128 @findex error
19129 @smallexample
19130 @group
19131 (if (zerop (length kill-ring)) ; @r{if-part}
19132 (error "Kill ring is empty")) ; @r{then-part}
19133 ;; No else-part
19134 @end group
19135 @end smallexample
19136
19137 @noindent
19138 If there is not anything in the kill ring, its length must be zero and
19139 an error message sent to the user: @samp{Kill ring is empty}. The
19140 @code{current-kill} function uses an @code{or} expression which is
19141 simpler. But an @code{if} expression reminds us what goes on.
19142
19143 This @code{if} expression uses the function @code{zerop} which returns
19144 true if the value it is testing is zero. When @code{zerop} tests
19145 true, the then-part of the @code{if} is evaluated. The then-part is a
19146 list starting with the function @code{error}, which is a function that
19147 is similar to the @code{message} function
19148 (@pxref{message, , The @code{message} Function}) in that
19149 it prints a one-line message in the echo area. However, in addition
19150 to printing a message, @code{error} also stops evaluation of the
19151 function within which it is embedded. This means that the rest of the
19152 function will not be evaluated if the length of the kill ring is zero.
19153
19154 Then the @code{current-kill} function selects the element to return.
19155 The selection depends on the number of places that @code{current-kill}
19156 rotates and on where @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19157
19158 Next, either the optional @code{do-not-move} argument is true or the
19159 current value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} is set to point to the
19160 list. Finally, another expression returns the first element of the
19161 list even if the @code{do-not-move} argument is true.
19162
19163 @ifnottex
19164 @node Digression concerning error
19165 @unnumberedsubsubsec Digression about the word ``error''
19166 @end ifnottex
19167
19168 In my opinion, it is slightly misleading, at least to humans, to use
19169 the term ``error'' as the name of the @code{error} function. A better
19170 term would be ``cancel''. Strictly speaking, of course, you cannot
19171 point to, much less rotate a pointer to a list that has no length, so
19172 from the point of view of the computer, the word ``error'' is correct.
19173 But a human expects to attempt this sort of thing, if only to find out
19174 whether the kill ring is full or empty. This is an act of
19175 exploration.
19176
19177 From the human point of view, the act of exploration and discovery is
19178 not necessarily an error, and therefore should not be labeled as one,
19179 even in the bowels of a computer. As it is, the code in Emacs implies
19180 that a human who is acting virtuously, by exploring his or her
19181 environment, is making an error. This is bad. Even though the computer
19182 takes the same steps as it does when there is an ``error'', a term such as
19183 ``cancel'' would have a clearer connotation.
19184
19185 @ifnottex
19186 @node Determining the Element
19187 @unnumberedsubsubsec Determining the Element
19188 @end ifnottex
19189
19190 Among other actions, the else-part of the @code{if} expression sets
19191 the value of @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} to
19192 @code{ARGth-kill-element} when the kill ring has something in it and
19193 the value of @code{do-not-move} is @code{nil}.
19194
19195 @need 800
19196 The code looks like this:
19197
19198 @smallexample
19199 @group
19200 (nthcdr (mod (- n (length kill-ring-yank-pointer))
19201 (length kill-ring))
19202 kill-ring)))
19203 @end group
19204 @end smallexample
19205
19206 This needs some examination. Unless it is not supposed to move the
19207 pointer, the @code{current-kill} function changes where
19208 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} points.
19209 That is what the
19210 @w{@code{(setq kill-ring-yank-pointer ARGth-kill-element))}}
19211 expression does. Also, clearly, @code{ARGth-kill-element} is being
19212 set to be equal to some @sc{cdr} of the kill ring, using the
19213 @code{nthcdr} function that is described in an earlier section.
19214 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.) How does it do this?
19215
19216 As we have seen before (@pxref{nthcdr}), the @code{nthcdr} function
19217 works by repeatedly taking the @sc{cdr} of a list---it takes the
19218 @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} of the @sc{cdr} @dots{}
19219
19220 @need 800
19221 The two following expressions produce the same result:
19222
19223 @smallexample
19224 @group
19225 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (cdr kill-ring))
19226
19227 (setq kill-ring-yank-pointer (nthcdr 1 kill-ring))
19228 @end group
19229 @end smallexample
19230
19231 However, the @code{nthcdr} expression is more complicated. It uses
19232 the @code{mod} function to determine which @sc{cdr} to select.
19233
19234 (You will remember to look at inner functions first; indeed, we will
19235 have to go inside the @code{mod}.)
19236
19237 The @code{mod} function returns the value of its first argument modulo
19238 the second; that is to say, it returns the remainder after dividing
19239 the first argument by the second. The value returned has the same
19240 sign as the second argument.
19241
19242 @need 800
19243 Thus,
19244
19245 @smallexample
19246 @group
19247 (mod 12 4)
19248 @result{} 0 ;; @r{because there is no remainder}
19249 (mod 13 4)
19250 @result{} 1
19251 @end group
19252 @end smallexample
19253
19254 @need 1250
19255 In this case, the first argument is often smaller than the second.
19256 That is fine.
19257
19258 @smallexample
19259 @group
19260 (mod 0 4)
19261 @result{} 0
19262 (mod 1 4)
19263 @result{} 1
19264 @end group
19265 @end smallexample
19266
19267 We can guess what the @code{-} function does. It is like @code{+} but
19268 subtracts instead of adds; the @code{-} function subtracts its second
19269 argument from its first. Also, we already know what the @code{length}
19270 function does (@pxref{length}). It returns the length of a list.
19271
19272 And @code{n} is the name of the required argument to the
19273 @code{current-kill} function.
19274
19275 @need 1250
19276 So when the first argument to @code{nthcdr} is zero, the @code{nthcdr}
19277 expression returns the whole list, as you can see by evaluating the
19278 following:
19279
19280 @smallexample
19281 @group
19282 ;; kill-ring-yank-pointer @r{and} kill-ring @r{have a length of four}
19283 ;; @r{and} (mod (- 0 4) 4) @result{} 0
19284 (nthcdr (mod (- 0 4) 4)
19285 '("fourth line of text"
19286 "third line"
19287 "second piece of text"
19288 "first some text"))
19289 @end group
19290 @end smallexample
19291
19292 @need 1250
19293 When the first argument to the @code{current-kill} function is one,
19294 the @code{nthcdr} expression returns the list without its first
19295 element.
19296
19297 @smallexample
19298 @group
19299 (nthcdr (mod (- 1 4) 4)
19300 '("fourth line of text"
19301 "third line"
19302 "second piece of text"
19303 "first some text"))
19304 @end group
19305 @end smallexample
19306
19307 @cindex @samp{global variable} defined
19308 @cindex @samp{variable, global}, defined
19309 Incidentally, both @code{kill-ring} and @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer}
19310 are @dfn{global variables}. That means that any expression in Emacs
19311 Lisp can access them. They are not like the local variables set by
19312 @code{let} or like the symbols in an argument list.
19313 Local variables can only be accessed
19314 within the @code{let} that defines them or the function that specifies
19315 them in an argument list (and within expressions called by them).
19316
19317 @ignore
19318 @c texi2dvi fails when the name of the section is within ifnottex ...
19319 (@xref{Prevent confusion, , @code{let} Prevents Confusion}, and
19320 @ref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
19321 @end ignore
19322
19323 @node yank
19324 @appendixsec @code{yank}
19325 @findex yank
19326
19327 After learning about @code{current-kill}, the code for the
19328 @code{yank} function is almost easy.
19329
19330 The @code{yank} function does not use the
19331 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable directly. It calls
19332 @code{insert-for-yank} which calls @code{current-kill} which sets the
19333 @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} variable.
19334
19335 @need 1250
19336 The code looks like this:
19337
19338 @c in GNU Emacs 22
19339 @smallexample
19340 @group
19341 (defun yank (&optional arg)
19342 "Reinsert (\"paste\") the last stretch of killed text.
19343 More precisely, reinsert the stretch of killed text most recently
19344 killed OR yanked. Put point at end, and set mark at beginning.
19345 With just \\[universal-argument] as argument, same but put point at
19346 beginning (and mark at end). With argument N, reinsert the Nth most
19347 recently killed stretch of killed text.
19348
19349 When this command inserts killed text into the buffer, it honors
19350 `yank-excluded-properties' and `yank-handler' as described in the
19351 doc string for `insert-for-yank-1', which see.
19352
19353 See also the command \\[yank-pop]."
19354 @end group
19355 @group
19356 (interactive "*P")
19357 (setq yank-window-start (window-start))
19358 ;; If we don't get all the way thru, make last-command indicate that
19359 ;; for the following command.
19360 (setq this-command t)
19361 (push-mark (point))
19362 @end group
19363 @group
19364 (insert-for-yank (current-kill (cond
19365 ((listp arg) 0)
19366 ((eq arg '-) -2)
19367 (t (1- arg)))))
19368 (if (consp arg)
19369 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19370 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19371 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19372 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19373 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19374 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer)))))
19375 @end group
19376 @group
19377 ;; If we do get all the way thru, make this-command indicate that.
19378 (if (eq this-command t)
19379 (setq this-command 'yank))
19380 nil)
19381 @end group
19382 @end smallexample
19383
19384 The key expression is @code{insert-for-yank}, which inserts the string
19385 returned by @code{current-kill}, but removes some text properties from
19386 it.
19387
19388 However, before getting to that expression, the function sets the value
19389 of @code{yank-window-start} to the position returned by the
19390 @code{(window-start)} expression, the position at which the display
19391 currently starts. The @code{yank} function also sets
19392 @code{this-command} and pushes the mark.
19393
19394 After it yanks the appropriate element, if the optional argument is a
19395 @sc{cons} rather than a number or nothing, it puts point at beginning
19396 of the yanked text and mark at its end.
19397
19398 (The @code{prog1} function is like @code{progn} but returns the value
19399 of its first argument rather than the value of its last argument. Its
19400 first argument is forced to return the buffer's mark as an integer.
19401 You can see the documentation for these functions by placing point
19402 over them in this buffer and then typing @kbd{C-h f}
19403 (@code{describe-function}) followed by a @kbd{RET}; the default is the
19404 function.)
19405
19406 The last part of the function tells what to do when it succeeds.
19407
19408 @node yank-pop
19409 @appendixsec @code{yank-pop}
19410 @findex yank-pop
19411
19412 After understanding @code{yank} and @code{current-kill}, you know how
19413 to approach the @code{yank-pop} function. Leaving out the
19414 documentation to save space, it looks like this:
19415
19416 @c GNU Emacs 22
19417 @smallexample
19418 @group
19419 (defun yank-pop (&optional arg)
19420 "@dots{}"
19421 (interactive "*p")
19422 (if (not (eq last-command 'yank))
19423 (error "Previous command was not a yank"))
19424 @end group
19425 @group
19426 (setq this-command 'yank)
19427 (unless arg (setq arg 1))
19428 (let ((inhibit-read-only t)
19429 (before (< (point) (mark t))))
19430 @end group
19431 @group
19432 (if before
19433 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (point) (mark t))
19434 (funcall (or yank-undo-function 'delete-region) (mark t) (point)))
19435 (setq yank-undo-function nil)
19436 @end group
19437 @group
19438 (set-marker (mark-marker) (point) (current-buffer))
19439 (insert-for-yank (current-kill arg))
19440 ;; Set the window start back where it was in the yank command,
19441 ;; if possible.
19442 (set-window-start (selected-window) yank-window-start t)
19443 @end group
19444 @group
19445 (if before
19446 ;; This is like exchange-point-and-mark,
19447 ;; but doesn't activate the mark.
19448 ;; It is cleaner to avoid activation, even though the command
19449 ;; loop would deactivate the mark because we inserted text.
19450 (goto-char (prog1 (mark t)
19451 (set-marker (mark-marker)
19452 (point)
19453 (current-buffer))))))
19454 nil)
19455 @end group
19456 @end smallexample
19457
19458 The function is interactive with a small @samp{p} so the prefix
19459 argument is processed and passed to the function. The command can
19460 only be used after a previous yank; otherwise an error message is
19461 sent. This check uses the variable @code{last-command} which is set
19462 by @code{yank} and is discussed elsewhere.
19463 (@xref{copy-region-as-kill}.)
19464
19465 The @code{let} clause sets the variable @code{before} to true or false
19466 depending whether point is before or after mark and then the region
19467 between point and mark is deleted. This is the region that was just
19468 inserted by the previous yank and it is this text that will be
19469 replaced.
19470
19471 @code{funcall} calls its first argument as a function, passing
19472 remaining arguments to it. The first argument is whatever the
19473 @code{or} expression returns. The two remaining arguments are the
19474 positions of point and mark set by the preceding @code{yank} command.
19475
19476 There is more, but that is the hardest part.
19477
19478 @node ring file
19479 @appendixsec The @file{ring.el} File
19480 @cindex @file{ring.el} file
19481
19482 Interestingly, GNU Emacs posses a file called @file{ring.el} that
19483 provides many of the features we just discussed. But functions such
19484 as @code{kill-ring-yank-pointer} do not use this library, possibly
19485 because they were written earlier.
19486
19487 @node Full Graph
19488 @appendix A Graph with Labeled Axes
19489
19490 Printed axes help you understand a graph. They convey scale. In an
19491 earlier chapter (@pxref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}), we
19492 wrote the code to print the body of a graph. Here we write the code
19493 for printing and labeling vertical and horizontal axes, along with the
19494 body itself.
19495
19496 @menu
19497 * Labeled Example::
19498 * print-graph Varlist:: @code{let} expression in @code{print-graph}.
19499 * print-Y-axis:: Print a label for the vertical axis.
19500 * print-X-axis:: Print a horizontal label.
19501 * Print Whole Graph:: The function to print a complete graph.
19502 @end menu
19503
19504 @ifnottex
19505 @node Labeled Example
19506 @unnumberedsec Labeled Example Graph
19507 @end ifnottex
19508
19509 Since insertions fill a buffer to the right and below point, the new
19510 graph printing function should first print the Y or vertical axis,
19511 then the body of the graph, and finally the X or horizontal axis.
19512 This sequence lays out for us the contents of the function:
19513
19514 @enumerate
19515 @item
19516 Set up code.
19517
19518 @item
19519 Print Y axis.
19520
19521 @item
19522 Print body of graph.
19523
19524 @item
19525 Print X axis.
19526 @end enumerate
19527
19528 @need 800
19529 Here is an example of how a finished graph should look:
19530
19531 @smallexample
19532 @group
19533 10 -
19534 *
19535 * *
19536 * **
19537 * ***
19538 5 - * *******
19539 * *** *******
19540 *************
19541 ***************
19542 1 - ****************
19543 | | | |
19544 1 5 10 15
19545 @end group
19546 @end smallexample
19547
19548 @noindent
19549 In this graph, both the vertical and the horizontal axes are labeled
19550 with numbers. However, in some graphs, the horizontal axis is time
19551 and would be better labeled with months, like this:
19552
19553 @smallexample
19554 @group
19555 5 - *
19556 * ** *
19557 *******
19558 ********** **
19559 1 - **************
19560 | ^ |
19561 Jan June Jan
19562 @end group
19563 @end smallexample
19564
19565 Indeed, with a little thought, we can easily come up with a variety of
19566 vertical and horizontal labeling schemes. Our task could become
19567 complicated. But complications breed confusion. Rather than permit
19568 this, it is better choose a simple labeling scheme for our first
19569 effort, and to modify or replace it later.
19570
19571 @need 1200
19572 These considerations suggest the following outline for the
19573 @code{print-graph} function:
19574
19575 @smallexample
19576 @group
19577 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
19578 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
19579 (let ((height @dots{}
19580 @dots{}))
19581 @end group
19582 @group
19583 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
19584 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
19585 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
19586 @end group
19587 @end smallexample
19588
19589 We can work on each part of the @code{print-graph} function definition
19590 in turn.
19591
19592 @node print-graph Varlist
19593 @appendixsec The @code{print-graph} Varlist
19594 @cindex @code{print-graph} varlist
19595
19596 In writing the @code{print-graph} function, the first task is to write
19597 the varlist in the @code{let} expression. (We will leave aside for the
19598 moment any thoughts about making the function interactive or about the
19599 contents of its documentation string.)
19600
19601 The varlist should set several values. Clearly, the top of the label
19602 for the vertical axis must be at least the height of the graph, which
19603 means that we must obtain this information here. Note that the
19604 @code{print-graph-body} function also requires this information. There
19605 is no reason to calculate the height of the graph in two different
19606 places, so we should change @code{print-graph-body} from the way we
19607 defined it earlier to take advantage of the calculation.
19608
19609 Similarly, both the function for printing the X axis labels and the
19610 @code{print-graph-body} function need to learn the value of the width of
19611 each symbol. We can perform the calculation here and change the
19612 definition for @code{print-graph-body} from the way we defined it in the
19613 previous chapter.
19614
19615 The length of the label for the horizontal axis must be at least as long
19616 as the graph. However, this information is used only in the function
19617 that prints the horizontal axis, so it does not need to be calculated here.
19618
19619 These thoughts lead us directly to the following form for the varlist
19620 in the @code{let} for @code{print-graph}:
19621
19622 @smallexample
19623 @group
19624 (let ((height (apply 'max numbers-list)) ; @r{First version.}
19625 (symbol-width (length graph-blank)))
19626 @end group
19627 @end smallexample
19628
19629 @noindent
19630 As we shall see, this expression is not quite right.
19631
19632 @need 2000
19633 @node print-Y-axis
19634 @appendixsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function
19635 @cindex Axis, print vertical
19636 @cindex Y axis printing
19637 @cindex Vertical axis printing
19638 @cindex Print vertical axis
19639
19640 The job of the @code{print-Y-axis} function is to print a label for
19641 the vertical axis that looks like this:
19642
19643 @smallexample
19644 @group
19645 10 -
19646
19647
19648
19649
19650 5 -
19651
19652
19653
19654 1 -
19655 @end group
19656 @end smallexample
19657
19658 @noindent
19659 The function should be passed the height of the graph, and then should
19660 construct and insert the appropriate numbers and marks.
19661
19662 @menu
19663 * print-Y-axis in Detail::
19664 * Height of label:: What height for the Y axis?
19665 * Compute a Remainder:: How to compute the remainder of a division.
19666 * Y Axis Element:: Construct a line for the Y axis.
19667 * Y-axis-column:: Generate a list of Y axis labels.
19668 * print-Y-axis Penultimate:: A not quite final version.
19669 @end menu
19670
19671 @ifnottex
19672 @node print-Y-axis in Detail
19673 @unnumberedsubsec The @code{print-Y-axis} Function in Detail
19674 @end ifnottex
19675
19676 It is easy enough to see in the figure what the Y axis label should
19677 look like; but to say in words, and then to write a function
19678 definition to do the job is another matter. It is not quite true to
19679 say that we want a number and a tic every five lines: there are only
19680 three lines between the @samp{1} and the @samp{5} (lines 2, 3, and 4),
19681 but four lines between the @samp{5} and the @samp{10} (lines 6, 7, 8,
19682 and 9). It is better to say that we want a number and a tic mark on
19683 the base line (number 1) and then that we want a number and a tic on
19684 the fifth line from the bottom and on every line that is a multiple of
19685 five.
19686
19687 @ifnottex
19688 @node Height of label
19689 @unnumberedsubsec What height should the label be?
19690 @end ifnottex
19691
19692 The next issue is what height the label should be? Suppose the maximum
19693 height of tallest column of the graph is seven. Should the highest
19694 label on the Y axis be @samp{5 -}, and should the graph stick up above
19695 the label? Or should the highest label be @samp{7 -}, and mark the peak
19696 of the graph? Or should the highest label be @code{10 -}, which is a
19697 multiple of five, and be higher than the topmost value of the graph?
19698
19699 The latter form is preferred. Most graphs are drawn within rectangles
19700 whose sides are an integral number of steps long---5, 10, 15, and so
19701 on for a step distance of five. But as soon as we decide to use a
19702 step height for the vertical axis, we discover that the simple
19703 expression in the varlist for computing the height is wrong. The
19704 expression is @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)}. This returns the
19705 precise height, not the maximum height plus whatever is necessary to
19706 round up to the nearest multiple of five. A more complex expression
19707 is required.
19708
19709 As usual in cases like this, a complex problem becomes simpler if it is
19710 divided into several smaller problems.
19711
19712 First, consider the case when the highest value of the graph is an
19713 integral multiple of five---when it is 5, 10, 15, or some higher
19714 multiple of five. We can use this value as the Y axis height.
19715
19716 A fairly simply way to determine whether a number is a multiple of
19717 five is to divide it by five and see if the division results in a
19718 remainder. If there is no remainder, the number is a multiple of
19719 five. Thus, seven divided by five has a remainder of two, and seven
19720 is not an integral multiple of five. Put in slightly different
19721 language, more reminiscent of the classroom, five goes into seven
19722 once, with a remainder of two. However, five goes into ten twice,
19723 with no remainder: ten is an integral multiple of five.
19724
19725 @node Compute a Remainder
19726 @appendixsubsec Side Trip: Compute a Remainder
19727
19728 @findex % @r{(remainder function)}
19729 @cindex Remainder function, @code{%}
19730 In Lisp, the function for computing a remainder is @code{%}. The
19731 function returns the remainder of its first argument divided by its
19732 second argument. As it happens, @code{%} is a function in Emacs Lisp
19733 that you cannot discover using @code{apropos}: you find nothing if you
19734 type @kbd{M-x apropos @key{RET} remainder @key{RET}}. The only way to
19735 learn of the existence of @code{%} is to read about it in a book such
19736 as this or in the Emacs Lisp sources.
19737
19738 You can try the @code{%} function by evaluating the following two
19739 expressions:
19740
19741 @smallexample
19742 @group
19743 (% 7 5)
19744
19745 (% 10 5)
19746 @end group
19747 @end smallexample
19748
19749 @noindent
19750 The first expression returns 2 and the second expression returns 0.
19751
19752 To test whether the returned value is zero or some other number, we
19753 can use the @code{zerop} function. This function returns @code{t} if
19754 its argument, which must be a number, is zero.
19755
19756 @smallexample
19757 @group
19758 (zerop (% 7 5))
19759 @result{} nil
19760
19761 (zerop (% 10 5))
19762 @result{} t
19763 @end group
19764 @end smallexample
19765
19766 Thus, the following expression will return @code{t} if the height
19767 of the graph is evenly divisible by five:
19768
19769 @smallexample
19770 (zerop (% height 5))
19771 @end smallexample
19772
19773 @noindent
19774 (The value of @code{height}, of course, can be found from @code{(apply
19775 'max numbers-list)}.)
19776
19777 On the other hand, if the value of @code{height} is not a multiple of
19778 five, we want to reset the value to the next higher multiple of five.
19779 This is straightforward arithmetic using functions with which we are
19780 already familiar. First, we divide the value of @code{height} by five
19781 to determine how many times five goes into the number. Thus, five
19782 goes into twelve twice. If we add one to this quotient and multiply by
19783 five, we will obtain the value of the next multiple of five that is
19784 larger than the height. Five goes into twelve twice. Add one to two,
19785 and multiply by five; the result is fifteen, which is the next multiple
19786 of five that is higher than twelve. The Lisp expression for this is:
19787
19788 @smallexample
19789 (* (1+ (/ height 5)) 5)
19790 @end smallexample
19791
19792 @noindent
19793 For example, if you evaluate the following, the result is 15:
19794
19795 @smallexample
19796 (* (1+ (/ 12 5)) 5)
19797 @end smallexample
19798
19799 All through this discussion, we have been using ``five'' as the value
19800 for spacing labels on the Y axis; but we may want to use some other
19801 value. For generality, we should replace ``five'' with a variable to
19802 which we can assign a value. The best name I can think of for this
19803 variable is @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
19804
19805 @need 1250
19806 Using this term, and an @code{if} expression, we produce the
19807 following:
19808
19809 @smallexample
19810 @group
19811 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19812 height
19813 ;; @r{else}
19814 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19815 Y-axis-label-spacing))
19816 @end group
19817 @end smallexample
19818
19819 @noindent
19820 This expression returns the value of @code{height} itself if the height
19821 is an even multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing} or
19822 else it computes and returns a value of @code{height} that is equal to
19823 the next higher multiple of the value of the @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}.
19824
19825 We can now include this expression in the @code{let} expression of the
19826 @code{print-graph} function (after first setting the value of
19827 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}):
19828 @vindex Y-axis-label-spacing
19829
19830 @smallexample
19831 @group
19832 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
19833 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
19834 @end group
19835
19836 @group
19837 @dots{}
19838 (let* ((height (apply 'max numbers-list))
19839 (height-of-top-line
19840 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19841 height
19842 @end group
19843 @group
19844 ;; @r{else}
19845 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19846 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
19847 (symbol-width (length graph-blank))))
19848 @dots{}
19849 @end group
19850 @end smallexample
19851
19852 @noindent
19853 (Note use of the @code{let*} function: the initial value of height is
19854 computed once by the @code{(apply 'max numbers-list)} expression and
19855 then the resulting value of @code{height} is used to compute its
19856 final value. @xref{fwd-para let, , The @code{let*} expression}, for
19857 more about @code{let*}.)
19858
19859 @node Y Axis Element
19860 @appendixsubsec Construct a Y Axis Element
19861
19862 When we print the vertical axis, we want to insert strings such as
19863 @w{@samp{5 -}} and @w{@samp{10 - }} every five lines.
19864 Moreover, we want the numbers and dashes to line up, so shorter
19865 numbers must be padded with leading spaces. If some of the strings
19866 use two digit numbers, the strings with single digit numbers must
19867 include a leading blank space before the number.
19868
19869 @findex number-to-string
19870 To figure out the length of the number, the @code{length} function is
19871 used. But the @code{length} function works only with a string, not with
19872 a number. So the number has to be converted from being a number to
19873 being a string. This is done with the @code{number-to-string} function.
19874 For example,
19875
19876 @smallexample
19877 @group
19878 (length (number-to-string 35))
19879 @result{} 2
19880
19881 (length (number-to-string 100))
19882 @result{} 3
19883 @end group
19884 @end smallexample
19885
19886 @noindent
19887 (@code{number-to-string} is also called @code{int-to-string}; you will
19888 see this alternative name in various sources.)
19889
19890 In addition, in each label, each number is followed by a string such
19891 as @w{@samp{ - }}, which we will call the @code{Y-axis-tic} marker.
19892 This variable is defined with @code{defvar}:
19893
19894 @vindex Y-axis-tic
19895 @smallexample
19896 @group
19897 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
19898 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
19899 @end group
19900 @end smallexample
19901
19902 The length of the Y label is the sum of the length of the Y axis tic
19903 mark and the length of the number of the top of the graph.
19904
19905 @smallexample
19906 (length (concat (number-to-string height) Y-axis-tic)))
19907 @end smallexample
19908
19909 This value will be calculated by the @code{print-graph} function in
19910 its varlist as @code{full-Y-label-width} and passed on. (Note that we
19911 did not think to include this in the varlist when we first proposed it.)
19912
19913 To make a complete vertical axis label, a tic mark is concatenated
19914 with a number; and the two together may be preceded by one or more
19915 spaces depending on how long the number is. The label consists of
19916 three parts: the (optional) leading spaces, the number, and the tic
19917 mark. The function is passed the value of the number for the specific
19918 row, and the value of the width of the top line, which is calculated
19919 (just once) by @code{print-graph}.
19920
19921 @smallexample
19922 @group
19923 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
19924 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
19925 A numbered element looks like this ' 5 - ',
19926 and is padded as needed so all line up with
19927 the element for the largest number."
19928 @end group
19929 @group
19930 (let* ((leading-spaces
19931 (- full-Y-label-width
19932 (length
19933 (concat (number-to-string number)
19934 Y-axis-tic)))))
19935 @end group
19936 @group
19937 (concat
19938 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
19939 (number-to-string number)
19940 Y-axis-tic)))
19941 @end group
19942 @end smallexample
19943
19944 The @code{Y-axis-element} function concatenates together the leading
19945 spaces, if any; the number, as a string; and the tic mark.
19946
19947 To figure out how many leading spaces the label will need, the
19948 function subtracts the actual length of the label---the length of the
19949 number plus the length of the tic mark---from the desired label width.
19950
19951 @findex make-string
19952 Blank spaces are inserted using the @code{make-string} function. This
19953 function takes two arguments: the first tells it how long the string
19954 will be and the second is a symbol for the character to insert, in a
19955 special format. The format is a question mark followed by a blank
19956 space, like this, @samp{? }. @xref{Character Type, , Character Type,
19957 elisp, The GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual}, for a description of the
19958 syntax for characters. (Of course, you might want to replace the
19959 blank space by some other character @dots{} You know what to do.)
19960
19961 The @code{number-to-string} function is used in the concatenation
19962 expression, to convert the number to a string that is concatenated
19963 with the leading spaces and the tic mark.
19964
19965 @node Y-axis-column
19966 @appendixsubsec Create a Y Axis Column
19967
19968 The preceding functions provide all the tools needed to construct a
19969 function that generates a list of numbered and blank strings to insert
19970 as the label for the vertical axis:
19971
19972 @findex Y-axis-column
19973 @smallexample
19974 @group
19975 (defun Y-axis-column (height width-of-label)
19976 "Construct list of Y axis labels and blank strings.
19977 For HEIGHT of line above base and WIDTH-OF-LABEL."
19978 (let (Y-axis)
19979 @group
19980 @end group
19981 (while (> height 1)
19982 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
19983 ;; @r{Insert label.}
19984 (setq Y-axis
19985 (cons
19986 (Y-axis-element height width-of-label)
19987 Y-axis))
19988 @group
19989 @end group
19990 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
19991 (setq Y-axis
19992 (cons
19993 (make-string width-of-label ? )
19994 Y-axis)))
19995 (setq height (1- height)))
19996 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
19997 (setq Y-axis
19998 (cons (Y-axis-element 1 width-of-label) Y-axis))
19999 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20000 @end group
20001 @end smallexample
20002
20003 In this function, we start with the value of @code{height} and
20004 repetitively subtract one from its value. After each subtraction, we
20005 test to see whether the value is an integral multiple of the
20006 @code{Y-axis-label-spacing}. If it is, we construct a numbered label
20007 using the @code{Y-axis-element} function; if not, we construct a
20008 blank label using the @code{make-string} function. The base line
20009 consists of the number one followed by a tic mark.
20010
20011 @need 2000
20012 @node print-Y-axis Penultimate
20013 @appendixsubsec The Not Quite Final Version of @code{print-Y-axis}
20014
20015 The list constructed by the @code{Y-axis-column} function is passed to
20016 the @code{print-Y-axis} function, which inserts the list as a column.
20017
20018 @findex print-Y-axis
20019 @smallexample
20020 @group
20021 (defun print-Y-axis (height full-Y-label-width)
20022 "Insert Y axis using HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
20023 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
20024 Full width is the width of the highest label element."
20025 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
20026 ;; are passed by 'print-graph'.
20027 @end group
20028 @group
20029 (let ((start (point)))
20030 (insert-rectangle
20031 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width))
20032 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
20033 (goto-char start)
20034 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
20035 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
20036 @end group
20037 @end smallexample
20038
20039 The @code{print-Y-axis} uses the @code{insert-rectangle} function to
20040 insert the Y axis labels created by the @code{Y-axis-column} function.
20041 In addition, it places point at the correct position for printing the body of
20042 the graph.
20043
20044 You can test @code{print-Y-axis}:
20045
20046 @enumerate
20047 @item
20048 Install
20049
20050 @smallexample
20051 @group
20052 Y-axis-label-spacing
20053 Y-axis-tic
20054 Y-axis-element
20055 Y-axis-column
20056 print-Y-axis
20057 @end group
20058 @end smallexample
20059
20060 @item
20061 Copy the following expression:
20062
20063 @smallexample
20064 (print-Y-axis 12 5)
20065 @end smallexample
20066
20067 @item
20068 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20069 want the axis labels to start.
20070
20071 @item
20072 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20073
20074 @item
20075 Yank the @code{graph-body-print} expression into the minibuffer
20076 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20077
20078 @item
20079 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20080 @end enumerate
20081
20082 Emacs will print labels vertically, the top one being @w{@samp{10 -@w{
20083 }}}. (The @code{print-graph} function will pass the value of
20084 @code{height-of-top-line}, which in this case will end up as 15,
20085 thereby getting rid of what might appear as a bug.)
20086
20087 @need 2000
20088 @node print-X-axis
20089 @appendixsec The @code{print-X-axis} Function
20090 @cindex Axis, print horizontal
20091 @cindex X axis printing
20092 @cindex Print horizontal axis
20093 @cindex Horizontal axis printing
20094
20095 X axis labels are much like Y axis labels, except that the ticks are on a
20096 line above the numbers. Labels should look like this:
20097
20098 @smallexample
20099 @group
20100 | | | |
20101 1 5 10 15
20102 @end group
20103 @end smallexample
20104
20105 The first tic is under the first column of the graph and is preceded by
20106 several blank spaces. These spaces provide room in rows above for the Y
20107 axis labels. The second, third, fourth, and subsequent ticks are all
20108 spaced equally, according to the value of @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20109
20110 The second row of the X axis consists of numbers, preceded by several
20111 blank spaces and also separated according to the value of the variable
20112 @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20113
20114 The value of the variable @code{X-axis-label-spacing} should itself be
20115 measured in units of @code{symbol-width}, since you may want to change
20116 the width of the symbols that you are using to print the body of the
20117 graph without changing the ways the graph is labeled.
20118
20119 @menu
20120 * Similarities differences:: Much like @code{print-Y-axis}, but not exactly.
20121 * X Axis Tic Marks:: Create tic marks for the horizontal axis.
20122 @end menu
20123
20124 @ifnottex
20125 @node Similarities differences
20126 @unnumberedsubsec Similarities and differences
20127 @end ifnottex
20128
20129 The @code{print-X-axis} function is constructed in more or less the
20130 same fashion as the @code{print-Y-axis} function except that it has
20131 two lines: the line of tic marks and the numbers. We will write a
20132 separate function to print each line and then combine them within the
20133 @code{print-X-axis} function.
20134
20135 This is a three step process:
20136
20137 @enumerate
20138 @item
20139 Write a function to print the X axis tic marks, @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}.
20140
20141 @item
20142 Write a function to print the X numbers, @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20143
20144 @item
20145 Write a function to print both lines, the @code{print-X-axis} function,
20146 using @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20147 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20148 @end enumerate
20149
20150 @node X Axis Tic Marks
20151 @appendixsubsec X Axis Tic Marks
20152
20153 The first function should print the X axis tic marks. We must specify
20154 the tic marks themselves and their spacing:
20155
20156 @smallexample
20157 @group
20158 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
20159 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
20160 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
20161 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
20162 @end group
20163 @end smallexample
20164
20165 @noindent
20166 (Note that the value of @code{graph-blank} is set by another
20167 @code{defvar}. The @code{boundp} predicate checks whether it has
20168 already been set; @code{boundp} returns @code{nil} if it has not. If
20169 @code{graph-blank} were unbound and we did not use this conditional
20170 construction, in a recent GNU Emacs, we would enter the debugger and
20171 see an error message saying @samp{@w{Debugger entered--Lisp error:}
20172 @w{(void-variable graph-blank)}}.)
20173
20174 @need 1200
20175 Here is the @code{defvar} for @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}:
20176
20177 @smallexample
20178 @group
20179 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
20180 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
20181 @end group
20182 @end smallexample
20183
20184 @need 1250
20185 The goal is to make a line that looks like this:
20186
20187 @smallexample
20188 | | | |
20189 @end smallexample
20190
20191 The first tic is indented so that it is under the first column, which is
20192 indented to provide space for the Y axis labels.
20193
20194 A tic element consists of the blank spaces that stretch from one tic to
20195 the next plus a tic symbol. The number of blanks is determined by the
20196 width of the tic symbol and the @code{X-axis-label-spacing}.
20197
20198 @need 1250
20199 The code looks like this:
20200
20201 @smallexample
20202 @group
20203 ;;; X-axis-tic-element
20204 @dots{}
20205 (concat
20206 (make-string
20207 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20208 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20209 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20210 ? )
20211 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20212 X-axis-tic-symbol)
20213 @dots{}
20214 @end group
20215 @end smallexample
20216
20217 Next, we determine how many blanks are needed to indent the first tic
20218 mark to the first column of the graph. This uses the value of
20219 @code{full-Y-label-width} passed it by the @code{print-graph} function.
20220
20221 @need 1250
20222 The code to make @code{X-axis-leading-spaces}
20223 looks like this:
20224
20225 @smallexample
20226 @group
20227 ;; X-axis-leading-spaces
20228 @dots{}
20229 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? )
20230 @dots{}
20231 @end group
20232 @end smallexample
20233
20234 We also need to determine the length of the horizontal axis, which is
20235 the length of the numbers list, and the number of ticks in the horizontal
20236 axis:
20237
20238 @smallexample
20239 @group
20240 ;; X-length
20241 @dots{}
20242 (length numbers-list)
20243 @end group
20244
20245 @group
20246 ;; tic-width
20247 @dots{}
20248 (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20249 @end group
20250
20251 @group
20252 ;; number-of-X-ticks
20253 (if (zerop (% (X-length tic-width)))
20254 (/ (X-length tic-width))
20255 (1+ (/ (X-length tic-width))))
20256 @end group
20257 @end smallexample
20258
20259 @need 1250
20260 All this leads us directly to the function for printing the X axis tic line:
20261
20262 @findex print-X-axis-tic-line
20263 @smallexample
20264 @group
20265 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
20266 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
20267 "Print ticks for X axis."
20268 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20269 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
20270 @end group
20271 @group
20272 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
20273 (insert (concat
20274 (make-string
20275 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20276 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
20277 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
20278 ? )
20279 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20280 @end group
20281 @group
20282 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
20283 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20284 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
20285 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
20286 @end group
20287 @end smallexample
20288
20289 The line of numbers is equally straightforward:
20290
20291 @need 1250
20292 First, we create a numbered element with blank spaces before each number:
20293
20294 @findex X-axis-element
20295 @smallexample
20296 @group
20297 (defun X-axis-element (number)
20298 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
20299 (let ((leading-spaces
20300 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20301 (length (number-to-string number)))))
20302 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
20303 (number-to-string number))))
20304 @end group
20305 @end smallexample
20306
20307 Next, we create the function to print the numbered line, starting with
20308 the number ``1'' under the first column:
20309
20310 @findex print-X-axis-numbered-line
20311 @smallexample
20312 @group
20313 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
20314 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces)
20315 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
20316 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing))
20317 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
20318 (insert "1")
20319 @end group
20320 @group
20321 (insert (concat
20322 (make-string
20323 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
20324 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing) 2)
20325 ? )
20326 (number-to-string number)))
20327 @end group
20328 @group
20329 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
20330 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20331 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
20332 (insert (X-axis-element number))
20333 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
20334 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
20335 @end group
20336 @end smallexample
20337
20338 Finally, we need to write the @code{print-X-axis} that uses
20339 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and
20340 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}.
20341
20342 The function must determine the local values of the variables used by both
20343 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line} and @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and
20344 then it must call them. Also, it must print the carriage return that
20345 separates the two lines.
20346
20347 The function consists of a varlist that specifies five local variables,
20348 and calls to each of the two line printing functions:
20349
20350 @findex print-X-axis
20351 @smallexample
20352 @group
20353 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list)
20354 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST."
20355 (let* ((leading-spaces
20356 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
20357 @end group
20358 @group
20359 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
20360 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
20361 (X-length (length numbers-list))
20362 @end group
20363 @group
20364 (X-tic
20365 (concat
20366 (make-string
20367 @end group
20368 @group
20369 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
20370 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
20371 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
20372 ? )
20373 @end group
20374 @group
20375 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
20376 X-axis-tic-symbol))
20377 @end group
20378 @group
20379 (tic-number
20380 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
20381 (/ X-length tic-width)
20382 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
20383 @end group
20384 @group
20385 (print-X-axis-tic-line tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
20386 (insert "\n")
20387 (print-X-axis-numbered-line tic-number leading-spaces)))
20388 @end group
20389 @end smallexample
20390
20391 @need 1250
20392 You can test @code{print-X-axis}:
20393
20394 @enumerate
20395 @item
20396 Install @code{X-axis-tic-symbol}, @code{X-axis-label-spacing},
20397 @code{print-X-axis-tic-line}, as well as @code{X-axis-element},
20398 @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}, and @code{print-X-axis}.
20399
20400 @item
20401 Copy the following expression:
20402
20403 @smallexample
20404 @group
20405 (progn
20406 (let ((full-Y-label-width 5)
20407 (symbol-width 1))
20408 (print-X-axis
20409 '(1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16))))
20410 @end group
20411 @end smallexample
20412
20413 @item
20414 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20415 want the axis labels to start.
20416
20417 @item
20418 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20419
20420 @item
20421 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20422 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20423
20424 @item
20425 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20426 @end enumerate
20427
20428 @need 1250
20429 Emacs will print the horizontal axis like this:
20430 @sp 1
20431
20432 @smallexample
20433 @group
20434 | | | | |
20435 1 5 10 15 20
20436 @end group
20437 @end smallexample
20438
20439 @node Print Whole Graph
20440 @appendixsec Printing the Whole Graph
20441 @cindex Printing the whole graph
20442 @cindex Whole graph printing
20443 @cindex Graph, printing all
20444
20445 Now we are nearly ready to print the whole graph.
20446
20447 The function to print the graph with the proper labels follows the
20448 outline we created earlier (@pxref{Full Graph, , A Graph with Labeled
20449 Axes}), but with additions.
20450
20451 @need 1250
20452 Here is the outline:
20453
20454 @smallexample
20455 @group
20456 (defun print-graph (numbers-list)
20457 "@var{documentation}@dots{}"
20458 (let ((height @dots{}
20459 @dots{}))
20460 @end group
20461 @group
20462 (print-Y-axis height @dots{} )
20463 (graph-body-print numbers-list)
20464 (print-X-axis @dots{} )))
20465 @end group
20466 @end smallexample
20467
20468 @menu
20469 * The final version:: A few changes.
20470 * Test print-graph:: Run a short test.
20471 * Graphing words in defuns:: Executing the final code.
20472 * lambda:: How to write an anonymous function.
20473 * mapcar:: Apply a function to elements of a list.
20474 * Another Bug:: Yet another bug @dots{} most insidious.
20475 * Final printed graph:: The graph itself!
20476 @end menu
20477
20478 @ifnottex
20479 @node The final version
20480 @unnumberedsubsec Changes for the Final Version
20481 @end ifnottex
20482
20483 The final version is different from what we planned in two ways:
20484 first, it contains additional values calculated once in the varlist;
20485 second, it carries an option to specify the labels' increment per row.
20486 This latter feature turns out to be essential; otherwise, a graph may
20487 have more rows than fit on a display or on a sheet of paper.
20488
20489 @need 1500
20490 This new feature requires a change to the @code{Y-axis-column}
20491 function, to add @code{vertical-step} to it. The function looks like
20492 this:
20493
20494 @findex Y-axis-column @r{Final version.}
20495 @smallexample
20496 @group
20497 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20498 (defun Y-axis-column
20499 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
20500 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
20501 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20502 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
20503 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
20504 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
20505 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
20506 that each line is five units of the graph."
20507 @end group
20508 @group
20509 (let (Y-axis
20510 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
20511 (while (> height 1)
20512 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20513 @end group
20514 @group
20515 ;; @r{Insert label.}
20516 (setq Y-axis
20517 (cons
20518 (Y-axis-element
20519 (* height number-per-line)
20520 width-of-label)
20521 Y-axis))
20522 @end group
20523 @group
20524 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
20525 (setq Y-axis
20526 (cons
20527 (make-string width-of-label ? )
20528 Y-axis)))
20529 (setq height (1- height)))
20530 @end group
20531 @group
20532 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
20533 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
20534 (or vertical-step 1)
20535 width-of-label)
20536 Y-axis))
20537 (nreverse Y-axis)))
20538 @end group
20539 @end smallexample
20540
20541 The values for the maximum height of graph and the width of a symbol
20542 are computed by @code{print-graph} in its @code{let} expression; so
20543 @code{graph-body-print} must be changed to accept them.
20544
20545 @findex graph-body-print @r{Final version.}
20546 @smallexample
20547 @group
20548 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20549 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
20550 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20551 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20552 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
20553 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
20554 @end group
20555 @group
20556 (let (from-position)
20557 (while numbers-list
20558 (setq from-position (point))
20559 (insert-rectangle
20560 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
20561 (goto-char from-position)
20562 (forward-char symbol-width)
20563 @end group
20564 @group
20565 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
20566 (sit-for 0)
20567 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
20568 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
20569 (forward-line height)
20570 (insert "\n")))
20571 @end group
20572 @end smallexample
20573
20574 @need 1250
20575 Finally, the code for the @code{print-graph} function:
20576
20577 @findex print-graph @r{Final version.}
20578 @smallexample
20579 @group
20580 ;;; @r{Final version.}
20581 (defun print-graph
20582 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step)
20583 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
20584 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
20585 @end group
20586
20587 @group
20588 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
20589 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
20590 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
20591 each row is five units."
20592 @end group
20593 @group
20594 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
20595 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
20596 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
20597 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
20598 @end group
20599 @group
20600 (height-of-top-line
20601 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20602 height
20603 ;; @r{else}
20604 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
20605 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
20606 @end group
20607 @group
20608 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
20609 (full-Y-label-width
20610 (length
20611 @end group
20612 @group
20613 (concat
20614 (number-to-string
20615 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
20616 Y-axis-tic))))
20617 @end group
20618
20619 @group
20620 (print-Y-axis
20621 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
20622 @end group
20623 @group
20624 (graph-body-print
20625 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
20626 (print-X-axis numbers-list)))
20627 @end group
20628 @end smallexample
20629
20630 @node Test print-graph
20631 @appendixsubsec Testing @code{print-graph}
20632
20633 @need 1250
20634 We can test the @code{print-graph} function with a short list of numbers:
20635
20636 @enumerate
20637 @item
20638 Install the final versions of @code{Y-axis-column},
20639 @code{graph-body-print}, and @code{print-graph} (in addition to the
20640 rest of the code.)
20641
20642 @item
20643 Copy the following expression:
20644
20645 @smallexample
20646 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1))
20647 @end smallexample
20648
20649 @item
20650 Switch to the @file{*scratch*} buffer and place the cursor where you
20651 want the axis labels to start.
20652
20653 @item
20654 Type @kbd{M-:} (@code{eval-expression}).
20655
20656 @item
20657 Yank the test expression into the minibuffer
20658 with @kbd{C-y} (@code{yank)}.
20659
20660 @item
20661 Press @key{RET} to evaluate the expression.
20662 @end enumerate
20663
20664 @need 1250
20665 Emacs will print a graph that looks like this:
20666
20667 @smallexample
20668 @group
20669 10 -
20670
20671
20672 *
20673 ** *
20674 5 - **** *
20675 **** ***
20676 * *********
20677 ************
20678 1 - *************
20679
20680 | | | |
20681 1 5 10 15
20682 @end group
20683 @end smallexample
20684
20685 @need 1200
20686 On the other hand, if you pass @code{print-graph} a
20687 @code{vertical-step} value of 2, by evaluating this expression:
20688
20689 @smallexample
20690 (print-graph '(3 2 5 6 7 5 3 4 6 4 3 2 1) 2)
20691 @end smallexample
20692
20693 @need 1250
20694 @noindent
20695 The graph looks like this:
20696
20697 @smallexample
20698 @group
20699 20 -
20700
20701
20702 *
20703 ** *
20704 10 - **** *
20705 **** ***
20706 * *********
20707 ************
20708 2 - *************
20709
20710 | | | |
20711 1 5 10 15
20712 @end group
20713 @end smallexample
20714
20715 @noindent
20716 (A question: is the @samp{2} on the bottom of the vertical axis a bug or a
20717 feature? If you think it is a bug, and should be a @samp{1} instead, (or
20718 even a @samp{0}), you can modify the sources.)
20719
20720 @node Graphing words in defuns
20721 @appendixsubsec Graphing Numbers of Words and Symbols
20722
20723 Now for the graph for which all this code was written: a graph that
20724 shows how many function definitions contain fewer than 10 words and
20725 symbols, how many contain between 10 and 19 words and symbols, how
20726 many contain between 20 and 29 words and symbols, and so on.
20727
20728 This is a multi-step process. First make sure you have loaded all the
20729 requisite code.
20730
20731 @need 1500
20732 It is a good idea to reset the value of @code{top-of-ranges} in case
20733 you have set it to some different value. You can evaluate the
20734 following:
20735
20736 @smallexample
20737 @group
20738 (setq top-of-ranges
20739 '(10 20 30 40 50
20740 60 70 80 90 100
20741 110 120 130 140 150
20742 160 170 180 190 200
20743 210 220 230 240 250
20744 260 270 280 290 300)
20745 @end group
20746 @end smallexample
20747
20748 @noindent
20749 Next create a list of the number of words and symbols in each range.
20750
20751 @need 1500
20752 @noindent
20753 Evaluate the following:
20754
20755 @smallexample
20756 @group
20757 (setq list-for-graph
20758 (defuns-per-range
20759 (sort
20760 (recursive-lengths-list-many-files
20761 (directory-files "/usr/local/emacs/lisp"
20762 t ".+el$"))
20763 '<)
20764 top-of-ranges))
20765 @end group
20766 @end smallexample
20767
20768 @noindent
20769 On my old machine, this took about an hour. It looked though 303 Lisp
20770 files in my copy of Emacs version 19.23. After all that computing,
20771 the @code{list-for-graph} had this value:
20772
20773 @smallexample
20774 @group
20775 (537 1027 955 785 594 483 349 292 224 199 166 120 116 99
20776 90 80 67 48 52 45 41 33 28 26 25 20 12 28 11 13 220)
20777 @end group
20778 @end smallexample
20779
20780 @noindent
20781 This means that my copy of Emacs had 537 function definitions with
20782 fewer than 10 words or symbols in them, 1,027 function definitions
20783 with 10 to 19 words or symbols in them, 955 function definitions with
20784 20 to 29 words or symbols in them, and so on.
20785
20786 Clearly, just by looking at this list we can see that most function
20787 definitions contain ten to thirty words and symbols.
20788
20789 Now for printing. We do @emph{not} want to print a graph that is
20790 1,030 lines high @dots{} Instead, we should print a graph that is
20791 fewer than twenty-five lines high. A graph that height can be
20792 displayed on almost any monitor, and easily printed on a sheet of paper.
20793
20794 This means that each value in @code{list-for-graph} must be reduced to
20795 one-fiftieth its present value.
20796
20797 Here is a short function to do just that, using two functions we have
20798 not yet seen, @code{mapcar} and @code{lambda}.
20799
20800 @smallexample
20801 @group
20802 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
20803 "Return list, each number one-fiftieth of previous."
20804 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
20805 @end group
20806 @end smallexample
20807
20808 @node lambda
20809 @appendixsubsec A @code{lambda} Expression: Useful Anonymity
20810 @cindex Anonymous function
20811 @findex lambda
20812
20813 @code{lambda} is the symbol for an anonymous function, a function
20814 without a name. Every time you use an anonymous function, you need to
20815 include its whole body.
20816
20817 @need 1250
20818 @noindent
20819 Thus,
20820
20821 @smallexample
20822 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
20823 @end smallexample
20824
20825 @noindent
20826 is a function definition that says ``return the value resulting from
20827 dividing whatever is passed to me as @code{arg} by 50''.
20828
20829 @need 1200
20830 Earlier, for example, we had a function @code{multiply-by-seven}; it
20831 multiplied its argument by 7. This function is similar, except it
20832 divides its argument by 50; and, it has no name. The anonymous
20833 equivalent of @code{multiply-by-seven} is:
20834
20835 @smallexample
20836 (lambda (number) (* 7 number))
20837 @end smallexample
20838
20839 @noindent
20840 (@xref{defun, , The @code{defun} Macro}.)
20841
20842 @need 1250
20843 @noindent
20844 If we want to multiply 3 by 7, we can write:
20845
20846 @c clear print-postscript-figures
20847 @c lambda example diagram #1
20848 @ifnottex
20849 @smallexample
20850 @group
20851 (multiply-by-seven 3)
20852 \_______________/ ^
20853 | |
20854 function argument
20855 @end group
20856 @end smallexample
20857 @end ifnottex
20858 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20859 @sp 1
20860 @tex
20861 @center @image{lambda-1}
20862 @end tex
20863 @sp 1
20864 @end ifset
20865 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20866 @iftex
20867 @smallexample
20868 @group
20869 (multiply-by-seven 3)
20870 \_______________/ ^
20871 | |
20872 function argument
20873 @end group
20874 @end smallexample
20875 @end iftex
20876 @end ifclear
20877
20878 @noindent
20879 This expression returns 21.
20880
20881 @need 1250
20882 @noindent
20883 Similarly, we can write:
20884
20885 @c lambda example diagram #2
20886 @ifnottex
20887 @smallexample
20888 @group
20889 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
20890 \____________________________/ ^
20891 | |
20892 anonymous function argument
20893 @end group
20894 @end smallexample
20895 @end ifnottex
20896 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20897 @sp 1
20898 @tex
20899 @center @image{lambda-2}
20900 @end tex
20901 @sp 1
20902 @end ifset
20903 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20904 @iftex
20905 @smallexample
20906 @group
20907 ((lambda (number) (* 7 number)) 3)
20908 \____________________________/ ^
20909 | |
20910 anonymous function argument
20911 @end group
20912 @end smallexample
20913 @end iftex
20914 @end ifclear
20915
20916 @need 1250
20917 @noindent
20918 If we want to divide 100 by 50, we can write:
20919
20920 @c lambda example diagram #3
20921 @ifnottex
20922 @smallexample
20923 @group
20924 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
20925 \______________________/ \_/
20926 | |
20927 anonymous function argument
20928 @end group
20929 @end smallexample
20930 @end ifnottex
20931 @ifset print-postscript-figures
20932 @sp 1
20933 @tex
20934 @center @image{lambda-3}
20935 @end tex
20936 @sp 1
20937 @end ifset
20938 @ifclear print-postscript-figures
20939 @iftex
20940 @smallexample
20941 @group
20942 ((lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) 100)
20943 \______________________/ \_/
20944 | |
20945 anonymous function argument
20946 @end group
20947 @end smallexample
20948 @end iftex
20949 @end ifclear
20950
20951 @noindent
20952 This expression returns 2. The 100 is passed to the function, which
20953 divides that number by 50.
20954
20955 @xref{Lambda Expressions, , Lambda Expressions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
20956 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{lambda}. Lisp and lambda
20957 expressions derive from the Lambda Calculus.
20958
20959 @node mapcar
20960 @appendixsubsec The @code{mapcar} Function
20961 @findex mapcar
20962
20963 @code{mapcar} is a function that calls its first argument with each
20964 element of its second argument, in turn. The second argument must be
20965 a sequence.
20966
20967 The @samp{map} part of the name comes from the mathematical phrase,
20968 ``mapping over a domain'', meaning to apply a function to each of the
20969 elements in a domain. The mathematical phrase is based on the
20970 metaphor of a surveyor walking, one step at a time, over an area he is
20971 mapping. And @samp{car}, of course, comes from the Lisp notion of the
20972 first of a list.
20973
20974 @need 1250
20975 @noindent
20976 For example,
20977
20978 @smallexample
20979 @group
20980 (mapcar '1+ '(2 4 6))
20981 @result{} (3 5 7)
20982 @end group
20983 @end smallexample
20984
20985 @noindent
20986 The function @code{1+} which adds one to its argument, is executed on
20987 @emph{each} element of the list, and a new list is returned.
20988
20989 Contrast this with @code{apply}, which applies its first argument to
20990 all the remaining.
20991 (@xref{Readying a Graph, , Readying a Graph}, for a explanation of
20992 @code{apply}.)
20993
20994 @need 1250
20995 In the definition of @code{one-fiftieth}, the first argument is the
20996 anonymous function:
20997
20998 @smallexample
20999 (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50))
21000 @end smallexample
21001
21002 @noindent
21003 and the second argument is @code{full-range}, which will be bound to
21004 @code{list-for-graph}.
21005
21006 @need 1250
21007 The whole expression looks like this:
21008
21009 @smallexample
21010 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21011 @end smallexample
21012
21013 @xref{Mapping Functions, , Mapping Functions, elisp, The GNU Emacs
21014 Lisp Reference Manual}, for more about @code{mapcar}.
21015
21016 Using the @code{one-fiftieth} function, we can generate a list in
21017 which each element is one-fiftieth the size of the corresponding
21018 element in @code{list-for-graph}.
21019
21020 @smallexample
21021 @group
21022 (setq fiftieth-list-for-graph
21023 (one-fiftieth list-for-graph))
21024 @end group
21025 @end smallexample
21026
21027 @need 1250
21028 The resulting list looks like this:
21029
21030 @smallexample
21031 @group
21032 (10 20 19 15 11 9 6 5 4 3 3 2 2
21033 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4)
21034 @end group
21035 @end smallexample
21036
21037 @noindent
21038 This, we are almost ready to print! (We also notice the loss of
21039 information: many of the higher ranges are 0, meaning that fewer than
21040 50 defuns had that many words or symbols---but not necessarily meaning
21041 that none had that many words or symbols.)
21042
21043 @node Another Bug
21044 @appendixsubsec Another Bug @dots{} Most Insidious
21045 @cindex Bug, most insidious type
21046 @cindex Insidious type of bug
21047
21048 I said ``almost ready to print''! Of course, there is a bug in the
21049 @code{print-graph} function @dots{} It has a @code{vertical-step}
21050 option, but not a @code{horizontal-step} option. The
21051 @code{top-of-range} scale goes from 10 to 300 by tens. But the
21052 @code{print-graph} function will print only by ones.
21053
21054 This is a classic example of what some consider the most insidious
21055 type of bug, the bug of omission. This is not the kind of bug you can
21056 find by studying the code, for it is not in the code; it is an omitted
21057 feature. Your best actions are to try your program early and often;
21058 and try to arrange, as much as you can, to write code that is easy to
21059 understand and easy to change. Try to be aware, whenever you can,
21060 that whatever you have written, @emph{will} be rewritten, if not soon,
21061 eventually. A hard maxim to follow.
21062
21063 It is the @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line} function that needs the
21064 work; and then the @code{print-X-axis} and the @code{print-graph}
21065 functions need to be adapted. Not much needs to be done; there is one
21066 nicety: the numbers ought to line up under the tic marks. This takes
21067 a little thought.
21068
21069 @need 1250
21070 Here is the corrected @code{print-X-axis-numbered-line}:
21071
21072 @smallexample
21073 @group
21074 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21075 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21076 &optional horizontal-step)
21077 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21078 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21079 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21080 @end group
21081 @group
21082 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21083 ;; @r{Delete extra leading spaces.}
21084 (delete-char
21085 (- (1-
21086 (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21087 (insert (concat
21088 (make-string
21089 @end group
21090 @group
21091 ;; @r{Insert white space.}
21092 (- (* symbol-width
21093 X-axis-label-spacing)
21094 (1-
21095 (length
21096 (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21097 2)
21098 ? )
21099 (number-to-string
21100 (* number horizontal-step))))
21101 @end group
21102 @group
21103 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21104 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21105 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21106 (insert (X-axis-element
21107 (* number horizontal-step)))
21108 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21109 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21110 @end group
21111 @end smallexample
21112
21113 @need 1500
21114 If you are reading this in Info, you can see the new versions of
21115 @code{print-X-axis} @code{print-graph} and evaluate them. If you are
21116 reading this in a printed book, you can see the changed lines here
21117 (the full text is too much to print).
21118
21119 @iftex
21120 @smallexample
21121 @group
21122 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21123 @dots{}
21124 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21125 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step))
21126 @end group
21127 @end smallexample
21128
21129 @smallexample
21130 @group
21131 (defun print-graph
21132 (numbers-list
21133 &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21134 @dots{}
21135 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step))
21136 @end group
21137 @end smallexample
21138 @end iftex
21139
21140 @ifnottex
21141 @smallexample
21142 @group
21143 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21144 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21145 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21146 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21147 each column."
21148 @end group
21149 @group
21150 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21151 ;; are passed by 'print-graph'.
21152 (let* ((leading-spaces
21153 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21154 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21155 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21156 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21157 @end group
21158 @group
21159 (X-tic
21160 (concat
21161 (make-string
21162 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21163 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21164 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21165 ? )
21166 @end group
21167 @group
21168 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21169 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21170 (tic-number
21171 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21172 (/ X-length tic-width)
21173 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21174 @end group
21175
21176 @group
21177 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21178 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21179 (insert "\n")
21180 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21181 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21182 @end group
21183 @end smallexample
21184
21185 @smallexample
21186 @group
21187 (defun print-graph
21188 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21189 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21190 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21191 @end group
21192
21193 @group
21194 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21195 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21196 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21197 each row is five units.
21198 @end group
21199
21200 @group
21201 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21202 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21203 each column."
21204 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21205 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21206 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21207 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21208 @end group
21209 @group
21210 (height-of-top-line
21211 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21212 height
21213 ;; @r{else}
21214 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21215 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21216 @end group
21217 @group
21218 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21219 (full-Y-label-width
21220 (length
21221 (concat
21222 (number-to-string
21223 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21224 Y-axis-tic))))
21225 @end group
21226 @group
21227 (print-Y-axis
21228 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21229 (graph-body-print
21230 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21231 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21232 @end group
21233 @end smallexample
21234 @end ifnottex
21235
21236 @c qqq
21237 @ignore
21238 Graphing Definitions Re-listed
21239
21240 @need 1250
21241 Here are all the graphing definitions in their final form:
21242
21243 @smallexample
21244 @group
21245 (defvar top-of-ranges
21246 '(10 20 30 40 50
21247 60 70 80 90 100
21248 110 120 130 140 150
21249 160 170 180 190 200
21250 210 220 230 240 250)
21251 "List specifying ranges for `defuns-per-range'.")
21252 @end group
21253
21254 @group
21255 (defvar graph-symbol "*"
21256 "String used as symbol in graph, usually an asterisk.")
21257 @end group
21258
21259 @group
21260 (defvar graph-blank " "
21261 "String used as blank in graph, usually a blank space.
21262 graph-blank must be the same number of columns wide
21263 as graph-symbol.")
21264 @end group
21265
21266 @group
21267 (defvar Y-axis-tic " - "
21268 "String that follows number in a Y axis label.")
21269 @end group
21270
21271 @group
21272 (defvar Y-axis-label-spacing 5
21273 "Number of lines from one Y axis label to next.")
21274 @end group
21275
21276 @group
21277 (defvar X-axis-tic-symbol "|"
21278 "String to insert to point to a column in X axis.")
21279 @end group
21280
21281 @group
21282 (defvar X-axis-label-spacing
21283 (if (boundp 'graph-blank)
21284 (* 5 (length graph-blank)) 5)
21285 "Number of units from one X axis label to next.")
21286 @end group
21287 @end smallexample
21288
21289 @smallexample
21290 @group
21291 (defun count-words-in-defun ()
21292 "Return the number of words and symbols in a defun."
21293 (beginning-of-defun)
21294 (let ((count 0)
21295 (end (save-excursion (end-of-defun) (point))))
21296 @end group
21297
21298 @group
21299 (while
21300 (and (< (point) end)
21301 (re-search-forward
21302 "\\(\\w\\|\\s_\\)+[^ \t\n]*[ \t\n]*"
21303 end t))
21304 (setq count (1+ count)))
21305 count))
21306 @end group
21307 @end smallexample
21308
21309 @smallexample
21310 @group
21311 (defun lengths-list-file (filename)
21312 "Return list of definitions' lengths within FILE.
21313 The returned list is a list of numbers.
21314 Each number is the number of words or
21315 symbols in one function definition."
21316 @end group
21317
21318 @group
21319 (message "Working on '%s' ... " filename)
21320 (save-excursion
21321 (let ((buffer (find-file-noselect filename))
21322 (lengths-list))
21323 (set-buffer buffer)
21324 (setq buffer-read-only t)
21325 (widen)
21326 (goto-char (point-min))
21327 @end group
21328
21329 @group
21330 (while (re-search-forward "^(defun" nil t)
21331 (setq lengths-list
21332 (cons (count-words-in-defun) lengths-list)))
21333 (kill-buffer buffer)
21334 lengths-list)))
21335 @end group
21336 @end smallexample
21337
21338 @smallexample
21339 @group
21340 (defun lengths-list-many-files (list-of-files)
21341 "Return list of lengths of defuns in LIST-OF-FILES."
21342 (let (lengths-list)
21343 ;;; @r{true-or-false-test}
21344 (while list-of-files
21345 (setq lengths-list
21346 (append
21347 lengths-list
21348 @end group
21349 @group
21350 ;;; @r{Generate a lengths' list.}
21351 (lengths-list-file
21352 (expand-file-name (car list-of-files)))))
21353 ;;; @r{Make files' list shorter.}
21354 (setq list-of-files (cdr list-of-files)))
21355 ;;; @r{Return final value of lengths' list.}
21356 lengths-list))
21357 @end group
21358 @end smallexample
21359
21360 @smallexample
21361 @group
21362 (defun defuns-per-range (sorted-lengths top-of-ranges)
21363 "SORTED-LENGTHS defuns in each TOP-OF-RANGES range."
21364 (let ((top-of-range (car top-of-ranges))
21365 (number-within-range 0)
21366 defuns-per-range-list)
21367 @end group
21368
21369 @group
21370 ;; @r{Outer loop.}
21371 (while top-of-ranges
21372
21373 ;; @r{Inner loop.}
21374 (while (and
21375 ;; @r{Need number for numeric test.}
21376 (car sorted-lengths)
21377 (< (car sorted-lengths) top-of-range))
21378
21379 ;; @r{Count number of definitions within current range.}
21380 (setq number-within-range (1+ number-within-range))
21381 (setq sorted-lengths (cdr sorted-lengths)))
21382 @end group
21383
21384 @group
21385 ;; @r{Exit inner loop but remain within outer loop.}
21386
21387 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21388 (cons number-within-range defuns-per-range-list))
21389 (setq number-within-range 0) ; @r{Reset count to zero.}
21390
21391 ;; @r{Move to next range.}
21392 (setq top-of-ranges (cdr top-of-ranges))
21393 ;; @r{Specify next top of range value.}
21394 (setq top-of-range (car top-of-ranges)))
21395 @end group
21396
21397 @group
21398 ;; @r{Exit outer loop and count the number of defuns larger than}
21399 ;; @r{ the largest top-of-range value.}
21400 (setq defuns-per-range-list
21401 (cons
21402 (length sorted-lengths)
21403 defuns-per-range-list))
21404
21405 ;; @r{Return a list of the number of definitions within each range,}
21406 ;; @r{ smallest to largest.}
21407 (nreverse defuns-per-range-list)))
21408 @end group
21409 @end smallexample
21410
21411 @smallexample
21412 @group
21413 (defun column-of-graph (max-graph-height actual-height)
21414 "Return list of MAX-GRAPH-HEIGHT strings;
21415 ACTUAL-HEIGHT are graph-symbols.
21416 The graph-symbols are contiguous entries at the end
21417 of the list.
21418 The list will be inserted as one column of a graph.
21419 The strings are either graph-blank or graph-symbol."
21420 @end group
21421
21422 @group
21423 (let ((insert-list nil)
21424 (number-of-top-blanks
21425 (- max-graph-height actual-height)))
21426
21427 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-symbols}.}
21428 (while (> actual-height 0)
21429 (setq insert-list (cons graph-symbol insert-list))
21430 (setq actual-height (1- actual-height)))
21431 @end group
21432
21433 @group
21434 ;; @r{Fill in @code{graph-blanks}.}
21435 (while (> number-of-top-blanks 0)
21436 (setq insert-list (cons graph-blank insert-list))
21437 (setq number-of-top-blanks
21438 (1- number-of-top-blanks)))
21439
21440 ;; @r{Return whole list.}
21441 insert-list))
21442 @end group
21443 @end smallexample
21444
21445 @smallexample
21446 @group
21447 (defun Y-axis-element (number full-Y-label-width)
21448 "Construct a NUMBERed label element.
21449 A numbered element looks like this ' 5 - ',
21450 and is padded as needed so all line up with
21451 the element for the largest number."
21452 @end group
21453 @group
21454 (let* ((leading-spaces
21455 (- full-Y-label-width
21456 (length
21457 (concat (number-to-string number)
21458 Y-axis-tic)))))
21459 @end group
21460 @group
21461 (concat
21462 (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21463 (number-to-string number)
21464 Y-axis-tic)))
21465 @end group
21466 @end smallexample
21467
21468 @smallexample
21469 @group
21470 (defun print-Y-axis
21471 (height full-Y-label-width &optional vertical-step)
21472 "Insert Y axis by HEIGHT and FULL-Y-LABEL-WIDTH.
21473 Height must be the maximum height of the graph.
21474 Full width is the width of the highest label element.
21475 Optionally, print according to VERTICAL-STEP."
21476 @end group
21477 @group
21478 ;; Value of height and full-Y-label-width
21479 ;; are passed by 'print-graph'.
21480 (let ((start (point)))
21481 (insert-rectangle
21482 (Y-axis-column height full-Y-label-width vertical-step))
21483 @end group
21484 @group
21485 ;; @r{Place point ready for inserting graph.}
21486 (goto-char start)
21487 ;; @r{Move point forward by value of} full-Y-label-width
21488 (forward-char full-Y-label-width)))
21489 @end group
21490 @end smallexample
21491
21492 @smallexample
21493 @group
21494 (defun print-X-axis-tic-line
21495 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces X-axis-tic-element)
21496 "Print ticks for X axis."
21497 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21498 (insert X-axis-tic-symbol) ; @r{Under first column.}
21499 @end group
21500 @group
21501 ;; @r{Insert second tic in the right spot.}
21502 (insert (concat
21503 (make-string
21504 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21505 ;; @r{Insert white space up to second tic symbol.}
21506 (* 2 (length X-axis-tic-symbol)))
21507 ? )
21508 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21509 @end group
21510 @group
21511 ;; @r{Insert remaining ticks.}
21512 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21513 (insert X-axis-tic-element)
21514 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics))))
21515 @end group
21516 @end smallexample
21517
21518 @smallexample
21519 @group
21520 (defun X-axis-element (number)
21521 "Construct a numbered X axis element."
21522 (let ((leading-spaces
21523 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21524 (length (number-to-string number)))))
21525 (concat (make-string leading-spaces ? )
21526 (number-to-string number))))
21527 @end group
21528 @end smallexample
21529
21530 @smallexample
21531 @group
21532 (defun graph-body-print (numbers-list height symbol-width)
21533 "Print a bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21534 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21535 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21536 SYMBOL-WIDTH is number of each column."
21537 @end group
21538 @group
21539 (let (from-position)
21540 (while numbers-list
21541 (setq from-position (point))
21542 (insert-rectangle
21543 (column-of-graph height (car numbers-list)))
21544 (goto-char from-position)
21545 (forward-char symbol-width)
21546 @end group
21547 @group
21548 ;; @r{Draw graph column by column.}
21549 (sit-for 0)
21550 (setq numbers-list (cdr numbers-list)))
21551 ;; @r{Place point for X axis labels.}
21552 (forward-line height)
21553 (insert "\n")))
21554 @end group
21555 @end smallexample
21556
21557 @smallexample
21558 @group
21559 (defun Y-axis-column
21560 (height width-of-label &optional vertical-step)
21561 "Construct list of labels for Y axis.
21562 HEIGHT is maximum height of graph.
21563 WIDTH-OF-LABEL is maximum width of label.
21564 @end group
21565 @group
21566 VERTICAL-STEP, an option, is a positive integer
21567 that specifies how much a Y axis label increments
21568 for each line. For example, a step of 5 means
21569 that each line is five units of the graph."
21570 (let (Y-axis
21571 (number-per-line (or vertical-step 1)))
21572 @end group
21573 @group
21574 (while (> height 1)
21575 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21576 ;; @r{Insert label.}
21577 (setq Y-axis
21578 (cons
21579 (Y-axis-element
21580 (* height number-per-line)
21581 width-of-label)
21582 Y-axis))
21583 @end group
21584 @group
21585 ;; @r{Else, insert blanks.}
21586 (setq Y-axis
21587 (cons
21588 (make-string width-of-label ? )
21589 Y-axis)))
21590 (setq height (1- height)))
21591 @end group
21592 @group
21593 ;; @r{Insert base line.}
21594 (setq Y-axis (cons (Y-axis-element
21595 (or vertical-step 1)
21596 width-of-label)
21597 Y-axis))
21598 (nreverse Y-axis)))
21599 @end group
21600 @end smallexample
21601
21602 @smallexample
21603 @group
21604 (defun print-X-axis-numbered-line
21605 (number-of-X-tics X-axis-leading-spaces
21606 &optional horizontal-step)
21607 "Print line of X-axis numbers"
21608 (let ((number X-axis-label-spacing)
21609 (horizontal-step (or horizontal-step 1)))
21610 @end group
21611 @group
21612 (insert X-axis-leading-spaces)
21613 ;; line up number
21614 (delete-char (- (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))))
21615 (insert (concat
21616 (make-string
21617 ;; @r{Insert white space up to next number.}
21618 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21619 (1- (length (number-to-string horizontal-step)))
21620 2)
21621 ? )
21622 (number-to-string (* number horizontal-step))))
21623 @end group
21624 @group
21625 ;; @r{Insert remaining numbers.}
21626 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21627 (while (> number-of-X-tics 1)
21628 (insert (X-axis-element (* number horizontal-step)))
21629 (setq number (+ number X-axis-label-spacing))
21630 (setq number-of-X-tics (1- number-of-X-tics)))))
21631 @end group
21632 @end smallexample
21633
21634 @smallexample
21635 @group
21636 (defun print-X-axis (numbers-list horizontal-step)
21637 "Print X axis labels to length of NUMBERS-LIST.
21638 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21639 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21640 each column."
21641 @end group
21642 @group
21643 ;; Value of symbol-width and full-Y-label-width
21644 ;; are passed by 'print-graph'.
21645 (let* ((leading-spaces
21646 (make-string full-Y-label-width ? ))
21647 ;; symbol-width @r{is provided by} graph-body-print
21648 (tic-width (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing))
21649 (X-length (length numbers-list))
21650 @end group
21651 @group
21652 (X-tic
21653 (concat
21654 (make-string
21655 ;; @r{Make a string of blanks.}
21656 (- (* symbol-width X-axis-label-spacing)
21657 (length X-axis-tic-symbol))
21658 ? )
21659 @end group
21660 @group
21661 ;; @r{Concatenate blanks with tic symbol.}
21662 X-axis-tic-symbol))
21663 (tic-number
21664 (if (zerop (% X-length tic-width))
21665 (/ X-length tic-width)
21666 (1+ (/ X-length tic-width)))))
21667 @end group
21668
21669 @group
21670 (print-X-axis-tic-line
21671 tic-number leading-spaces X-tic)
21672 (insert "\n")
21673 (print-X-axis-numbered-line
21674 tic-number leading-spaces horizontal-step)))
21675 @end group
21676 @end smallexample
21677
21678 @smallexample
21679 @group
21680 (defun one-fiftieth (full-range)
21681 "Return list, each number of which is 1/50th previous."
21682 (mapcar (lambda (arg) (/ arg 50)) full-range))
21683 @end group
21684 @end smallexample
21685
21686 @smallexample
21687 @group
21688 (defun print-graph
21689 (numbers-list &optional vertical-step horizontal-step)
21690 "Print labeled bar graph of the NUMBERS-LIST.
21691 The numbers-list consists of the Y-axis values.
21692 @end group
21693
21694 @group
21695 Optionally, VERTICAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21696 specifies how much a Y axis label increments for
21697 each line. For example, a step of 5 means that
21698 each row is five units.
21699 @end group
21700
21701 @group
21702 Optionally, HORIZONTAL-STEP, a positive integer,
21703 specifies how much an X axis label increments for
21704 each column."
21705 (let* ((symbol-width (length graph-blank))
21706 ;; @code{height} @r{is both the largest number}
21707 ;; @r{and the number with the most digits.}
21708 (height (apply 'max numbers-list))
21709 @end group
21710 @group
21711 (height-of-top-line
21712 (if (zerop (% height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21713 height
21714 ;; @r{else}
21715 (* (1+ (/ height Y-axis-label-spacing))
21716 Y-axis-label-spacing)))
21717 @end group
21718 @group
21719 (vertical-step (or vertical-step 1))
21720 (full-Y-label-width
21721 (length
21722 (concat
21723 (number-to-string
21724 (* height-of-top-line vertical-step))
21725 Y-axis-tic))))
21726 @end group
21727 @group
21728
21729 (print-Y-axis
21730 height-of-top-line full-Y-label-width vertical-step)
21731 (graph-body-print
21732 numbers-list height-of-top-line symbol-width)
21733 (print-X-axis numbers-list horizontal-step)))
21734 @end group
21735 @end smallexample
21736 @c qqq
21737 @end ignore
21738
21739 @page
21740 @node Final printed graph
21741 @appendixsubsec The Printed Graph
21742
21743 When made and installed, you can call the @code{print-graph} command
21744 like this:
21745 @sp 1
21746
21747 @smallexample
21748 @group
21749 (print-graph fiftieth-list-for-graph 50 10)
21750 @end group
21751 @end smallexample
21752 @sp 1
21753
21754 @noindent
21755 Here is the graph:
21756 @sp 2
21757
21758 @smallexample
21759 @group
21760 1000 - *
21761 **
21762 **
21763 **
21764 **
21765 750 - ***
21766 ***
21767 ***
21768 ***
21769 ****
21770 500 - *****
21771 ******
21772 ******
21773 ******
21774 *******
21775 250 - ********
21776 ********* *
21777 *********** *
21778 ************* *
21779 50 - ***************** * *
21780 | | | | | | | |
21781 10 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
21782 @end group
21783 @end smallexample
21784
21785 @sp 2
21786
21787 @noindent
21788 The largest group of functions contain 10--19 words and symbols each.
21789
21790 @node Free Software and Free Manuals
21791 @appendix Free Software and Free Manuals
21792
21793 @strong{by Richard M. Stallman}
21794 @sp 1
21795
21796 The biggest deficiency in free operating systems is not in the
21797 software---it is the lack of good free manuals that we can include in
21798 these systems. Many of our most important programs do not come with
21799 full manuals. Documentation is an essential part of any software
21800 package; when an important free software package does not come with a
21801 free manual, that is a major gap. We have many such gaps today.
21802
21803 Once upon a time, many years ago, I thought I would learn Perl. I got
21804 a copy of a free manual, but I found it hard to read. When I asked
21805 Perl users about alternatives, they told me that there were better
21806 introductory manuals---but those were not free.
21807
21808 Why was this? The authors of the good manuals had written them for
21809 O'Reilly Associates, which published them with restrictive terms---no
21810 copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
21811 them from the free software community.
21812
21813 That wasn't the first time this sort of thing has happened, and (to
21814 our community's great loss) it was far from the last. Proprietary
21815 manual publishers have enticed a great many authors to restrict their
21816 manuals since then. Many times I have heard a GNU user eagerly tell me
21817 about a manual that he is writing, with which he expects to help the
21818 GNU project---and then had my hopes dashed, as he proceeded to explain
21819 that he had signed a contract with a publisher that would restrict it
21820 so that we cannot use it.
21821
21822 Given that writing good English is a rare skill among programmers, we
21823 can ill afford to lose manuals this way.
21824
21825 Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
21826 price. The problem with these manuals was not that O'Reilly Associates
21827 charged a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. The Free
21828 Software Foundation @uref{http://shop.fsf.org, sells printed copies} of
21829 free @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/doc.html, GNU manuals}, too.
21830 But GNU manuals are available in source code form, while these manuals
21831 are available only on paper. GNU manuals come with permission to copy
21832 and modify; the Perl manuals do not. These restrictions are the
21833 problems.
21834
21835 The criterion for a free manual is pretty much the same as for free
21836 software: it is a matter of giving all users certain
21837 freedoms. Redistribution (including commercial redistribution) must be
21838 permitted, so that the manual can accompany every copy of the program,
21839 on-line or on paper. Permission for modification is crucial too.
21840
21841 As a general rule, I don't believe that it is essential for people to
21842 have permission to modify all sorts of articles and books. The issues
21843 for writings are not necessarily the same as those for software. For
21844 example, I don't think you or I are obliged to give permission to
21845 modify articles like this one, which describe our actions and our
21846 views.
21847
21848 But there is a particular reason why the freedom to modify is crucial
21849 for documentation for free software. When people exercise their right
21850 to modify the software, and add or change its features, if they are
21851 conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can provide
21852 accurate and usable documentation with the modified program. A manual
21853 which forbids programmers to be conscientious and finish the job, or
21854 more precisely requires them to write a new manual from scratch if
21855 they change the program, does not fill our community's needs.
21856
21857 While a blanket prohibition on modification is unacceptable, some
21858 kinds of limits on the method of modification pose no problem. For
21859 example, requirements to preserve the original author's copyright
21860 notice, the distribution terms, or the list of authors, are ok. It is
21861 also no problem to require modified versions to include notice that
21862 they were modified, even to have entire sections that may not be
21863 deleted or changed, as long as these sections deal with nontechnical
21864 topics. (Some GNU manuals have them.)
21865
21866 These kinds of restrictions are not a problem because, as a practical
21867 matter, they don't stop the conscientious programmer from adapting the
21868 manual to fit the modified program. In other words, they don't block
21869 the free software community from making full use of the manual.
21870
21871 However, it must be possible to modify all the technical content of
21872 the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual media,
21873 through all the usual channels; otherwise, the restrictions do block
21874 the community, the manual is not free, and so we need another manual.
21875
21876 Unfortunately, it is often hard to find someone to write another
21877 manual when a proprietary manual exists. The obstacle is that many
21878 users think that a proprietary manual is good enough---so they don't
21879 see the need to write a free manual. They do not see that the free
21880 operating system has a gap that needs filling.
21881
21882 Why do users think that proprietary manuals are good enough? Some have
21883 not considered the issue. I hope this article will do something to
21884 change that.
21885
21886 Other users consider proprietary manuals acceptable for the same
21887 reason so many people consider proprietary software acceptable: they
21888 judge in purely practical terms, not using freedom as a
21889 criterion. These people are entitled to their opinions, but since
21890 those opinions spring from values which do not include freedom, they
21891 are no guide for those of us who do value freedom.
21892
21893 Please spread the word about this issue. We continue to lose manuals
21894 to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that proprietary
21895 manuals are not sufficient, perhaps the next person who wants to help
21896 GNU by writing documentation will realize, before it is too late, that
21897 he must above all make it free.
21898
21899 We can also encourage commercial publishers to sell free, copylefted
21900 manuals instead of proprietary ones. One way you can help this is to
21901 check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it, and prefer
21902 copylefted manuals to non-copylefted ones.
21903
21904 @sp 2
21905 @noindent
21906 Note: The Free Software Foundation maintains a page on its Web site
21907 that lists free books available from other publishers:@*
21908 @uref{http://www.gnu.org/doc/other-free-books.html}
21909
21910 @node GNU Free Documentation License
21911 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
21912
21913 @cindex FDL, GNU Free Documentation License
21914 @include doclicense.texi
21915
21916 @node Index
21917 @unnumbered Index
21918
21919 @ignore
21920 MENU ENTRY: NODE NAME.
21921 @end ignore
21922
21923 @printindex cp
21924
21925 @iftex
21926 @c Place biographical information on right-hand (verso) page
21927
21928 @tex
21929 \par\vfill\supereject
21930 \ifodd\pageno
21931 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
21932 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
21933 %\page\hbox{}\page
21934 \else
21935 % \par\vfill\supereject
21936 \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
21937 \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}
21938 %\page\hbox{}%\page
21939 %\page\hbox{}%\page
21940 \fi
21941 @end tex
21942
21943 @c page
21944 @w{ }
21945
21946 @c ================ Biographical information ================
21947
21948 @w{ }
21949 @sp 8
21950 @center About the Author
21951 @sp 1
21952 @end iftex
21953
21954 @ifnottex
21955 @node About the Author
21956 @unnumbered About the Author
21957 @end ifnottex
21958
21959 @quotation
21960 Robert J. Chassell has worked with GNU Emacs since 1985. He writes
21961 and edits, teaches Emacs and Emacs Lisp, and speaks throughout the
21962 world on software freedom. Chassell was a founding Director and
21963 Treasurer of the Free Software Foundation, Inc. He is co-author of
21964 the @cite{Texinfo} manual, and has edited more than a dozen other
21965 books. He graduated from Cambridge University, in England. He has an
21966 abiding interest in social and economic history and flies his own
21967 airplane.
21968 @end quotation
21969
21970 @c @page
21971 @c @w{ }
21972 @c
21973 @c @c Prevent page number on blank verso, so eject it first.
21974 @c @tex
21975 @c \par\vfill\supereject
21976 @c @end tex
21977
21978 @c @iftex
21979 @c @headings off
21980 @c @evenheading @thispage @| @| @thistitle
21981 @c @oddheading @| @| @thispage
21982 @c @end iftex
21983
21984 @bye